O&M - Manuel GRE TM801C PDF

COMMENTS :
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
Sign.
C N. P GRAS G BECIU G BECIU 14/04/2010 Following letter S/LI/ALSTOM 2223 GFE
Sign.
B N. SFH G BECIU G BECIU 10/11/2008 Following review note M-3A-3-029 GFE
Sign.
A N. SFH G BECIU G BECIU 10/07/2007 1° EDITION GFE
ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE

REV
DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED
Approved Approved as noted Returned for correction For information
Date : ………………………….. Signature : …………………………….

LAHMEYER INTERNATIONAL
GOVERNMENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF THE SUDAN

MINISTRY OF IRRIGATION AND WATER RESOURCES
MEROWE DAM PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION UNIT
MEROWE DAM PROJECT

10 x 140MVA
CONTRACTS 3A, 3B, 3C, 3E
ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR:
OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

GOVERNING SYSTEM
SCALE Subcontractor:
1/1
Power Environment
Hydro
Ce document propriété de ALSTOM ne doit pas être utilisé, copié ou communiqué à des tiers sans son autorisation
This document is the exclusive property of ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third parties without their prior authorization
REV SH/SH END N of SH

AHT MRW00 GRE-TM801 MRW01T1-GOV001-80-001 C 1/635 853
INTERNAL USE
Page 2 / 2
MAIN ITEMS
EP 00 GENERALITIES
EP10 SPEED GOVERNOR
EP20 LOCAL CONTROL BOXES
EP30 PRESSURE TANKS & ACCESSORIES
EP50 OIL PRESSURE UNIT OPU
EP60 MONITORING TURBINE
ANNEX1 LIST OF SPARE – GENERAL & SPECIAL
ANNEX2 DATASHEET OF SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES
ANNEX3 BOOKLET A4.
ANNEX3 DRAWING A3.
File: 1° page O&M manuel GOVrevC.doc 2 GRE-TM801B

PAGE 1 / 18
OPERATING & MAINTENACE MANUAL OF GOVERNING SYSTEM GRE-PA 00
ABSTRACT GRE – PA 00
1 GENERAL............................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 SCOPE 2
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS USED FOR THIS DOCUMENT. ...................................................................................... 2
2 GENERAL OPERATIONS ....................................................................................................... 3
2.1 TURBINE CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 TURBINE CONTROL ................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 TRANSIENT FROM ONE MODE TO ANOTHER......................................................................................... 7
2.4 SPECIFIC USE............................................................................................................................................. 10
3 SPECIAL MODES .................................................................................................................. 11
3.1 GO TO CONDENSER MODE FROM GENERATOR MODE......................................................................... 11
3.2 STOP IN CONDENSER MODE ................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 EMERGENCY STOP IN CONDENSER MODE ............................................................................................ 13
3.4 GO TO GENERATOR MODE FROM CONDENSER MODE......................................................................... 14
3.5 DEAD BUS START....................................................................................................................................... 14
4 BACK UP MODES ................................................................................................................. 15
5 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................... 16
6 SPARE PART LIST................................................................................................................. 17
7 DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................. 18
TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA00_2.DOC

GRE-TM801 A
3
PAGE 2 / 18
OPERATING & MAINTENACE MANUAL OF GOVERNING SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
This document describes the Governing system scope and the associated operation and maintenance.
Each components is designed by a special functional label.
Theses label are defined in table 1 in annex for control device and table 2 for instruments.
1.1 SCOPE
The Governing system includes for Merowe project for each Unit:
• One sump tank supporting oil pumps and accessories noted O.P.U. GRE110BA at level 251,90
• One pressure tank noted GRE-101AQ at level 251,90
• One speed governor cubicle noted GRE-101RG.
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS USED FOR THIS DOCUMENT.
• OPU means Oil Power Unit or oil sump tank with pumps and associated devices
• WG means Wicket Gate or turbine guide vane
• TB means Thrust bearing
• EPD means Emergency Positioning device
• UCB means Unit Control Board or Cell Controller.
• PLC means Programmable Logic Controller
• AVR means Generator Voltage Controller
Associated documents & drawings
Governing system functional diagram GRE-SP001
List of Input-Output of Turbine GRE-FC013
F8000 list _______
FILE: TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA00_2.DOC GRE-TM801REVC

4
PAGE 3 / 18
2 GENERAL OPERATIONS
2.1 TURBINE CHARACTERISTICS
Wicket Gate typical time for load or power adjustment: opening 60 s , closure 60 s
Wicket Gate fast emergency closure : 20s
Inertia PD2 = 46 106 kgm
Rated speed = 100 rpm
Rated power at rated head = 120 MW @ 45.5 m
Maximum and minimum downstream levels = 259.80 mEL & 245.00 mEL ( 32 %)
Maximum power at max & mini head = 142 MW @ 53.6m & 67.65 MW @ 30m
Max overpressure during load rejection = +25%
Max over-speed during load rejection = +50%

5
PAGE 4 / 18
2.2 TURBINE CONTROL
2.2.1 LEVELS OF TURBINE CONTROL
As required by the Contract, the control of Turbine is at 3 levels:
• manual for maintenance or emergency purpose
• local automatic for management Unit per Unit
• remote automatic for centralized joint control
Mode of Use Interface Location remarks
Manual control of OPU Starter of oil pumps and 252.55 EL Start –stop of pumps.
accessories on oil sump tank
Manual control of WG EPD Emergency positioning 252.55 EL Slow movements of WG servomotors
device on oil sump tank
Manual control of TB uplifting Oil pump control box 247.66 EL Start –stop of pump.
pump on oil module
Manual control of seal filter Filter control box 249.55 EL Washing for manual maintenance
450CR on filter
Manual control of HP air Compressor logic sequencer on compressors shell Start-stop of motors & compressors
compressors
Manual control of pitch drainage PB on level switches box 401 CR 245.00 Start-stop of water pump
turbine pitch
Local automatic control of OPU MMI in front face of of Governor 258.80 EL Total control of OPU
cubicle machine hall
Local automatic control of WG MMI in front face of of Governor 258.80 EL All mode available
servomotor cubicle machine hall
Local automatic control of TB UCB front face 258.80 EL Included into Unit start-stop sequence
uplifting pumps machine hall
Local automatic control of seal Filter control box 450CR 249.55 EL Washing in case of clogging
filter on filter
Local automatic control of HP AUX PLC Optimization of HP compressor Use.
compressors
Local automatic control of pitch Level switches box 401CR 246.00 EL Start-stop of water pump
drainage turbine pitch
Remote control UCB

6
PAGE 5 / 18
2.2.2 MODES OF TURBINE USE
The turbine can be used as for different modes.
Long maintenance
The turbine is stopped and the auxiliaries can be used only in local manual mode.
Ready to start.
The turbine is stopped and every turbine auxiliaries are under local automatic control or under remote control.
No-load operation
The turbine is running following the Grid frequency and the Generator Breaker is open.
Opening mode control
The turbine is running, Generator Breaker is closed and the set-point is given as a percent of WG servomotor
stroke, taken into account the speed no-load pre-opening.
Power mode control
The turbine is running, Generator Breaker is closed and the set-point is given as a percent of active rated
power value.
Condenser mode
The turbine is running under Generator – motor action and the Generator Breaker is closed.
Dead bus start
The turbine is used to run the generator supplying the network with reactive load only (mode called Line
Charging mode).
The turbine is started using diesel engine and associated generator to supply the mechanical auxiliaries (black
start).
It is possible to switch from one mode to another following sequences.
2.2.3 STEADY STATE
The power supply of Governor must never be cut to start or stop the Unit.
The orders are send using relay (hardwire) or F8000 bit.
By convention Rnn = 1 means that the relay nn is closed or the associated bit (if existing) is at 1.

7
PAGE 6 / 18
Description of I/O status on Steady State condition

STATUS ready to START Relay F8000 bit
Governing system Stopped R100 = 0 hardwired
OPU OK R101 = 0 hardwired
No fault of SLG 201 R29-1 = 1 AQ 401_0 = 1
No fault of EPD R29-2 = 0 hardwired
EPD non acting R120 = 0 hardwired
No fault of 8035 R29-0 = 1 AQ 400_0 = 1
T-SLG Start/Stop R0 = 0 hardwired
Mode of Use selected : opening control R5 = 0 AI 1889_7 = 0
Type of set-point selected : analogue R7 = 0 AI 1889_1 = 0
Unit Breaker status (open) R1 = 1 hardwired
Increase of set point by synchro-coupler R21 = 0 hardwired
Decrease of set point by synchro-coupler R22 = 0 hardwired
Gross Head AI 562 = measure
Active power measure AI 573 = 0
Permanent speed droop Bp at rated value (5% as example) AI 567 = 5
Opening set-point is 0 AI 569 = 0
Power set-point is 0 AI 570 = 0
Opening limiter is full open AI 572 = 10 000
Power limiter is full open AI 573 = 10 000
Safety valve energized GRE 101EM = 1
F8000 exchange data table Check status of Digital I/O
STATUS at NO-LOAD Relay F8000 bit

Governing system Acting R100 = 1 hardwired
OPU status OK R101 = 1 hardwired
No fault of 8035 R29-0 = 1 AQ 400_0 = 1
No fault of SLG 201 R29-1 = 1 AQ 401_0 = 1
No fault EDP R29-2 = 0 AQ 402_0 = 1
EPD non acting R120 = 0 hardwired
Unit Run R0 = 1 hardwired
Mode of Use selected : opening control (R5 = 0) AI 1889_7 = 0
Type of set-point selected : analogue (R7 = 1 ) AI 1889_1 = 1
Unit Breaker status (open) R1 = 1 hardwired
Increase of set point R21 = 0 (not used) hardwired
Decrease of set point R22 = 0 (not used) hardwired
Gross Head AI 562 = measure
Active power measure AI 573 = 0
Permanent speed droop Bp at rated value AI 567 = 5
Opening set-point is 0 AI 569 = 0
Power set-point is 0 AI 570 = 0
Opening limiter is full open AI 572 = 10 000
Power limiter is full open AI 573 = 12 000
Safety valve energized GRE 101EM = 1
Note* : Actual internal opening set-point is given by the governor itself.
The speed set-point adjustment is made without need of +/- external orders.

8
PAGE 7 / 18
2.3 TRANSIENT FROM ONE MODE TO ANOTHER
2.3.1 TURBINE TRANSIENT.
STOP
NORMAL START READY TO START
NORMAL STOP
NO-LOAD
QICK STOP
CONDENSER MODE
LOAD POWER LOAD REJECTION
ADJUSTMENT
QICK STOP
GENERATOR
OPENING OR POWER
GENERATOR MODE FROM CONDENSER
CONDENSER
GO TO CONDENSER
This document describes the sequences which can be performed by the Governor Alspa-SLG hardwired to local
control board of UCB and connected to PLC of UCB using F8000 link.
2.3.2 NORMAL START
Order from UCB Cause Status

Start OPU Start of oil pumps to get rated pressure R100 = 1
OPU OK Rated level into pressure tank R101 =1
Wait others auxiliaries
Start of Governor SLG energize proportional valve board GRE101R0 = 1
Adjustment of speed & phase lock made
automatically by T-SLG module
Closure of Unit Breaker Change PID20 set to PID10 set GRE101R1 = 0 *
NOTE * : R1 is inverted ( Breaker closure = 0 instead of 1) as loss of this input causes a return to no-load PID set
which is more safe situation.
As option, the synchronization can be performed with slow shift between Unit speed and Grid frequency.

9
PAGE 8 / 18
2.3.3 LOAD ADJUSTMENT
This mode is used after start of Unit to adjust the turbine output close of the power set-point required by Joint
Control.
Closure of Unit Breaker Change PID20 set to PID10 set GRE101R1= 0 *
Selection of local set-point mode Selection MMI acting by Operator AQ 430_0 = 0
Output set-point on MMI AQ 445 modified
LO set point on MMI AQ 442 modified
Selection of Opening control mode Set-point is servomotor stroke (R5=0) AI 1889_7 = 0
Selection of remote Selection MMI not acting AQ 430_0 = 1

set-point mode Data set-point (R7=1) AI 1889_1 = 1
Control of load Adjustment using F8000 _word AI 569 = 0 to 10 000
Opening Limiter set if necessary following Operator Adjustment using F8000 _word AI 572 = 0 to 10 000
request
** Analogue set-point AI_1 is not used for MEROWE.
The choice of AI or F8000 data as input is made using mask into 8035 ControCad software.
2.3.4 POWER ADJUSTMENT
This mode is the basic one in relationship with Power Plant Joint Control to optimize the set-point of each Unit
(see Hydraulic design later).
• Avoid cavitation area
• Avoid vortex area at low head
• Optimize turbine efficiency
• Avoid over-opening at high head.

Closure of Unit Breaker Change PID20 set to PID10 set GRE101R1 = 0 *
4.3.1 Selection of local set-point mode Selection MMI acting AQ 430_0 = 0
Power adjusted on MMI AQ_441 modified
LW adjusted on MMI AQ_443 modified
Selection of Power control mode Set-point is an active power data (R5 = 1 ) AI 1889_7 = 1
4.3.2 Selection of remote set-point mode MMI not acting AQ 430_0 = 1

Data set point (R7 = 1 ) AI 1889_1 = 1
Power set as per Joint Control Adjustment using F8000 _word AI 570 = 0 to 10 000
Limiter set if necessary following Operator request Adjustment using F8000 _word AI 573 = 0 to 10 000

10
PAGE 9 / 18
2.3.5 NORMAL STOP
Order from C.C Cause Status

Selection of Opening mode Set point is opening (R5 = 0 ) AI 1889_7 = 0
Order to decrease the load following internal T-SLG slope Load & power set point =0 AI 569 = 0
AI 570 = 0
Decrease Power & Opening * Power = 0 OR
AQ_445 <1000 AND
AQ_447 < 1000 AND
AQ_448 < 1000
Set LO-opening at 0 AI 572 = 0
Opening of Unit breaker Change PID10 to PID20 GRE101R1 = 1
Full closure of WG GRE132FC = 1
Stop of Governor Cut output of actuator R0 = 0 hardwire
Creep detection activated Internal T-SLG action
Wait speed switch for brakes GRE120RV2 = 1
Cancel Monitoring No alarm taken into account and displayed by DCS.
Safety valve de-energized GRE101EM = 0
Manual Lock applied Detection of lock GRE150FC = 1
Stop OPU Stop oil pumps R100 = 0
OPU out of service R101 = 0
Stop others auxiliaries
* Note: This Stop sequence is used too in case of electrical fault for Generator.
2.3.6 QUICK STOP
This sequence is used in case of mechanical fault to get a fast stop without to high stresses for turbine.
Order from C.C Cause Status
Cancel Monitoring No other alarms are taken into account and displayed
Set Limiter following T-SLG slope Closure of Guide vane up to 0 AI 572 = 0
Closure of Guide vane < 10% AQ_445 <1000 AND
AQ_447 < 1000 AND
AQ_448 < 1000
Opening of Unit breaker Change PID10 to PID20 R1 = 1
De-energized of safety valve Final closure of Guide vane GRE101EM = 0
Full closure of Guide vane GRE132FC = 1
Stop of Governor Cut output to actuator GRE101R0G = 0
Creep detection activated by Governor
Full stop of Unit
After timelag Stop OPU Stop oil pumps R100 = 0

OR If Manual Lock applied Detection of lock “full closure” GRE150FC = 1
The emergency closure using the fast closure time is only used in case of detection of over-speed. In this case
the safety solenoid valve GRE101EM is immediately de-energized to cause the fastest closure of guide vane.

11
PAGE 10 / 18
2.4 SPECIFIC USE
2.4.1 LOAD REJECTION
This sequence is used in case of failure on main line from generator.

Sudden opening of Unit Breaker Change PID10 set to PID20 set GRE101R1 = 1
& GRE101R0G = 1
Opening limiter to LO_RABT value
Power limiter not changed
If line failure is canceled Synchronizing device acting
Wait Unit breaker closure
2.4.2 ISOLATED NETWORK

Isolated detection
Change PID10 set to PID12 set
Information to UCB AQ 431_11 = 1
Timelag adjustable
Infinite Network detection (return)
Change PID12 set to PID10 set
Opening limiter is taken into account
Power limiter is taken into account
Information to UCB AQ 431_11 = 0
Timelag adjustable
Selection of Power mode Set point is power (R5 = 1 ) AI 1889_7 = 1
* This sequence is noted for information because the actions are made by Alspa-T-SLG software without need
of external orders from DSC.
2.4.3 EMERGENCY STOP

Major fault of Speed governor module R29-201 = 0 * AND
R29-202 = 0*
Emergency closure De-energization of Safety valve GRE101EM = 0
Closure of Guide vane GRE132FC = 1
Measure of Power by UCB P = 0 [1]
Opening of Unit breaker at no-load Unit speed decreases GRE120RV2 = 1 [2]
Brake applied
Note* [1] [2]
If the power or the speed don’t decrease , after a time-lag (adjustable, typically 5 minutes) the Intake Gate
shall be closed by DCS.

12
PAGE 11 / 18
3 SPECIAL MODES
The following turbine sequence must be completed by AVR control.
3.1 GO TO CONDENSER MODE FROM GENERATOR MODE
The turbine is started at no-load and the runner is dewatered, then air under pressure is send from pressure
vessel (rated 7MPA) to runner chamber using automatic valve. The runner wearing ring shall be cooled by water
from cooling system.
Unit at no-load P = 0 MW
Check HP air pressure is enough 720 MP_H1 =1
If NO Start HP compressors P> Rated pressure into Air tanks 720 MP_H1 =1
Set LO-opening at 0 AI 572 = 0
Guide vane closed GRE132FC = 1
1° De-watering Opening of de-watering valve 410 VA = 1
Valve 410VA open 410 FC = 1
Time lag 1° de-watering T1 # 20 s
Closure of de-watering valve 410 VA = 0
Valve 410VA closed 411 FC = 1
Runner dewatered 410MN_L1 = 1
411 SN = 0
Absorbed power below max power in condenser P < 17 MW typical
mode
De-watering 2° step (note 2) Check HP air pressure is enough 720 MP_L2 =1
Opening of de-watering valve 410 VA = 1
Valve 410VA open 410 FC = 1
Time lag de-watering 2° stage T2 # 40 s
Valve 410VA closed 411 FC = 1
Runner dewatered 410MN_L1 = 1
411 SN = 0
Absorbed power below max power in condenser P < 17 MW typical
mode
If no send alarm “dewatering status not possible “
Wearing ring cooling Open valve 420VD 420EM = 1
Check valve is full open 420FC = 1
Water level management (note 1) Check HP air pressure is enough 720 MP-L2 =1
Runner partially re-watered 410MN_L2 =1
411 SN = 0
Opening of de-watering valve 410 EM = 1
Valve 410VD open 410 FC = 1
Timelag 2° de-watering T3 # 10s
Valve 410VD closed 411 FC = 1
Runner re-watered 410MN_L1 = 1
411 SN = 0
If no , try again
Note 1: If during commissioning, the time to open 410VD is too short, a second small valve 411VD will be
added for water level management.
Note 2: If the Supervisory system decide to use 2 Units in the same time in condenser mode without time
enough to fill up the dewatering pressure tanks or if the 1° dewatering is not successful.

13
PAGE 12 / 18
3.2 STOP IN CONDENSER MODE
The air around the runner is send out to tailrace and the Unit is stopped.
Stop condenser mode Out of condenser mode to Stop
Opening mode selected Set point is opening (R5 = 0 ) AI 1889_7 = 0
Release of air to downstream basin Partial opening typical 10% AI 569 = 1000
Wait re-watering Timelag typical 20s
Check opening AQ 445 > 1000 OR
AQ 447 > 1000 AND
AQ 448 > 1000
Runner re-watered 410MN-H2 =1
AND 411 SN = 1
OR Absorbed power = 0
Closure of Guide vane Set LO-opening at 0 AI 572 = 0
Open Unit breaker GRE101R1 = 1
Stop wearing ring cooling Closure of valve GTU420VD 420EM = 0
Check full closure of valve 422FC = 1
Check closure of Guide vane GRE132FC = 1
Stop of Governor Cut output of actuator GRE101R0G = 0
OR if Manual Lock applied Detection of lock “closure” GRE150FC = 1
In case of Mechanical Trip, the Quick Stop sequence is the same as Normal Stop because it is the fastest
stop sequence.

14
PAGE 13 / 18
3.3 EMERGENCY STOP IN CONDENSER MODE
The runner chamber if fulfilled by water from cooling line up to break the Unit . The stop time is longuer than in
normal stop but it is safe.
Stop condenser mode Out of condenser mode to Stop
Release of air to downstream basin Partial opening typical 10% AI 569 = 1000
Check opening AQ 445 > 1000 OR
AQ 447 > 1000 AND
AQ 448 > 1000
OR 411 SN = 1
Closure of Guide vane Set LO-opening at 0 AI 572 = 0
Stop wearing ring cooling Closure of valve GTU420VD 420EM = 0
Check closure of Guide vane GRE132FC = 1
Stop of Governor Cut output of actuator GRE101R0G = 0
OR if Manual Lock applied Detection of lock “closure” GRE150FC = 1

15
PAGE 14 / 18
3.4 GO TO GENERATOR MODE FROM CONDENSER MODE
The air around the runner is send out to tailrace and the Unit takes load in generator mode
Stop condenser mode Re-watering of runner
Release of air to downstream basin Partial opening 10% of Guide vane AI 569 = 1000
Check opening AQ_445 >1000 OR
AQ_447 > 1000 AND
AQ_448 > 1000
411 SN = 1
Stop wearing ring cooling Closure of valve GT420VD 420EM = 0
Set generator
Select power feed back mode Set point is power (R5 = 1 ) AI 1889_7 = 1
3.5 DEAD BUS START
This start is used for black start and line charging start.
The main difference with normal start is that the Unit breaker is closed by DSC order before start of Unit.
Closure of Unit Breaker GRE101R01 = 0
Order dead bus Dead bus selection R28 =1 AI 1889_6 = 1
Start OPU Start of oil pumps to get rated pressure R100 = 1
OPU OK Rated level into pressure tank R101 = 1
Wait others auxiliaries
Start of Governor SLG energize proportional valve board GRE101R0G = 1
Set point is opening (R5 = 0) AI 1889_7 = 0
Adjustment of speed by manual +/- orders from GRE101R21 = 1
external synchro-coupler of DSC. OR
GRE101R22 = 1
NOTE :
R1 is inverted ( Breaker closure = 0 instead of 1) as loss of this input causes a return to no-load PID set which
is more safe situation.
The module T-SLG detects that the network PT is not at the rated level of voltage, then its fast synchronizing
software is not activated.

16
PAGE 15 / 18
4 BACK UP MODES
Loss of T-SLG Governor
The Speed governor module T-SLG is fully redundant, one main module is into cubicle GRE101RG and the
stand-by module is into local box GRE120CR.
The functions of control of speed, opening and power are the same.
In case of commutation from Main to Stand-by, an alarm is send using F8000 to DSC. The commutation is
fully bump-less and transparent, the orders from DSC to Governor using F8000 are transmitted in any
condition of use.
If the main T-SLG starts again, the commutation from Stand-by is automatically assured by acknowledge of
fault (local action on MMI by Operator).
Loss of local PLC 8035
Even if the F8000 link fails, the PLC 8035 loss is detected by an hardwired signal from relay (GRE101R29 = 0
= failure) to DCS. The Speed governor module continues to pilot the Guide vane servomotors without any
troubles.
The O.P.U commutes to Local mode.
The acting oil pump continues to run, the pressure is adjusted by a mechanical pressure switch rated at 75
bar. If the PLC 8035 starts again , the OPU goes back to remote mode without need of Operator action.
Minor and Major fault
The Speed governor can send to DCS 2 types of fault:
Minor fault means that the DCS shall move the setting point to stabilize the Unit in safe condition
Major fault means that the DCS shall stop the Unit immediatly without time-delay.
For MRW, as the power plant is fully automatic a minor fault causes:
Minor fault detected by DSC
Go to Opening mode control
Decrease the Load set-point by LO

17
PAGE 16 / 18
5 MAINTENANCE
No applicable for this part.

18
PAGE 17 / 18
6 SPARE PART LIST
No applicable for this part.

19
PAGE 18 / 18
7 DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS
See drawings
AHT-MRW00-GRE-SP001
AHT-MRW00-GRE-SP014

20
PAGE 1 / 58
OPERATING & MAINTENACE MANUAL OF GOVERNING SYSTEM – PA10
ABSTRACT PA10
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 DOWNLOADING A PROGRAM FROM THE PC WORKSTATION .............................................................. 3
1.2 KEYS FOR READING THE SEQUENCE CHARTS (SFC) ............................................................................. 4
2 PLC STRUCTURE .................................................................................................................. 6
2.1 IDENTIFICATION OF ELEMENTS .............................................................................................................. 7
2.2 DIGITAL INPUT DI4 .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3 DIGITAL INPUT DI9 .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.4 DIGITAL OUTPUT DO6................................................................................................................................ 10
2.5 DIGITAL OUTPUT DO7................................................................................................................................ 10
2.6 ANALOG INPUT AI8.................................................................................................................................... 11
2.7 DIGITAL OUPUT AO5.................................................................................................................................. 11
2.8 PERMANENT CONDITIONS FOR MAINTAINING AN OPERATING MODE .............................................. 12
3 STABLE PLC STATES............................................................................................................. 13
3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF PLC FAULTS ............................................................................................................. 14
3.2 HYDRAULIC STATION ................................................................................................................................ 18
3.3 PRESSURE TANK ISOLATING VALVE ........................................................................................................ 35
3.4 MANAGEMENT OF OIL TEMPERATURE IN THE OIL SUMP..................................................................... 42
3.5 OIL FILTRATION IN THE SUMP TANK....................................................................................................... 45
4 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................... 46
4.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................... 46
4.2 CURATIVE MAINTENANCE. ....................................................................................................................... 47
5 SPARE PART LIST PA10........................................................................................................ 57
6 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 58
TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA10_3.DOC GRE-TM801 C

21
PAGE 2 / 58
This document describes the Speed Governor scope and the associated operation and maintenance.
1 INTRODUCTION
The documents quoted as reference, forms the essential basis for proper understanding of the study to
be conducted.
The main purpose of the structure to be developed is automatic management of an hydraulic station and
a full control of a governor system. This main structure is produced using a T-SLG.
This assembly is in turn inserted in a control and monitoring system (known as CCL (Cell Controller)
hereafter) and communicates with the higher level with a front by means of a digital network in the F8000
protocol.
The PLC also controls:
A set of two speed governors, using a digital link in CANOpen protocol in Master mode (NMT, Network
Management). One governor is used as a main module and situated inside the main cabinet. The second
is used as a redundancy governor ,and situated in a dedicated cubicle near the oil pack.
A touch-sensitive screen located on the main cubicle permitting the parameters adjustments on both
governors main and emergency.
In this document, we develop the basic sequences used for hydraulic station management. These
sequences are described in the form of functional Steps/Flows/Control (SFC), whose logic is recalled in
the appendix.
FILE: TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA10_3.DOC GRE-TM801C

22
PAGE 3 / 58
1.1 DOWNLOADING A PROGRAM FROM THE PC WORKSTATION
Note : These advices are indicated by the software experts in AC110 PLC programming, under ADVANT BUILD
environment.
Particular cautions must be taken in account when downloading the PLC from the PC workstation.
Indeed, loading a program rewrites the last parameters programmed at the MMI level.
It is so necessary to refine directly the default values of the parameters in the original program sources ,
to guarantee the adequacy between the downloaded parameters and the operational values of the
process.
ADVA BUILT
PC
Change initial value

by loading new
program
SW ITCH-C and other

AC110 EEPROM
language blocks
Copy initial values

to register at
application start
Register used in application

AC110 RAM run (active values)
Get displayed Modbus Overwrite active values and

values indicate active screen
HMI Proface
Include DKY's Scheme
We advise the reader to re-control the strict identity between the adjusted parameters, and the downloaded
parameters. Methods to modify the parameters in the sources programs are described in the user's guide of the
ADVANCE BUILT.

23
PAGE 4 / 58
1.2 KEYS FOR READING THE SEQUENCE CHARTS (SFC)
The remainder of the document presents the sequence charts for the unit controller: these are intended to
describe the processing performed by the PLC during execution of the sequence as defined above.
The sequence charts have been prepared using the standard IEC848 representation, with the following
symbols:
STEP
5 Start of Regulation Pumps
A step characterises an invariant behaviour of the system.
It is featured by some associated commands or actions which
are listed in one or several frames attached to the symbol of
the step.
A step may be ACTIVE or INACTIVE: when a step is ACTIVE,

the associated actions are performed.
Each step is labelled by a number which is unique within the

sequence.
INITIAL STEP
0
The initial steps are the ones which are active on initialisation
of the system
TRANSITION
Condition
A transition describes the possible evolution of the active state
from one step to another, routed by directed link
Each transition is featured by a condition
Example:
3 Start of Regulation Pumps
Step 4 will be active as soon as step 3 is active AND the
End of Start Regulation Pumps sequence condition to the transition is true.
Activation of step 4 entails the immediate de-activation of step
4
Opening of Oil pressure tank's 3.
shut-off valve
The direction of the evolution is always from top to bottom,

unless otherwise specified by arrows.
Evolution from top to Evolution from bottom
bottom to top When a time-lag is to be considered as a transition condition,
the notation t/Xn will be used:
t = duration of the time-lag in seconds
Xn = step n
t/Xn is true at time t after the beginning of the activation of Xn

24
PAGE 5 / 58
BEGINNING OF SEQUENCE SELECTION

2
An evolution will take place from step 2 to step 3 if step 2 is

active AND if the condition « a » is true, or from step 2 to step
a b
4 if step 2 is active AND if the condition « b » is true.
3 4 Conditions a and b are normally exclusive, so that only one

sequence can be selected.
c d
5 6
e f END OF SEQUENCE SELECTION
An evolution will take place from step 5 to step 9 if step 5 is

9 active AND if the transition condition « e » is true, or from step
6 to step 9 if step 6 is active AND if the transition « f » is true.
BEGINNING OF SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCES

10
An evolution will take place from step 10 to steps 14 and 15 if

a
step 10 is active AND if the transition condition « a » is true.
14 15
b c END OF SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCES
16 17 An evolution will take place from steps 16 and 17 to step 18 if

steps 16 and 17 are both active AND if the transition condition
« d » is true.
d
18

25
PAGE 6 / 58
2 PLC STRUCTURE
The PLC supplied is of the ALSTOM make, model 8035.
Baseplate and modules
Module Place in the rack
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COM COM
Power CPU DI4 AO5 DO6 DO7 AI8 DI9
CCL SLG
P 3 B C M A M M A M
0 W 6 E A D L D D L D
R 3 C M N L G L L G L
3 o 3 5 6 3 9 9 2 6
2 m 4 0 4 9 4 4 2 4
5 m 1 1 5 2 0 0 3 5
Main Rack
Figure 1: Structure of the hydraulic station monitoring PLC
PLC’s boards Nomenclature

Reference Meaning Symbol
IC693CHS392 10 slots Extension base-plate for C8035 + adaptator CHS392
XE693PWR325 C80-35 Power Supply 24Vdc (5V 15W) PWR325
IC693CPU364 C80-35 Processing unit CPU363 CPU364
IC693BEM341 dual network FIP communication board 2.5 Mbits for Alspa C80-35 BEM341
controller
HE693CAN501 CANopen Master Module CAN501
IC693MDL645 24 Vdc 16 input positive/negative logic module MDL645
IC693MDL940 5/24 Vdc 4 A 16 relay output module with 1 common point / 4 MDL940
IC693ALG223 16 input high level module 0/20 mA or 4/20 mA with common point ALG223
IC693ALG392 8 current output module 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. ALG392

26
PAGE 7 / 58
2.1 IDENTIFICATION OF ELEMENTS
Hereafter in this document, each subassembly (oil sump, motor pump, etc.) is described in the form of a
table giving the system's stable states excluding transients:
In column 1, the label used in the software to describe the electrical element associated with it
In column 2, the reminder of the meaning of the symbol used
In column 3, the physical assignment of the electrical input or output on the interface board placed in the
PLC rack:
-DIx.y is therefore the mark of a digital input on the input board in slot no. x of the rack, y indicating input
no. y on this board
-DOx.y, same meaning for digital outputs
-AIx.y: same meaning for analog inputs
-AOx.y: same meaning for analog outputs
In column 4, the expected polarity for a true state associated with symbol meaning
In columns 5 and 6, the expected state of the symbol when the PLC is in state S1 or S2
Note:
The Reference column gives the symbols used in the PLC program.
Columns S1 to S2 give the stabilized state of equipment in the states "PLC ready" and "Hydraulic station
in operation".
x indicates that sensor state can be 1 or 0, according to the control produced by the PLC.
0 or 1 indicates that failure to respect the given polarity causes signaling of a minor fault R129M=1, but
operation of the hydraulic station continues.
0* or 1* indicates that failure to respect the given polarity causes signaling of a major fault R29M=1, and
the system moves to state S0.

27
PAGE 8 / 58
2.2 DIGITAL INPUT DI4
Polarity
Symbol Place Meaning Source Comment 0 1
Equipment
R5 DI4.1 Power feedback selection Reserved – Not used
R14 DI4.2 Sluicing setting selection Reserved – Not used
R7 DI4.3 Analog setting selection Reserved – Not used
R40 DI4.4 Pump Turbine mode selection Reserved – Not used
R60 DI4.5 Back to back startup sequence Reserved – Not used
R13 DI4.6 Basin level mode selection Reserved – Not used
XR0 DI4.7 Governor Run/Stop order UCB UNIT PLC Stop Run
R28 DI4.8 Forcing Isolated grid operation Normal grid Isolated grid
operation operation
R30 DI4.9 Opening limiter decrease Reserved – Not used
R31 DI4.10 Opening limiter increase Reserved – Not used
XR29 DI4.11 Governors major faults T-SLG01 & 202 Logical AND between Major fault At least 1
201R29 and 202R29 governor is
(see Governor chapter) operational
XR329 DI4.12 Power transducer fault Available
XR429 DI4.13 Creep detection Reserved – Not used
This information is
transmitted from T-
SLG02 to T-SLG01 via
CANOPEN bus
XAU DI4.14 Emergency stop Available
Function realized on
210CR cubicle
XR600 DI4.15 Local/Remote mode 120CR Main T- Main T-
SLG02 SLG01
DI416 DI4.16 Available Available

28
PAGE 9 / 58
2.3 DIGITAL INPUT DI9
OIL PRESSURE STATION is abbreviated OPS

OIL PRESSURE TANK is abbreviated OPT
Polarity
Symbol Place Meaning Source Comment 0 1
Equipment
DI91 DI9.1 Available
101FC DI9.2 Isolating valve closed OPT Not closed Closed
102FC DI9.3 Isolating valve open OPT Not open Open
131FC DI9.4 Wicket gate lock applied Reserved – Not used
132FC DI9.5 Wicket gate lock free Reserved – Not used
111MO DI9.6 Pump 111PO is acting OPS Not acting Acting
112MO DI9.7 Pump 112PO is acting OPS Not acting Acting
XR100 DI9.8 Hydraulic pack Start/Stop UCB UNIT Stop order Run order
order PLC
110SD DI9.9 Too low water flow OPS Normal Too low
110SP DI9.10 Oil filter clogging OPS Normal Clogging
113PO DI9.11 Pump 113PO is acting Reserved – Not used
114PO DI9.12 Pump 114PO is acting Reserved – Not used

29
PAGE 10 / 58
2.4 DIGITAL OUTPUT DO6

Symbol Place Meaning Recipient Comment 0 1
equipment
111PO DO6.1 Pump 111 Stop/Start OPS Stop Start
order
112PO DO6.2 Pump 112 Stop/Start OPS Stop Start
order
111EM DO6.3 Unloader Valve 111EM OPS Load Unload
112EM DO6.4 Unloader Valve 112EM OPS Load Unload
101EM-O DO6.5 Isolating Valve opening OPT No opening Opening
101EM-C DO6.6 Isolating Valve closure OPT No closure Closure
130EM-O DO6.7 Wicket gate lock Reserved
130EM-C DO6.8 Wicket gate unlock Reserved
101EL DO6.9 Air injection into pressure OPT No air Air injection
tank injection
110VE DO6.10 Oil Cooler acting OPT No acting Acting
110PY DO6.11 Oil Heater acting No acting Acting
XR101 DO6.12 Hydraulic station ready UCB UNIT Not ready Ready
PLC
D513 DO6.13 Available
XR29 DO6.14 Major Fault UCB UNIT Major fault Operational
PLC
R0START DO6.15 Governors run order T-SLG01 & Internal wiring No run Run order
T-SLG02 (see Chapter Governor) ordrer
R0STOP DO6.16 Governors stop order T-SLG01 & Internal wiring No stop Stop order
T-SLG02 (see Chapter Governor) order
2.5 DIGITAL OUTPUT DO7
Symbol Place Meaning Recipient Comment 0 1

equipment
113PO DO7.1 Pump 113 Stop/Start Reserved – Not used
order
114PO DO7.2 Pump 114 Stop/Start Reserved – Not used
order
113EM DO7.3 Unloader Valve 113EM Reserved – Not used
114EM DO7.4 Unloader Valve 114EM Reserved – Not used
DO75 DO7.5 Available

30
PAGE 11 / 58
2.6 ANALOG INPUT AI8

Symbol Place Meaning Recipient Comment

equipment
AI91 AI9.1 External set point Reserved
See F8000 table
AI92 AI9.2 Active power Reserved
See F8000 table
AI93 AI9.3 Head or upstream level Reserved
See F8000 table
AI94 AI9.4 Downstream level Reserved
See F8000 table
101MP AI9.5 Oil pressure in pressure OPT
tank
110MR AI9.6 Oil temperature OPS
101MN AI9.7 Oil level in pressure tank OPT
110MP AI9.8 Oil pressure into circuits OPS
AI99 AI9.9 Available
2.7 DIGITAL OUPUT AO5
Symbol Place Meaning Recipient Comment

equipment
AO51 AO5.1 Test point programmable
with the HMI
AO52 AO5.2 Test point programmable
with the HMI

31
PAGE 12 / 58
2.8 PERMANENT CONDITIONS FOR MAINTAINING AN OPERATING MODE
The PLC incorporates a program used to automatically detect anomalies linked to the state of the digital
inputs of the system.
This program permanently compares the state of the digital inputs with the values given in the sensor
identification tables.
Boxes S1 and S2 give their stable states in a given mode.
In the event of discrepancy between sensor state and the state given in the table, and excluding
transients in the graphs:
The PLC generates a major fault and stops the hydraulic station by automatically starting the associated
sequence if the reference in the box is marked with an asterisk*.
The PLC reports a simple alarm if the box is not marked with an asterisk, and unit operation continues.
The PLC performs no specific action if the box is marked with an x.

32
PAGE 13 / 58
3 STABLE PLC STATES
Three states are recognised in the application built around the PLC. The system can be in any of the
following states:
• PLC not ready, Hydraulic station stopped
• PLC ready, Hydraulic station stopped
• Hydraulic station in operation
S0
PLC not
P1 ready
S1
PLC ready P4
P4 S2
Hydraulic
station Hydraulic
stopped P3 station in
operation
P2
Figure 2: Identification of stable PLC states
Program Meaning
P1: Acknowledgement of major faults Acknowledging the faults causes passage to state S1 if
all major faults have disappeared.
The Ack button on the HMI screen is used to
acknowledge
P2: Start up of the hydraulic station The PLC switches on the hydraulic station and validates
the motorised pump intermittency cycle
P3: Shutdown of the hydraulic station Hydraulic station shutdown
P4: Detection of a major fault XR29=0 Return to state S0
In state S0, the PLC detects a major fault, causing de-energizing of relay XR29M=0. In these conditions, an
order to start up the hydraulic station will not be accepted as long as the causes of the fault remains present and
the operator has not acknowledged the fault by pressing the acknowledgement button on the HMI screen.
In state S1, the PLC is ready to start up the hydraulic station.
No major fault is detected XR29=1.
All the minimum conditions for unit operation are fulfilled, even if the PLC detects partial faults indicated
by energising of the Minor fault output R129M.
In state S2, the hydraulic station has already started, and the intermittence cycle has been activated.

33
PAGE 14 / 58
3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF PLC FAULTS
3.1.1 LIST OF PLC FAULTS
PLC faults
Label Meaning Polarity S1 S2
PLC major failure 0 1 1

XR29 XR29 Relay=0 for
Power source fault on 24VDC (output XR209 inactive)
PLC software watchdog fault
POWER SUPPLY 24 Vdc ON 0 1 1
XR209 XR209 Relay=0 for
Power source fault on 24VDC
MAIN POWER SUPPLY 220VAC ON 0 1 1
XR209-01 XR209-1 Relay=0 for
Power source fault on 220VAC
STANDBY POWER SUPPLY 220Vdc ON 0 1 1
XR209-02 XR209-2 Relay=0 for
Power source fault on 220VDC
R129H PLC minor failure (PLC peripheral error) 1 x x
R129H=1 for
CANOPEN MMI link fault
CANOPEN Normal govenor link fault
CANOPEN standby governor fault
F 8000 BUS AC450 link fault
R29M Mechanical major failure 1 0 0
R29M=1 for
All major faults indicated in the sequences described in this
document.
(In particular, analysis of the stable states of the logic inputs in
the tables)
R129M Mechanical minor failure 1 x x
R129M=1 for
All minor faults indicated in the sequences described in this
document. (In particular, analysis of the stable states of logic
inputs in the tables)

34
PAGE 15 / 58
3.1.2 DEFINITION
R29H major fault management: PLC Major Fault
The PLC major failure ( R29 H=1) signal is active where there is no watchdog fault and the PLC is
energised by source no. 1.
The internal relay R29H=0 (operating due to lack of voltage) validates the inputs, enabling the UNIT PLC
to ensure standby operation of the oil-hydraulic station:
Program P4: R29M fault management: Mechanical major failure
The PLC indicates a Mechanical major failure R29M=1 fault:
In stabilised conditions, if it detects discordance in the tables describing the system's stable states (boxes
marked with an asterisk in the matrices).
In transient conditions, in the graphs describing the passage from the Hydraulic station stopped state to
the Hydraulic station started state, each time that a major fault signal detection is indicated.
) If a R29M=1 fault is detected, the PLC maintains the state of its logic outputs in the graph detecting
the fault, as long as the operation order R0H=1 is maintained by the UNIT PLC.
) When the operation order is reset to 0 by the UNIT PLC (R0H=0), the PLC starts the hydraulic
station stop graph.
) In the hydraulic station shutdown sequences, detection of a R29M major faults stays active, but the
execution of under - graphs back to the stop state normally continues.
Retaking control of the oil-hydraulic station by the PLC
Case no. 1
Operation order active after a PLC major fault (R29 H) => station controlled by the UNIT PLC with station
in operation:
After repairing the PLC or power source no. 1, the PLC detects the active operation order (ROH=1) and
maintains the major fault (R29H=0).
The operator can press the ACK button to acknowledge the faults.
If no fault remains, the PLC switches to a no major fault state (R29H=1) and the station is restored to PLC
control.
Case no. 2
Inactive operation order after a PLC major fault (R29 H) => station controlled by the UNIT PLC with the
station stopped:
After repairing the PLC or power source no. 1, the PLC detects an inactive operation order (ROH=0).
If the PLC does not detect any major faults and the oil-hydraulic station is actually stopped, relay R29 H
=1 after a time delay (without having to press the ACK push button) and the PLC takes over control of the
station.

35
PAGE 16 / 58
)The UNIT PLC must control the start and stop order in any case.
Preliminary conditions for automatically starting the hydraulic station
These conditions are at least indicated in the table describing the different elements involved in the
command system, in column S1.
Start up authorisation also depends on the checking of the following elements:
• Presence of the hydraulic station start order R100=1 (see Programme 2 section: Starting the
hydraulic station).
• No major faults: R29H=0 R29M=0
• Sensor 101MN not in error
• At least one sensor, either 111MP or 112MP not in error
• At least 2 pumps ready to operate: Pump_Fault[X]=0 (see section

36
PAGE 17 / 58
Behaviour of the PLC in event of pump failure).
• PLC in automatic mode: R300H=0

37
PAGE 18 / 58
3.2 HYDRAULIC STATION
The hydraulic station is used to produce pressurised oil necessary:

• for permanent operation of guide vanes, under the control of the speed governor.
• for creating the pressurised oil reserve, to perform large movements and safety mechanisms for the
guide vanes.
3.2.1 LIST OF INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Oil Governor Pumps
Label Meaning Board Board Board Board Board Polarity S1 S2

111PO 112PO NA NA
Oil generator pump n°X

R293PX Pump Filter clogged DI1.1 DI1.2 DI1.3 DI1.4 1 0 0
R23PX Pump in Auto Mode DI1.5 DI1.6 DI1.7 DI1.8 1 1 1
R22PX Pump X started DI1.9 DI1.10 DI1.11 DI1.12 1 0 x
R11XFC Unloading position from DI1.16 DI1.17 DI1.18 DI1.19 1 0 x
unloader valve
R290PX Pump not available DI1.20 DI1.21 DI1.22 DI1.23 0 x x
10XMP Pump pressure AI1.7 AI1.8 AI1.9 AI1.10 4-20mA 4 x
R11PX Pump start DO1.24 DO1.25 DO1.26 DO1.27 1 0 x

PLC
R12PX Pump stop DO1.28 DO1.29 DO1.30 DO1.31 1 1 x
PLC
R13PX Unloader valves pumps DO1.32 1 1 x

PLC order
Name Variable Relay Signification Board Polarity S0 S1 S2

Oil generator
111MO 111PO_ON Pump 111 is ON DI9.6 1 0 x x
112MO 112PO_ON Pump 112 is ON DI9.7 1 0 x x
111PO 111PO_Order Pump 111 Order DO6.1 1 0 x x

111EM 111EM_Order Electro-distributor 111 Order DO6.2 1 1 x x
112PO 112PO_Order Pump 112 Order DO6.3 1 0 x x
112EM 112EM_Order Electro-distributor 112 Order DO6.4 1 1 x x
Pump assignment according to hydraulic diagram marks:

PUMP X MARK
Pump n°1 111PO
Pump n°2 112PO

38
PAGE 19 / 58
3.2.2 MANAGEMENT OF PUMP PRIORITIES
A 3-position selector switch S01: AutoÍÎ1ÍÎ2, located on the front panel of the cubicle, allows
automatic or manual choice of the main pump and only the main pump.
Standby pumps are always selected automatically by the PLC.
A pump is selected in automatic mode by an algorithm taking into account the ratio of pump operating
times and their number of start-ups per hour.
Assignment of pump priority is also achieved from the maintenance terminal. Its modification is protected
in write mode by a confidential access code.
Priority encoding criterion
To guarantee system adaptability to all unit operating and maintenance requirements, the system accepts
a parameter that can define the priority of a pump when it needs to be used in the pressurized oil
generation system.
A priority programmable between -1 and 100 is then defined for each element, with the following
conventions:
Operating time Meaning
T=0 Stand-By pump
The Stand-by pump can only be chosen if no higher priority pump can be selected.
Selection of this pump does not take into account its operating time with respect to
higher priority pumps
0<T<=100 The operator then programmes the desired percentage of total pump operating
time.
T=-1 By convention, a pump whose operating time is programmed at value -1, is a pump
temporarily disconnected for oil-hydraulic station maintenance, or is not part of the
contract supply.
In this case, it cannot be selected by the selection algorithm.
It enables disconnection of pump operating fault monitoring.
)Operating times for all the pumps can be viewed on the maintenance terminal and can be reset to 0
individually by the operator.
) The operator can at any time redefine the priority assignment system, i.e. the priority encoding
table, even during operation. However, this pump can only be selected if the PLC decides to select a new pump,
or stopped if the PLC decides to remove a pump, in the control sequences that it manages.
)Pump operating times are measured as soon as the PLC detects the information R22PX=1: Pump
X started. In particular, pump operating time is measured even when a pump is operating in the manual mode.
)Motor operating times are recorded at a frequency of 1 Hz and saved on internal 32 bit counters.

39
PAGE 20 / 58
Normalisation of recorded operating times
) The operator must ensure that operating time percentages are entered so that the sum of data
entered equals 100%.
PUMP 111PO 112PO 103PO 104PO
Data a b NA NA
To ensure the convergence and respect of operating times, the PLC associates the table calculated from
data entered by the operator:
NA NA
Percentage a/(a+b+c+d) b/(a+b+c+d) c/(a+b+c+d) d/(a+b+c+d)
Of course, the value –1 (pump switched off) is sorted and excluded from the calculation.
Programming example
NA NA
Percentage 25 25 50 0
In this example, pump 103PO is the priority pump. Pumps 111PO and 112PO have equal priority and pump
104PO is the Stand-By pump.
Pump 103PO operates on average twice as long as pumps 111PO and 112PO.
Pumps 111PO and 112 PO have approximately equal operating times.
Best availability criterion
A candidate pump can only be chosen if it offers the best availability compared to that of the stopped candidate
pumps:
If
T represents total pump operating time
Ti represents total operating time of pump no.i
Tj represents total operating time of pump no.j
Pi represents the programmed percentage of use for pump no. i
Pj represents the programmed percentage of use for pump no. j
The PLC calculates the associated availabilities of pumps i and j, i.e.

Di=Pi-Ti/T and Dj=Pj-Tj/T.
Pump n.i will be selected before pump no.j if Di>Dj
) The pumps are therefore put into competition with a rotating priority.
Therefore, the notions of Normal, Standby and Hot Spare pumps do not exist. The PLC program selects an
element to ensure equal distribution of their operating times with an adjustable weight.
) The operating time of each pump can be individually reset to 0 by an authorized operator, after
entry of a confidential access code on the LOGIN programming page.
When the operating time is reset to 0, the time delay system T_PUMP[i] is also reset to 0.

40
PAGE 21 / 58
)An operating pump, with priority j, is not stopped when its operating time exceeds the operating time of a
priority j pump. This criterion is therefore only taken into consideration before starting the pump Pj.
Manufacturer criterion
Each motor is designed to accept a limited number of start-ups per hour. This is normally true for pumps also.
This manufacturer parameter is accessible and adjustable from the maintenance terminal.
PUMP 101P 102P 103P 104P
Ni: Nbr Start-ups / hour 6
Figure 3: Consideration of the number of start-ups per hour authorized
As from the number Ni/hour provided for each pump, defining the maximum number of start-ups per hour
3600 sec .
accepted for pump no. i, the PLC initializes a time delay relay T_PUMP[i] corresponding to time during
Ni
which the motor cannot be re-activated.
A motor no. i can therefore only be controlled if T_PUMP[i]=0.
In these conditions, motor control by the PLC causes initialization of the time delay relay at the value
3600 sec .
which then decreases down to value 0 at a frequency of 1Hz.
Ni
This criterion normally satisfies the thermal operating limits of the motor defined by the manufacturer.
Pump starting
authorisation time
delay
Pump xxx
Request
Pump starting
authorisation
Figure 4: Manufacturer criterion chronogram
The characteristics of the motors installed on TGP are such that their restarts must be prohibited in a time
evaluated at 10 minutes.
A motor can be placed on-load 5 seconds after start-up.
Pump selection algorithm Select_Start_Pump()
This algorithm provides a Main_Pump logic input value that is true if the main pump is to be started, abd
false if the stand-by pump is to be started.

41
PAGE 22 / 58
The program gives an output that is the number of the pump to be started or value –1 if there is a
selection fault.
Variables used
This algorithm receives as an input a pump start-up request. It is a voter system supplying as an output
the number of the pump to be started.
Notation:
X, Y: pump no. X or pump no. Y
AUTO: main pump selection switch indicator in position Automatic
K: Counter showing the number of pumps inspected in the search
P[X]: Programmed percentage of use for pump no. X
p intermediary variable: this variable enables at least one pump to be found available, nut not fulfilling the
manufacturer’s criterion.
Pump_Fault[X] fault state (1) of the X index pump X (operator acknowledgement)
D[X]: Result of the availability calculation associated with pump X, according to the section Best
availability criterion
)A pump X is declared faulty if it is unavailable (R290PX=1), or if a pump starting or stopping sequence

contains an anomaly in its control (for example, time delay operating report not correct. See pump starting and
stopping graphs).
Management of pump number in the algorithm
The number of the first pump to be inspected is set at 1 if the switch S01 on the front panel is in the
Automatic position, otherwise, it is equal to the value shown by the switch.
In these conditions, the following formula is used to calculate the next pump index:
X=(X+1) Mod 5 + (X+1)/5
This formula naturally gives a return from pump 4 to pump 1 if X=4.
Mod is the remainder of the division of the value X+1 by 5, or 5 equals the maximum number of pumps
+1.

42
PAGE 23 / 58
3.2.3 PRELIMINARY SEARCH FOR THE PUMP WITH HIGHEST PRIORITY
Start of preliminary search Start
Calculation of the availabilities

Di of each pump
X=S01 Encoded Front Board

Switch Value
Front Board Switch S01 in AUTO No

X=0 ?
position?
Yes
X=Number 1st pump to be AUTO=true
inspected X=1 AUTO=false
k=Counter of the nbr. pumps

k=1
p=indicator at least 1 elligible
p=0
pump
Figure 5: Initialization of search indexes

43
PAGE 24 / 58
Pum p connected in the table of No

P[X] ≠ -1 ?
percentages of use?
Yes
Yes
Is the pum p already in operation? R22PX=1 ?
No
Is the pum p in the autom atic No

R23PX=1 ?
m ode?
Yes
Yes
Is the pum p declared faulty? Pum p_Fault[X] = 1 ?
No
No
Is it the first available pum p? p=0?
Yes
M ark of the no. of the first

p=X
available pum p
Is the pum p's num ber of starts per

hour com patible w ith the m otor No
T_PUM P[X]=0 ?
m anufacturer's operating
instructions?
Yes
Yes
StandBy Pum p ? P[X]=0 ?
No
k=k+1
Inspection of the next pum p X=(X+1) m od 5 + (X+1)/5
Yes
Are there other available pum ps? k<=m ax_pum p ?
No
Is there at least one available No

p ≠ 0?
pum p?
Yes
X=p
Note 1
Note 2
B ALARM OR M AJOR FAULT

End of the prelim inary search
Return(-1)
Figure 6: Preliminary search for the first available pump

Note 1: The algorithm therefore detects at least one available pump, but which does not satisfy the
manufacturer criterion.
Note 2: The major fault is only signalled if the PLC starts the main pump. In this case the variable
Main_Pump in the calling program is true.

44
PAGE 25 / 58
3.2.4 SEARCH FOR THE OPTIMUM PUMP
Start of the optimal search B
Y=X
No
Start main pump? Main_Pump=true ?
Yes
Switch S01 on the front No
AUTO=true ?
panel in AUTO position ?
(Pump 1-4 selection position) Yes
k=k+1 Inspection of the next

Initialisation of the search index
Y=(Y+1) mod 5 + (Y+1)/5 pump
Return(X) k> max_pump ?

Pump X chosen Yes
No
Pump connected in the table of No

P[Y] ≠ -1?
percentages of use?
Yes
Yes
Is the pump already in operation? R22PY=1 ?
No
Is the pump in the automatic No

R23PY=1 ?
mode?
Yes
Yes
Is the pump declared faulty? Pump_Fault[Y] = 1 ?
No
Is the pump's number of starts per No

hour compatible with the T_PUMP[Y]=0 ?
manufacturer's instructions?
Yes
Pump Y calculated availability better No
D[Y]>D[X]?
than pump X
Yes
Yes
Pump Y = Stand-By pump? P[Y]=0?
No
Change priority and save X=Y
Figure 7: Search for the optimal pump

45
PAGE 26 / 58
Note: In this second phase of the algorithm, the stand-by pump is not selected, even if its operating time
authorises it to be so. The stand-by pump can therefore only be selected in the preliminary search.
Pump selection algorithm Select_Stop_Pump()
The program gives the number of the pump to be stopped as an output.
Initialisation of the search index
Start of preliminary search Start
Calculation of the availabilities

Di of each pump
X=Encoded Front Board S01

Switch Value
Front Board Switch S01 in AUTO No

X=0 ?
position?
Yes
X=Numéro 1st pump to be AUTO=true

inspected X=1 AUTO=false
k=Counter for the number of

k=1
pumps
Z=Mark of the main pump Z=X

46
PAGE 27 / 58
Stop of the optimal pump
Next pum p X=(X+1) m od M axi + (X+1)/M axi
No
Is the pum p already in operation ? R22PX=1 ?
Yes
No
Is the pum p in autom atic m ode ? R23PX=1 ?
Yes
Y=X
Pum p X = Stand-By Pum p ?

P[X] = 0 ?
Yes
No
k=k+1
Y=(Y+1) m od M axi + (Y+1)/M axi
k=k+1
Yes
k>m ax_pum p ?
No
No k>m ax_pum p ?
Return(X)
Pum p X selected Yes
No
Is the pum p running ? R22PY=1 ? Return(-1)
Yes
No
Is the pum p in autom atic m ode ? R23PY=1 ?
Yes
Yes
AUTO=1
No
Yes
Is Y the m ain pum p ? Y=Z ?
No
Yes
Pom pe Y = Pom pe Stand-By ? P[Y] = 0 ?
No
Yes
Pum p Y calculated availability D[Y] > D[X] ?
better than pum p X
No
Change priority and save X=Y
Figure 8 : Stop of the optimal pump

47
PAGE 28 / 58
Behaviour of the PLC in event of pump failure
The PLC permanently monitors the consistency information between the control and the state of the
pumps and generates an alarm if a discrepancy is detected (Minor fault R129M=1) updating the pump
fault table Pump_Fault[X].
Moreover, the PLC indicates a major fault if it detects that all the pumps are faulty (R29M=0).
A pump is declared faulty if the following information is detected:
Pump ordered (memory) AND [Pump X is not available R290PX=0

OR Pump is not started R22PX=0] OR Pump X Filter clogged R293PX=1 OR 10XMP<1mA]
)Caution: pump controls are auto-maintained in the 10XCR motor control box. By design, the controls must
be repositioned at 0 after a time delay.
It is thus recommended to memorise pump control states in memories inside the PLC.
Detection of the criterion causes the corresponding pump to stop (action R11 PXPLC=0
AND R12 PXPLC=1), signalling of a minor fault, indication on the maintenance terminal of the pump in
error and the automatic starting of another pump.
The minor fault can be acknowledged using the maintenance terminal.
The information message on the terminal is deleted according to the fault acknowledgement procedure
on the terminal, provided that the fault really has disappeared.
A fault can only occur if the relevant pump is declared present in the system configuration.
Pressure thresholds 10XMP associated with the distributors 10XDR
These thresholds determine whether or not a pump outputs on the governing circuit.
Threshold Meaning of sensors 10XMP
MP10X_S10
Pressure threshold not reached at distributor outlet 10XDR
MP10X_S20
Pressure threshold reached at distributor outlet 10XDR
)The thresholds can only be adjusted by the PLC programming software workshop.
They are expressed in number of analog converter points and cannot be adjusted on the MMI.

48
PAGE 29 / 58
Pump starting graph
This algorithm receives the main or stand-by pump start information as an input: Main_Pump=false/true.
Automatic pump start order
Start time delay between 2 pumps = 0
*The false or true value is determined by

4 y Select_Start_Pump(false/true)
the calling program
=1
y Start pump X :
6 R11PX PLC=1 AND R12PX PLC=0
y Set impulsional start time delay 1 sec
End of impulsional start time delay
y Stop impulsional start order R11PX PLC=0

7
y Set Pump X Start time delay
Pump X started R22PX=1

AND
Distributor 10XDR loaded : R11XFC=1 Pump X start time delay = 0
AND
Detection of pressure at distributor exit 10XDR :
10XMP>MP10X_S20
12 y Pump X start fault Signal
=1
y Set start time delay between 2 pumps

8 14 y Pump X override stop sequence
y Set time delay : Number of starts/hour criterion
End of pump X stop sequence
=1
y Signal "Pump X started"

10 y Set pump operating time counter
y End of pump start sequence
Figure 9: Pump starting graph

49
PAGE 30 / 58
Pump stopping graph
This algorithm receives as an input the main or standby pump start information: Main_Pump=true/false.
Stop pump X by override (*Note 1) Automatic pump stoppage order
2 y Select_Stop_Pump(false/true)
=1
*The false or true value is determined by
the calling program
y Stop pump X :
R11PX PLC=0 and R12PX PLC=1
4
y Disable pump operating time counter
y Set impulsional time delay 1 sec
End of impulsional time delay
y Stop impulsional order : R12PX PLC=0

5
y Set pump X stop time delay
Pump X stopped: R22PX=0

AND
Pump X in no load mode R11X PLC=0
Pump X stop time delay = 0
AND
Pressure detection at distributor exit 10XDR :
10XMP < MP10X_S10
6 y Indicate pump stop fault X
=1
y Indicate pump X stopped

8
y End of pump stop sequence
Figure 10: Pump stopping graph
*Note 1: Stopping by override is a consequence of a pump’s starting graph. The selected pump X could
not be started. Stoppage of pump X is therefore explicitly ordered.

50
PAGE 31 / 58
Pressure and level sensors
Pressure and level sensors
Label Meaning Board Polarity S1 S2
111MP Main bus pressure signal AI1.5 4-20mA ≥4 >4
112MP Main bus pressure signal AI1.6 4-20mA ≥4 >4
121MP Pressure tank pressure signal AI1.3 4-20mA >4 >4
101MN Pressure tank oil level signal AI1.4 4-20mA >4 >4
3.2.5 PRESSURE SENSORS 111MP AND 112MP IN THE GOVERNING CIRCUIT
Priorities associated with the pressure sensors
These pressure sensors are used to measure oil pressure at the outlet of the pressurised oil generating
station (111MP and 112MP sensors).
The priority sensor considered by the system is defined using the maintenance terminal. This priority
defines the Main sensor. The second sensor therefore acts as a Stand-by sensor.
User Pressure Sensors 111MP 112MP
Priority 1 2
Figure 11: Example of defining Main and Stand-by sensor priorities
In this example, sensor 111MP has a higher priority than sensor 112MP.
When a sensor is no longer included in the supply or if it is disassembled for maintenance reasons, its
priority must be defined, by convention, with a value equalling 0.
This measure prevents detection of faults on the sensor in question.
These sensors are used in the start up sequences of the hydraulic station, as long as the pressure tank
isolating valve is closed and the information “Pressure reached” has not been registered in the hydraulic
intermittence cycle.

51
PAGE 32 / 58
3.2.6 DETECTION OF SENSOR FAULTS
The PLC permanently monitors sensor state and signals a minor fault as soon as a sensor delivers a
signal less than 1 mA (detection of wire breakage, etc.) if they have been declared present in the tables
above.
The PLC declares a major fault if the two sensors are declared faulty.
Thresholds associated with the pressure sensors

Threshold Meaning of sensors 111MP or 112MP Action
MP111_S10 Pressure reached Start authorisation
MP111_S20 Low intermittence pressure threshold Main pump loaded
MP111_S30 Nominal pressure Main pump in no load mode
Pressure sensor 121MP or level sensor 101MN in the pressure tank
These sensors enable measurement of the pressure or level in the pressurised oil pressure tank (sensor 121MP
or 101MN).
3.2.7 PRESSURE AND LEVEL THRESHOLDS IN THE PRESSURE TANK
Software threshold associated with the level sensor 101MN and pressure sensor 121MP
Threshold Meaning of sensor 101MN Action
MN101_S20 High level threshold Automatic compressed air top-up.
Isolating valve open.
MN101_S30 Normal level threshold Main pump in unload mode
MN101_S40 Stop auxiliary pumps
MN101_S60 - Start pump 2
MN101_S90 1st stage low threshold Alarm
MP121_S10 Not used

MP121_S20 Nominal pressure threshold
Figure 12: Thresholds associated with the level sensors 101MN and 121MP
Threshold relays associated with the level measurement

Pressure Tank
Label Meaning Board Polarity S1 S2 Action
Threshold relays in pressure tank

R101SN Too high oil level DI2.8 1 0 0 Alarme
R102SN Sufficient oil level DI2.9 1 x x Start-up condition
R103SN Too low oil level DI2.10 1 0 0 Turbine shutdown
R104SN Too too low oil level DI2.11 1 0 0 Closing of isolating valve
Figure 13 : Threshold relays associated with the level measurement

52
PAGE 33 / 58
3.2.8 PRINCIPLE OF LEVEL THRESHOLDS MANAGEMENT
The actions associated with these thresholds are only possible when the hydraulic station is in operation
(except automatic air top-up sequence on detection of threshold MP121_S10 when the isolating valve is
closed).
All the thresholds can be programmed with an operating hysterisis SY_HYST, that can be adjusted using
the programming console.
3.2.9 HYDRAULIC INTERMITTENCE CYCLE
Presentation
The energy required to supply the oil circuits is supplied by the motor pump(s). The instantaneous power
required varies to a large extent:
If there are no disturbances on the network, thus in steady state, servomotors are virtually motionless and
power consumption is that required to operate actuators and to maintain circuit pressure.
When major disturbances occur, rapid servomotor operations require very great instantaneous power.
To economically satisfy these requirements, the energy supplied by the motor pump or pumps is stored in
a pressure-oil tank, able to restore for a limited time the power required for rapid operations.
To prevent wasting energy, the tank's intermittent reloading electrical device steers pump delivery rate:
Either to the tank to ensure reloading
Or to the discharge at reduced pressure while the tank supplies the general circuit.
111MP or
112MP sensor
Threshold
MP111_S30
Threshold
MP111_S20
Deflation phase Inflation phase
TOFF TON TOFF TON
R13PX PLC
Figure 14: Unit intermittence cycle in no-load operation
Graph showing management of the hydraulic intermittence cycle

53
PAGE 34 / 58
Control of relay PLC R13PX: Common control of the all Unloader valves
)Caution, only one relay R13PX PLC controls all the un-loader valves 1, 2, 3 and 4.
0
Validated intermittency cycle
Pressure 111MP (ou 112MP) < Low intermittency

Pressure 111MP (ou 112MP) > Nominal pressure threshold MP111_S30
pressure threshold MP111_S20
AND
OR
Level 101MN > Auxiliary pumps stop threshold MN101_S40
Level 101MN < Pump 2 start threshold MN101_S60
4 y Pumps in load mode R13PX PLC=0 6 y Pumps in unload mode R13PX PLC=1
=1 =1
Figure 15: Management of the hydraulic intermittence cycle
Note: To avoid looping of this graph, the first 2 transitions 2Î4 or 2Î6 are completed on detection of a rising edge of the
associated receptivities.
Reminder: The graph activation thresholds can be programmed from the maintenance terminal.

54
PAGE 35 / 58
3.3 PRESSURE TANK ISOLATING VALVE
Pressure Tank
Tank Isolating Valve

R127FC Tank Isolating Valve is closed DI2.7 1 1 0
R126FC Tank Isolating Valve is open DI2.6 1 0 1
R105EM PLC Energize isolating valve 105EM Closing Order DO1.16 1 0 0

R106EM PLC Energize isolating valve 106EM Opening Order DO1.17 1 0 0
Servomotor positions
R144FC Wicket gate at speed no load DI2.17 1 0 x
R145FC Wicket gate closed DI2.18 1 1 x
R146FC Wicket gate fully open DI2.19 1 0 x

55
PAGE 36 / 58
3.3.2 OPENING THE PRESSURE TANK ISOLATING VALVE
Isolating valve opening order
y Opening isolating valse

1 R106EM PLC=1 AND R105EM PLC=0
y Set Impulsional time delay 1 s
y Set time delay "Isolating valve opening time too long"

2
y Stop Opening isolating valve command R106EM PLC=0
Isolating valve open:

Time delay=0
R126FC=1 AND R127FC=0
y Stopping Isolating valve opening R106EM PLC=0

4 6 MAJOR FAULT
y Signal "End of Isolating valve opening sequence"
Figure 16: Opening the pressure tank isoating valve
Closing the pressure tank isolating valve
Memorisations associated with the isolating valve closing order
As soon as the isolating valve closing sequence is ordered, the PLC memorises the level 101MV and pressure
121MP values in the pressure tank:
Thresholds Meaning
MN101_V10 Level in the pressure tank when the isolating valve is closed
MP121_V10 Pressure in the pressure tank when the isolating valve is closed
These values are then used in the air top-up sequences in the isolating valve closed mode.

56
PAGE 37 / 58
3.3.3 GRAPH SHOWING THE ISOLATING VALVE CLOSURE COMMAND
Isolating valve closing order OR Level too low 104SN=1
y M em orisation M N101_V1= 101M N current value

y M em orisation M P121_V1=121M P current value
2
y Set Im pulsional tim e delay 1 sec
y Closing the isolating valve: R106EM PLC=0 AND R105EM PLC=1
y Stop Closing com m and R105EM PLC=0

3
y Set tim e delay "Isolating valve closing tim e too long"
Isolating valve closed:

R127FC=1 AND R126FC=0 Time delay=0
6 M AJOR FAULT
=1
4 y Signal "End of closed Isolating valve sequence"
=1
Figure 17: Closing the pressure tank isolating valve
Program P2: Starting the hydraulic station

Hydraulic station
R0H Start Hydraulic system DI2.1 1 x x

R300H Hydraulic System Control in Manual mode DI2.3 1 x x
R400M Hydraulic Station is Ready DO1.5 1 0 1
The switching 0Î1 of relay R300H immediately causes the return to state S1 (i.e. Automatic pump
command mode to Manual mode).

57
PAGE 38 / 58
Hydraulic station starting order R0H=1 AND Hydraulic System Control in Automatic mode R300H=0
AND Starting conditions are filled
y Main_Pump=True
2 y Selecting the main pump
y Starting the regulation main pump
End of pump start sequence
4 Set time delay "Starting the hydraulic station is too long"
Starting authorisation : Threshhold MP111_S10=1 Time delay=0
6 Opening the pressure tank isolating valve 8 Major Fault
End of the isolating valve opening sequence
10 y Validating the intermittency cycle
=1
y Signal "Hydraulic station in operation"

12
y Hydraulic station ready R400M=1
Figure 18: Starting the hydraulic station
) The hydraulic station is always started with the threshold Starting authorisation associated with the
pressure sensors 111MP or 112MP.

58
PAGE 39 / 58
Program P3: Stopping the hydraulic station
Hydraulic station stop order R0H=0

AND
Servomotor is closed R145FC=1
2 y Invalidating the interm ittency cycle
Level < Normal level : Threshold MN101_S30=0 Level < Normal level : Threshold M N101_S30=1
Isolating valve closed OR AND
Pressure 121M P < Nominal pressure MP121_S20 Pressure 121MP> Nominal pressure MP121_S20
y Pum ps in load m ode : R13PX PLC=0

4
y Set tim e delay
Time delay=0
Normal level in pressure tank :

6 ALARM
Threshold MN101_S30=1
AND
Pressure 121M P> Nominal pressure MP121_S20
=1
y Pum ps in no load m ode : R13PX PLC=1

8
y Closure of isolating valve
End of closed Isolating valve sequence
10 y Stop governing pum ps
End of Stop governing pumps sequence
y Reset hydraulic station stop order

12 y Signal "Hydraulic station stopped"
y Hydraulic station not ready R400H=0
=1
Figure 19: Stopping the hydraulic station

59
PAGE 40 / 58
Compressed air top--up in the pressure tank

Pressure Tank
Air Injection
R101 EL PLC Energize air injection DO1.15 1 x x
3.3.4 AIR TOP-UP, ISOLATING VALVE OPEN
The High Level MN101_S20 threshold when the pressure tank isolating valve is open causes a top-up of
compressed air in the pressure tank by energising electrovalve 101EL. The duration and frequency of
injection are subject to a time delay.
These parameters can be adjusted on the front panel terminal.
The compressed air top-up is performed during the intermittence cycle deflation phase, i.e. R13PX=1
(Document TGP261XX-01-03 Air admittance control section).
Hydraulic Station Ready R400H=1

AND Isolating valve open (R126FC=1AND R127FC=0)
AND [ ( High level threshold MN101_S20=1AND Level sensor ready) OR Threshold 101SN ]
AND Deflation phase in the intermittency cycle R13PX=1
Delay EL101_T2 between 2 Delay EL101_T2 between 2

injections not elapsed injections elapsed
y Energise electrovalve R101EL PLC=1
4 y Set injection duration time delay EL101_T1
y Reset time delay between 2 injections EL101_T2
Injection duration time delay EL101_T1 elapsed
6 y De-energise electrovalve R101EL PLC=0
=1
Figure 20: Compressed air top-up graph, isolating valve open
Compressed air top-up with shut-off valve closed
From the thresholds memorised in the pressure tank isolating valve closure sequence (see section 0:
Closing the pressure tank isolating valve) the PLC takes into account the coefficients that can be modified
on the maintenance terminal (MMI):
Sensor Meaning
MN101_K10 Coefficient for air injection on level threshold, sensor 101MN
MP121_K10 Coefficient for air injection on pressure threshold, sensor 121MP

60
PAGE 41 / 58
And calculates the following thresholds

MN101_V11=MN101_K10*MN101_V10
MP121_V11=MP121_K10*MP121_V10
Isolating valve closed R126FC=0AND R127FC=1

AND Pressure in pressure tank 121MP < MP121_V11
AND Level in pressure tank 101MN > MN101_V11
2 y Energise electrovalve R101EL=1
Isolating valve not closed R127FC=0

OR Pressure in pressure tank 121MP > MP121_V10
OR Level in pressure tank 101MN < MN101_V11
4 y De-energise electrovalve R101EL=0
=1
Figure 21 : Graph showing the top-up of compressed air, isolating valve closed

61
PAGE 42 / 58
3.4 MANAGEMENT OF OIL TEMPERATURE IN THE OIL SUMP
Oil sump temperature

RO PV PLC Oil cooler ON order DO1.23 1 x x

RC PV PLC Oil cooler OFF order DO1.22 1 x x
R132FC Water valve opened (status) DI2.27 1 x x
R133FC Water valve closed (status) DI2.28 1 x x
RTH Temperature control is ON DI2.12 1 x x

LO PY Oil heater ON (status) DI2.31 1 x x
RO PY PLC Oil heater ON order DO1.21 1 x x
RS PY PLC Oil heater OFF order DO1.20 1 x x
MR101 Oil sump tank temperature gauge 1 AI1.1 4-20mA ≥4 ≥4

MR102 Oil sump tank temperature gauge 2 (NOT USED FOR AI1.2 4-20mA ≥4 ≥4
Merowe)
R101ST Oil temperature too high DI2.26 1 0 0
R29-206 206CR box major fault DI2.32 1 0 0
Temperature sensors 101MR and 102MR enable the temperature of the oil in the pressurised oil generating
station to be measured.
Threshold R101ST is only used to generate an alarm and does not affect the control graphs below.
Priorities associated with the temperature sensors
The priority sensor taken into account by the system is defined on the maintenance terminal. This priority
defines the Main sensor. The second sensor is therefore the Standby sensor (NOT USED FOR Merowe).
Temperature sensor 101MR 102MR
Priority 1 2
If a sensor is not part of the supply, or is dismantled for maintenance purposes, its priority must be programmed,
by convention, with a value of 0.
This convention prevents detection and indication of faults on the sensor concerned.

62
PAGE 43 / 58
3.4.2 THRESHOLDS ASSOCIATED WITH TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Threshold Meaning sensor 111MP or 112MP Action

MR101_S1 Normal temperature threshold Stops Heating and Cooling orders
MR101_S2 Too low temperature threshold Heating order
MR101_S3 Too high temperature threshold Cooling order
Temperature thresholds MR101_S1, MR101_S2, MR101_S3 can be modified using the front panel terminal.
Detection of sensor faults
The PLC continually monitors the state of the temperature sensors in the oil tank and indicates a minor
fault (alarm) as soon as one sensor issues a signal less than 1 mA (detection of wire breakage, etc.), if
they have been declared present in the tables above.
The PLC declares a major fault if both sensors are declared faulty and ends the heating or cooling
command sequences. Time delay MR101_TP1 can be adjusted from the front panel. No alarm is
generated if this parameter is set to 0.

63
PAGE 44 / 58
3.4.3 COOLING VALVE 101PV COMMAND GRAPH
Temperature MR101 (or MR102) > Temperature too high MR101_S3

AND
At least 1 sensor MR101 or MR102 not faulty
AND
Hydraulic station in operation R400M=1
y Indicate cooling
2 y Cooling by water valve 101PV: RO_PV_PLC=1
y Set pulse command time delay 1 second
Command time delay = 0
4 y Stop command signal RO_PV_PLC=0

y Set awaiting end of time delay R132FC
Valve 101PV open limit switch:

Time delay = 0
6 ALARM
=1
8 y Set temperature gradient decrease

time delay MR101_TP2
Time delay = 0
Normal temperature threshold
AND
Temperature MR101 (or MR102) < MR101_S1
MR101_TP2 <>0
OR
Sensor faults MR101 AND MR102
10 ALARM
=1
y Stop cooling RC_PV_PLC=1

12
y Set pulse command time delay 1 second
Command time delay = 0
y Stop command RC_PV_PLC=0

14
y Set awaiting 101PV valve closed time delay
Valve 101PV closed limit switch:

Time delay= 0
16 ALARM
=1
18 y Indicate end of cooling
=1
Figure 22: Graph showing command of the cooling valve 101PV

64
PAGE 45 / 58
Time delay MR101_TP1 can be adjusted from the front panel. No alarm is generated if this parameter is
set to 0.
3.5 OIL FILTRATION IN THE SUMP TANK
Oil Filtering in sump tank

LO_PU Oil Purifier is ON DI2.29 1 x x

R170FC Oil purifier clogged DI2.30 1 0 0
Clogging of filter 110FI (R170FC=1) signals an alarm R129M=1.

65
PAGE 46 / 58
4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The preventive maintenance is very light for these electronic components.
Every months, open the door and check if no dust is coming in;
If yes, cut the supply of the cubicle (use breaker ) or box and clean it carefully.
Reset the supply and close the door after cleaning with the key.
Note : Into the cubicle and the box, ALSTOM use small breaker to cut the supply and to protect each
device at the needed value.
These breaker shall be used to protect the devices during operation maintenance.
To cut the power it is better to start by the small breakers first then to cut the general breaker at minimum
load.
As reverse to supply a box or a cubicla gain, it is better to commute first the general breaker and after
each the individual breaker. Following this procedure, it is possible to check the start of each device ( Led
in front face) step by step.
This procedure allows a good final check of the internal components before run.

66
PAGE 47 / 58
4.2 CURATIVE MAINTENANCE.
The maintenance is supported by some LED given the status of the main components.
Supply
PLC 8035
Man-Machine Interface
Relays

67
PAGE 48 / 58
4.2.1 MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE FAILURE
QUALIFICATION Electronic engineer
TYPICAL FAILURE The front face display is fully black
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of supply
2 – Shutdown of software (and/or hardware)
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ111 sheet 08 & 33

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the associated breaker Q5, if not open check the supply
module of 8035
2 – The software don’t run. Cut the supply - open Q5. Supply the PLC
and the associated M.M.I. – close Q5
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The output voltage is 24VDC +/- 10% measured between terminal
on supply module. If no, change for the spare one.
2 – After a time delay of 10 second, the display restart. If no, change

for the spare one.
OPERATOR & DATE Operator Name Date: / /

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:

68
PAGE 49 / 58
4.2.2 POWER FAILURE OF GRE101RG
TYPICAL FAILURE The alarm relay is commuted R209-1 or R209-2 but no R209
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of DC or AC supply
2 – Failure of DC/DC converter of AC/DC converter

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the associated breaker Q& or Q2 , if not open check the
supply module
2 – check the LED in front face of module (lighting = OK). If the

voltage is not correct change the converter
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The input voltage of DC/DC converter is 220VDC +/- 10%, the
input voltage of AC/DC converter is 220VAC. If no, check the
associated feeder.
2 – The output voltage of each converter is 24VDC +/- 10%

measured between terminal on supply module. If no, change for the
spare one.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE: Be careful with the polarity (+ and 0) at the input and output of DC/DC
converter and output of AC/DC converter.

69
PAGE 50 / 58
4.2.3 POWER 8035 FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The alarm relay is commuted R209-1 or R209-2 but no R209
2 – Failure of DC/DC converter of AC/DC converter

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the associated breaker Q1 or Q2 , if not open check the

supply module

EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The input voltage of DC/DC converter is 220VDC +/- 10%, the
input voltage of AC/DC converter is 220VAC. If no, check the
associated feeder.

spare one.

OF INCIDENT

70
PAGE 51 / 58
4.2.4 POWER FAILURE OF GRE120CR
TYPICAL FAILURE The alarm relay is commuted R209
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of 220VDC
2 – Failure of DC/DC converter
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ221 sheet 06S

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the associated breaker Q1 , if not open check the supply
module

EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The input voltage of DC/DC converter is 220VDC +/- 10%,.If no,
check the associated feeder.

spare one.

OF INCIDENT

71
PAGE 52 / 58
4.2.5 OUTPUT/INPUT FAILURE OF 101RG
TYPICAL FAILURE The relay alarms R29 is not commuted but a signal is not transmitted
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of DC supply of associated relay
2 – Failure of associated interface relay
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ111 sheet 15-16-33-23-25

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the input of relay
2 – check the contact by manual action of push-button of relay, for

the output relay, the board of 8035 includes the relays themselves
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The supply of relay is common for every devices (24VDC)
2 – If the contact is good , the wiring is OK and the relay is OUT, then
change it for one spare. I the contact is wrong, check the wiring
(screw, wire…). For output relays, change the board for spare one.

OF INCIDENT

72
PAGE 53 / 58
4.2.6 T-SLG_N FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The relay alarms R29 is commuted
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of DC supply
2 – Failure of T-SLG module
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ111 sheet 15-16-33-23-25

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the input of module, look the Led on front face.
2 – Use the maintenance notice of product T-SLG .
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The supply is common for every devices (24VDC)
2 – Module is OK or not. If no, change for a spare one.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE: Excepted for the supply wires, all the others wires can connected to
moveable terminal. Don’t change the wires themselves, only the
boards or module.

73
PAGE 54 / 58
4.2.7 T-SLG_S FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The relay alarms 120-R29 is commuted
2 – Failure of T-SLG-202 module
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ211 sheet 06 - 15

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1a - Check the input of module, look the Led on front face and the
breaker Q2
1b – Check the associated breaker Q2
2 – Use the maintenance notice of product Alpsa-T-SLG ref 3032.
EXPECTED RESULT 1a – The supply is common for every devices (24VDC)
1b- Check the associated breaker Q2

OF INCIDENT
boards or module.

74
PAGE 55 / 58
4.2.8 NO COMMAND FROM T-SLG_S
TYPICAL FAILURE The on-off solenoid valve don’t supply the servomotor
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of emergency solenoid valve
2a – Failure of T-SLG_S module
2b – Failure of T-SLG_S output
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ211 sheet 06 - 15

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1a - Check the input of module, look the Led on front face and the
breaker Q2
1b – Check the associated breaker Q2
2 – Use the maintenance notice of product T-SLG
EXPECTED RESULT 1a – The supply is common for every devices (24VDC)
1b- Check the associated breaker Q2

OF INCIDENT
boards or module.

75
PAGE 56 / 58
4.2.9 PLC 8035 FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The relay alarms R29-P is commuted
2 – Failure of supply module or board
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ111
DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the input of module, look the Led on front face.
2 – Use the maintenance notice of product T-SLG
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The supply is common for every devices (24VDC)
2 – Board is OK or not. If no, change for a spare one.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE: The boards of 8035 are equipped with moveable front face. It is not
necessary to move the wires only the front face. Be careful, the
plastic cover is not so strong.

76
PAGE 57 / 58
5 SPARE PART LIST PA10
See Annex SPARES.

77
PAGE 58 / 58
6 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
Wiring of Speed Governor Cubicle AHT-MRW-00- GRE-EQ111
Wiring of Speed Emergency Governor AHT-MRW-00- GRE-EQ211
T-SLG Notices

78
PAGE 1 / 16
ABSTRACT PA 20
1 GENERAL: STARTER GRE210CR............................................................................................ 2
1.1 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENT................................................................................................................ 2
1.2 FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 ARRANGEMENT. .................................................................................................................................. 3
1.4 COMPONENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.5 LOCAL MODE......................................................................................................................................... 5
1.6 SPECIAL FUNCTION............................................................................................................................ 8
2 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................... 10
2.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................... 10
2.2 CURATIVE MAINTENANCE. .............................................................................................................. 11
TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA20_2.DOC

GRE-TM801 B
79
PAGE 2 / 16
1 GENERAL: STARTER GRE210CR
This document describes one the 2 control boxes used for Local Control of Governing system and the
associated operation and maintenance.
Emergency Local Governor GRE120CR (see associated chapter)
And Oil pumps starter GRE210CR.
1.1 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENT.
AHT-MRW00-GRE232 : WIRING of GRE210CR.
1.2 FUNCTIONS
The local box GRE210CR is a multi-purpose local control box performing:
• Electrical protection of motors of oil pumps
• Electrical start-stop of oil pumps in remote mode under control of Speed-Load governor GRE101RG
• Interface in remote mode between the Speed-Load governor GRE101RG and the governing system
control components and instruments.
As this box is installed on the OPU close of air/oil pressure tank, it can be used for local control of
Governing system.
• Local selection of remote / local use
• Manual start-stop of oil pumps in local mode
• Unloading & loading of oil pumps in local mode
• Control of air under pressure injection into pressure tank in local mode
• Control of opening / closure of automatic isolating valve of air/oil pressure tank.
In case of loss of connection between the Speed-Load governor GRE101RG and the OPU, the control
commutes automatically in local stand-by mode.
In this mode, the oil pump used before failure continues to run and a mechanical pressure switch is
stabilizes the pressure at a pressure range of 65/68 bar (instead of 62/64 bar in remote mode).
The Unit continues to supply energy, waiting the Operator to acknowledge the GRE101RG fault to go
back to remote mode.
In term of safety, this mode shall not be used too long time.
TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA20_2.DOC GRE-TM801C

80
PAGE 3 / 16
1.3 ARRANGEMENT.
1.3.1 FRONT FACE
The front face is used in local / manual mode by the Operator to control the Governing system auxiliaries when
the switch local / remote is commuted inside the box.
The front face light REMOTE / LOCAL indicates to the Operator the mode in use.
Every front face push-button is linked with a light indicating the status of the actual command.

81
PAGE 4 / 16
1.4 COMPONENTS
OIL PUMP MANUAL

MOTORBREAKER DISCONNECTOR
LOCAL/REMOTE
SELECTOR DIFFERENTIAL
BREAKER
BREAKER
INTERFACE RELAYS
SUPPLY
TERMINAL

82
PAGE 5 / 16
1.5 LOCAL MODE
In local mode the following function can be performed.
1.5.1 START OF OIL PUMP GRE111PO.
Open the manual breaker of side of the box (Box not supplied)
Select “local mode” using switch inside the box
Close the box
Close the manual breaker on side of the box (Box supplied)
Check: the light “REMOTE CONTROL” is out.
Push the un-loader command “UNLOAD 111PO” of the pump
Check: the associated light is on.
Push the start command “ON/OFF 111PO”
Check: the associated light is off
Check: the oil pressure increases in the circuit.
1.5.2 STOP OF OIL PUMP GRE111PO.
Check: the associated light is off.
Select “remote mode” using switch inside the box
Close the box

83
PAGE 6 / 16
1.5.3 START OF OIL PUMP GRE112PO.
Close the box
Check: the oil pressure increases in the circuit.
1.5.4 STOP OF OIL PUMP GRE112PO.
Close the box.
1.5.5 OPENING – CLOSURE OF ISOLATING VALVE
The oil flow from / to air/oil pressure tank is controlled by a valve piloted by oil under pressure.
Close the box

84
PAGE 7 / 16
Push the command “OPEN PRESSURE TANK” to supply the solenoid valve O side
Push the command “CLOSE PRESSURE TANK” to supply the solenoid valve C side
Open the manual breaker of side of the box (no supply)
Close the box
1.5.6 HP AIR SUPPLY
The air/oil pressure tank needs some addition of air under pressure to stabilize the oil level and /or
pressure.
Close the box
Push the command “ADD HP AIR” to supply the solenoid valve O side
Check: the pressure into the air/oil pressure tank
Release the command “ADD HP AIR” to supply the solenoid valve C side
Open the manual breaker of side of the box (no supply)
Close the box.

85
PAGE 8 / 16
1.6 SPECIAL FUNCTION
1.6.1 OIL PUMP PROTECTION
In case of too low oil level into the OPU, the oil pumps can be destroyed when they continue to run, then
the sensor GRE110SL acts directly to stop the motors without need of connection with the PLC.
The same sensor is used to send an “ALARM” to the Supervisory system.
The Operator shall go in front of OPU to check the actual reason of the “ LOW OIL LEVEL “ detection and
to solve the trouble.
The Operator shall acknowledge the fault using the front face push-button “RESET ALARM”.
Note: This alarm is activated during maintenance or commissioning, if the oil level is not high enough
inside the OPU or if the supply of the sensor is cut.
1.6.2 OIL PRESSURE LIMITATION
During commissioning or for maintenance purpose, it is necessary to run the oil pumps on a pressure that
is not the rated one (64 bar).
This operation is possible in remote mode or in local mode using the manual pressure switch GRE111SP
installed on OPU board.
Close the box
Set the reference pressure of GRE111SP using a key (for example 20 bar)
Check: the oil pressure increases in the circuit (up to 20 bar)

86
PAGE 9 / 16
GRE111SP de-energizes the command “UNLOAD 111PO” of the pump
The pressure is stabilized (around 20 bar).

Note 1: after use of this function for maintenance, don’t forget to reset the sensor GRE110SL at the normal set-
point: 68 bar.
In remote mode, the set-point of GRE111SP shall be higher than the rated pressure to avoid troubles
during operation.
Note 2: the use of this function avoids modifying the reference pressure of the safety valves that shall be never
changed after workshop test.
1.6.3 STAND-BY MODE
In case of failure of PLC, the OPU shall continue to run to control the Turbine.
The Speed Governor major fault causes the commutation of the GRE210CR to local mode.
As the GRE111SP is set at a higher value than 64 bar (typically 68 bar), it don’t cause interference with
remote mode actions but it is always present.
Then the pressure limitation assures the control of the pressure waiting the Operator action.

87
PAGE 10 / 16
2 MAINTENANCE
The preventive maintenance is very light for these electronic components.
Every months, open the door and check if no dust is coming in;
If yes, cut the supply of the cubicle or box and clean it carefully.
Reset the supply and close the door after cleaning with the key.

88
PAGE 11 / 16
The maintenance is supported by some LED given the status of the main components.

89
PAGE 12 / 16
2.2.1 SUPPLY FAILURE
QUALIFICATION Electric engineer
TYPICAL FAILURE The front face lamp (white) is out
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of main supply line
2 – Action of auxiliary breaker caused by short-cut
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ232 sheet 05

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the voltage at terminal L1,L2,L3,N (caution the test is made
under supply)
2 – Check the associated breaker 5Q6,
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – between L and N the voltage shall be 2240VAC, if not check the
feeder breaker
2 – If the breaker is open , check the possible cause of short-cut,

open the main manual switch 5Q5 , check one by one power wires
transformer to components (wires, terminals…).

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:

90
PAGE 13 / 16
2.2.2 MOTOR FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The commutation from one motor to another is not possible (action of
PLC8035 in normal mode)
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of AC supply of motor
2 – Failure of motor itself

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the associated breaker 111XM or 112 XM . Cut the supply
(main switch 5Q5 open) and inverse the wiring of motor 111MO and
112 MO to confirm the status of the breaker., X1-1,2,3 and X1-4,5,6.
2 – Cut the supply (main switch 5Q5 open) and check with an
ohmmeter the resistor of motor between each phase L1/L2,
L2/L3,L3/L1.
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – If the motor is OK , change the breaker by a spare one.
2 – The value is the same, if not, change the motor

OF INCIDENT

91
PAGE 14 / 16
2.2.3 IDLING FAILURE OF OIL PUMPS
TYPICAL FAILURE The load / no-load cycle of oil pump is not stable in local mode
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 – Bad setting of pressure switch SP111
2 – Wrong action of relief valve of OPU

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1a – Change the setting value given by the pressure switch using the
screw at the top of the sensor (below the cover) and commute to
local mode in front face of box.
1b - If it is not clear, disconnect the 2 wires from pressure switch in

terminal box GRE110CR
2 – See OPU maintenance guide
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – When the pressure switch is set down, the pressure in the oil
circuit is limited, if not make the following test 1b.
The pressure is adjusted by the PLC 8035 in remote mode and by

the relief valve in local mode. The pressure grows up to 80 bar and
the relief valve stays open (noise). If yes change the pressure switch
2 – The relief valve can be locked

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:

92
PAGE 15 / 16
2.2.4 OUTPUT/INPUT FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The command of one solenoid valve is not correct.
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 - Loss of DC supply of associated relay
2 – Failure of associated interface relay
3 – Failure of solenoid valve
DRAWING OR GRE-EQ232 sheet 7 to 14

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the input of relay
2 & 3 – check the contact by manual action of push-button of relay,
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The supply of relay is common for every devices (24VDC)
2 – If the coil is energized, the wiring is OK and the relay is OUT,

then change it for one spare. I the contact is wrong, check the wiring
(screw, wire…).
3 – If the coil is not energized and the relais is OK, change the coil of
solenoid valve.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:

93
PAGE 16 / 16
See Annex : List of Spare part.
Wiring of GRE210CR AHT-MRW00-GRE-EQ232

94
PAGE 1 / 14
ABSTRACT PA 30
1 GENERAL : PRESSURE TANKS.............................................................................................. 2
1.1 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS. ...................................................................................................................... 2
2 OPERATION......................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 AIR FILLING DEVICE .................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 ISOLATING AUTOMATIC VALVE................................................................................................................. 4
2.3 OIL LEVEL MEASURE ................................................................................................................................. 5
3 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................... 6
4 SPARE PART LIST................................................................................................................. 13
TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA30_2.DOC 95

GRE-TM801 C
PAGE 2 / 14
This document describes the system of pressure tank and the associated operation and maintenance.
1 GENERAL : PRESSURE TANKS
Each Unit has a reserve of energy using an oil/air pressure tank. This tanks is used as damping system
during movement of Guide Vane servomotor and it assure a safe closure of Guide vane in case of oil
pump failure.
1.1 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
Capacity 6 000 dm3
Mass of tank 9 000 kg
Max mass full of water 15 000 kg
Calcul Code Europe code CODAP 2000
Operating pressure 7,0 M Pa
Rated pressure 7,7 M Pa
Test pressure 11,011 M Pa at 20°C
1.2 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS.
Main drawing GRE – EQ 311
Equipment drawing GRE – EQ 313.
Isolating valve drawing MRW050-68-001A
Air injection MRW050-68-002A
96
TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA30_2.DOC GRE-TM801 B
PAGE 3 / 14
2 OPERATION
The air/oil pressure tank is a static system under control of
• Pressure sensor GRE 101MP connected to the PLC8035 of the Speed governor
• Pressure gauge for local check GRE 101LP
• Relief safety device rated at 75 bar GRE101VQ
• Level sensor connected to the PLC8035 of the Speed governor GRE 101MN
• Level switch “Too low level” directly hardwired to the Unit PLC GRE 101SN
• Isolating automatic valve GRE 101RI
• Air Up-filling device GRE 101DU
AIR UPFILLING DEVICE

101 DU 101 VQ
See AHTMRW00-
101 101
HP AIR System
MP LP
GRESP014
101 AQ
V = 6 m3
P_maxi. = 7.0 M Pa 135 VA
P_rated = 6.4 M Pa 101 101
MN LN
P_mini. = 5.12 M Pa
L Maxi.
132 VA
101
SN
L Mini.
131 VA
101 VH 102 VH
101 FC-O
130 DP
130 EM
101 RI
102FC-C
Functional drawing
97
PAGE 4 / 14
2.1 AIR FILLING DEVICE
This device is manufactured by ALSTOM see MRW050-68-002A
This system adds a quantity of air under pressure time to time to compensate the air solving into oil. This
action is controlled by the PLC 8035 in two cases:
When the pressure tank isolating valve is closed, the air pressure is measured by the sensor GRE
101MP. If the pressure decreases into the tank , the air quantity is completed to avoid a too low pressure
into tank at Unit start.
When the isolating tank isolating valve is open, the interface position between air and oil is measured by
level sensor GRE 101MN. When a “High level” is detected, the up-filling device add air to droop down the
level.
The detail procedure is describes in chapter PA10 Speed governor.
2.2 ISOLATING AUTOMATIC VALVE
When the Unit is stopped, the 2 oil pumps are stopped after oil level adjustment.
Then the oil pressure droops down and if the isolating valve stay open , all the oil will go back to the sump
tank. To avoid waste of time at Unit stop, the isolating valve is piloted to maintain the oil quantity into the
pressure tank.
This device is manufactured by ALSTOM see MRW050-68-001A
The device is a full integrated system including
1. Solenoid valve GRE150EM is energized :
• by PLC 8035 in remote / normal mode through the local starter box GRE 210CR
• by push-button on front face of box GRE 210CR in local / manual mode.
2. Limit switches Full Open GRE 101FC and Full Close GRE 102FC to inform the PLC 8035.
3. The body valve with direct metal/metal contact without seal
These 2 limit switches are used to confirm the actual position of isolating valve spool.
The coils of the solenoid valve are mechanically locked and the command from the PLC 8035 is an
impulse of 5 second.
98
PAGE 5 / 14
2.3 OIL LEVEL MEASURE
This measure is very important to assure the safety of Unit in case of failure of the oil pumps.
This sensor is manufactured by Alstom (see MRW050-60-001A) including:
a) 3 glasses for local inspection of level
• Low level (cause a Quick Shutdown of Unit)
• Rated level in normal use
• High level (cause an air injection)
b) check valves avoiding the oil leakage in case of braking of glass
c) one level gauge based on radar technology to detect the interface between oil and air under
pressure with accuracy and reliability (see datasheet).
d) one level switch to detect a very low oil level in case of failure of main level gauge (see datasheet).
99
PAGE 6 / 14
3 MAINTENANCE
The preventive maintenance is very important.
a) Every day, check carefully the possible oil leakage mainly at level gauge.
b) Every month, check if no water is stored into the pipe before the air admission valve; The air is dry but
if some ware stays close of the valve, it can cause fast wear of the solenoid valve.
c) Every year, check the level sensor:
• Lock the manual valve.
• Empty the air / oil tank down to atmospheric pressure
• Check the commutation of safety “Too low oil level” connected to the Unit PLC.
• Confirm the signal from level sensor to 8035 using MMI of Alspa-T-SLG, see MMI booklet to see
the procedure
d) Every year, check the safety relief valve
Dismantle the relief valve and install it on a pipe with a manual pump able to get a pressure 80 bar. The
relief valve shall open at 80bar +/- 1 bar.
If not change it for a spare one.
e) Every 10 year empty fully the tank and check the internal coating to detect some possible cracks.
100
PAGE 7 / 14
The curative maintenance is mainly about the associated devices installed on the pressure tank.
For the body itself a new coating can be made in case of shock following ALSTOM procedure of painting
ref AHT MRW00 GRE PE031.
101
PAGE 8 / 14
3.2.1 PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The signal given by sensor to 8035 is different of the value measured
by pressure sensor GRE110MP on oil pipe when the isolating valve
is open and gauge GRE101LP
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 – Failure of GRE101MP
2 – Clogging of pipe of GRE101MP
3 – Trouble at input of 8035
DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 – When the Unit is running, the loss of signal GRE101MP don’t
cause a stop of Unit. Inverte this sensor with another one to confirm
the measure.
2 – Check the pipe or change it
3 - See chapter about Alspa-T-SLG, check first the wiring of sensor

and at the cubicle input.
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The signal given by the new sensor is the same, the trouble is at
8035 board level
2 – The pipe can have some dirty part inside
3 – If the Analogue input board of 8035 is out other signal can be

modified (GRE110MR and/or GRE110MP…..).

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:
102
PAGE 9 / 14
3.2.2 LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE

DOCUMENT
L2/L3,L3/L1.

OF INCIDENT
103
PAGE 10 / 14
3.2.3 LEVEL SWITCH FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE False alarm given by sensor or no commutation during test
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 – Failure of wiring
2 – Failure of sensor
DRAWING OR Drawing SFH 015-0299

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 – Check the wiring at sensor output and at Unit PLC input.
2 – Install the sensor on a tank and full it with water
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The line is electrically OK
2 – The output of sensor commute when the level of water is up the

sensor itself.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:
104
PAGE 11 / 14
3.2.4 AIR INJECTION FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The air injection is not well controlled (no air or too low quantity).
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 – No command from PLC 8035
3 – Clogging of pipes
DRAWING OR
DOCUMENT
ACTION 1–Force the relay output by manual action on push-button.
2 - Change the solenoid valve by another one
3 – Dismantle the pipes and clean them with air under pressure.
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The air injection is made as per manual action. If no see the
chapter Alspa-T-SLG
2 – The air injection is correct. If no check the pipes
3 – If the air injection is not correct after cleaning , check the input of
tank.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:
105
PAGE 12 / 14
3.2.5 ISOLATING VALVE FAILURE
QUALIFICATION Mechanical engineer
TYPICAL FAILURE The valve don’t close or move very slowly
DRAWING OR AHT MRW050-60-0000

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1- Force the relay output by manual action on push-button.
4 – Dismantle the body to check if the spool is not wear or marked by

metal particules
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The automatic valve is made as per manual action. If no see the
chapter T-SLG
2 – The movement of valve is correct. If no check the pipes
3 – If the isolating don’t move correctly check the oil return to sump
tank (no back pressure).
4 – Change the valve itself.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:
106
PAGE 13 / 14
4 SPARE PART LIST
Items Quantity Note or reference
Relief valve 1
Sensor Krohne GRE101MN 1
Sensor Mobrey GTR101SN 2
Glass 3
Valve for level sensor 2
Union for level sensor 2
Check valves 2
Pressure gauge GRE 101LP 1
Pressure sensor GRE101MP 1
Manhole screws 10
Air injection device complete 1
Isolating valve complete 1
Consumable Quantity Note or reference
Manhole joint 1
Seal pocket 1
107
PAGE 14 / 14
Equipment drawing AHT-MRW00-GRE – EQ 313
Accessories : Air injection, Isolating valve AHT-MRW00-GRE – EQ 681.
108
PAGE 1 / 22
ABSTRACT PA 50
1 GENERAL : O.P.U. ................................................................................................................ 2
1.1 CHARACTERISTICS..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 3
2 OPERATION......................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 OIL UNDER PRESSURE GENERATION...................................................................................................... 4
2.2 OIL TEMPERATURE COOLING ................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 OIL FILTRATION AND PROTECTION ......................................................................................................... 5
2.4 GUIDE VANE SERVOMOTOR CONTROL ................................................................................................... 7
3 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................... 10
TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA50_2.DOC GRE-TM801 A

109
PAGE 2 /
22
This document describes the system of Oil Pressure Unit and the associated operation and maintenance.
1 GENERAL : O.P.U.
The sump tank and its accessories is a full independent system which can be set and controlled without
need of external connection excepted the supply 380VAC.
1.1 CHARACTERISTICS
Sump tank material Stainless Steel
Volume 4 300 dm3
Mini oil volume 1 190 dm3
Max volume of oil 2 870 dm3
Weight of tank empty 2 200 kg
Oil type ISO VG46
Oil purity Class 6 as par NAS standard.
Closure time of Guide vane 10second (for Load rejection)
Servomotor speed time 30s for 0-100% (normal mode)
Servomotor speed time 90s for 0-100% (emergency mode)
Rated pressure 6,4 M Pa.
Oil temperature 15°C to 55°C.
Main fine filter 10 micron
Filter on return 70 micron
Water cooling flow 1,7 m3 / h
Water cooling filtration 500 micron T° max =25°C at cooler input

110
PAGE 3 /
22
1.2 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS
Function block of governing system AHT-MRW00-GRE SP014
Schematic diagram AHT-MRW00-GRE EQ501
Overhaul of OPU AHT-MRW00-GRE EQ502
OPU part list AHT-MRW00-GRE EQ503
OPU arrangement AHT-MRW00-GRE EQ504

111
PAGE 4 /
22
2 OPERATION
The OPU performs different functions under control of associated PLC 8035 which is a part of Speed
Governor GRE 101RG.
• Oil under pressure generation
• Oil temperature stabilization
• Oil cleaning and filtering.
• Control of Guide vane servomotors
2.1 OIL UNDER PRESSURE GENERATION
The sump tank supports 2 identical set of oil pump and associated components
• One strainer 400 micron (GRE111FI or GRE112FI) to avoid intake of big metallic parts into the pump
• One oil screw pump , (GRE111PO or GRE112PO) speed 1500 rpm able to supply 145 dm3 / minute at
64 bar.
• One non-return valve (GRE111VT or GRE112VT)
• One relief mechanical valve rated at 80 bar (GRE111VQ or GRE112VQ)
112 PO
M
112 DR
112 EM
112 VT 112 VQ
112 FI
This relief valve is also piloted by a solenoid valve (GRE111EM or GRE112EM) under control of PLC
8035.
To start the oil pump without load, the coil of the solenoid valve is energized. Then the current to start the
motor of pump is lower than in case of direct start at load.
When the rated pressure is gotten, the coil of the solenoid valve is energized, then the oil flow goes back
to the sump tank through the water cooler. This “idling” system avoids to start / stop the motor too
frequently. A motor-pump is always supplied with a load /no-load cycle, the other is in stand-by.
The choice of the stand-by motor-pump is managed by PLC8035 software.

112
PAGE 5 /
22
2.2 OIL TEMPERATURE COOLING
If the oil temperature measured by the sensor GRE110MR is too high, the PLC 8035 orders to open the
valve. The water goes through the water / oil heat exchanger and the oil temperature decreases.
If the temperature is down , the PLC8035 orders to close the valve.
The max water flow can be adjusted by an orifice plate to avoid waste of water.
2.3 OIL FILTRATION AND PROTECTION
The filtration is very important to avoid fast wear of components.
2.3.1 FILTRATION
The oil is filtered at 3 levels:
• At pump input with large size strainer 430 micron
• At pump output with fine size duo filter 10 micron to protect the components and specially the
actuator.
• At return in sump tank with a medium size to avoid too fast clogging of the fine filter.
The clogging of the fine filter is detected by an differential pressure switch GRE110SP. If the difference of
pressure is higher than 2 bar, an alarm is send to the Operator to commute manually the filter and change
the clogged one.
The moisture of oil is detected by a specific sensor arranged at the bottom of the sump tank. If some
water stays inside the sensor, the ball floats and an electrical contact send an alarm to the Unit PLC. The
Operator shall drain the water using the lower drain valve after a stop of more than 4 hours to be sure to
store all the water mixed into oil.

113
PAGE 6 /
22
The air is also filtered by an air strainer with water absorbing cells. This device avoid that water vapor
goes inside the tank to be mixed into oil. This water is a critical point to avoid corrosion of solenoid valve
spool and bearings.
2.3.2 EMPTYING AND FILLING
The sump tank is equipped with 2 x 2 valves at lower and upper levels, the top one is used to fill the tank
and the lower to drain
• Manual valves G3/4 inch for connection with the global oil treatment system of the power plant
• Check valve H6-62 BSPP for connection to moveable filtration skid or to sample an oil for
analysis.
The “clean” check valve avoid pollution of oil during filtration in operation.
The top of the sump tank can be removed for very rare case, This opening cannot be use because it is a
very important source of oil pollution by air dust. The check of the inside is possible by 2 lateral orifices
with joint.

114
PAGE 7 /
22
2.4 GUIDE VANE SERVOMOTOR CONTROL
101 EB 102 EB OR 101 EM 110DR
101DR
102DP 111 DP 112 DP

Tn Tmo Tmc
102DR
101 DP
Te
The control of servomotors is made by 3 ways:
• By-pass valves GRE101DR & 102DR to close the Guide vane very fast in case of Load-rejection
• Normal control by the actuator GRE101EB
• Emergency control by the stand-by actuator GRE102DB.
The normal control is mainly used to start-stop of the Unit and to stabilize the Unit in case of isolated
network conditions of use.
2.4.1 BY-PASS VALVES
These valves are piloted by the safety valve GRE101EM. This valve is always energized (220VDC) by
the Safety relay of the Unit. If the coil is de-energized, the 2 by-pass valves are open because the control
pressure is canceled. The oil under pressure supplies the closure side of the servomotor and the oil flow
from the opening side goes back to the sump tank through the orifice plate GRE101DP which avoid a too
fast guide vane closure.
NOTE: A closure faster than 10 second can cause too high overpressure in spiral case.
These by-pass valves are piloted by the distributor GRE101DR which is commuted in case of over-speed
detected by the mechanical device GRE110DT (see associated chapter). They are arranged into the
general manifold.

115
PAGE 8 /
22
2.4.2 EMERGENCY CONTROL
If the Speed governor is out of service, the control is automatically assured by the “emergency governor”
(see chapter about speed governor).
The emergency governor installed into box GRE120CR pilots the actuator GRE102EB.
This actuator is a very strong on-off actuator able to work in hard condition (dirty oil, low voltage…) to
improve the reliability of the control. But its performances are lower than those of GRE101EB which is
mainly used in normal mode.
GRE102EB
GRE102EB
2.4.3 NORMAL CONTROL
The proportional valve pilots the oil flow to adjust the servomotor position of Guide Vane.
The speed of servomotor displacement is adjusted by the orifice plate GRE102DP. As this orifice plate is
mounted in link with GRE101DP, it is necessary to take into account these 2 oriifce plate to limit the
servomotor speed.
The 2 actuators shall never work in same time, then the commutation Normal to Stand-by causes in the
same time the opening of line to the main actuator.
As the same, in case of load-rejection , the selection of by-pass valve open the lines to the main actuator
and stand-by actuators (input BA of GRE120CR).

116
PAGE 9 /
22
2.4.4 ADJUSTMENT OF ORIFICE PLATE
These devices are set during commissioning and they shall be never change. But if the Operator want to
modify the time closure, it is necessary to screw this orifice plate off.
Orifice plate side
It is necessary to use a 6 side key size 24 (special tool).

117
PAGE 10
/ 22
3 MAINTENANCE
The preventive maintenance is very important.
a) Every day: when the fine filter is clogged, commute it immediately and change the dirty one.
b) Every month:
• Perform an oil analysis to detect metal parts and oil oxidation
• Change the deshydrant cells in the air filter to avoid water input into oil. The color of the cells is
an indicator, when the cells are red, it is necessary to change the full lot.
• Check the by-pass of the medium size filter GRE120FI. If the by-pass is open, clean the filter.
Filter GRE120FI
Cooler
c) Every year, check the level sensor “too low level” which is normally never used:
• Remove the screws, pull up the sensor (with its wires) to simulate a low oil level
• Check the stop of the acting oil pump.
• Put the sensor in place to start the pump again. This level switch protects the oil pumps in case of
lack of oil inside the sump tank..

118
PAGE 11
/ 22
d) Every year, check the safety relief valves
Dismantle the relief valve and install it on a pipe with a manual pump able to get a pressure > 80 bar. The
relief valve shall open at 80bar +/- 1 bar. If not change it for a spare one.
NOTE: never open the top cover to look at the pumps. If it necessary perform a full cleaning operation
before restart of pumps.
e) Over-scheduled maintenance
When the penstock is emptied for any reasons, it is an opportunity to check the safety devices which are
never used.
Test of safety over-speed device GRE110DR
Open the Guide vane by manual action on emergency governor (positioning mode)
Simulate the over-speed by manual pushing on the distributor on main shaft of turbine.
Confirm the automatic closure of Guide vane.
Test of safety solenoid valve GRE101EM
Simulate the load rejection by cutting the supply (220VDC).

119
PAGE 12
/ 22
The curative maintenance is mainly about the associated devices installed on the sump tank.
For the devices themselves a new coating (blue) can be made in case of shock following ALSTOM
procedure of painting ref AHT MRW00 GRE PE031.
NOTE: It is necessary to stop the Unit and to lock the Guide vane servomotor if any Maintenance
operation is made on sump tank and associated devices.
NOTE: The safety valve GRE101EM is supplied directly with 220VDC from batteries. Then it is
dangerous for human to work directly on this solenoid valve. First it is necessary to cut the 220VDC from
feeder.
The others solenoid valves are supplied by 240VAC protected by a breaker, then it is less
dangerous for human but it is recommended to cut the supply from box GRE210CR using the
main switch on the right side of the box before any maintenance..

120
PAGE 13
/ 22
3.2.1 PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The signal given by sensor to 8035 is different of the value measured
by pressure sensor GRE110MP on oil pipe when the isolating valve
is open and gauge GRE101LP
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 – Failure of GRE101MP
2 – Clogging of pipe of GRE101MP
3 – Trouble at input of 8035
DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 – When the Unit is running, the loss of signal GRE101MP don’t
cause a stop of Unit. Inverte this sensor with another one to confirm
the measure.
2 – Check the pipe or change it
3 - See chapter about Alspa-SLG, check first the wiring of sensor

and at the cubicle input.
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The signal given by the new sensor is the same, the trouble is at
8035 board level
2 – The pipe can have some dirty part inside
3 – If the Analogue input board of 8035 is out other signal can be

modified (GRE110MR and/or GRE110MP…..).

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:

121
PAGE 14
/ 22
3.2.2 MOTOR PUMP FAILURE

DOCUMENT
L2/L3,L3/L1.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE: Be careful with the polarity L1,L2,L3 to avoid that the pump runs in
wrong direction.
For the 1° run, check the sense of rotation during a short time to
avoid wear of pump.

122
PAGE 15
/ 22
3.2.3 OIL PUMP FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The pressure given at the output is not stable or not at the rated
value
2 – Failure of gear pump itself
3 – Bad work of un-loader device
DRAWING OR Datasheet Rexroth 10-223

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 – See associated chapter
2 – Change the full device motor and gear pump
3 – Use the pressure switch GRE111SP to set at lower pressure 60

bar (see chapter about GRE210CR box).
2 – If it don’t work , check un-loader
3 – The pressure follows the value given by the pressure switch, if no

change the full system solenoid valve and un-loader valve.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE: Be careful with the O ring seals. It is possible to re-use them if the
dismantling is made in good way (pull up the device, no lateral
movements).

123
PAGE 16
/ 22
3.2.4 LEVEL SWITCH FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE False alarm given by sensor or no commutation during test
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 – Failure of wiring
2 – Failure of sensor
DRAWING OR Drawing SFH 015-0299

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 – Check the wiring at sensor output and at Unit PLC input.
2 – Install the sensor on a tank and full it with water
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The line is electrically OK
2 – The output of sensor commute when the level of water is up the

sensor itself.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:

124
PAGE 17
/ 22
3.2.5 ACTUATOR FAILURE
TYPICAL FAILURE The servomotor is not well controlled in normal mode
POSSIBLE CAUSE 1 – No command from main SLG2
2 – Failure of proportional valve GRE101EB
3 – Clogging of pipes or filter
DRAWING OR Datasheet Rexroth 29 075

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1– Unit running, force the opening limitation to confirm the action of
SLG2.
2 - Change the proportional valve by another one
3 – Dismantle the pipes (and filter) to clean them with air under
pressure.
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The servomotor shall follow the limitation even if the speed is not
stable or if the head is not nominal. If not, see the chapter Speed
governor
2 – The control is correct. If no check the fine filter and pipes
3 – Use the emergency governor to confirm that the servomotor feed-

back (position sensor) is OK

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:

125
PAGE 18
/ 22
3.2.6 TESTING INSTRUCTIONS
4WRKE..-3X/ Industrial Hydraulics 2/3 279643/E b
A -Introduction
These testing instructions explain amendments to and deviations from the general testing instructions
4WR.-.X/, Mat. no. 269971.
B - Zero point adjustment
Supply the controller with voltage and feed forward a command value in accordance with the interface
designation in the valve type code.
Measure actual value xa = 0 V ± 10 V using a measuring plug at J6 pin 3 against pin 2.
C.- Pre-setting
C1 - Pre-setting for sizes 10 – 25 (dry, without pressure oil supply)
While the supply voltage is connected, adjust the actual value of the main stage to xa = 0 V ± 0.05 V
using the potentiometer R212.
Then shift the spool of the main stage mechanically by the nominal stroke ± 0.05 mm (for the nominal
stroke, see the product specification 279648).
Set the actual value to xa = 10 V ± 0.05 V using potentiometer R214.
C2 - Pre-setting for sizes 32 – 35 (dry, without pressure oil supply)
While the supply voltage is applied, shift the displacement transducer coil over the displacement
transducer core until the actual value of the main stage is xa = 0 V ± 0.05 V.
Then shift the spool of the main stage mechanically by nominal stroke ± 0.05 mm (for the nominal stroke,
see product specification 279648).
Set the actual value to xa = 10 V ± 0.05 V using potentiometer R214.
C3 - Biasing current adjustment
Feed forward a command value of xe = 10 % 1 %.
Measure controller output yR = 0 V using a measuring plug at J6 pin 1 against pin 2.
Set the controller output to yRB = 0 V ± 0.05 V using potentiometer R112.
Feed forward a command value of xe = -10 % 1 %.
Set the controller output to yRA = 0 V ± 0.05 V using potentiometer R115.

126
PAGE 19
/ 22
D - Static tests
D1 - Flow/signal characteristic curve
Oscillate valve; time t ≥3 min; f ≤2 Hz; xe = 0 % 100 %
D2 - Pressure/signal characteristic curve
Spool symbol 1) X [%] po[bar] pu[bar]
Q2 4
E - Step response
E1 - Transfer function
Size Command value xe T1[ms] T2[ms] Δxa[%] ΔxD[%

]
10 ≤15 ≤30 ≤2
16 ≤20 ≤35 ≤2
25 ≤30 ≤30 ≤2
32 ≤50 ≤50 ≤2
35 10-85 % ≤90 ≤90 ≤2 ≤1

127
PAGE 20
/ 22
3.2.7 UN-LOADER FAILURE
QUALIFICATION Mechanical engineer
TYPICAL FAILURE The pressure is not stable
DRAWING OR See datasheet Rexroth 25 802

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1- Force the relay output by manual action on push-button.
4 – Dismantle the body to check if the spool is not wear or marked by

metal parts
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The automatic valve is made as per manual action. If no see the
chapter Alspa-SLG
2 – The movement of valve is correct. If no check the pipes
3 – If the isolating don’t move correctly check the oil return to sump
tank (no back pressure).
4 – Change the valve itself.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE:

128
PAGE 21
/ 22
See Annex SPARES.

129
PAGE 22
/ 22
Function block of governing system AHT-MRW00-GRE SP004
Schematic diagram AHT-MRW00-GRE EQ501
Overhaul of OPU AHT-MRW00-GRE EQ502
OPU arrangement AHT-MRW00-GRE EQ504

130
PAGE 1 / 21
ABSTRACT PA 60
1 GENERAL............................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................. 2
2 OPERATION......................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 OVERSPEED DEVICE ......................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 INSTRUMENT CUBICLE...................................................................................................................... 3
2.3 MANUAL CONTROL OF VALVES..................................................................................................... 4
2.4 MONITORING CUBICLE...................................................................................................................... 5
2.5 MOST SOFTWARE ............................................................................................................................... 7
2.6 MAIN MOST SCREENS ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.7 ALSTOM SENSORS ............................................................................................................................. 15
3 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................... 16
3.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................... 16
3.2 CURATIVE MAINTENANCE. .............................................................................................................. 17
TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA60_2.DOC TM801 B

131
PAGE 2 / 21
1 GENERAL
This document describes some accessories used for MEROWE project
Mechanical over-speed device AHT-MRW00-GRE101DU
Instrument cubicle AHT-MRW00-GTU430CR.
Turbine monitoring AHT-MRW00-GTU420CR
1.1 ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS
Cubicle GTU430CR wiring AHT-MRW00-GRE-EQ251
Cubicle GTU420CR interface AHT-MRW00-GRE-EQ023
Oil level control device AHT-MRW00-GRE-EQ601
Hydraulic measure diagram AHT-MRW00-GTU-SP014

132
PAGE 3 / 21
2 OPERATION
2.1 OVERSPEED DEVICE
For Merowe Power plant, the over-speed device has two function
Information of Unit PLC using a relay GRE101FC
Hydraulic action on distributor GRE101DE to close the guide vane servomotor using the by-pass valve as
per a load rejection.
The overspeed is set at 140% of the rated speed (140 rpm) to avoid to be activated in case of normal
load rejection.
This device shall be manually reset after action.
2.2 INSTRUMENT CUBICLE
This cubicle is an interface between turbine instruments and the Unit PLC ;
On front face, some push buttons can be used in local manual mode to operate the 2 automatic valves
GTU401VA and GTU420VE.
2.2.1 FLOWMETER
The turbine flow is measured by a differential pressure sensor measuring the pressure between 2 point
on spiral case. During the model test, this arrangement was set and the same coefficient is use to
calculate the actual flow.
Q=K P½ With K is a specific parameter defined during the Index test at site
Every Unit has a different parameter K.
The pressure sensor GTU401MD is able to calculate directly the square root of the pressure, then the
output is actually the value of flow.
2.2.2 NET HEAD
The head is measured by 2 pressure sensors GTU401PM and GTU402MP, one connected to the spiral
case, the other to the draft tube. The 2 signals are compared into the Instrument cubicle by an electronic
interface to calculate the actual net head which is not influenced by the possible loss of pressure into the
penstock.
The signal is filtered to avoid fluctuation induced by vortex into the draft tube.

133
PAGE 4 / 21
2.2.3 WATER LEVEL BELOW THE RUNNER
During condenser mode, some air under pressure is send below the runner to create an air bubble. To
measure the water / air interface level, a differential pressure sensor GTA410MN is used.
CONCRETE
TURBINE BOARD
401 CR
LEVEL 249.14
402
MP
401
MD
404
LP
430
MB 430DN80 402DN10PN10
411
SN 402
431 LP
MB
401
MP 410 410
LN MN
401
LP
x 4 at 90° Line 401.DN10
403
403DN10PN10 LP
TURBINE BOARD
402 CR
LEVEL 235.85
DN600
GTU401VE
GTU 402 VE
2.3 MANUAL CONTROL OF VALVES
For maintenance purpose, it is possible to check the automatic valve in local mode after maintenance of
automatic valve (see the associated chapter).
• Select the local mode on front face of GTU430CR
• Push Open button to inject air under pressure (GTUXXXVA)
• Let the button to stop the air injection
• Push Open button to cool the labyrinths with water from cooling system (GTUXXXVA)
• Let the button to stop the cooling water flow.

134
PAGE 5 / 21
2.4 MONITORING CUBICLE
The Power plant of Merowe is equipped with a MOST (see booklet).
This product is a monitoring of the main parameters of the turbine to help the Operator to avoid too fast
wear of mechanical parts.
For the turbine bearing, a special sensor Vega is used to detect the moisture into oil. This sensor is
installed on the top of the bearing, because the bottom part of bearing tank is not accessible by operator.
2.4.1 TOP BOX GTU420CR
This box is arranged at level 249.14 close of GTU430CR .
Local Setting interface
Supply lamp
CPU of TOP fault lamp

Fault relay
On-Off switch
This local box GTU420CR is connected using Modbus protocol (Ethernet type line) connection to one PC
supporting the analyzing software of MOST.

135
PAGE 6 / 21
The local Man-Machine Interface is used to set the parameters.
2.4.2 INPUT SIGNALS OF TOP
Label Rep. Sensor Unit Range

ALSTOM
DEDICATED SENSORS
Turbine bearing displacement X1 GTU411MM XS4-P12AB120 mm 0.4 / 4
Turbine bearing displacement Y1 GTU412MM XS4-P12AB121 0.4 / 4
Upper bearing displacement X2 GTU331MM XS4-P12AB122 mm 0.4 / 4
Upper bearing displacement Y2 GTU332MM XS4-P12AB123 0.4 / 4
Thrust bearing displacement X3 GTU441MM XS4-P12AB124 mm 0.4 / 4
Thrust bearing displacement Y3 GTU442MM XS4-P12AB125 0.4 / 4
Thrust bearing accelerometerZ2 GTU331MX SX46 021 g +/- 2
Cavitation noise B1 GTU441MB Module TVB mV
Cavitation noise B2 GTU442MB Module TVB mV
AUX. SIGNALS
Net head H GTU401MP AO 2 of Alspa-T-SLG m 30 / 60
Active Power P GTU400MW AO 4 of Alspa-T-SLG MW 0 / 142
Unit main breaker status Open GRE101R1 AO 4 of Alspa-T-SLG MW 0 / 142
Servomotor stroke GRE111MM AO 8 of Alspa-T-SLG mm 0 / 525
Oil pressure Opening side GRE201MP Bourdon E910 Bar 0 / 100
Oil pressure Closure side GRE202MP Bourdon E910 Bar 0 / 100

136
PAGE 7 / 21
2.4.3 OUTPUT SIGNALS OF TOP
The TOP system is mainly connected to MOST PC by a serial link based on Modbus communication
protocol.
A dry contact “TOP major fault” is available to inform the DSC in case of loss of power, communication
and others main failure.
2.4.4 TOP SETTING
The TOP can be set by 2 ways:
Using a serial link and a laptop computer to download and upload the software
Using a local MMI to modify the setting data.
2.5 MOST SOFTWARE
The MOST software is implemented inside 1 PC in main Control room.
2.5.1 MAIN FUNCTIONS
The MOST software is able to perform the following functions.
Monitoring of shaft line
The orbit of each bearing can be displayed and recorded. The actual value of orbit is compared with
reference levels memorized following a table in relationship with Head and Power.
This table is able to contain up to 15 thresholds.
0MW 60MW 80MW 100MW 120MW 140MW
Abnormal use Possible use Normal use Possible use Exceptionnal

use
60 m
reference
Actual
head
50 m
40 m
30 m
Actual
Orbit Power
Measure

137
PAGE 8 / 21
Monitoring of Cavitation
The noise transmitted through the draft tube cone is measured by 2 sensors and compared with
reference level as per orbit. To avoid using the Turbine in bad area, the actual set point is display in term
of head and Power on the PC screen.
Monitoring of axial thrush
The axial vibration is measured by an absolute accelerometer able to measure the full rang of excitation
(low frequency caused by vortex). The Root Mean Square value (rms) is calculated by TOP and an alarm
is end to DSC if the level is upper a reference threshold. The signals itself is displayed and recorded by
MOST.
Monitoring of Guide Vane servomotors
The oil pressure in 2 sides of servomotor is measured and the effort to move the Guide vane is calculated
by MOST. This measure is compared with reference to check the effect of bearing and seal wear.

138
PAGE 9 / 21
2.6 MAIN MOST SCREENS
Upper guide bearing
Lower guide bearing

139
PAGE 10 / 21
Thrush - guide bearing

140
PAGE 11 / 21
Vibration and noise overview
Area of use View

141
PAGE 12 / 21
Governor View
Data View
Alarms View

142
PAGE 13 / 21
Curve display

143
PAGE 14 / 21
Diagnostic View

144
PAGE 15 / 21
2.7 ALSTOM SENSORS
The sensors for Condition Monitoring are developed by ALSTOM to get reliable and accurate measures
for low speed rotating machine. They are arranged inside strong aluminium case for protection and good
wiring.
2.7.1 VIBRATION SENSOR
This sensor has a very low cu-off frequency to be able to measure hydraulic effect on structures.
2.7.2 DISPLACEMENT SENSOR
This sensor is not influenced by oil vapor as capacitive sensor.
2.7.3 NOISE SENSOR
This sensor measure the transmitted noise generated mainly by cavitation in case of use of the turbine
out its normal area of work.

145
PAGE 16 / 21
3 MAINTENANCE
The mechanical over-speed is not often used, then it is necessary to test it time to time to confirm its
availability.
Test of safety over-speed device
Simulate the over-speed by manual pushing on the distributor on main shaft of turbine.
This test cannot confirm the good rating of the spring which define the actual speed threshold.
Cleaning of measuring pipes.
The pipes used to measure the flow and the head can be clogged.
Every month: send air under pressure into the pipes to clean them.
After drain carefully the pipe to avoid to store some air into the pipe (using Minimess tape).

146
PAGE 17 / 21
No applicable for sensors and associated devices, only change it in case of failure.
Not applicable for over-speed device, only preventive maintenance is possible.

147
PAGE 18 / 21
3.2.1 POWER FAILURE OF TOP
TYPICAL FAILURE The alarm relay is commuted
2 – Failure of DC/DC converter
DRAWING OR GTU-FG021 sheet 06

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check the associated breaker Q6, if not open check the supply
module
2 – Check the LED in front face of module (lighting = OK). If the

EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The input voltage of DC/DC converter is 220VDC +/- 10%. If no,
check the associated feeder.

spare one.

OF INCIDENT

148
PAGE 19 / 21
3.2.2 FAILURE OF TOP CPU
TYPICAL FAILURE The alarm relay is commuted
2 – Failure of CPU and/or associated I-O boards
DRAWING OR GTU-FG021 sheet 06

DOCUMENT
ACTION 1 - Check te output of power supply
2 – Check the LED in front face of module (lighting = OK)
EXPECTED RESULT 1 – The output voltage of each converter is 24VDC +/- 10%
spare one.
2 – If a LED is not ON, check the wiring. If the wiring is OK change

the board with a spare one.

OF INCIDENT
NOTE: Be careful with the polarity (+ and 0) at the terminal of boards.

149
PAGE 20 / 21
See Annex SPARES.

150
PAGE 21 / 21
Main drawing GTU430CR AHT-MRW00-GRE – EQ 223C
Main drawing GTU420CR AHT-MRW00-GRE – FG 221B
Over-speed device drawing MRW050xx-63-001
MOST booklet 3010
Over-speed device booklet 2179
Datasheet Krohne Flow-meter EDD575-1
Datasheet Moisture detector Buhler WW6
Datasheet Ardetem modules DIP400 & TPA41

151
COMMENTS :
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
Sign.
N.
Sign.
C N. P GRAS G BECIU G BECIU 14/04/2010 Following letter S/LI/ALSTOM 2223 GFE
Sign.
B N. SFH G BECIU G BECIU 10/11/2008 Following review note M-3A-3-029 GFE
Sign.
A N. SFH G BECIU G BECIU 10/07/2007 1° EDITION GFE

REV
DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

Date : ………………………….. Signature : …………………………….


MEROWE DAM PROJECT

10 x 140MVA
OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

GOVERNING SYSTEM
1/1
Power Environment
Hydro
REV SH/SH END N of SH

AHT MRW00 GRE-TM801 MRW01T1-GOV001-80-001 C 1/ 606
INTERNAL USE
152
Page 2 / 2
MAIN ITEMS
EP 00 GENERALITIES
EP10 SPEED GOVERNOR
EP20 LOCAL CONTROL BOXES
EP30 PRESSURE TANKS & ACCESSORIES
EP50 OIL PRESSURE UNIT OPU
EP60 MONITORING TURBINE
ANNEX1 LIST OF SPARE – GENERAL & SPECIAL
ANNEX2 DATASHEET OF SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES
ANNEX3 BOOKLET A4.
ANNEX3 DRAWING A3.
File: 1° page O&M manuel GOVrevC.doc 153 GRE-TM801B

ANNEX
ANNEXE 1 - SPARES
1 - GENERAL SPARES FOR GOVERNOR
2 - SPECIAL SPARES FOR GOVERNOR
ANNEX 1 SPARES.DOC GRE-TM801 C

154
MEROWE DAM ANNEX : LIST OF GENERAL SPARES FOR GOVERNOR 1/6
Ref N° Qt Unit SAP Definition DESIGNATION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
1 PC MRW051-89-000 MRW051XX-89 : GENERAL SPARES GOVERNOR
R01 1 PC 1267314 MRW051XX89R01 R01
0100 3 PC 1267162 MRW051-89-100 150 PJ DRAIN VALVE G1/2'' SFERACO 509006
0101 2 PC 1267163 MRW051-89-101 110LN VISUAL LEVEL HYDAC FSA 381 1.X/ /12
0102 2 PC 1267164 MRW051-89-102 110SH WATER ALARM UNIT BUHLER WW6 SW
0103 2 PC 1267165 MRW051-89-103 VALVE G3/4 SFERACO SFERACO 525005
0104 3 PC 1267166 MRW051-89-104 VALVE G1 INCH SFERACO 525006
0105 2 PC 1267167 MRW051-89-105 110SN LEVEL SWITCH KUBLER AFMSS L700 SVKR
0106 1 PC 1267168 MRW051-89-106 151PJ COUPLING PARKER H6-62 BSSP
0107 1 PC 1267553 MRW051-89-107 151PJ COUPLING PARKER H6-62 BSSP
0108 2 PC 1267169 MRW051-89-108 110FJ FILTER HYDAC BF P5 G3 W1.0
0109 3 PC 1267170 MRW051-89-109 110FI SUCTION FILTER HYDAC 0180 S 300W
0110 4 PC 1267171 MRW051-89-110 111MO ELECTRIC MOTOR SIEMENS 1 LG4 186 4AA
0111 3 PC 1267172 MRW051-89-111 112MO COUPLING HYDAC 42/55 48/25
0112 4 PC 1267173 MRW051-89-112 111PO OIL GEAR PUMP BOSCH PGH4-2X/100RR07VU2
0113 1 PC 1267174 MRW051-89-113 MANIFOLD WITH TEST POINT SFH
0114 3 PC 1267175 MRW051-89-114 111VQ RELIEF VALVE BOSCH DBW20A2-5X/100-S6EW230N9K4R12
0115 3 PC 1267176 MRW051-89-115 111VT CHECK VALVE BOSCH M-SR30KE05-1X/
0116 2 PC 1267177 MRW051-89-116 3 WAY MANIFOLD VALVE HYDAC KHP3K-25 L 1114 02 X
0117 2 PC 1267178 MRW051-89-117 110SP VISUAL & ELECTRICAL CLOGGING HYDAC VM 2 D.0/ V L220
0118 2 PC 1267179 MRW051-89-118 CHECK VALVE KE30 BOSCH M SR30KE30 1X/
0119 3 PC 1267180 MRW051-89-119 CHECK VALVE KE05 BOSCH M SR30KE05 1X/
0120 2 PC 1267181 MRW051-89-120 130DP DIAPHRAGM SFH
0121 3 PC 1267182 MRW051-89-121 410EM SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE BOSCH 4WE10D3X/CW230N9K4
0125 2 PC 1267186 MRW051-89-125 110DR 3/2 WAY VALVE HAWE BVP3Z-H
Annex 1 General Spare GRE.xlsNomenclature 155

0126 2 PC 1267187 MRW051-89-126 101EM 3/2 DISTRIBUTOR NG10 HAWE BVP3ZWG230
0127 2 PC 1267188 MRW051-89-127 101EB 4/3 PROPORTIONNAL VALVE BOSCH 4/3 NG3 4WRKE32E600L-3X/6EG24ETK31/C1D3M
0128 3 PC 1267189 MRW051-89-128 111DP 1 DP' THROTTLE VALVE SFH
0129 2 PC 1267190 MRW051-89-129 102EB SPOOL DISTRIBUTOR BOSCH 5/3 NG10 WV10P11001WS220/50D
0130 3 PC 1267191 MRW051-89-130 102 DP & DP' THROTTLE VALVE SFH
0131 2 PC 1267192 MRW051-89-131 101DR LOGIC CHECK BOSCH LC32A05E7X/
0132 2 PC 1267193 MRW051-89-132 102DR LOGIC CHECK BOSCH LC32A05E7X/
0133 2 PC 1267194 MRW051-89-133 120FI RETURN FILTER MP FILTRI MPF 180/1 A G1 T
0134 2 PC 1267195 MRW051-89-134 120FI FILTER ELEMENT 60µ MP FILTRI MF 180 M60
0135 2 PC 1267196 MRW051-89-135 120FI VISUAL CLOGGING MP FILTRI MTE 50
0136 3 PC 1267197 MRW051-89-136 VALVE G 1.5 INCH SFERACO 509008
0137 2 PC 1267198 MRW051-89-137 VALVE FOR FLOW G 1.5 INCH SFERACO 465008
0138 2 PC 1267199 MRW051-89-138 110SD FLOW SWITCH IFM SI1000
0139 1 PC 1267200 MRW051-89-139 ADAPTATOR 110SD IFM E 40097
0140 1 PC 1267554 MRW051-89-140 ADAPTATOR 110SD IFM E 40097
0141 2 PC 1267201 MRW051-89-141 111SP PRESSURE SWITCH REXROTH HED8 OA1X/100 K14S
0142 2 PC 1267202 MRW051-89-142 110LT TEMPERATURE GAUGE BOURDON TBI 100 251.148/12T
0143 2 PC 1267203 MRW051-89-143 110MR TEMPERATURE SENOR BOURDON E71TR61 3A
R02 1 PC 1267315 MRW051XX89R02 R02
0200 50 PC 1267205 MRW051-89-200 ELECTRICAL GLAND PG7 as 1229272
0203 5 PC 1267208 MRW051-89-203 ELECTRICAL GLAND PG42 as1229275
0204 2 PC 1267209 MRW051-89-204 M12 SENSOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR M12 TYPE IFM REF E11145 WITOUT LED (idem article 1234530)
0205 50 PC 1267210 MRW051-89-205 SCREW & NUTS M6X20 as article 1229266
0206 2 PC 1267211 MRW051-89-206 101RI SHUT-OFF VALVE ALSTOM PRODUCT code 038 521 2051
0207 1 PC 1267212 MRW051-89-260 101DU HP AIR INJECTION ALSTOM PRODUCT code 032-576-2003
0208 2 PC 1267213 MRW051-89-208 101VQ SAFETY VALVE G1/2 PN 100 G 1/2 STAINLESS STEEL TYPE S153510E

0209 5 PC 1267214 MRW051-89-209 101LP PRESSURE GAUGE 100 BAR5 (2+3) BOURDON MMA5A31D31 DN100 PN100 G 1/2 MONTAGE TABLEAU
0210 5 PC 1267215 MRW051-89-210 101MP PRESSURE SENSOR 100 BAR BOURDON E913 02 3 B31R
0211 2 PC 1267216 MRW051-89-211 MANUAL VALVE FITTING DN80 VOSS 0189362000
0212 3 PC 1267217 MRW051-89-212 101VH MANUAL VALVE PN100 GRISA/ VALVE ADLER 776 ASA600 DN50 PN100
0213 3 PC 1267218 MRW051-89-213 101LN OIL LEVEL SENSOR SFH TUBE EQUIPP2 SANS CAPTEUR AVEC VANNES ET HUBLOTS
0214 6 UN 200550 233000200-S PRESSURE TAPPING G 1/4 A
0215 4 PC 1267219 MRW051-89-215 SCREW M10X25
0216 4 PC 1267220 MRW051-89-216 NUT H M10
0217 2 PC 1267221 MRW051-89-217 SCREW M5X15
0218 2 PC 1267222 MRW051-89-218 NUT H M5
0219 2 PC 1267223 MRW051-89-219 FLEXIBLE PIPE 500 G1/2 G1/2 FLEXIBLE STAUFF L=500mm G1/2 G1/2 (idem article 1232524)
0220 2 PC 1267224 MRW051-89-220 FLEXIBLE PIPE 500 G3/8 G3/8 FLEXIBLE STAUFF L=500mm G3/8 G3/8 (idem article 1232540)
0221 2 PC 1267225 MRW051-89-221 O RING 3X45
0222 3 PC 1267226 MRW051-89-222 SOLENOID VALVE (idem article 1232545)
0223 2 PC 1267227 MRW051-89-223 T CONNECTOR FOR 2 SENSORS (idem article 1232518)
0224 4 PC 1267228 MRW051-89-224 VALVE G3/4 DRAIN HYDAC KHB G3/4 1212 01X
0225 3 PC 1267229 MRW051-89-225 SECURITY VALVE BODY HYDAC XB12520 01X
0226 5 PC 1267230 MRW051-89-226 SECURITY VALVE G3/4 HYDAC RBE R3/4 X 150
0227 2 PC 1267231 MRW051-89-227 ANALOGUE LEVEL SENSOR BM100 KROHNE BM100 A/C PN100
0228 4 PC 1267232 MRW051-89-228 GLASS DN 2 INCH METAGLAS 1802 AR GLAS
0229 4 PC 1267233 MRW051-89-229 LEVEL SWITCH MOBREY : VT03 MINI SQUIN G1" BSPT
0230 1 PC 1267234 MRW051-89-261 OVERSPEED DETECTOR NORME APH 034-542-5000
0231 1 PC 1267235 MRW051-89-262 OVERSPEED SPRING NORME APH 034-542-5020
0232 3 PC 1267236 MRW051-89-232 331MM VIBRATION SENSOR TELEMECANIQUE XS4 P12 AB120
0233 4 PC 1267237 MRW051-89-233 121MM SPEED SENSOR IFM SENSOR IFM REF-IAE2010FRKG
0234 4 PC 1267238 MRW051-89-234 SCREW H M8X35/35
0235 2 PC 1267239 MRW051-89-235 SCREW H M10X20/20
0236 2 PC 1267240 MRW051-89-236 SCREW H M10X30/30

0237 4 PC 1267241 MRW051-89-237 SCREW H M10X40/26
0238 4 PC 1267242 MRW051-89-238 SCREW H M20X90/46
0239 4 PC 1267243 MRW051-89-239 SCREW CHC M3X20/20
0242 5 PC 1267246 MRW051-89-242 NUT H M5
0243 4 PC 1267247 MRW051-89-243 NUT H M8
0244 4 PC 1267248 MRW051-89-244 NUT H M10
0245 4 PC 1267249 MRW051-89-245 WASHER Z3
0246 4 PC 1267250 MRW051-89-246 WASHER M5
0247 8 PC 1267251 MRW051-89-247 WASHER M8
0248 12 PC 1267252 MRW051-89-248 WASHER M10
0249 5 PC 1267253 MRW051-89-249 NUT LOCKING DEVICE D20 Ias 1207899 : APH 021-116-2000
0250 5 PC 1267254 MRW051-89-250 ELASTIC PIN D6-20
0253 1 PC 1267257 MRW051-89-253 TOOTHED RING DIAMETRE 1115 mm instead of 1100mm (idem article 1207904)
0254 1 PC 1267258 MRW051-89-254 MOVEABLE PART (RELEASE SUPPORT) as1207921
0255 1 PC 1267259 MRW051-89-255 MOVEABLE PART (SENSOR SUPPORT) as 1207923
0256 1 PC 1267260 MRW051-89-256 MOVEABLE PART (COUNTER WEIGHT) as 1207926
0257 1 PC 1267261 MRW051-89-257 MOVEABLE PART (DOUBLE SENSOR SUPPORT) as 1207928
0258 1 PC 1267262 MRW051-89-258 MOVEABLE PART (SINGLE SENSOR SUPPORT) as 1207930
0259 1 PC 1270672 MRW051-89-263 OVERSPEED BODY EQUIPPED ALSTOM PRODUCT code 034-542-5010
0260 1 PC 1267212 MRW051-89-260 101DU HP AIR INJECTION EP68 REP002 (as 1228889) ALSTOM PRODUCT code 032-576-2003
0261 1 PC 1267234 MRW051-89-261 OVERSPEED DETECTOR ALSTOM PRODUCT code APH 034-542-5000
0262 1 PC 1267235 MRW051-89-262 OVERSPEED SPRING ALSTOM PRODUCT codeAPH 034-542-5020
0263 1 PC 1270672 MRW051-89-263 OVERSPEED BODY EQUIPPED ALSTOM PRODUCT codeAPH 034-542-5010
R03 1 PC 1267319 R03

0300 25 PC 1267264 MRW051-89-300 COLLAR 33.7 STAUFF SM533.7DP-PP-AS + 1 VIS H M10X35/35 + 1 ECROU H M10 + 2 RONDELLES M10
0301 25 PC 1267265 MRW051-89-301 COLLAR DE 88.9 STAUFF RB-RUL/PP-76.1 + 1 VIS H M10X35/35 + 1 ECROU H M10 + 2 RONDELLES M10
0302 4 PC 1267266 MRW051-89-302 PLUG G1/4 PARKER VSTI 1/4EDA3C
0303 5 PC 1267267 MRW051-89-303 SCREW+NUT+WASHER VIS H M5X16/6 + ECROU H M5 + 2 RONDELLES M5
0304 4 PC 1267268 MRW051-89-304 CAPILLARY STAUFF SMS 20/M1/2-1000-C
0305 100 PC 1267269 MRW051-89-305 SCREW M10 VIS H M10X25/25
0306 2 UN 200467 231420130-S RESTRICTOR 33.5 OR 30
0307 6 PC 1267270 MRW051-89-307 FLEXIBLE 700 M G1/2 PARKER 301SN10+1D248-20-10 + 11C48-20-10
0308 3 PC 1267271 MRW051-89-308 SPECIAL NUT M20X2 PARKER M20S-A3CX
0309 4 PC 1267272 MRW051-89-309 O RING D56.75X3.53 TOR D56.75X3.53
0310 3 PC 1267273 MRW051-89-310 SCREW M16X60 CHC M16X60/38
0311 6 UN 200248 221365100-S TORIC SEAL 110.5X5.3
0312 29 PC 1267274 MRW051-89-312 SCREW H M16X100/50+NUT+2WASHER H M16X100/50 + ECROU H M16 + 2 RONDELLES M16
0313 3 UN 200485 231428500-S DIAPHRAGM FOR FLANGE PN40 DN80
0314 4 PC 1267275 MRW051-89-314 O RING TYPE R FOR RTJ DN100 (ASME SEAL RTJ ON 600Lbs 4 INCH) N° R37
0315 4 PC 1267276 MRW051-89-315 FLAT SEAL 2 INCHS DN50 (ASME SEAL FLAT)
0316 2 PC 1267277 MRW051-89-316 420VD VALVE SAPAG GATE VALVE 27 57 09 + HTSE (ORDER 45 0000 1622 ARTICLE 1164333)
0317 2 PC 1267278 MRW051-89-317 410VD VALVE SAPAG HPA 4X4 INCH 600 LB (ORDER 45 0000 1622 ARTICLE 1164335)
0318 2 PC 1267279 MRW051-89-318 421VE VALVE SAPAG BALL VALVE RTS 68461 (ORDER 45 0000 1622)
0319 2 PC 1267280 MRW051-89-319 410VE VALVE SAPAG GATE VALVE 27 76 09 (ORDER 45 0000 1622)
0320 2 PC 1267281 MRW051-89-320 411VE VALVE SAPAG GATE VALVE 27 76 09 (ORDER 45 0000 1622)
0321 2 PC 1267282 MRW051-89-321 SRA006VE VALVE SAPAG GATE VALVE FIG 040 (ORDER 45 0000 1622)
0322 2 PC 1267283 MRW051-89-322 7XXVA VALVE SAPAG GATE VALVE 27 76 09 (ORDER 45 0000 1622)
0323 2 PC 1267284 MRW051-89-323 BLIND FLANGE RF DN100-PN100 W. NECK FLANGE
0324 2 PC 1267285 MRW051-89-324 FLAT SEAL RF DN35-PN100

0328 7 PC 1267289 MRW051-89-328 COLLAR DN42 +NUT+SCREW+WASHER STAUFF SM 542-PP DP-AS
0329 4 PC 1267290 MRW051-89-329 COLLAR DN76 +NUT+SCREW+WASHER STAUFF RB-RUL/PP-76,1
0330 8 PC 1267291 MRW051-89-330 COLLAR DN88 +NUT+SCREW+WASHER STAUFF RB-RUL/PP-88.9
0331 10 PC 1267292 MRW051-89-331 COLLAR DN114 +NUT+SCREW+WASHER STAUFF RB-RUL/PP-114.3
0332 4 PC 1267293 MRW051-89-332 COLLAR DN40 +NUT+SCREW+WASHER STAUFF SM 542-PP DP-AS EQUIPE
0333 1 PC 1267294 MRW051-89-333 TAPE 1.25 INCH R 1"1/4 PN100 (as 1227622)
0334 2 PC 1267295 MRW051-89-334 BALL VALVE G1"1/4 1"1/4 : NICOLL VBK40E
0335 6 PC 1267296 MRW051-89-335 SCREW M6+NUT+WASHER H M6X20
0337 9 PC 1267298 MRW051-89-337 SCREW M16 H M16X70
0341 2 UN 200550 233000200-S PRESSURE TAPPING G 1/4 A
0342 1 PC 1267302 MRW051-89-342 FLEXIBLE G1/4 STAUFF SG-G1/4-G1/4-1000-A
0343 1 PC 1267303 MRW051-89-343 VALVE DN32PN100 DN32 PN100 INOX (idem article 1227653)
0344 1 PC 1267304 MRW051-89-344 PRESSURE SWITCH 100 BAR PRESSOSTAT HYDAC - EDS 1791 (idem article 1227656)
0345 2 PC 1267305 MRW051-89-345 SAFETY VALVE ALSTOM PRODUCT code S153510 indE (as 1227657)
0346 3 PC 1267306 MRW051-89-346 FLEXIBLE G1/4-G1/2 STAUFF SG-G1/4-G1/2-500A
0347 1 PC 1267307 MRW051-89-347 PRESSURE SENSOR 701MP 702MP BOURDON E913 (idem article 1227664)
0348 2 PC 1267329 MRW051XX89348 FLAT SEAL RF DN100-PN100

ANNEX2 : SPECIAL SPARES GRE 1/8
Ref N° Type Qt Unit SAP Drawing Désignation Article Anglaise TECHNICAL REFERENCE
1 PC MRW051-59-000 SPECIAL SPARE PARTS
R01 1 PC 1269615 MRW051-59-R01 R01 : OIL PRESSURE SYSTEM CONTRACT: SPARES FOR GOVERNOR
0100 111PO 1 PC 1269616 MRW051-59-100 Internal gear pump 145 l/mn REXROTH : PGH4-2X/100RR07VU2
0101 111PO 1 PC 1269617 MRW051-59-101 Electrical notor 22kW 1500 tr/mn B5 SIEMENS : 1 LG4 186 4AA
0102 111EM 1 PC 1269618 MRW051-59-102 Pressure relief valve pilot operated REXROTH : BDW20A2-5X/100-S6EW230N9K4R12
0103 112EM 1 PC 1269619 MRW051-59-103 Pressure relief valve pilot operated REXROTH : BDW20A2-5X/100-S6EW230N9K4R12
0104 111PO-112PO 2 PC 1269620 MRW051-59-104 Flexing coupling HYDAC : 42/55 48/25
0105 110LN 1 PC 1269621 MRW051-59-105 Visual level HYDAC : FSA/381/1.X/ /12
0106 110LN 3 PC 1269622 MRW051-59-106 Visual level HYDAC : FSA/381/1.X/ /12
0107 111SP 1 PC 1269623 MRW051-59-107 Pressure switch REXROTH : HED8 OA12/100 K14S
0108 101MN 1 PC 1269624 MRW051-59-108 LEVEL SENSOR BM100 KROHNE : BM100 A/C PN100
0109 110SN 1 PC 1269625 MRW051-59-109 Electrical level sensor KUBLER : AFMSS L700 SVKR CS4 L 430
0110 101SN 1 PC 1269626 MRW051-59-110 Mobrey VT03 MOBREY LS 5100
0111 110MP 1 PC 1269627 MRW051-59-111 Pressure sensor BOURDON : E913 023 B 33 R

SFH part list n°N.BF.050202D rep 035, voir devis SFH
0112 101DP 1 PC 1269628 MRW051-59-112 Throttle valve N°OD709944 du 06/05/09 repère 007
Annex 2 Special Spare GRE.xlsNomenclature 161

0116 110LT 1 PC 1269632 MRW051-59-116 Temperature gauge BOURDON : TBI 100 251.148/12T
0117 110MR 1 PC 1269633 MRW051-59-117 Temperature sensor BOURDON : E71TR61 3A

SFH Terminal box equipped (Plan MRW050-50-004B, rep
0118 110CR 1 PC 1269634 MRW051-59-118 SFH Terminal box equipped 110CR)
0119 101FC 5 PC 1269635 MRW051-59-119 Proximity switch TELEMECANIQUE ZCK-J4 (APH 038 521 2051)
0120 102FC 5 PC 1269636 MRW051-59-120 Proximity switch TELEMECANIQUE ZCK-J4 (APH 038 521 2051)
0121 150FC 5 PC 1269637 MRW051-59-121 Inductive proximity switch CONTRINEX : DW-AD-623-M18-120
0122 130EM 3 PC 1269638 MRW051-59-122 Poppet solenoid valve 220VDC PARKER : 4D01-3-7-51-09-01-00A1
0123 101RI 1 PC 1269639 MRW051-59-123 ALSTOM ISOLATING VALVE DN50 PN160 ALSTOM : CODE 038 521 2051
0124 110EH 1 PC 1269640 MRW051-59-124 Plate heat exchanger + clamp HYDAC HEX422 30 C24 C24 + HRGBLPU 25
0125 110LT 2 PC 1269641 MRW051-59-125 Temperature gauge BOURDON TBI 100 251.148/12T
0126 110LP 1 PC 1269642 MRW051-59-126 Pressure gauge BOURDON MEX5 A 31 E 31

CONTRACT: SPARES FOR THE TURBINE CONTROL
R02 1 PC 1269643 MRW051-59-R02 R02 : OIL PRESSURE SYSTEM CUBICLE
0127 GRE 210CR 9 PC 1269644 MRW051-59-127 Electrical device of GRE210CR contact ZB4 BZ105
0128 GRE 210CR 9 PC 1269645 MRW051-59-128 Electrical device of GRE210CR boutons ZB4 BA6
0129 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269646 MRW051-59-129 Electrical device of GRE210CR relais crouzet EWS2
0130 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269647 MRW051-59-130 Electrical device of GRE210CR relais RHN 411UG
0131 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269648 MRW051-59-131 Electrical device of GRE210CR boutons a accrochage XB4 BVM1

0135 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269652 MRW051-59-135 Electrical device of GRE210CR boutons a accrochage XB4 BV5
0136 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269653 MRW051-59-136 Electrical device of GRE210CR commutateur à clef ZB4 BG2
0137 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269654 MRW051-59-137 Electrical device of GRE210CR contact auxiliaire LA1 LC025
0138 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269655 MRW051-59-138 Electrical device of GRE210CR voyant lumineux ZB4 BV01
0139 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269656 MRW051-59-139 Electrical device of GRE210CR bloc différentiel VIGI C60-26509
0140 GRE 210CR 10 PC 1269657 MRW051-59-140 Electrical device of GRE210CR fusible legrand 0.5A 500VAC
0141 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269658 MRW051-59-141 Electrical device of GRE210CR module de protection LB1-LD03P61
0142 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269659 MRW051-59-142 Electrical device of GRE210CR disjoncteur VAG0024635 type MER24202 - C60 2P 16A C
0143 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269660 MRW051-59-143 Electrical device of GRE210CR disjoncteur VAG0024635 type MER24581 - C60 2P 2A D
0144 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269661 MRW051-59-144 Electrical device of GRE210CR disjoncteur VAG0024635 type MER24222 - C60N 4P 1A
disjoncteur VAG0024635 type MER24183 - C60N 1PN 1A
0145 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269662 MRW051-59-145 Electrical device of GRE210CR C
disjoncteur VAG0024635 type MER24222 - C60N 4PN 1A
0146 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269663 MRW051-59-146 Electrical device of GRE210CR C
0147 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269664 MRW051-59-147 Electrical device of GRE210CR disjoncteur VAG0024635 type MER24584 - C60N 2P 6A D
disjoncteur VAG0024635 type MER24222 - C60N 4P 10kA
0148 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269665 MRW051-59-148 Electrical device of GRE210CR D
0149 GRE 210CR 1 PC 1269666 MRW051-59-149 Electrical device of GRE210CR Détecteur de débit IFM SI1000 type SID10ADBFPKG/US
0150 GRE 210CR 3 PC 1269667 MRW051-59-150 Electrical device of GRE210CR Disjoncteur AC43 : 63A ref LD1 LD030M

R03 1 PC 1269668 MRW051-59-R03 R03 : GOVERNOR CONTRACT: SPARES FOR GOVERNOR
0151 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269669 MRW051-59-151 NEYRPIC SLG2 MODULE SELCO : MODULE SLG2
0152 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269670 MRW051-59-152 Power supply DC/DC 240/24 1A PHOENIX CONVERTER DC/DC 240/24 ref 2866284
0153 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269671 MRW051-59-153 CPU board CONVERTEAM : IC693 CPU360
0154 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269672 MRW051-59-154 8 analog inputs board (Alspa) CONVERTEAM : IC693 ALG223
0155 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269673 MRW051-59-155 8 analog outputs board (Alspa) CONVERTEAM : IC693 ALG392
0156 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269674 MRW051-59-156 External base comm board (Alspa) CONVERTEAM : IC693 BEM340
0157 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269675 MRW051-59-157 16 digital inputs board (Alspa) CONVERTEAM : IC693 MDL645
0158 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269676 MRW051-59-158 16 digital outputs board (Alspa) CONVERTEAM : IC693 MDL940
0159 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269677 MRW051-59-159 Power supply base 24/48VDC CONVERTEAM : IC693 PWR322
0160 GRE101RG 2 PC 1269678 MRW051-59-160 Carte CANopen (HORNER) HORNER CAN 502
R04 1 PC 1269679 MRW051-59-R04 R04 : GOVERNOR CONTRACT: SPARE FOR GOVERNOR
0161 101EB 1 PC 1269680 MRW051-59-161 BOSCH actuator 101EB REXROTH : 4WRKE32E600L-3X/6EG24K31/C1D3M
0162 101MM11 1 PC 1269681 MRW051-59-162 SM position feed-back BALUFF : BTLE5-E10-M0560-B-KA05
0163 110DR 1 PC 1269682 MRW051-59-163 Overspeed valve HAWE : BVP3Z-H
0164 101EM 1 PC 1269683 MRW051-59-164 Safety valve HAWE : BVP3ZWG230
0165 102EB 1 PC 1269684 MRW051-59-165 Emergency actuator REXROTH : WV10P1V1001W5220/50-230/60DO
0166 410EM 1 PC 1269685 MRW051-59-166 Solenoid valve REXROTH : 4WE10D3X/CW230N9K4

0167 101DR 1 PC 1269686 MRW051-59-167 Fast closure valve REXROTH : LC32A05E7X/
0168 110FI 1 PC 1269687 MRW051-59-168 Fine filter body 10µ HYDAC : LF 660 SET XX W 1.0
0169 110FI 20 PC 1269688 MRW051-59-169 Fine filter 10µ HYDAC : 0660 D 010 BN3HC
0170 110SD 2 PC 1269689 MRW051-59-170 Water flow sensor IFM : SI1000

0171 2 PC 1269690 MRW051-59-171 Flushing plate N°OD709944 du 06/05/09 repère 002
0172 1 PC 1269691 MRW051-59-172 Rubber ring set for OPU SFH part list n°N.BF.050202D
0173 120MM11 1 PC 1269692 MRW051-59-173 SM position feed-back BALUFF : BTLE5-E17-M0560-B-KA05
0174 110LP 1 PC 1269693 MRW051-59-174 Pressure gauge BOURDON : MEX5 A31 E31
0175 131FC 5 PC 1269694 MRW051-59-175 Inductive limit switch CONTRINEX : DW-AS-503-P20
0176 120LA 5 PC 1269695 MRW051-59-176 Cubicle lighting lamp TELEMECANIQUE : ZB4 BV01
0177 1 PC 1269696 MRW051-59-177 CPU module of SLG2 AHS
0178 121MM 1 PC 1269697 MRW051-59-178 Tachometer sensor IFM : IA-5122
0179 120FI 1 PC 1269698 MRW051-59-179 Return filter+elt 60µ+visual clog MP FILTRI : MPF180/1AG1T + MF180 M60 + MTE50
0180 110SH 1 PC 1269699 MRW051-59-180 Water oil detector 110SH BUHLER : WW6-SW
0181 2 PC 1269700 MRW051-59-181 IHM AURA TECH Proface GP2500 TC 41 24V
R05 1 PC 1269701 MRW051-59-R05 R05 : HP AIR COMPRESSOR WP126L CONTRACT: SPARE FOR GOVERNOR
0182 2 PC 1269702 MRW051-59-182 Set of piston ring VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 069122
0183 2 PC 1269703 MRW051-59-183 Set of suction and discharge valves GIRODIN : 300-033489

0184 4 PC 1269704 MRW051-59-184 Unloader GIRODIN : 300-037681

VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-057520 +
0186 1 PC 1269706 MRW051-59-186 Piston complete 064987 + 300-033185
0187 2 PC 1269707 MRW051-59-187 Coupling with damper VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-033494
0188 2 PC 1269708 MRW051-59-188 Gaskets GIRODIN : 300-066087
0189 2 PC 1269709 MRW051-59-189 Crankshaft bearing VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-033215
0190 2 PC 1269710 MRW051-59-190 Pressure reducer VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-031925
0191 2 PC 1269711 MRW051-59-191 Miscellaneous GIRODIN : 300-036395
R06 1 PC 1269712 MRW051-59-R06 R06 : HP AIR COMPRESSOR WP3100 CONTRACT: SPARE FOR GOVERNOR
0192 4 PC 1269713 MRW051-59-192 Set of piston ring GIRODIN : 300-03500937
0193 4 PC 1269714 MRW051-59-193 Set of suction and discharge valves GIRODIN : 300-033489

VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-064261 +
0197 2 PC 1269718 MRW051-59-197 Piston complete 061768 + 064503
0198 4 PC 1269719 MRW051-59-198 Coupling with damper VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-033423

0206 4 PC 1269727 MRW051-59-206 Gaskets VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-03500938
0207 4 PC 1269728 MRW051-59-207 Crankshaft bearing VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-036961
0208 4 PC 1269729 MRW051-59-208 Pressure reducer VOIR DEVIS N°10900322 GIRODIN : REF 300-031925
0217 1 PC 1269738 MRW051-59-217 Miscellaneous GIRODIN : 02103801

R07 1 PC 1269741 MRW051-59-R07 R07 : 430CR CUBICLE CONTRACT: SPARE FOR GOVERNOR
0220 4 PC 1269742 MRW051-59-220 Measure convertor ARDETEM : TPA DIP 402
0221 1 PC 1269743 MRW051-59-221 Measure convertor ARDETEM : TPA DIP 420
0222 4 PC 1269744 MRW051-59-222 Measure convertor ARDETEM : TPA 401
0223 1 PC 1269745 MRW051-59-223 Measure convertor ARDETEM : TPA 450
0224 11 PC 1269746 MRW051-59-224 Micro console ARDETEM : MICRO CONSOLE
0225 2 PC 1269747 MRW051-59-225 PHOENIX alimentation PHOENIX ALIM REF : 2938578
0226 2 PC 1269748 MRW051-59-226 Level convertor (VEGA) CONVERTISSEUR VEGA

ANNEX
ANNEXE 2 - DATASHEET
1 - ACTUATOR
2 – CONTROL DEVICES
3 – ADDITIONAL SENSORS
ANNEX 2 DATASHEET.DOC GRE-TM801 C

169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
Pressure sensors
PA3024
Electronic pressure sensor
PA30
Connector
Process connection G¼ I
e1 compliant
Analogue output
Measuring range Made in Germany

0...10 bar
Application Type of pressure: relative pressure

Liquids and gases
Electrical design DC
Output 4...20 mA analogue
Operating voltage [V] 9.6...32 DC ¹)
Reverse polarity protection yes
Overload protection yes
Analogue output 4...20 mA
Load for analogue output [ohms] max. (Ub - 9.6 V) x 50; 720 at Ub = 24 V
Pressure rating [bar] 75
Bursting pressure min. [bar] 150
Accuracy / deviations
(in % of the span)
Characteristics deviation *) < ± 0.25 (BFSL) / < ± 0.5 (LS)
Repeatability **) < 0.1
Long-term stability ***) < ± 0.05
Temperature coefficients (TEMPCO)
in the temperature range 0...80° C (in
% of the span per 10 K)
Greatest TEMPCO of the zero point 0.1
Greatest TEMPCO of the span 0.2
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen — We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice. — GB — PA3024 — 07.08.2007
303
PA3024
Step response time analogue output
[ms] 3
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...80
Medium temperature [°C] -25...90 ****)
Storage temperature [°C] -40...100
Protection IP 65, III
Insulation resistance [MΩ] > 100 (500 V DC)
Shock resistance DIN IEC 68-2-27:50 g (11 ms)
Vibration resistance DIN IEC 68-2-6:20 g (10...2000 Hz)
Min. pressure cycles 100 million
EMC EN 61000-4-2 ESD: 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: 30 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: 2 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: 10 V
according to the automotive directive
radiation of interference 2004/104/EC / CISPR25
according to the automotive directive
noise immunity 2004/104/EC / ISO 11452-2
HF radiated 100 V/m
according to ISO7637-2 / severity level
pulse resistance 3
Housing materials stainless steel 316L / 1.4404; FPM (Viton); PA; EPDM/X (Santoprene)
Materials (wetted parts) stainless steel (303S22); ceramics; FPM (Viton)
Connection M12 connector; gold-plated contacts
Weight [kg] 0.218
Remarks ¹) The device shall be supplied from an isolating source and protected
by an overcurrent device such that the limited voltage circuit
requirements in accordance with UL 508 are met.
*) BFSL = Best Fit Straight Line / LS = Limit Value Setting
**) with temperature fluctuations < 10 K
***) in % of value of measuring range / 6 months
****) -40...90 °C upon request
Wiring
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen — We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice. — GB — PA3024 — 07.08.2007
304
Capteurs de pression
PNI024
Capteur de pression électronique
PNI
Raccordement par connecteur

Raccord process G¼ I
Fonction programmable
Entrée analogique
2 seuils réglables
Visualisation alphanumérique à 4 digits
Etendue de mesure 1: Visualisation alphanumérique à 4 digits

0...10 bar 2: LEDs (unité d'affichage / indication de commutation)
3: Bouton de programmation
Made in Germany
Application Type de pression: pression relative

Liquides et gaz
Technologie DC PNP/NPN
Sortie 2 x normalement ouvert / fermé programmable
Tension d'alimentation [V] 18...30 DC
Courant de sortie [mA] 250
Protection courts-circuits pulsé
Protection contre l'inversion de polarité oui
Protection surcharges oui
Chien de garde intégré oui
Chute de tension [V] <2
Consommation [mA] < 90
Tenue en pression [bar] 50
Pression d'éclatement min. [bar] 150
Plage de réglage
Point de consigne haut, SP [bar] -2,46...10,00 *)
Point de consigne bas, rP [bar] -2,50...9,96 *)
en pas de [bar] 0,02
Options à programmer hystérésis/fonction fenêtre; N.F/N.O; type de sortie; entrée courant / tension;
amortissement; calibrage des valeurs affich ées; affichage peut être orienté à 180°
/ desactivé; unité d'affichage
Sensibilité Bouton de programmation
Entrée analogique 0...20 mA / 0...10 V
Charge / résistance d'entrée [kOhm] 0...20 mA: 0,3 / 0...10 V: 90
Déviations (% de l'étendue de
mesure)
Exactitude type < ± 0,6
Dérive / température (par 10 °C) < ± 0,3
dans la plage de température 0...80
Entrée analogique
Exactitude type < ± 0,3
Dérive / température (par 10 °C) < ± 0,1
dans la plage de température 0...80
305
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen — Nous nous réservons le droit de modifier les données techniques sans préavis. — FR — PNI024 — 13.10.2005
PNI024
Retard à la disponibilité [s] 0,2
Temps de réponse pour les sorties de
commutation min. [ms] 3
Amortissement pour la sortie de
commutation (dAP) [ms] 0,10...4000
Fréquence de commutation [Hz] ≤ 170
Temporisation réglable dS, dr [s] 0, 0,1...50
Temps de réponse maxi pour l'entrée
analogique [ms] 3
Unité d'affichage bar, PSI, MPa
Température ambiante [°C] -25...80
Température du fluide [°C] -25...80
Température de stockage [°C] -40...100
Protection IP 65, III
Résistance d'isolation [MΩ] > 100 (500 V DC)
Tenue aux chocs DIN CEI 68-2-27 :50 g (11 ms)
Tenue aux vibrations DIN CEI 68-2-6 :20 g (10...2000 Hz)
Cycles de commutation min. 100 millions
CEM EN 61000-4-2 ESD (décharges électro.): 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 rayonnement HF : 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 transitoires électriques rapides : 2 kV
EN 61000-4-6 parasites HF conduits par le câble
: 10 V
Matières boîtier inox (1.4305 / 303); PBT (Pocan); PC (Makrolon); PA; EPDM/X (Santoprène); FPM
(Viton)
Matières en contact avec le fluide inox (1.4305 / 303); céramique; FPM (Viton)
Indication Unité d'affichage 3 x LED vert
Mode d'affichage 3 x LED vert
Indication de fonction Visualisation alphanumérique à 4 digits
Valeurs mesurées Visualisation alphanumérique à 4 digits
Raccordement connecteur M12; Contacts dorés
Poids [kg] 0,294
Remarques *) pression différentielle
Branchement
Programmation des sorties tout ou rien:

Hno = hystérésis / normalement ouvert
Hnc = hystérésis / normalement fermé
Fno = fonction fenêtre / normalement ouvert
Fnc = fonction fenêtre / normalement fermé
Sorties antivalentes:
OUT1 = Hno, OUT2 = Hnc
(SP1 = SP2; rP1 = rP2)
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen — Nous nous réservons le droit de modifier les données techniques sans préavis. — FR — PNI024 — 13.10.2005
306
307
308
309
ANNEX
ANNEXE 3 - BOOKLETS
1 – T-SLG
2 – T-SOFT
3 – T-ADT
ANNEX 3 BOOKLETS.DOC GRE-TM801 C

310
311
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 3#$
#' () *+, ( )
""
"3 /
"$ -
"$" &! ! '#+ = '
"$3 !' ) '
"> .
-' () .+ / + .+
3"
3"" ) ) ) 6 ! ;! ') ) 7 "9
3"3 ) ' !! 7 ,9
3"$ ! = ; 2 !? ! 7 9
3"> ) =! 7 9
3" .! 7 .9
33 , -
33" ) ) +
333 + ! + '! @ ) 7 9
33$ !@ ) + ! ! ) +)&) ) 7 9
33> !! '! )
3$ ,
3> ,
3>" ++ #2 !? ! '! @ ) 7 9
3>3 ) =! 7 9
3>$ + ! ) +)&) ) 7 9
3>> ) 2 !? ! 7 ,9
3> A' ) !<) ! ! ) 7 "9
0' .1 () *1
$" %
$3 %
$$ %
$$" . +
$$3 )! +7"3 6) +!9
$> %
&' */ 12 + 1) ,3 , )
>"
>3 0 %
>3" @ ' : )B ) ' !
>33 ) ) &
>3$ ) @' : )' ) ' ! ' )
>3> ) + 2 !? ! +
>3 6) ! ' : ' ! '! ! )
>$ %0/
4' 1* + ) * ) ,3
312
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! $#$
" , • ,
3 %
$ , . % % • ,
5' + ) 1 1)
4" C
4"" ' ' !& 2 +'
4"3 6'! ! 2 ) !? ! ' : )' ) ' !
4"$ ! ) +
4"> ! • , && ) )
4" %0 && ) ) + '' 7 && ) ) = ) : 9
43
43" &) 2 +
433 ! = ; 2 !? ! &! ' !&! 2 ' : )' )
43$ 6'! ! 2 ) !? ! 2 & ' : )' ) ' !
43> 6'! ! 2 = ! ') +
43 .! .
434 %)' ! 2! , &! ' !&! '
43D %0 && ) ) + ''
43E E && ) ) + ''
435 ! • , && ) )
4$ - %
6' ..1) * (,1

D" • , % ,
D3 ,
D$ 7 " 9
313
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! >#$
., &"04 ! ) ) ' ) '

• * &"05 • % ! ) ) ' ) '
*
)<! = ! ' !
- - + ! '2 &!
• , 6) ! !! # , <!
• , ) !'') ++!
• , !< ') ) ! ++!
• % 6) ! & ' : &! !
• • ,# • % 2) ) ' 2= !
. . & :) ! ! 2 !
) + ' !&
% ) +8 ! +8 %! )< )<!
314
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! #$
#' () * +, ( )
:! • , )' ! ) ! :! ! ) 2: +) 6) !'F ) :! + 2 !? ! <! )

2 ) '
++) 2 & ) ) ! ) :)' : ! )' 2 ! ! +) 2 & ) 7 +) 6+! 2 ' ! )2) A! 9
! "
! "
:! • , +' :! !+! @: +) ' ! 6+) + 2 : +) 6) !
315
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 4#$
:! & ) 2 ) ' 2!+! ) <! ) !

• + 2 6) ! ' @ ': = '!? ! !'
• : )' ) 2 :! 6) ! = ) : :! !+! ) + ! = ;
• + 2 :! = ! ' +)! 6 :! & :) ! ) ! ! ! != ;
• + 2 ! = ; 2 !? ! )' + ! !+! ) ! = ;
• + 2' ! ) +'!? ! !'
#'# .
• ) ) ) 6 ! ;! ') )
• +) !' 6! )'' ! 6 ' : @ +! <) + + & ! ' ' !& ) = ) ! + )
• ! ' ') +' && ') +'
• %) ! &! ' !&! '
• ) 2 !? !
• ! = ; 2 !? !
• !< & ') ) '
• - +<! ') ) '
• =!
• .!
#'-
:! • , )' ) ! + ) ! 2 ! = ) : :! 6) ! + <)
• E +) ;
• 6+! ) 2 & )
#'0 ,
! )2) )' ) ) ! ) :)' &!
#'0'# . /
:!'! ! • , ) ! + : 6! & )2)! ! 6+! • , 6! ! ') !
! )2)! 7!* & +!9
&! ! ' - G
=' G #
#'0'-
:!'! ! • ,) ! + : 6! )' + ! :! ! ) ! 2 ! 7. • 9
! )2)! & ;) 7!*9
!' ) ' H G
316
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! D#$
#'&
:! • , )' & ! 2= !' 2) ! ! ! & +!'

• +! ) ) :! !'') ) 7 9F ! 2 &) :! 2 ++ = ) 2 ) '
• !! <! ) + #2 !? ! + :)' & +! ! ! !' ') ) '! ) '2 &
:! !'' &! ' !&! ') +'F && !' && ' 2 & :! ! ) ! 2 !'
• ! :)' & +! & !' :! ! 2 ) =) : :! • ,
• ') ) 2!! 6 ; & +! 7 9 :)' & +! ! ' !' '! < & ') ) 2!! 6 ; 7 ! ') )
2!! 6 ; ! '! < & 9
:)' & +! )' !' )6! ) ! )+) :! ., &!
%#' #
,
,
(
% #
#
#
#
%#'
% $
,
)%
% #' # (
* % $ %
% +%
% +%
(
. .
+% %
) *
-* * #% '
%#'
#
'
%-
-* *
%--
)'
%--
# $ %& ' % (
% $ %
% +% ' )'
%-- * )'
317
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! E#$
-' () .+ / + .+
-'# .
:!'! ! ') +' '! + + ! :! <! ) +
-'#'# + 7 8 #9
:)' ') + &!' ) ! + 2 & :)' & ! 7 ' <! ) 2 & ) '2! )&!9
) 2 & 2 =) !6 ! ; ! ) :)' ') +F :! 2 ++ = ) <! ) )' '!

• " ! ') + !' ' :! ) ) ) 6 ! ;! + '!
• " + '! ') + !' ' :! ) ) ) 6 ! ;! !
-'#'- + 8 9
:! &! ' !&! )' & ! 6 :! ,@" ) ') += :) : )' &! ' ! 2 &
• - )
-'#'-'#
:! &! ' !&! ,@3 ) ') +)' '! ' ! &! ' !&! 2 :! ,@" ') + & 6!
'! = :! :! )22! ! ! 6! = !! :! = ') +' )' ! ! : :! )' ! : !': + 2 :! ' !!
&! ' !&! !! :434
:! &! ' !&! )' & ! :! ,@3 ) ') +F = :) : )' &! ' ! 2 & ' !! &! ' !&! :!
) ': 2
-'#'0 ) 7 : 8 9
:! ! = ; 2 !? ! )' &! ' ! 2 & -
-'#'& + 81! 9
:! = ! &! ' !&! )' ' +)!
• 0 >@3 & ') +2 & :! ) I' & ! ' ' !&F
-'#'4 8, 9
:! :! &! ' !&! )' ' +)!
• 0 + ! >@3 & ') +
318
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 5#$
-'-
:! • , +) ' 6! ' +)! • ,

• 0 = ) ! ') +'
• -) :! E +) ; = :! ) )' )< !
&! <! ) ') +' !? ) ! 2 ' ) ': + 6! ) ! ! ! 2 & :! E && ) )

' 'F :! ! )! = ) !' =
• , <! ! ) !'
• ) ) 6 ! ;! ' ') 2 & ) "
• ! ' 28#@ 3"# 33 :! ' !! '! ) 72 ') ' : @ +! 9
!<! + 2) ) ' ! < )+ 6+! 2 :! :! +

J J
• E +) ; )<! :! <! '!' :! ' +)! 6 :! E +) ;
J
• E +) ; )<! :! <! '!' :! = ) ! ) '
.1 ( ) () , 1 ;""" () < ( * 1 ( 1* () =5'-';
-'-'#
( ;""" !
@, 6) ! ' !
. & !& ! ! '= ) : # + )2 6) +! K L K 7 ! += ) ) 9
3"# 33 ' !! '! @ ) 8#@ !
D + ! + '! @ ) : ) ! 7 M ) !&! +'! @ ) '9
7 '! 9
$ # $" 8#@ ! ) +)&) )
7 '! 9
= ! 2!! 6 ;
7 '! 9
3E ! ) ) )' + ! != ; 7+) ! : ) 9
7 '! 9
E@ ) )' )<!N + ) ' 6 7 ! += ) ) 2 & E @ 9
D : ' ! '! & !
> '! ') )<) :! ' !! &! ' !&!
"3D !& ! 2 )
319
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! " #$
-'-'- % 8 19
-'-'-'# % &%-" 8) + 1* 9
:)' '! @ ) < )!' 6! = !! >& 2 O + 3 & 2 " O+
-'-'-'- % ;""" 7
!@ ) 7 9 '! @ ) ) ! ) 7) ! ) ! ! ! 6 <! ' !! + 9
!@ ) 7 9 '! @ ) ) = ! 7) 9
-'-'0 % 8 9
-'-'0'# % ;""" 7
!@ ) 2+)&) ) )<! ) ! ) ! ! !
-'-'&
:)' '! @ ) 7 )<! 6 :! E +) ;9 )' '! & )2 :! ! & ! < + ! 0 2 & :! ) +
' ' !& )' + ;! ) )2 :! E 6) "3D )' 2 ! "
320
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! ""#$
-'0
:!'! ! + ) '2 ) +
:! ! += ' < )+ 6+!
;""" !
35 F 35 • ,) ! ) 7) <! '! 2& A 2 + 9
"35 F "35 ) 2 + !'!
"" ! ) ) +)&) )
$3E ! ) ) )' + ! ! = ;
3D ) ! )
$ @ + )<!
$ @ + )<!
$ @ + )<!
$ = ! 2!! 6 ;
E , & + )<! 7 E @ ! ! E@ 9
E ,' 6 )<! 7 E @ ! ! "3
6) +! 2 '= ) : :! + 2 9
-'&
-'&'# / : % 8, 9
• 0 >@3 & ') +
: '!F >@3 & !' '
• @ " O 8 " O 2 ! ' !! )2 ) 6 ! ;! )' !
• @" O 8 " O 2 ! ) )2 ) 6 ! ;! )' + '! )2 )' 7 ! ) 2!! 6 ;9
• @" O 8 " O 2 = ! )2 ) 6 ! ;! )' + '! )2 )' 7 = ! 2!! 6 ;9
• 0 E +) ;
• ! )
• =!
-'&'- + 8 ! 9
• 0 >@3 & ') +
• -) E +) ;
-'&'0 8 9
• 0 >@3 & ') +
• -) E +) ;
321
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! "3#$
-'&'& + : 8 9
• 0 >@3 & ') +
• -) E +) ;
-'&'4 > 8 #9
:! A ' ) !<) !' 2 ) ;! , !F ! ) &! ' !&! )' )<!
• 0 >@3 & ') +
• -) E +) ;
322
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! "$#$
0' .1 () *1
:! • , )& +!&! '!<! + ! ) & !' ! ! ) :! : ) ! & ! 6 :! ! <) :!

! ) ! 2 !'
;"""
+ .+
*1 0"" 0""
1 1 + " "
, + # "
, )+ " #
, )+
" #
* ( , ) () + , )
0'# 1 1 +
:)' )' :! • ,I' 2 ++ & ) ! ) & ! :! • , ;!' ) :! ! ' '! 6 :! )

+' ' !&
0'- , +
:)' ! ) & !F 6) ! +) ' ! & )2)! <) :! ! ) ! 2 !'
,
'! @ )
! ) +)&) )
= ! 2!! 6 ;
0'0 , )+
0'0'# (
:)' ! ) & ! ! 6+!' ) ! +<) :! ! ) ! 2 !' 7. 9

• 2 :! <! ) 6+ ;
:! +& ! & ' 6! '! = ) : ! ' && ' )'' ! ) :)' & ! ! )<! ) ) :! & )
<! ) + :)' & !F :! • , + ! !!' & ! ' ) ) !+ ) :! ' !!
< ) ) ' + ;) !? !' '
323
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! ">#$
0'0'- ! 8#-", 9
:)' & ! )' < )+ 6+! 6 :! + +6 ' :! "3 6) +!
8#-", 9 ,
" + 7 ' 6
) + +& +& !9
3 ) +< +<! +
$ ! 8#@
0'& , ) + * ( , ) () + , )
:)' & ! )' ) ! ! ! 2 :! +
8#-", 9 ,
" +
3 %)' ) ' < +<! +
$ ! 8#@
324
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! " #$
&' */ 12 +1) ,3 , )
&'# ,
:! • ,I' +' ! )' & ) ++ ! :! 6) ! +'!? ! ! '!? ! !

! ! &) !' :! ' ! ) = :) : :! • , ! !' :! <! ++ ) & 2 :)' '!? ! ! )' )<! ) PD "
:! 2 ++ = ) ) & ': = ' :! ) ! + )' ) 2 :! + #2 !? ! +6+ ;
%& '% %+ / %+%
/%
# %& '% ( %/ ' *
%-- * )' #%
&'-
&'-'# % ?
:! '! 2 :)' '!? ! ! )' 6 ) :! 6) ! &) +2 !? ! ! 6+! +) :! )
:)' '!? ! ! )' )& +!&! ! )< ) 2 :! ' ! F = :! :! ) ) ) 6 ! ;! )' ! 7 "

9
325
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! "4#$
&'-'-
)% * / *+* %
+* )%%#
* )%%#
* 3%
/ %
. ) -* *
#* 3%
-% ) *
* *+'+ 2 % 4 %%
. 5 .
*+%
( 1 *- * - /% ') %# ' * - / %
0 )
0
* '* 2 % 3 % )% %# * '* 2 % 3 % -%#
0
326
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! "D#$
&'-'0 %
:! <! ) ' ! )' ': = 6!+ = N) )' & ) ) ! '+ ' :! ) ) ) 6 ! ;! !& ) ' !
.
.
*))* /
.
'
( 1
6
*# 6
$ %& '% ( 6 *
6 ) *+* *
-% ) *
: 6
+*
6 6
%& '% (
*:
*:)
. .
%$% % %
.
.
77 89 8 6 #:
#:)9
*
$ %& '% (
7 869 +) 8 6 # :)9
&'-'0'# 7
:)' 6+ ; +)&) ' :! ! ) '! @ ) 2 & :! 6+ ;
• :! ' @ +)&) ) < + ! 7 G % 9 = :)+! ) ' !! )' 6!+ = :! - G ' !! : !': +
• :! 2 + 6 ; +)&) ) < + ! : : !' ) :! 7&) )& & 6! = !! :! + =
G 0 . :! &! ! G 0 9 = :)+! ) ' !! )' & )'! 6! = !! :! ' !! : !': + '
- G - G %
• 6 <! :! : !': + - G % :! )<! +)&) ) 7 !' ) !' ) G 9 6! &!' :!
!* ! ++)&) ) 7E F $ # $" . 9
&'-'0'- .( @ * 7
:! '! 2 % &! ! ' )' :! ! 2 @ # : )' )
! 2 % &! ! ' Q @ # : )' ) ' !
%)22! ! ) + ) ) + ) ! + ) )&! %! )< )<! ) )&!
G R% GR G ) G
327
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! "E#$
&'-'0'0
3' : )B ) & !' !* + ) ! ' 6!+ = ! '')6+!
• , <! ' : )B ) 6 2 !? ! '+) ) /G

:)' & !F :! <! ' !! !2! ! ! )' :! ! = ; 2 !? ! +' && 6+! '+) ) )<!
6 :! &! ! G , F ++ = ) :! ! + & ;! ) 2 !? ! ! ! ! != ;
2 !? ! )&&! ) !+ 2 ! :! ' !! 6 )+ @ '!? ! ! :)' ! ' !' : +) ) ) ' ! <!
? ) ;+ 6 ) ! 7 <) ! : :! ! ! !* ) ) ) ) ' ! 2 +2)++!
7 ! < )+ 6+! )2 :! ! = ; 2 !? ! &! ' !&! )' !'! 9
• *! +' : )B ) 7 '! 2 3"# 33 + ) ) '9 /G

:)' & !F :! 2 !? ! '! ) )' :! &) +2 !? ! :! 2 !? ! ' : )B ) )'
! 2 &! & ++ 6 &! ' 2 +' 3" 33
@ = :! 3" )' )< ! F :! 2 !? ! '! ) ) ! '!' ) 2 !? ! < ) ) &
7 )<! 6 :! &! ! G 9
@ = :! 33 )' )< ! F :! 2 !? ! '! ) ! ! '!' ) :! &
@ = :! 6 : ) ' ! )< ! :! ' &! )&!F ) ) )' )<! ) 33
328
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! "5#$
&'-'& + :
:)' ' ! )' )& +!&! ! = :! :! 6) ! )' ! ! :! ! = ;7 ) ) ) 6 ! ;! + '! Q " )'
9
:! '! 2 :)' ' ! )'

• + :! = ! 2 :! & :) ! ! ! ) ! ! ! != ;F = :)+! )6 )
:! '! ) 2 :! ! = ; 2 !? !
• + ) 2 !? ! 7M & :) ! ' !! 9 )' + ! != ; = :! :! 6) ! )' ! !
:! ! = ;
:)' ' ! )' )& +!&! ! 2 !

• :! & +' @ '!? ! ! = :! :! ) ) 6 ! ;! )' + '!
. . .
6
8 6 #:
#:)9
+* *
%& '% ( %& '% (
8 6 # :)9
-% -* *< * (
#
.
.
)% * /
.
.
.
.
.
**::)
.
;
8 9
6 6 6
6
)
6 6 )% * / 4 %
*+* * *+* * -% ) *
:
)
;
8 9
6
#
#% * % *- * 4
+) .
.
.
4 %
329
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 3 #$
&'-'&'# .(*
:! E 0) "3E ! 6+!' '!+! ) 2 ! 2 = '! ' 2 % !& ! &! ! '

• "3E )' +! ) Q) ! ! ! != ; % &! ! '!
• "3E )' +! ) Q )' + ! ! = ; % &! ! '!
% &! ! ' ! ) ! + )<! ) ! ) & !

! ! ! != ; % &! ! ' '!
%)22! ! ) + ) ) + ) ! + ) )&! %! )< )<! ) )&! !& !
G R% GR G ) G G0
' + ! != ; % &! ! '!

%)22! ! ) + ) ) + ) ! + ) )&! %! )< )<! ) )&! !& !
G R% ' +G R ' +G ) ' +G ' +G 0
:! 6) $3E 7 E + 9 )' )< ! ) )' + ! != ; & ! 72 ) ) ) :! +' ' !&9
&'-'&'-
:)' !' ' :! ! ) 2 = :) : :! ) !' =!
)' ! 6+! !' ) %G % ! ! &) !
• ) :! & ) ++ :! )&! 2 +) )2 :! &! ! - G - )'
• 6 :! < + ! 2 :! &! ! - G - )2) ' < + ! )' :! :
&'-'&'0 7
:! E 6) ! ! &) !' :! 2!! 6 ; & !
• ! ) 2!! 6 ;
• :! + '! @ ) +)! )' :! ! ) '! @ )
• :! ! 7 +)! 0 ) 9 )' :! ! ) '! @ )
• = ! 2!! 6 ;
• :! + '! @ ) +)! )' :! = ! '! @ ) 6 : &) + = !
• :! ! 7 +)! 0 ) 9 )' :! &! ' ! =!
• '! 2 :! G # + = F = :) : )<!' :! ! ) !' ) +!<!+ 2 = ! 7 :!
'! @ ) )' ! ) '! @ ) 9
&'-'&'&
:! ! ) +)&) ) )' & ! 6
• :! !* ! + ! ) +)&) ) '! @ ) )<! 6 :! E +) ;
• :! + = G . F = :) : )<!' :! ! ) +)&) ) ) :! :!) :
:! < + ! 2 ! ) +)&) ) )' < )+ 6+! : : !' ) G
330
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 3"#$
&'-'&'4 .
! ) ' ! )2) '!' = :! :! = ! &! ' !&! )' !'! F :! !+! ) =! ' +)! 6 :!
) & ' 6! +)&) !
:)' 6+ ; +)&) ' ! ) 2 :! A ' ) ' ' !& ) :! &! ' ! =! :! + =!
+)&) ) + + ! 6 :! <!
= ! +)&) ) )' !2) ! 6 :! G &! !
. ! )' ;! ) ) :! G . + = F = :) : & + !' = ! +)&) ) ) :!

:! < + ! 2 = ! +)&) ) )' < )+ 6+! : : !' ) G
&'-'&'5 %
:! E 6) D ! ! &) !' :! ! 2'! @ ) +)!
• D :! '! @ ) )' & )2)! ') ) ' 3" 33
• :! 3" )' F :! + ! ) ) ! '!' ) :! + & 7 !2) ! 6 :!
G &! ! 9
• :! 33 )' F :! + ! ) ! ! '!' ) :! ' &! + & 7 33 : '
) ) 3"9
• D :! '! @ ) )' )<! 6 :! E +) ; 7= ) : +) ) 2 :! + & 9
:! + '! @ ) < 2 & Q" O 8" O
= ) : 2 & ! + '! @ ) :! :!
• '! 2 :! ) !&! + && ' 3"# 33 '= ) : <! F :! +'! @ ) )' ! + + ! ' :
6) ! ! )&! )' & )2)!
• '! 2 :! E + '! @ ) = ) : <! )' = ) : ' ! A + ' . = !<! F ) ': + 6! ! : )
:)' '!F :! 6) !I' 2) + ! )&! = )++6! & )2)! 6! '! ' &! '! @ ) & !' :!
' &! ! )&! ! ! ) :! ! 2'! @ ) F ! ) = ! :! ! )&! !< +<!' ) :!
+ &
&'-'&'6 :
!? ! ) '! ') )<) )' )& +!&! ! 6 :! &! ! ' - G - G "
;""" & :
- G
- G "
:! ) ) ) ) ) )& 2 !? ! A ' &! )' )' 6+! '+ ' ! = ; 2 !? ! !'

!<) ! 2 & &) +2 !? ! 6! :! 2 !? ! : !': + &! ! '!+! !
331
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 33#$
&'-'4
:! '! 2 :)' ' ! )' + 6) ! ! ) ) 6) ! ' : ' ! '! = :)+! :! 6) ! )'
! ! :! ! = ; 7 ) ) ) 6 ! ;! + '! 9
:)' '!? ! ! )' )& +!&! ! = :! :! 6) D )'

:)' '!? ! !F :! '! @ ) 2 & :! <! ) 6+ ; )' 2)*! !2) ! 6 &! ! G :!
') ) '! @ ) < )!' ) :! & !2) ! 6 &! ! G
&'0
:)' ' ! F :! <! ) ' ' !& )' = ) ) 2 ' !
') ) 2!! 6 ;' ! && ! 6 :! ' !! <!
332
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 3$#$
4' 1* +) * ) ,3
:! ! 2 ')' ' ) : <) = ') ++!+

• :! )<! : +' :! '
• :! '')<! : + + !' ) ' ) ! + ! ) ) ') ! 6! 6+! 2 ;) <! +
2 :! ') '! 22 )+ ! 2 :! )<!
:! . )' ! ! 6 : 2 :! '
') ) 2!! 6 ; )' ! && ) ' = ! ') ++!<!+ ') ) 2!! 6 ;

7 && ) !* ! + :! • ,9
-* * -% -
%#' # (
# %&
/ %+%
"
,
%
-
%
%#' # (
# %& "
/ %+%
"
-* * -% -
333
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 3>#$
4'# •
! F2 )22! ! ! ) & !' ! !2) ! 2 :! • ,

• )<! ' ! :! • , & ;!' + + ) ' :! 6 ')' 2) ' ) ' &!& )'!' ) ' ) ! +' !'
:)' ' !F :! • , +' :! 6) !
• ++ = ! ' ! :! • , & ;!' + + ) ' :! 6 ')' 2) ' ) ' 6 2 !' ) ' ) ! +' !' :!
6 ')' 2 : '! 2 & :! )<! • , ! 6+! '= ) : <! = ) : & A ')! :! &!
• & ! ! ) & ! ) ! ) + :! !<) ' ' !F 6 :! <! 6! &! 2 ++ = !
=) : ! ) ! <! ) 7'!! '! ) 39
• A 2 + !! ) 2 & A 2 + &! ' : :! • , !' ) ) !) 6) ! +
E 2 :! & + • , )' 6+! ) E 2 :! ' 6 • ,F = :) : !2) !' :!

& +#' 6 ) )
4'- 1
:)' ! ) & !F :! • , ! !' ) :! 2 ++ = ! & !

:)' & ! ! 6+!' <! )2) ) 2 • , 6!2 ! ) ) ) ! ) = :)+! :! 6) ! )' ) ! )
• , '= ) :!' :! & ! 2 ! ; = +! !&! 2 & A 2 + = :! • , = ! )'

'= ) :! = :)+! :! 6) ! )' ++! 6 :! :! ! • ,
:! & ! )' ; = +! ! <) :! ! ) ! 2 !'
4'0 , •
:! )<! • , ! ) ) ++ '! ' :! < + !' 2) ' ) ! +' !' :! 2 ++ = ! • ,
334
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 3 #$
5' + ) 1 1)
5'# >
:!'! 2 + ' & ;! :! <! 6+! ) ! ) '!? ! ! +
• , )' ) ! ) )2 & A 2 + )' ! ! ! 6 :!
A 2 +' ! ) ) !
• 0 ! ) 2+ ) 35 35 7 ) 2 & :! ) + & ! ' ' !&9
• 0 :! A +% :! 2 !+ 2 :!
• :! ! ) ! 2 !'
& A 2 + )' ! ' = :! :! '! 2 :! 2 + )' ! ' :! 2 + : ' 6!! ; = +! ! 7<)

! 2 :! ! ) ! 2 !' )2 = ! )' '= ) :! ) 9
:! '!? ! ! 2 & A 2 + :! @ )' :! '= ) : 2 & @ @ = :) : 6! &!' )<! )2
:)' ! )' ! ) +7 35@ M"9
5'#'# + .,
:!'! 2 + ' ! !+ ! ! ) 2 :! ' ' !& :! ! !! ! : = ! +!<!+7& +2 ) 2
!+! ) !? ) &! F ' 2 = ! +) ) 2 + 9
5'#'- + :
:! ! )' ' !! ') +7 ++&! ' !&! ') +'9 ) :! ' @ : '! 2 ! )&! !+ )<! 6
&! ! ,G % )+ ) )' ' : )'!
5'#'0 .,
)' ! ) +) & A 2 + && ) ) !! .,
5'#'& •
'' 2 && ) ) +) ; 6! = !! <! '
:! 2 + ! ' + :! @ )<! 7'!! P 4 3 59
5'#'4 * A+ 8 . 9'
'' 2 6 ' && ) ) 6! = !! & +
:! '! :! ! )' ! ) +7 35 M"9F :! 6) ! +)' '= ) :! 2 & & +
! 2 :! ! )' ! ) +F :! + '' 2 6 ' && ) ) 6! = !!
& + )' &) 2 + 7'!! P 4 3 D9
335
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 34#$
5'-
:!'! 2 + ' ! )) + <! ! ) , <! ! ) )' '')6+! ) :! = ! & !
%)' ! ! 2 :! '! !+)&) !' :! 2 + ! 6+!' :! <! ! & + ! )
:!'! 2 + ' ! ) ) !
• 0 + ) "35 "35
• 0 :! ) + % :! 2 !+ 2 :!
• :! ! ) ! 2 !'
&) 2 + )' ! ' = :! :! '! 2 2 + )' ! '
5'-'# .,
&) 2 + )' !'! !! .,
5'-'- ) 7 :
! = ; 2 !? ! ') +) ' @ '!? ! ! ) 6) ! ! )
:! !* ! +' : )' ) & ! )' & ) ++ )& +!&! !
5'-'0 + :
) 2 !? ! ') + +!
:! < + ! '! 2 ) 2 !? ! )' :! ! = ; 2 !? ! &! ' !&! :! !2! ! ! 2 !? !
5'-'& . 1!
:! 6) ! + 2 !? ! +' ! F :! + '! ) '= ) :!' ! ) 2!! 6 ; ) ;! ' !
! ) )' )) ++ +)&) ! 2 ++6 ; < + ! 7 &! ! G 9 ) :! +! ) '!
5'-'4 ,
>@3 & ') +
++6 ; & ! :! < + ! '! 2 :! :! )' :! 2 ++6 ; < + ! . G
336
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 3D#$
5'-'5 *
) ' !! &! ' !&! ' )22! 7 :! )22! ! ! 6! = !! ') +' ,@" ,@3 )' ! ! : :!
2) 6+! )' ! : !': + ,G % 9
&&! :)' 2 + & 6! ! + '' 2 ! &! ' !&!
:! <! '!' :! :) :!' < + ! 2') +' ,@" ,@3
5'-'6 * A+ '
'' 2 6 ' && ) ) 6! = !! & + 7)2 :! ! )' ! ) +9
! 2 :! ! )' ! ) + :! + '' 2 6 ' && ) ) 6! = !!
& + )' & A 2 + 7'!! P 4 " 9
:! • , '= ) :!' + ) + !) ' + ! ;!' ) :! E :!

<! '!' :! = ) ! ) '
5'-'; ;"""
'' 2 E +) ;
:! • , '= ) :!' + ) + !) ' + ! ;!' ) :! E :!
<! '!' :! = ) ! ) '
5'-'B •
2 + :! && ) ) +) ; 6! = !! :! = ! <! ' !' + ' ) :! )& '')6)+) 2
'= ) :) & !
:! 2 + ! + :! )<! • , 7'!! P 4 " >9
5'0 (
' = : '! < + !' + ! 6! ! ! &) ! 7 2 ! 2 + 22! ) + + ) 9 !2 !
:! !2 + < + !
• ! 2 + ) 7< + ! 2 E +) ;9
• ! 2 + ! 7) < +) < + ! 2 E +) ;9
337
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 3E#$
6' ..1) * (,1
6'# •
,! ! + ! ) 2 :! • , )' )'! ' ! ) &7 2! !9 : ! ! &) !' :!

' ! 2 <! ) ) :! ! ' '! :! <! ) ' ' !&
#2 (
#% 0
-( 1 *- *
) #%
* % %# 1 % / *#
0
* % %#
) #% ( 1 '- #% -% * #*- % %#
0 #% =0 1% %4 3
( 1 '-
#% -%
) #% ( 1 '- #% -% * #*- % %#
0 ) #% =0
8 2 ,C 9 $
6 "# 8$19
@ # : )' ) "0 8* 9
+! ) "& 8 ,9
: ' ! '! "4 8, 9
338
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! 35#$
6'-
' 2' ! )2) !' ' :! <! ) F ) )' '')6+! ) A! ! ! &) ! ! ) ) +') + )22! !
+ ) ' 2 :! <!
! ' ' 2'! ) F :)' ') +)' +)&) ! 2 & Q " "
%%#2 3
.
#
)
.
.
-% * / 6 > ?
6 6 6
%& '% ( -* * %
6 *+* *
-% * / 6 -% ) *
> ?
6
6
.
> ?
*
%& '% (
:! + ) 2') + +) ) )' )<! 6 :! 2) ) &! ! ,0 G

• , ) 2 !? ! 7 :! ') +)' ! ' ! & 2 & :! 6 : 6+ ;9
• 0+ ; 7 :! ') +)' ! ' ! & 2 & :! 6+ ; ) :! ' @ =! ) : '!'9
• 2 :! + #2 !? ! 6+ ; 7 :! ') +)' ! = ' ! & 2 & :! + # 2 !? !
6+ ;F = ' ! & 2 & '')6+! )' )6 ) 6+ ;9
! :! ! ! 6! +)! F ') + +) ) + ) & ' 6! '!+! !
:! 2 & 2 :! ') +)' )<! 6 :! 2) ) &! ! ,0 G

• ) ' ) +') +
• H ? ! ') +
• ) + ') +
! :! ! ! 6! )< ! F 2) ) :! ') +2 & : ' 6! '!+! !
:! ') + : ! )' ) ' ! )<! 6 :! &! ! '

• ,0 G ) )& & < + !
• ,0 G *)& & < + !
• ,0 G !)
339
% &! '( )! ******
! "# # $%#"%""& '
! $ #$
6'0 8, D#" E 1 9
= + !2' '7 '" 39 ! < )+ 6+! :! ! 2 ! ! S T 2
:! !' ) ' < )+ 6+! 2 :!'! ' ! )<! ) :! 2 ++ = ) 6+!
) *
" %G %G , !? ! 6 : )
3 %G #2 !? ! '! )
$ %G 2 )
> %G 2) ! + )
%G 2 ) %
4 ) '! )
D ,G )'! 2 !? !
E G )'! =!
. # -
&6! 2 !' ) ++ ! 2' G "G 0 G 3G 0
)&! ' 22)+ ) G "G G 3G
) )& & < + ! 2 !' ) G "G G 3G
*)& & < + ! 2 !' ) G "G G 3G
340
% &! '( )! ******
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
T.SOFT USER GUIDE
N° 4012 Ind 6
POWER
Hydro
349
FOREWORD
The diffusion of the software T.SOFT version 6.2 ended in June 2008 and no more updates will be
diffused. The known problems of this software were the inability to take into account the
redundant systems, its instability with a large quantity of SPCs, its limited evolution and
maintenance and the incapability to operate as a multi-window system.
For all these reasons a new T.SOFT software has been entirely developed, started from the
version 10.0, under a more stable framework and with a new modern design providing a best
comfort to the user. The new T.SOFT is still compatible with all the projects and files generated
with the old versions of T.SOFT. The old “Full” licenses are also compatible with the new T.SOFT.
Improvements of the software:
- Correction of all the identified faults.

- More ergonomic menus.
- Better multiplexing between the systems.
New functionalities :
- Module connection management in the same window.

- Exporting data.
- Synoptic view of a Francis turbine.
- Automatic calibration of the SPC measurements.
- Language management.
- Automatic detection of the type of connected systems.
Important: Files saved with the new T.SOFT (version 10.0 or more) could not be opened with the
old T.SOFT (version 6.2 or less).
350
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Table of Contents

1 Introduction 7
2 Configuration of TSoft 8
2.1 Required configurations ............................................................................................... 8
2.2 Installation of the T.SOFT software............................................................................. 9
2.3 Configuration Network............................................................................................... 10
2.4 The T.SOFT license...................................................................................................... 12
2.4.1 Installation of the T.SOFT license ................................................................................................... 12
2.4.2 Activation of a license..................................................................................................................... 12
3 Generalities 13
3.1 TSOFT general menu .................................................................................................. 13
3.2 Menu dedicated to the systems ................................................................................. 14
3.3 The main window ....................................................................................................... 15
4 Windows of the general menu 17
4.1 Management of the T.SOFT projects ......................................................................... 17
4.1.1 Creation of a new T.SOFT project................................................................................................... 17
4.1.1.1 Access to the new menu......................................................................................................................... 17
4.1.1.2 Use ......................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.1.2 Open of a T.SOFT project................................................................................................................ 18
4.1.2.1 Access to the Open menu ....................................................................................................................... 18
4.1.2.2 Use ......................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.1.3 Save or move a TSOFT project........................................................................................................ 18
4.1.4 Open a recent T.SOFT project........................................................................................................ 18
4.1.5 Import the file in a T.SOFT project.................................................................................................. 19
4.1.5.1 Access to the import menu..................................................................................................................... 19
4.1.5.2 Use ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.1.6 Close a project ............................................................................................................................... 19
4.2 Different types of connections to the systems ........................................................... 20
4.2.1 Connection in "Master" mode to the systems ............................................................................... 20
4.2.1.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.1.2 Use ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.2 Connection in "Spy" mode of the systems ..................................................................................... 20
4.2.2.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.2.2 Use ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.3 Disconnection of the systems......................................................................................................... 20
4.2.3.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.3.2 Use ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.4 Connection / disconnection of a single system .............................................................................. 20
4.2.4.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.4.2 Use ......................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.3 Different levels of access to the T.SOFT ..................................................................... 22
4.3.1 Access ............................................................................................................................................. 22
4.3.2 Rights according to the level of access........................................................................................... 22
4.3.3 How to change level of access........................................................................................................ 22
4.3.3.1 Operator 1.............................................................................................................................................. 22
4.3.3.2 The other Access .................................................................................................................................... 22
351
2/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.4 The Views ................................................................................................................... 23

4.4.1 The oscilloscope ............................................................................................................................. 23
4.4.1.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 23
4.4.1.2 Characteristics........................................................................................................................................ 23
4.4.1.3 Initial mode. ........................................................................................................................................... 23
4.4.1.4 Selection of Test Points: ......................................................................................................................... 24
4.4.1.5 Management of the display of the Test Points....................................................................................... 25
4.4.1.6 Modification of the parameters ............................................................................................................. 25
4.4.1.7 Use of triggers........................................................................................................................................ 26
4.4.1.8 Acquisition mode.................................................................................................................................... 28
4.4.1.9 Reading Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 29
4.4.1.10 Action on the recordings ........................................................................................................................ 30
4.4.1.11 Action on the configurations .................................................................................................................. 32
4.4.2 The information systems ................................................................................................................ 34
4.4.2.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 34
4.4.2.2 Open an information file ........................................................................................................................ 34
4.4.2.3 Save information in a file ....................................................................................................................... 35
4.4.2.4 Print information.................................................................................................................................... 35
4.5 Defaults ...................................................................................................................... 36
4.5.1 The common faults......................................................................................................................... 36
4.5.1.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.5.1.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.5.2 The faults history ............................................................................................................................ 36
4.5.2.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 36
4.5.2.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................... 37
4.5.2.3 Load a faults history............................................................................................................................... 37
4.5.2.4 Save a faults history ............................................................................................................................... 38
4.5.2.5 Print a history of defaults....................................................................................................................... 38
4.6 Configuration ............................................................................................................. 39
4.6.1 Languages ....................................................................................................................................... 39
4.6.1.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 39
4.6.1.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................... 39
4.6.1.3 Edit a TSoft language file ....................................................................................................................... 39
4.6.2 The date and time of the systems .................................................................................................. 40
4.6.2.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 40
4.6.2.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................... 40
4.7 Help ............................................................................................................................ 41
4.7.1 Contents of the help....................................................................................................................... 41
4.7.1.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 41
4.7.1.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................... 41
4.7.2 About .............................................................................................................................................. 41
4.7.2.1 Access..................................................................................................................................................... 41
4.7.2.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................... 41
5 Windows of the system menu 42
5.1 Parameters................................................................................................................. 42
5.1.1 Access ............................................................................................................................................. 42
5.1.2 Navigate between the various modules of a (UPC / SPC) system .................................................. 42
5.1.3 Accessibility to the parameters compared with the access mode ................................................. 42
5.1.4 Modification of the parameters ..................................................................................................... 43
5.1.4.1 Edition of a configuration parameter..................................................................................................... 44
5.1.4.2 Edition of an analogical parameter........................................................................................................ 44
5.1.4.3 Edition of an law parameter .................................................................................................................. 45
5.1.4.4 Edition of an law 2D parameter ............................................................................................................. 45
5.1.4.1 Edition of an law 3D parameter ............................................................................................................. 46
5.1.5 Visualization of the modified parameters ...................................................................................... 47
352
3/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.1.6 Validation of the parameters in flash after modification ............................................................... 48

5.1.7 Save parameters in a file ................................................................................................................ 49
5.1.8 Opening of a parameters file.......................................................................................................... 49
5.1.9 Printing of the parameters ............................................................................................................. 51
5.2 The instructions Local Manu ...................................................................................... 52
5.3 The instructions Local Auto ........................................................................................ 53
5.4 SPC calibration ........................................................................................................... 54
5.5 Visualization of inputs / outputs ................................................................................ 56
5.5.1 Access and use................................................................................................................................ 56
5.5.2 Modification of the Analogical outputs.......................................................................................... 56
5.5.2.1 Modification of the Analogical outputs representing an intensity (Ampere) ......................................... 56
5.5.2.2 Modification of the Analogical outputs (Volts) ...................................................................................... 57
5.5.2.3 Modification of the Logical outputs ....................................................................................................... 57
5.6 The ModBus table ..................................................................................................... 58
5.7 Upload of a UPC application ...................................................................................... 59
5.8 Export data................................................................................................................. 62
5.9 Francis synoptic view.................................................................................................. 63
5.10 Configure the peripheral links ................................................................................... 65
5.10.1 The TPLC links ................................................................................................................................. 65
5.10.1.1 Case of the connection RS485 ................................................................................................................ 65
5.10.1.2 Case of the connection TCP / IP.............................................................................................................. 65
5.10.2 The T.SOFT link ............................................................................................................................... 66
5.11 Operating point view.................................................................................................. 67
6 Summary of access rights 69
6.1 Rights given by a license ............................................................................................ 69
6.2 Rights according to the mode of the system.............................................................. 70
6.3 Rights according to the level of access ...................................................................... 70
6.4 Visibility of the parameters according to the access mode ....................................... 70
7 Resolution of problems 71
7.1 Frequent problems ..................................................................................................... 71
7.2 Indicate a problem ..................................................................................................... 72
353
4/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Table of figures
Figure 1 : Diagram of the architecture of the systems................................................................................................ 7
Figure 2 : Choice of the installation language ............................................................................................................ 9
Figure 3 : Local Area Connection Properties ............................................................................................................. 10
Figure 4 : Properties of internet protocol (TCP / IP).................................................................................................. 11
Figure 5 : Choice of the license for a T.SOFT project ................................................................................................. 12
Figure 6 : Arborescence of the main window menus ................................................................................................ 13
Figure 7 : Arborescence of the main window menus ................................................................................................ 14
Figure 8 : Main window ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Figure 9 : Creation of a new T.SOFT project.............................................................................................................. 17
Figure 10 : Assign an IP address ............................................................................................................................ 17
Figure 11 : Opening of a project ............................................................................................................................ 18
Figure 12 : Import of files and\or directories......................................................................................................... 19
Figure 13 : Connection / disconnection from the system’s table ........................................................................... 21
Figure 14 : Rights according to the level of access ................................................................................................ 22
Figure 15 : Request for password .......................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 16 : Oscilloscope in initial mode ................................................................................................................. 23
Figure 17 : Selection of Test Points:....................................................................................................................... 24
Figure 18 : Display and information of the Test Points.......................................................................................... 25
Figure 19 : Modification of the parameters in the oscilloscope............................................................................. 25
Figure 20 : Configuration of a trigger.................................................................................................................... 26
Figure 21 : Use and operating of triggers.............................................................................................................. 28
Figure 22 : Oscilloscope in acquisition mode ......................................................................................................... 28
Figure 23 : Oscilloscope in reading mode .............................................................................................................. 30
Figure 24 : Open a recording ................................................................................................................................. 31
Figure 25 : Comment associated with the recording ............................................................................................. 31
Figure 26 : Save a recording .................................................................................................................................. 31
Figure 27 : Save a configuration............................................................................................................................ 32
Figure 28 : Load a configuration ........................................................................................................................... 33
Figure 29 : Information.......................................................................................................................................... 34
Figure 30 : Open information ................................................................................................................................ 34
Figure 31 : Save information ................................................................................................................................. 35
Figure 32 : Print information ................................................................................................................................. 35
Figure 33 : Common faults .................................................................................................................................... 36
Figure 34 : History of defaults ............................................................................................................................... 37
Figure 35 : Load a history of defaults .................................................................................................................... 37
Figure 36 : Save a history of defaults .................................................................................................................... 38
Figure 37 : Print a history of defaults .................................................................................................................... 38
Figure 38 : Configure the language ....................................................................................................................... 39
Figure 39 : Configure the date and time of the system ......................................................................................... 40
Figure 40 : Contents of the help ............................................................................................................................ 41
Figure 41 : About................................................................................................................................................... 41
Figure 42 : Visibility of the parameters compared with the various access modes ............................................... 42
Figure 43 : Overview of the parameters ................................................................................................................ 43
Figure 44 : Edition of a configuration parameter .................................................................................................. 44
Figure 45 : Edition of an analogical parameter ..................................................................................................... 44
354
5/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Figure 46 : Edition of a law parameter.................................................................................................................. 45

Figure 47 : Edition of a law 2D parameter ............................................................................................................ 46
Figure 48 : Edition of a law 3D parameter ............................................................................................................ 47
Figure 49 : Distinction between modified and non modified parameters ............................................................. 48
Figure 50 : Validation in flash of the modified parameters ................................................................................... 49
Figure 51 : Protect a file parameters..................................................................................................................... 49
Figure 52 : Open a parameters file ........................................................................................................................ 50
Figure 53 : Contents of the file parameters........................................................................................................... 50
Figure 54 : Result of the loading of the parameters .............................................................................................. 51
Figure 55 : Print the parameters ........................................................................................................................... 51
Figure 56 : Visualization and modification of the local Manu instructions............................................................ 52
Figure 57 : Visualization and modification of the local Auto instructions ............................................................. 53
Figure 58 : Visualization and modification of the local Auto instructions for SPO................................................. 53
Figure 59 : Visualization and modification of the SPC Calibration......................................................................... 54
Figure 60 : Visualization and modification of the Modbus table .......................................................................... 55
Figure 61 : Visualization and modification of the inputs and outputs ................................................................... 56
Figure 62 : Visualization and modification of the ModBus table........................................................................... 58
Figure 63 : Upload process : Activate the mode maintenance .............................................................................. 59
Figure 64 : Upload process : Select the software.................................................................................................. 59
Figure 65 : Upload process : Choose the file.......................................................................................................... 59
Figure 66 : Upload process : Pass on mode « Bootloader »................................................................................... 60
Figure 67 : Upload process: Restart of the system in mode " Bootloader "........................................................... 60
Figure 68 : Upload process : Request for the deletion of the memory................................................................... 60
Figure 69 : Upload process : Authorisation for the deletion of the memory.......................................................... 60
Figure 70 : Upload process : Upload the software................................................................................................. 60
Figure 71 : Upload process : Upload of the software finished ............................................................................... 61
Figure 72 : Upload process : Calculation of the sum of control ............................................................................ 61
Figure 73 : Upload process : Correct Sum of control ............................................................................................. 61
Figure 74 : Upload process : Authorization to restart the system ......................................................................... 61
Figure 75 : Save export data files .......................................................................................................................... 62
Figure 76 : Exporting data ..................................................................................................................................... 62
Figure 77 : Synoptic configuration......................................................................................................................... 63
Figure 78 : Francis synoptic view........................................................................................................................... 64
Figure 79 : Visualization and modification of the TPLC link................................................................................... 65
Figure 80 : Visualization and modification of the T.SOFT link ............................................................................... 65
Figure 81 : Visualization and modification of the T.SOFT link ............................................................................... 66
Figure 82 : Configuration of operating point......................................................................................................... 67
Figure 83 : Operating point view ........................................................................................................................... 68
Figure 84 : The rights with regard to licenses........................................................................................................ 69
Figure 85 : Rights with regard to the mode of the system .................................................................................... 70
Figure 86 : Rights according to the level of access ................................................................................................ 70
Figure 87 : Visibility of the parameters with regard to the various access modes ................................................ 70
Figure 88 : Frequent problems .............................................................................................................................. 71
Figure 89 : Procedure for the description of a problem......................................................................................... 72
355
6/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
1 Introduction
This maintenance tool allows to control ALSTOM’s new speed regulator: Neyrpic ® T.SLG.
The T-SOFT software is connected by a TCP/IP connection with a T.SLG with a UPC(N) and a
UPC(S) optional each connected to one of the SPC’s modules and in one optional T.ADT’s.
T.SLG
TCP/IP
1 to 24
SPC Board
T SOFT 1 to 2 UPC
Board
T.ADT
1 TADT
Board
SPO
1 SPO
Board
Figure 1 : Diagram of the architecture of the systems
This maintenance tool allows you to accomplish:

- Visualization of the current defaults
- Visualization of the history of defaults
- Modification of the parameters, saving of the parameters in a file and the uploading of
file parameters.
- Local mode (automatic or manual).
- Visualization and recording of tests points with an oscilloscope.
- Visualization of the inputs / outputs of the systems.
- Uploading software.
- Operating point view
- Various configurations of the product (Communications, date / time…)
356
7/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
2 Configuration of TSoft
2.1 Required configurations
Configuration PC :
- Material: network card (communication Ethernet TCP/IP), 256 Mo de RAM
- Operating system: Windows 2000/XP/Vista
Connections:
- Network cable of type crossed (RJ45): Supplied by Alstom
357
8/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
2.2 Installation of the T.SOFT software

To install T.SOFT on your PC, you must launch the "T.SOFT_xx_xx_setup.exe" executable file
supplied by Alstom. The procedure of this installation starts with the choice of the language
(associated by default with T.SOFT), then by the acceptance of the contract, before choosing the
installation directory and the "start" menu. It also proposes the creation of a shortcut on the desk.
Then the necessary files are copied and a virtual machine Java, essential to run T.SOFT, is
installed in the current installation directory.
To un-install the T.SOFT, go to Start → T.SOFT→ Un-install T.SOFT ".
It is advised, for every new installation of the T.SOFT, to un-install it if this one is already present
on your PC.
Figure 2 : Choice of the installation language
358
9/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
2.3 Configuration Network

To be able to connect to the various systems (T.SLG / T.ADT), you must modify the configuration
network of your PC.
1. Choose Start menu → Connection → Show All the connections.

2. Double-click on " Connection in the local area network ".
3. Click on Properties, the window below opens.
Figure 3 : Local Area Connection Properties
4. Double-click on " Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) ".

5. Type in the IP address " 10.10.10.50".
6. Type in the Mask of sub-network " 255.255.255.0".
359
10/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Figure 4 : Properties of internet protocol (TCP / IP)
7. Validate by OK.
NB: The IP addresses of UPC and TADT cards are physically allocated for the network in
10.10.10.0 (255.255.255.0).
360
11/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
2.4 The T.SOFT license

2.4.1 Installation of the T.SOFT license
If you have a T.SOFT type of license " Full " you have to copy (or replace) the TSOFT_License.dat
file in your hard disk (in the common installation directory).
The code of the license is encrypted and can be valid for a given computer (type of access " Full "
for all the projects opened on this computer) or a given system (type of access " Full " only for
this system). A TSOFT_License.dat file can contain several encrypted codes and thus give various
T.SOFT configurations.
NB: In the case of a T.SOFT project with several systems and working with system licenses, if a
system has no license then all the systems of the project will work with the license of type
"Light".
2.4.2 Activation of a license
The activation of the license is made either directly at the launching of T.SOFT or from the menu
after a connection with the TSLG.
Type of license used
Modification of the used license
Figure 5 : Choice of the license for a T.SOFT project
NB: In the case of a T.SOFT project working with a “Full” license, all functionalities, conditioning
by the access level and the functioning mode, are available. (see the recap table : Rights given by
a license)
361
12/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
3 Generalities
3.1 TSOFT general menu
This menu is accessible from the menus bar at the top of the T.SOFT main window. The following
diagram represents all the menus and the sub-menus.
Project New
Open
Recent
Import
Close
Connection Master Mode

Mode Spy
Disconnect
License Light
Full
Access Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Start
Alstom
View Oscilloscope
Information
Defaults Current faults

Faults history
Configuration Languages
Date and Time
Help Help content

About
Figure 6 : Arborescence of the main window menus
362
13/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
3.2 Menu dedicated to the systems

This menu is accessible from the drop-down list below on the right of the T.SOFT main window.
The following diagram represents all the menus dedicated to the systems.
Parameters
Local Manu
Local Auto
SPC Calibration
Input / Output
ModBus table
Export Data
Francis synoptic view
Upload
TPLC Link
TSOFT Link
Operating point view
Figure 7 : Arborescence of the main window menus
NB: Each of the windows stemming from the menu dedicated to the systems belongs to one
single system. On a multi-system project, it is thus necessary to first of all select the desired
system to obtain your dedicated window.
363
14/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
3.3 The main window

On the main page, you can visualize the main information of the various modules connected to
the T.SOFT. It enables to access the different windows of the software.
Type of licence Name of the project State of the regulator
Mode of operating
State of the connection
Name of the systems
Presence of minor
faults
System window
Presence of
majors faults
Figure 8 : Main window
Level of access
Mode of connection
Description:
• Name of the project: Name of the open project.
• Type of license: Indicate the type of license used.
• Names of the systems: Give the names of all the systems of the project.
• State of the connection: Allows knowing if one is connected to the systems.
364
15/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
• State of the regulator: Contains all the modules whose regulator is active.
• Operating mode: Level conditioning the rights of modifications of the various windows.
Remote
Local Auto
Local Manu
Maintenance
Boot Loader
• Presence of major defaults

Major defaults on the systems.
No major default on the systems.
Systems non-connected
• Presence of minor defaults

Minor defaults on the systems.
No minor default on the systems.
Systems non-connected
• Level of access: Level conditioning the rights of access and modifications of the various
windows.
Operator 1.
Operator 2.
Operator 3.
Start up.
Alstom.
• Mode of connection: Mode conditioning the rights of modifications of the various

windows.
Master
Spy
• List of windows available systems: allows opening or closing a system window.

Parameters.
Local Manu
Local Auto
Input/output.
TPLC link.
ModBus Table.
SPC Calibration.
Upload.
T.SOFT Link.
365
16/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4 Windows of the general menu

4.1 Management of the T.SOFT projects
4.1.1 Creation of a new T.SOFT project
4.1.1.1 Access to the new menu
Go to the menu "Project"→"New".
4.1.1.2 Use
The window for the creation of a new project is presented in the form below. You have to define:
A name of the project.
A directory in which this project is going to be found.
The number of systems in which the T.SOFT can be connected to (Maximum 10 systems).
Name of the
project
Number of
systems defined Directory of the
for this project project
Figure 9 : Creation of a new T.SOFT project
Create the project that you

Cancel the creation have just configured
of the project
NB: During the creation of a new project, the names of the systems are attributed by default; they
will be updated during the first connection.
When we confirm the new project by clicking on OK, the window below opens. This window asks
you for the IP address of every system which you previously defined.
IP Address the
of the defined
Cancel the creation of the system
project
Figure 10 : Assign an IP address
Create the project
366
17/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.1.2 Open of a T.SOFT project

4.1.2.1 Access to the Open menu
Go to the menu "Project"→"Open".
4.1.2.2 Use
The window to open a new project is presented in the form below. You have to select a "*.tsoft "
type of file.
Selection
of the
directory of
Project file
Open
the
selected
Figure 11 : Opening of a project
Cancel
4.1.3 Save or move a TSOFT project the
openin
To save or move a TSOFT project it is enough to copy or move the file containing the
arborescence above. This file is automatically generated during the creation of a project (file
"Alstom2" for the above example). It is essential to copy the file and not its contents.
Furthermore, you should not rename this file! The name of the file is identical to that of the
“*.tsoft" file project, if the names of the file and the project file are no longer identical, the
operation of the project will no longer be possible.
4.1.4 Open a recent T.SOFT project
Go to the menu "Project" → "Recent" → “A project….”
To open a recent TSOFT project, it is enough to go to the menu "Project" and click on "Recent", a
sub menu then displays with the last 5 projects opened on the machine.
367
18/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.1.5 Import the file in a T.SOFT project

This feature makes it possible to import in the various project file parameters or directories of
acquisition data directories from another T.SOFT project.
4.1.5.1 Access to the import menu

Go to "Project"→"Import". In the menu
4.1.5.2 Use
File importation window is as shown below. You must:
Select the directory destination in which you want to import the files and\or the
directory (ies).
Select the files and\or the directory (ies) that you want to import in the directory
destination by means of the button " Choose file ".
There are two types of directories in which you can import file:
Directory parameters: one per system.
The test point directory one for per project.
Destination directory for Select the file and/or directory to

the importation be imported
The files and/or

directory that will be
imported
Figure 12 : Import of files and\or directories

Cancel the
importation Validate the
importation
4.1.6 Close a project
Go to "Project" → "close" in the menu.

This is going to cut active connections and to close the opened project as well as the T.SOFT.
368
19/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.2 Different types of connections to the systems

4.2.1 Connection in "Master" mode to the systems
4.2.1.1 Access
Go to "Connection" → "Master" in the menu.
4.2.1.2 Use
When you click on Master, the T.SOFT tries to connect to the various systems defined during the
creation of the project. It uses the addresses defined during the creation of the project.
This mode allows handling various windows and gives access to the different operating modes:
Operator 2, operator 3, start up and Alstom.
With this mode of connection, the HMI is locked; the operator cannot thus take the control of the
system by the HMI.
4.2.2 Connection in "Spy" mode of the systems

4.2.2.1 Access
Go to "Connection" → "Spy" in the menu.
4.2.2.2 Use
When you click on Spy, the T.SOFT tries to connect to the various systems defined during the
creation of the project.
It uses the addresses defined during the creation of the project.
This mode does not allow handling the various windows dedicated to the systems or to modify
their contents, but offer the visualization of these windows.
With this mode of connection, the operator can intervene on the system by the HMI.
4.2.3 Disconnection of the systems

4.2.3.1 Access
Go to "Connection"→ "Disconnection" in the menu.
4.2.3.2 Use
When you are at least connected to a system in "Master" or "Spy" mode, T.SOFT disconnects
from every connected system. For a future connection, it will be necessary to re-connect from the
menu.
4.2.4 Connection / disconnection of a single system

4.2.4.1 Access
Interact with the table CheckBox of the systems of the main window.
369
20/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.2.4.2 Use
When you are connected to at least a system in "Master" or "Spy" mode, the action ticking the
interaction CheckBox's of a disconnected system connects this system to the same mode as other
connected systems.
The action to un-tick the interaction CheckBox of a connected system disconnects this system.
State of the connection
Figure 13 : Connection / disconnection from the system’s table
Interaction CheckBox
NB: When no connection in "Master" or "Spy" mode was made, it is impossible to connect a
system from the interaction CheckBox. Indeed the mode of connection "Master" or "Spy" must be
specified from the beginning.
370
21/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.3 Different levels of access to the T.SOFT

4.3.1 Access
Go to « Access » in the menu →« Operator 1 »

→« Operator 2 »
→« Operator 3 »
→« Start up »
→« Alstom »
4.3.2 Rights according to the level of access
The chart below presents possible actions according to the level of the selected operator.
Action Parameters Parameters Local Auto Local Manu Maintenance
Access mode visualization modification mode mode mode
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Start
Alstom
Figure 14 : Rights according to the level of access
4.3.3 How to change level of access

4.3.3.1 Operator 1
Go to "Access" → "Operator". No request for password. The T.SOFT crosses directly to operator 1
access.
4.3.3.2 The other Access

Go to "Access" → " Choose your access mode ". All these access modes are protected by
password. The window below opens.
Cancel the change

Level of desired access of access level
Key-in the password
Validate the change

Figure 15 : Request for password of access level
371
22/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.4 The Views
4.4.1 The oscilloscope

4.4.1.1 Access
Go to "View" → "Oscilloscope" in the menu.
4.4.1.2 Characteristics
- 8 ways of acquisitions corresponding to 8 Test Points which can be selected from
different systems and cards.
- Unlimited acquisition in time, the last thirty minutes are recordable.
- Possibility of modifying analogical parameters.
- Starting and\or stopping of acquisition on trigger.
- Modifiable time (of 0,2s in 2000s).
- Possibility of adjustment of scales.
4.4.1.3 Initial mode.

The initial mode represents the oscilloscope in a neutral state. The only possible actions are: the
selection of Test Points, the opening of an acquisition and the opening of a configuration.
Select Test Points Selected Test points Cursor of time
Parameters
of acquisition
Parameters
Reading
Start the
Trigger
Stop the
Trigger
Figure 16 : Oscilloscope in initial mode
Start the acquisition Stop the acquisition Actions on the scales OscilloGraph
372
23/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
• Selection of Test Points: Open a window to allow the selection of Test Points on the
various systems.
• Selected Test Points: Show the Test Points selected, the legend and the immediate values
of acquisition. A click in this zone involve the opening of a detailing window Test Points
and managing the display of their curve.
• Parameters of acquisition: Up to 4 parameters are modifiable from the Oscilloscope
window before and during an acquisition.
• Parameters of reading: Poster, during a reading, the configuration of all the parameters
during an acquisition.
• Start up trigger: Zone of management of the start up trigger.
• Stop trigger Zone of management of the stopping trigger.
• Start the acquisition: Button to start an acquisition.
• Stop an acquisition: Button to stop an acquisition.
• OscilloGraph: Display zone of the graph of the Test point curves.
• Actions on the oscilloGraph: Commands zone allowing adjustments on the curves scales
as well as the clock.
• Time Cursor: Allows the display of a vertical bar with the value (coloured with the
associated colour) of the curves and delta t.
4.4.1.4 Selection of Test Points:
By clicking on the button " Select Tests Point ", the following window appears. It is then enough to
tick/un-tick the CheckBoxes of the corresponding Test points to respectively select / un-select a system
Tests point of a card. The attribution of colours codes is automatic and the level of access governs the
visibility of the Tests point: "Operator" in black, "Start up" in red and "Alstom" in blue.
NB: It is impossible to select more than 8 Tests points.

Selection of the system Selection of the card
Figure 17 : Selection of Test Points:
Colour Code Selection of CheckBox Name of the Tests

373
24/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.4.1.5 Management of the display of the Test Points
By clicking on the table of the selected " Tests Point ", the following window appears. It is then
enough to tick/un-tick the Test Points Check Box to respectively show/un-show the curve of the
corresponding Test Point. The un-shown curves remain all the same recorded in the acquisition
and thus re-displayable. In this window we also find additional information on selected Test
Points.
Colour code Card Name Min
Figure 18 : Display and information of the Test Points
Unit Max
Display Check Box System Mnemonic
4.4.1.6 Modification of the parameters
By selecting a system, then a card, then the mnemonic of a parameter, its current value then
appears on a button. By clicking on this button, the following window appears, it is then possible
to modify the value of the parameter between its min and max points. By pressing on the "enter"
on the keyboard, we temporarily validate the modification of the parameter, it is then possible to
either re-enter a new parameter value, or cancel the last modification by clicking " Cancel the last
entered value ", or either to definitively validate in flash the modification of the parameter by
clicking on "Validate".
Card Value Button Modifiable Value
Figure 19 : Modification of the parameters in the oscilloscope
374
25/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
System Mnemonic Cancel the modification Validate
4.4.1.7 Use of triggers
To facilitate the capture of a particular event, there are two triggers integrated into the
oscilloscope: a start trigger and a stop trigger. The activation of the start trigger must necessarily
be made before the starting the acquisition; the activation of the stop trigger can be made before
the start or during the acquisition.
The activation of a trigger is made in the following way:

- Choose a Reference Test point in the list of the trigger.
- Key-in the release threshold, validate with the "enter" key.
- Choose the direction of the activation (on a rising or downward front).
- Key-in the value of the delta t, validate with the "enter" key.
- Tick the "Active" Check Box to activate the trigger.
NB: It is imperative to validate the threshold values with the "Enter" key of the keyboard to
be rally taken into account.
Threshold Trigger DirectionTrigger Check Box Activation
LED Start Trigger
Delta t Time
Selection List of the

reference Test Point
Figure 20 : Configuration of a trigger
Orderly meaning of the trigger states of the LED:

Deactivated Trigger
Armed Trigger
Trigger on standby for event (LED flashing)
Trigger Activated
375
26/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
These 4 states will be mentioned in this order for the normal operation of a trigger.
Example of cases of use and operation of triggers:
• No trigger
BtnD BtnA
t
[ ] Record
Max size = 30 mn
• Start trigger only

BtnD EvD BtnA
t
[ ] Record
Delta tD Max size = 30 mn
BtnD EvD BtnA

t
[ ] Record
Delta tD
• Stop trigger only

BtnD EvD BtnA
t
[ ] Record
Delta tA
BtnD EvA BtnA

t
[ ] Record
Max size = 30 mn Delta tA
• Start trigger + stop trigger

BtnD EvA EvD EvD EvA BtnA
t
[ ] Record
Delta tD Delta tA
Legend:
- BtnD : Start record button
- BtnA : Stop record button
- EvD : Start trigger event
- EvA : Stop trigger event
- Delta tD : Sought delta t of the start trigger
- Delta tA : Sought delta t of the stop trigger
- [ ]: Acquisition result which can be saved.
376
27/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Figure 21 : Use and operating of triggers
The value of the delta t is in seconds; it corresponds to the pre-recording time of the start up
trigger and post-recording time of the stopping trigger These values are truncated if the requested
pre-recording is superior to the already elapsed acquisition time, or if the post-recording time
desired cannot be contained in the maximal size of recording (30 mn) or still if we stop the
acquisition with the stop button.
Priority of the actions:

1) Start button of the acquisition obligatory
2) Start Trigger:
3) Maximum size of recording (30 mn)
4) Stop button of the acquisition
5) Stop trigger
4.4.1.8 Acquisition mode
By clicking on the acquisition start button, the acquisition of the Test Points values starts. It is
not limited in time, however only the last thirty minutes are memorized and recordable in reading
mode.
Scales of Tests Points Cursor of time
Figure 22 : Oscilloscope in acquisition mode
Time base Actions on the scales OscilloGraph
377
28/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
In the example above we notice that both time cursors are thus ticked then activated, these
represent both vertical bars, which indicate the instantaneous values of these curves. The position
of these vertical bars on the oscilloGraph meets the position of the cursors. We also notice that
the value of Delta t appeared corresponding to the time between both bars.
We can also act on the basis of time in order to adjust the scrolling speed of the curves. In the example
above, its value is 20 seconds, what corresponds to the interval of time of one division.
The actions on the scales are multiple and regroup for a Test Point. In the example above, the
Test point selected is OR1 in blue; the possible actions on the scale of OR1 are thus:
- Tick / un-tick " Axis display " which shows or does not show the OR1 scale
- "Move-up" decreasing the values of the scale, which has the effect of raising the curve
OR1.
- "Move-down" on the contrary increase the values of the scale, which has the effect of
decreasing the curve OR1.
- "Shrink" decrease the value of the intervals of the scale, which has the effect of
unzooming the curve OR1.
- "Expand" on the contrary increase the values of the intervals of the scale, which has the
effect of zooming on the curve OR1.
- "Max" assigns the maximal value of the scale
- "Min" assigns the minimal value of the scale
- "Full range" restores the values by default of the scale of OR1, which is a scale including
its limits, which ensure the visibility of the OR1, curve in the oscilloGraph.
- " Full range all axes " restore the values by default of all the scales.
- “Center” centres the last value which have for effect to centre the OR1 curve
4.4.1.9 Reading Mode
By clicking on the acquisition stop button (or by the activation of the stop trigger), or by reaching
of the maximum recording size because of the activation of the start up trigger) the acquisition
stops and changes to reading mode.
The reading cursor allows movements in time. The parameters of reading systems represent the
values of the parameters during the acquisition. We notice that for a basis of time lower or equal
to 0.1 second, a cross marks each value of the Test Points, the cursor fixes then automatically this
cross
The features of the acquisition mode described in the previous paragraph remain valid for the
reading mode.
378
29/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Reading Cursor
Figure 23 : Oscilloscope in reading mode

Parameters of reading systems
4.4.1.10 Action on the recordings
Open a recording
Go to "Recording" → "Open" .
379
30/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
By clicking on open, the following window appears:
Figure 24 : Open a recording
Cancel Existing Validate the loading

loading saving
Save a recording
Go to "Recording"→ "Save" .
It is possible to add a comment to the recording that we wish to save. By clicking on save, the
following window appears.
Figure 25 : Comment associated with the recording
Cancel saving Key-in commentary Validate the commentary and

continue saving
By clicking on save, the following window appears.
Existing
saving
Figure 26 : Save a recording
380
31/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Cancel saving Name of saving Validate saving
Close a recording
Go to "Recording" → "Close" .
This action allows to close a recording and to return to the initial mode.
4.4.1.11 Action on the configurations

A configuration is a set of parameters including:
- Selected Test Points
- The shown and un-shown scales
- The various settings of the Test Points on the scale
Save a configuration
Go to "Configuration" → "Save" .
By clicking on save, the following window appears.
Figure 27 : Save a configuration
Cancel Name of Existing Validate

saving saving configuration saving
Load a configuration
Go to "Configuration" → "Load" .
By clicking on open, the following window appears.
381
32/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Figure 28 : Load a configuration
Existing Selected
Cancel the Validate the
configurations configuration
loading loading
382
33/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.4.2 The information systems
4.4.2.1 Access
Go to "View" → "Information".
By clicking on information, the following window appears and allows displaying, saving or
printing the software versions installed in the cards.
Figure 29 : Information
4.4.2.2 Open an information file

Go to "File" → "Load" .
Figure 30 : Open information
Cancel Existing Selected Validate the

loading information information loading
383
34/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.4.2.3 Save information in a file

Go to "File"→"Save" .
Figure 31 : Save information
Cancel Name of the Existing Validate the

saving saving information saving
4.4.2.4 Print information

Go to "File"→"Print" .
Select printer
Print
information
Cancel print
Figure 32 : Print information
384
35/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.5 Defaults
4.5.1 The common faults
4.5.1.1 Access
Go to "Faults"→"Common" .
or
From the main window, click in the fault
presence zone below to the right
4.5.1.2 Outline
Figure 33 : Common faults
Acknowlede common faults
4.5.2 The faults history
4.5.2.1 Access
Go to "faults"→"faults history" .
385
36/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.5.2.2 Outline
Selected systems Enable/Disable the maintenance mode
Figure 34 : History of defaults
Refresh the table Delete the table
NB: To delete the list of the faults, it is imperative to activate, for the concerned system, the
mode "maintenance", subjected to various access rights.
4.5.2.3 Load a faults history
Figure 35 : Load a history of defaults
Cancel loading Existing Selected Validate the loading

history history
386
37/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.5.2.4 Save a faults history
Figure 36 : Save a history of defaults
Cancel the Name of the Existing Validate the

saving saving history saving
4.5.2.5 Print a history of defaults
Select printer
Cancel
printer
Figure 37 : Print a history of defaults
Print the faults history
387
38/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.6 Configuration
4.6.1 Languages
4.6.1.1 Access
Go to "Configuration"→"Languages" .
4.6.1.2 Outline
Select TSOFT language
Select the wording of parameters, Test Points

and defaults systems language
Figure 38 : Configure the language
Cancel the modification Validate the modification
NB: - Modification on systems language is not available on SPO

- The consideration of a modification is made in the next start of the TSOFT
4.6.1.3 Edit a TSoft language file

To modify a TSoft language file, follow these steps:
1. Go to the Tsoft install directory and open the “TSOFT.jar” file with unzip tool (ex: Winzip,
Winrar …)
2. Open directories “resources” then “text”
3. Edit (or copy) the modified language file
4. Save (or replace) the modified language file
5. Close the “TSOFT.jar” by saving modifications
Warning: It’s important to keep the same format of this document (« .properties » of files).
Be careful to don’t introduce specific format during file edition and don’t save the file as a text file
(« .txt »).
For SPO system, TSoft language files also contains all system mnemonics which are the key for
the translation with theirs long labels which need to be translate in the wanted language.
388
39/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.6.2 The date and time of the systems

4.6.2.1 Access
Go to "Configuration" →"Date and time" .
4.6.2.2 Outline
Date and time of the

systems
Adjustment of the date

and time to be applied
Validate the
Figure 39 : Configure the date and time of the system
modification

Cancel the modification
NB: Modification on date and hour is not available on SPO system
389
40/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
4.7 Help
4.7.1 Contents of the help
4.7.1.1 Access
Go to "Help"→" Help content "→" TSOFT User Guide ".
4.7.1.2 Outline
The elements of this sub-menu correspond to all the ".pdf " files contained in the " help " directory
of the TSOFT installation directory.
User
Manual
available
Figure 40 : Contents of the help
NB: All the user guides is in the " .pdf " format, the opening of these files thus requires the
installation of the " Adobe Acrobat Reader " software.
4.7.2 About
4.7.2.1 Access
Go to "Help"→"About" .
4.7.2.2 Outline
Name of the software
Version of TSoft
Identification number of the
last compilation
Figure 41 : About
Configuration of TSoft for a

specific product
390
41/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5 Windows of the system menu

This menu is accessible from the drop-down list below on the right of the TSOFT main window.
Each of the windows stemming from the menu dedicated to the system belongs to one single
system. On a multi-system project, it is necessary to first of all select in the system table of the
main window the desired system in order to obtain its dedicated window.
5.1 Parameters
5.1.1 Access
Go to the list of " Systems windows"→"Parameters"
5.1.2 Navigate between the various modules of a (UPC / SPC) system

To see the parameters of the various modules it is enough to click the tab of the module. The
selected card helps to visualize the parameters of this card
The various states of the modules:
: Connected module on which we can visualize the parameters.
: Connected module on which we can visualize the data.
: Module presented in the topology of the system but not connected. We cannot
visualize its parameters.
5.1.3 Accessibility to the parameters compared with the access mode
As we previously saw there are several types of access. The parameters shown depend on this
type of access. Some parameters will be accessible only from the access start or Alstom. The table
below gives you the various types of accessible parameters compared with the selected access
mode.
Access mode
Operator 1 Operator 2 Operator 3 Start Alstom
Parameters type visibility
Operator (black color)
Start (red color)
Alstom (blue color)
Figure 42 : Visibility of the parameters compared with the various access modes
391
42/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Furthermore, there are various types of parameters: "analogical", "configuration", "law", “law
2D” and “law 3D”.
Example in Alstom access mode:
Mnemonic of the Label of the Type of Value of the

parameter parameter parameter parameter
Parameter accessible only from

Alstom access level
Parameter accessible from the

start access level
Parameter accessible from the

Operator 1 access level
Figure 43 : Overview of the parameters
Type of access Click on the parameter line that you want to edit
5.1.4 Modification of the parameters
To access the detailed window of a parameter, you only need to click on this parameter from the
table of the parameters as above. You just have to be on the operator 1 level to visualize a
detailed parameter, however to modify a detailed parameter, the operator 2 level is at least
required.
392
43/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.1.4.1 Edition of a configuration parameter

By clicking on a configuration parameter, the following window opens:
Tick/un-tick to
Mnemonic of the Label of the activate/deactivate this sub-
Value of the
parameter parameter parameter configuration
parameter
Figure 44 : Edition of a configuration parameter
Cancel the Send the modification to

Mnemonic of the sub- Label of the sub-parameter
edition the concerned card
parameter configuration configuration
5.1.4.2 Edition of an analogical parameter

By clicking on a analogical parameter, the following window opens:
Mnemonic of the Label of the Maximum value of the

paramèter parameter analogical parameter
Minimale
value of the
analogical
parameter
Send the modification to
the concerned card
Figure 45 : Edition of an analogical parameter
Cancel the edition Modifiable value of the analogical parameter
393
44/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
NB: Having modified the value of an analogical parameter, it is possible to pre-validate it with
the "enter" key of the keyboard. This new value is then sent to the system and can be cancelled
by clicking " Cancel the last entered value "
5.1.4.3 Edition of an law parameter

By clicking on a law parameter, the following window opens:
Mnemonic of the Label of the parameter
parameter
Figure 46 : Edition of a law parameter
Table representing Min Table representing

and Max values of the values of the parameter law Send the modification to
Cancel the
parameter law the concerned card
edition
5.1.4.4 Edition of an law 2D parameter

By clicking on a law 2D parameter, the following window opens:
394
45/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Mnemonic of the Label of the

parameter parameter
Number of
points of the
parameter
Delete / add a
point

Cancel the and Max values of the values of the parameter law Send the modification to
edition parameter law 2D the concerned card
2D
Figure 47 : Edition of a law 2D parameter
5.1.4.1 Edition of an law 3D parameter

By clicking on a law 3D parameter, the following window opens:
395
46/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Mnemonic of the Label of the Selected law appears

parameter parameter in bold
Number of
points of the
selected law
Add / modify / delete a

Selected law law
Delete / add a
point on
selected law

Cancel the and Max values of the values of the selected law Send the modification to
edition parameter law the concerned card
3D

Figure 48 : Edition of a law 3D parameter
5.1.5 Visualization of the modified parameters
Because of the modification of one or several parameters, these are underlined in black, red or
blue corresponding respectively to the access right of the parameter.
396
47/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
NB: At this stage, the modified parameters were sent to the concerned cards, they are thus taken
into account by the system but are not yet saved in flash, it is at the closing of the window that
the modified parameters will be saved in flash.
Modified
parameters
Un-modified
Parameters
Figure 49 : Distinction between modified and non modified parameters
5.1.6 Validation of the parameters in flash after modification

After every validation of the modifications, the system takes into account the modification but not
in the flash memory, a restart of the system will thus imply the deletion of these modifications.
However, at the closure of the parameters window, the parameters are automatically validated in
flash. The colouring of the modified parameters disappears and a pop - up then comes to warn
the user that the parameters were protected in flash.
Pop-up warning of the saving in flash closing the parameter window
397
48/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Figure 50 : Validation in flash of the modified parameters
5.1.7 Save parameters in a file
Go to the list of "Parameters"→" Saving the parameters "
Figure 51 : Protect a file parameters
Cancel the Name of the Existing Validate the

saving saving parameters saving
5.1.8 Opening of a parameters file

Go to the list of "Parameters"→" Open a file parameters "
398
49/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Figure 52 : Open a parameters file
Cancel the Existing Selected Validate the

loading Parameters Parameter loading
After having validated the opening of the file parameters, one arrives on the following window
that presents all the parameters contained in the file.
Name of the Card of the

parameter file parameter file
Mnemonic, wording,
type and value of the
parameter of the
selected card present
in the parameter file
Go to the next Cancel the

step loading
Figure 53 : Contents of the file parameters
After having pressed on "OK", TSOFT checks all these new parameters by comparing them with those of
the system, one then arrives on the following window which presents the differences between the
parameters of the file and the parameters of the system: either the parameters of the file are not listed at
the level of the system, or the parameters of the system are not listed at the level of the file.
399
50/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Parameters of the un-

classified file of the system
Parameters of the un-

classified system of the file
Figure 54 : Result of the loading of the parameters

Validate the sending of
Cancel the loading these parameters
By pressing on "Validate all the parameters ", TSOFT sends these new parameters to the system,
with the exception for the failures summarized below. By pressing on "Cancel" (as in the previous
stages) the system reboots itself in its previous configuration.
5.1.9 Printing of the parameters
Go to the list of "Parameters"→" Print the parameters "
Select printer
Cancel the printing

Figure 55 : Print the parameters
Print the parameters

400
51/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.2 The instructions Local Manu

Go to the list of " Systems windows"→ "Local Manu"
The page is periodically refreshed every 500 ms.
The values of the instructions “Local Manu“ are only modifiable with the mode "Local Manu",
which in itself requests at least, a level of access "Start up".
At the initial state, the “Local Manu” mode is disable, all set point handle are disable too,
actuators are defined like servomotor and the values are dynamically refreshed (easily visible with
the presence of working order). Once the " Local Manu " mode is initiated, activate the card on
which we wish to modify the instruction, then specify if we wish to act on the distributor or on
the servomotor, next click on value button to modify. Then it appears a Popup allowing to enter
the set point value to be applied and to validate it.
The CSC parameter of the The OR parameter of the SPC

UPC module is enabled, its 01 module is disabled, its value
Enable/Disable the value is modifiable. is non modifiable.
mode Local Manu
Enable/Desable the modification of the Enable/Disable the

value of the parameter servomoteur/distributor Modifiable Values
Figure 56 : Visualization and modification of the local Manu instructions
NB: - It is impossible to activate/deactivate the servomotor / distributor with a UPC

- Negative instructions can be applied to a distributor.
- The set point value of handled board can not be refreshed.
- To perform an actuator switching, there will be asked to enter the initial set point value
for this new actuator.
401
52/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.3 The instructions Local Auto

Go to the list of " Systems windows"→"Local Auto"
The page is periodically refreshed every 500 ms.
The values of the setpoints and parameters " Local Auto " are only modifiable if the turbine is
coupled to the network and the mode is " Local Auto ", which needs to have, at least, a level of
access " Operator 2 ".
Modifiable value
Enable/desable the mode Local Auto
Figure 57 : Visualization and modification of the local Auto instructions
The analogical setpoints The digital setpoint
For a SPO system, which hasn’t digitals setpoints, the following window opens:
Modifiable value
Enable/desable the mode Local Auto
Figure 58 : Visualization and modification of the local Auto instructions for SPO
402
53/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.4 SPC calibration

Go to the list of " Systems windows"→"SPC Calibration"
The calibration SPC takes place with the mode " Local Manu ", which requests, at least, for a
level of access " Operator 3 ".
The SPC calibration makes it possible carry scaling measurements of SPC positions. By carrying out a
series of operations described below, TSOFT automatically calculates the gain and offset allowing
standardizing the position measures.
Mechanical Mechanical
locking opening
Mechanical stroke
Reduced Position Measurement
0 + Epsilon/10000 1 – Epsilon/10000
Value of the RAW Test Point:

Enable/desable the local manu mode SPC selected gross position measurement
Value of the SCA

Test Point:
calibrated
measurement
Sending from the

Max command
Figure 59 : Visualization and modification of the SPC Calibration

Sending of new
Sending from the Adjustment of gains and offsets
Min command the epsilon
403
54/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Procedure to be followed:
1. Activate the mode " Local Manu "
2. Select the SPC to calibrate
3. Choose an offset value for the servomotor (recommendation: 0.2)
4. Choose an offset value for the valve (if valve is present)
5. Click on « Max »
6. Wait for the position to stabilize at maximum.
7. Then Click on « Validate » : TSOFT calculates the gain and the offset.
Do not save gains

Saving new and offsets in flash
gains and
offsets in flash
Figure 60 : Visualization and modification of the Modbus table
8. Then click on "Yes" to send the new calculated parameters gain and offset to the UPC.
9. Click on « Min »
10. Wait for the position to stabilize at minimum.
11. Then Click on « Validate ».
12. And finally click on "Yes".
NB: It is impossible to open the SPC calibration window with the oscilloscope and the synoptic
view.
404
55/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.5 Visualization of inputs / outputs

5.5.1 Access and use
Go to the list of " Systems windows"→"Input/Output"
To change module, it is enough to click on the module that you want to visualize
Visualise inputs/outputs of another Enable/disable the maintenance

module of the system mode
Input un-
modifiable
Output
modifiable in
maintenance
mode
Figure 61 : Visualization and modification of the inputs and outputs
5.5.2 Modification of the Analogical outputs
The values of logical and analogical outputs are only modifiable with the "maintenance" mode,
which itself requests at least a level of"Start up" access.
5.5.2.1 Modification of the Analogical outputs representing an intensity (Ampere)

1. Click the Value column or on the mA column of the output that you want to modify.
2. Enter a value including: - Between 0 and 1 of the Value column.
- Between 4 and 20 of the column mA.
405
56/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.5.2.2 Modification of the Analogical outputs (Volts)

1. Click the Value column Value or on the column V of the output that you want to modify.
2. Enter an value including: - Between 0 and 1 of the Value column.
- Between –10 and 10 V for the column V.
5.5.2.3 Modification of the Logical outputs

Click on the output LED that you want to modify, this one then passes in the inverse state.
406
57/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.6 The ModBus table

Go to the list of " Systems windows"→"ModBus Table"
The values of the ModBus table are only modifiable with the "maintenance" mode, which in itself requests
at least a level of access "Start up".
Activate/deactivate the mode Maintenance Adresse ModBus modified
Number of correct frames Number of incorrect frames Number of errors

for the Modbus for the Modbus of communication
Figure 62 : Visualization and modification of the ModBus table
Modification of the binary Modification of the

Cancel the Validate the hexadecimal value of an
value of an adresse of the
table Modbus. modifications modifications adresse of the table ModBus.
NB: A highlighted line in black indicates that it was modified. This line represents the value of a
ModBus address and it is identified with a unique number. The value of this address expressed in
binary on 16 bits (bit 0 - 15), or in hexadecimal.
407
58/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.7 Upload of a UPC application

Attention : During the upload of a new application, all the parameters are deleted and lost. It
is thus preferable to save the parameters in a file before uploading an application.
Go to the list of " Systems windows"→"Upload"
The upload takes place with the mode "maintenance", which itself requests at least, a level of
access "Start up".
The sequences to upload a software:

a. Activate the mode maintenance
Enable/disable the
maintenance
mode
Figure 63 : Upload process : Activate the mode maintenance
b. Select a software to be uploaded
Select the software to

upload
Figure 64 : Upload process : Select the software
c. Choose the file
Choose
the file
Figure 65 : Upload process : Choose the file

408
59/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
d. Pass on mode « Bootloader »
change to
« Bootloader » mode
Figure 66 : Upload process : Pass on mode « Bootloader »
e. The system restarts in " Bootloader " mode
Restart of the system in

« Bootloader » mode
Figure 67 : Upload process: Restart of the system in mode " Bootloader "
f. Request for the deletion of the memory
Request for the deletion

of the memory
Figure 68 : Upload process : Request for the deletion of the memory
g. Authorisation for the deletion of the memory
Authorisation of the
deletion of the memory
Figure 69 : Upload process : Authorisation for the deletion of the memory
h. Upload the software
Uploading of the
software in progress
Figure 70 : Upload process : Upload the software
409
60/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
i. Upload of the software ended successfully
Upload of the software

finished
Figure 71 : Upload process : Upload of the software finished
j. Calculation of the checksum
Calculation of the
checksum
Figure 72 : Upload process : Calculation of the sum of control
k. Correct checksum
Correct checksum
Figure 73 : Upload process : Correct Sum of control
l. Authorization to reboot the system
System reboot allowed
Figure 74 : Upload process : Authorization to restart the system
Once all these stages are finished the new application is loaded in the module. Then you must
wait for approximately 30 seconds so that the module resets. You can then re-connect to the
system.
A module always ends its initialization by a major default " RESET ". For the module to be
operational, you thus have to correct this default either by the present button on the front face of
the module or by an interface (correction of the TSOFT or HMI defaults).
NB: Once the major default " RESET " corrected, you have to reload the parameters file previously
saved.
410
61/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.8 Export data

Go to the list of "Systems windows" → "Export data".
The export data can be extracted in 3 separate files and usable to report, the list of parameters, the list of
TestPoints and the list of defaults. These 3 files have the same root name, but ended by “_par.csv” ,
”_tpt.csv” and “_def.csv”. These 3 files can obtain information from the system (software(s) version(s)
embedded on board(s)).
At the opening of the export data, it is necessary to specify the name root files and their location
through the window:
Destination
directory
Root name of
files
Save export
Cancel export
Figure 75 : Save export data files
By clicking on save button, the window below opens and executes export:
Current state of
exportation
Figure 76 : Exporting data
NB: Some system does not get the default export list function, in this case the "_def.csv" file will
be empty.
NB: The "_par.csv" file contains no Alstom access parameters and can not be re-opened by the
system for a parameters loading.
411
62/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.9 Francis synoptic view

Go to the list of "Systems windows" → "Francis synoptic view"
This functionality is an animation of a turbine and its operating mechanisms until the energy distribution.
This animation is based on values of concrete measures (TestPoints), each animated object and indicator
represent the real functioning of the hydroelectric central.
By opening of the synoptic, a TestPoints configuration is necessary:

Choice of network
Enable synchronoscope simulation frequency reference
Association of
TestPoints with 8
reference
standards
Validate the
synoptic Cancel
configuration
Figure 77 : Synoptic configuration
As the mnemonic names of TestPoints may differ from one system to another, it is necessary to
specify the names of TestPoints for the next 8 criteria: the position of the actuator, the unit
frequency, unit breaker, network frequency, power, opening limiter, load/frequency set point and
phase. This one is not implemented on all systems, so it is possible to ignore it by enabling the
synchronoscope simulation CheckBox, in this case the synchronoscope will not be in keeping with
reality. It is also necessary to specify a reference value for the frequency network.
In validating the previous configuration, we get the next window:
412
63/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Servomotor’s Animated Unit Electricity current Provided

Position turbine Synchronoscope breaker delivery power
Figure 78 : Francis synoptic view
Decrease Opening Unit’s OscilloGraph Play/Pause Load / Increase

the time limiter frecuency frequency the time
range setpoint range
The only possible actions on this window are the "Play / Pause on OscilloGraph and increase or
decrease the base time.
NB: it is impossible to open the window synoptic with the calibration SPC or oscilloscope view.
413
64/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.10 Configure the peripheral links

5.10.1 The TPLC links
Go to the list of " Systems windows"→"TPLC link"
The properties of this connection are only modifiable with the mode "maintenance", which in itself
demands at least, a level of access "Start up".
There are two types of connection with the automaton machine of the group: RS485 or TCP/IP
5.10.1.1 Case of the connection RS485
Enable/Disable lthe
maintenance mode
Field to configure
Cancel the Validate the modifications

modifications Figure 79 : Visualization and modification of the TPLC link
5.10.1.2 Case of the connection TCP / IP
IP Adresse of the ModBus Enable/Disable the

maintenance mode
Mask the sub network of
the ModBus
Property of the Ethernet
connexion of the ModBus.
Gateway of the ModBus
router
Validate the
Cancel the modifications
modifications Figure 80 : Visualization and modification of the T.SOFT link
414
65/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
NB: The modification of the TPLC communication will only be taken into account after a reboot
of the system.
5.10.2 The T.SOFT link
Go to the list of " Systems windows" →"T.SOFT link"
The properties of this connection are only modifiable with the mode "maintenance", which in
itself demands at least, a level of access "Start up".
Adresse IP of the system Enable/Disable the

maintenance mode
Masking of sub-network of
the system
Property of the
Ethernet connexion of
Gateway of the of the the system.
router system
Validate the
Cancel the Figure 81 : Visualization and modification of the T.SOFT link modificatio
modification
A modification of the TSOFT link automatically causes a disconnection then a reconnection of the
TSOFT software with the system. The new IP address will be saved in the ongoing TSOFT project.
415
66/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
5.11 Operating point view

Go to the list of " Systems windows" →"Operating point view"
This functionality is an animation of the operating point and the limits. This point is defined by
two Test Points, one for x-axis and the other for y-axis.
The first time this view is opened, a TestPoints configuration is necessary:
Test points
Refresh time
of limits
Background
image
Cancel the Validate the

modifications modifications
Figure 82 : Configuration of operating point
Min and max values of a test point are automatically filled by default value of this test point. It’s
possible to modify these values.
Refresh time of limits value is between 10 and 60 seconds.
It’s also possible to apply a background image on graphic by clicking on “Browse”.
In validating the previous configuration, it’s saved for the next time and we get the next window:
416
67/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
Background image
Unit (test point) Operating point Display of limits
Limits
Opens configuration Close window

window
Figure 83 : Operating point view

By closing this window, the refresh mechanism is automatically stopped.
If a configuration has already been saved, the operating point view opens at first. By clicking on
“Setup” button, the configuration window opens with the last saved values.
NB: It’s impossible to open the operating point view with the oscilloscope.
417
68/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
6 Summary of access rights

6.1 Rights given by a license
Different Access T.SOFT Full License T.SOFT Light License

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Start
Alstom
Different Modes
Local Auto
Local Manu
Maintenance
Different Windows Visualization Modification Visualization Modification
Oscilloscope
Project Information
Defaults
Defaults history
Language
Date and time
Help content
About
Parameters
Local Auto
Local Manu
SPC Calibration
Input/output
ModeBus Table
Upload
Export data
Synoptic view
TPLC Link
T.SOFT Link
Figure 84 : The rights with regard to licenses
418
69/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
NB: When the T.SOFT software is not connected to the TSLG, all the accesses (Operator 1-2-3,
start and Alstom) are available with licenses "Full" and Light ".
6.2 Rights according to the mode of the system
Functioning mode
Remote Auto Local Auto Local Manu Maintenance
Action
Input/output modification
Local Auto parameters modification
Local Manu parameters modification
Peripheral device link modification
ModBus table modification
Defaults history modification
SPC calibration access
Firmware upload access
Figure 85 : Rights with regard to the mode of the system
6.3 Rights according to the level of access
Action Parameters Parameters Local Auto Local Manu Maintenance

visualization modification mode mode mode
Access mode
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Start
Alstom
Figure 86 : Rights according to the level of access
NB: The mode maintenance is accessible only when the system does not possess function
order (group in the stop).
6.4 Visibility of the parameters according to the access mode

Access mode
Operator 1 Operator 2 Operator 3 Start Alstom
Parameters type visibility
Operator (black color)
Start (red color)
Alstom (blue color)
Figure 87 : Visibility of the parameters with regard to the various access modes
419
70/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
7 Resolution of problems
7.1 Frequent problems
Problem Connection impossible with the TSLG
Solution Verify that the UPC / TADT module is under tension and works correctly.
Verify that the network cable is in an operating state .
Verify that the network cable is connected to the socket " Ethernet " of the
computer and to the socket " Remote PC " of the module TSLG.
Verify that the IP addresses (PC and TSLG) are correctly configured.
Try to close then to restart the TSoft software.
Problem You have no access to all the features
Solution Verify the rights provided by your license.
Verify the level of access required by the feature.
If necessary, contact Alstom.
Problem The TSoft software does not start any longer
Solution Restart the computer then the TSoft software
Files, bookshops, or keys of register can be corrupted: Un-install then re-install
the TSoft software.
Problem The TSoft software does no longer respond
Solution Wait one moment so that TSoft ends the task in the course of execution.
Try to close then to restart the TSoft software.
End the process " Javaw " then restart the TSoft software.
Problem A feature does not work correctly
Solution Verify the exact description of this feature in the manual).
Restart the Tsoft software.
Restart the UPC / SPC / TADT / SPO modules
Indicate the problem to Alstom (procedure below).
Figure 88 : Frequent problems
420
71/71 ABCD
4012 ind 6
T. SOFT USER GUIDE
7.2 Indicate a problem

It is possible that, in some special cases, TSoft does not work correctly. To resolve the problem,
it is important to indicate this problem to Alstom according to the following procedure:
• Description of the problem:
• Feature or expected behaviour:
• Feature or obtained behaviour:
• Print the screen showing the problem (if possible):
• Version, identification of the compilation and the type of Tsoft product:
• Configuration of the system (UPC, SPC, TADT, SPO, version of the application):
• Join the log files:
Figure 89 : Procedure for the description of a problem
NB: For a better traceability of the use of Tsoft software, this one records relevant information in
log files. These files are found in the “logs” folder of the root of Tsoft software installation, they
are called: " Tsoft.log ", "tsoft.log.1 ", " tsoft.log.2", "tsoft.log.3 ", " tsoft.log.4", "tsoft.log.5"
and are respectively classified from the most recent to the oldest.
421
72/71 ABCD
422
USER GUIDE
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................
...............................................................................................
............................................................... 5
2. FIRST STARTUP ................................................................

..............................................................................................
.............................................................. 6
3. NAVIGATION OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW................................
................................................................
.................................................................................
................................................. 7
4. DATA ON THE MAIN PAGE ................................................................

............................................................................
............................................ 12
5. CHANGING OPERATOR LEVEL

LEVEL................................
................................................................
.....................................................................
..................................... 13
6. CHANGING THE CURRENT TARGET ............................................................

............................................................ 14
7. VIEWING THE PARAMETERS OF A TARGET ................................................

................................................ 14
8. MODIFYING A PARAMETER ................................................................

..........................................................................
.......................................... 16
2
423
9. SELECTING A TEST POINT ................................................................
...........................................................................
........................................... 18
10. LABELLING A TEST POINT ................................................................

............................................................................
............................................ 19
!
!
11. CONSULTING CURRENT FAULTS ................................................................

.................................................................
................................. 20
12. ACKNOWLEDGING A FAULT ................................................................

.........................................................................
......................................... 21
13. CONSULTING THE FAULT LOG ................................................................

.....................................................................
..................................... 22
14. CONFIGURING THE PERIPHERAL LINKS .....................................................

..................................................... 22
15. CREATING A NEW TOPOLOGY ................................................................

.....................................................................
..................................... 23
"
16. MODIFYING LANGUAGE CONFIGURATIONS

CONFIGURATIONS................................
................................................
................................................ 24
"
17. CONSULTING AND SETTING THE DATE AND TIME .....................................

..................................... 25
18. LOCAL AUTO MODE ................................................................

......................................................................................
...................................................... 26
3
424
19. LOCAL MANU MODE
MODE................................
................................................................
......................................................................................
...................................................... 27
20. MANAGING REDUNDANCY ................................................................

...........................................................................
........................................... 28
!
!
21. VIEWING JET DISTRIBUTION ................................................................

........................................................................
........................................ 29
22. CONSULTING SYSTEM INFORMATION

INFORMATION................................
.........................................................
......................................................... 30
23. SCREEN CALIBRATION ................................................................

.................................................................................
................................................. 30
24. LANGUAGE FILE MANAGEMENT ................................................................

..................................................................
.................................. 30
25. TROUBLE-SHOOTING
TROUBLE-SHOOTING................................
................................................................
....................................................................................
.................................................... 33
4
425
1. Introduction
This HMI is a tactile screen enabling control of an ALSTOM speed governor: Neyrpic ® T.SLG and the
auxiliary tachometer Neyrpic ® T.ADT.
The HMI is connected via an RS485 serial link to either a T.SLG with a UPC (N) and an optional
redundant UPC (S) linked to SPC modules, or to a TATD with a single UPC module.
System topology may be composed of one to three target UPC systems, as shown below:
TSLG(N)
RS485
HMI: tactile
screen UPC (N) module 1-24 SPC
boards
TSLG(S)
UPC (S) module 1-24 SPC

boards
T-ADT
HMI characteristics:
characteristics
System Windows CE 4.2

Operating System:
screen 12’’ or 15’’
Tactile screen:
General operation
This HMI enables simultaneous consultation of current system faults, but only authorises connection
to one system at a time. Depending on the specificities of the application software and the existing
topology, the functions described in this manual may not all be available.
This tool gives access to the following functions:
o Real time consultation of the values of four given test points on a system or one of its
SPCs
o Consultation and modification of parameters
Application UPC (N), UPC(S), T-ADT and SPC
TPLC link
TSoft link
o Consultation and acknowledgement of faults
o General UPC configuration
Management of system topology
Date / Time
Language
o Access to Local Auto and Local Manu modes
o Access to specific functions
Jet distribution system
Redundancy
Key:
: Click on screen
5
426
2. First startup
Before starting, check the following:
o If the HMI languages are not French and English, the language files must be modified.
(See section 24.2: Language file management)
o If the labels available for the galvanometers do not suit you, they must be modified in the
language file.
o If these files have been modified, they must be copied onto the USB key in the AlstomIHM
directory.
When the HMI is first started up, proceed as follows:
o If, when you touch the screen, the cursor does not correspond to where you pressed, the
screen must be calibrated.
(See section 23: Screen calibration)
o If the language files have been modified, insert the USB key to update them.
o If the current topology is not correct, detect the new topology.

(See section 15: Create a new topology)
o Select the language page to choose which of the system’s languages the two HMI
languages are associated with.
(See section 16: Modification of language configuration)
o Select the test points to be displayed in the galvanometers.

(See section 9: Selection of a test point)
o If necessary, choose the labels for each of the galvanometers.

(See section 10: Labelling a test point)
6
427
3. Navigation overview
3.1 Menu
3.1.1 Description and accessibility

The HMI pages are accessed via the menu bar at the bottom of the screen. Some are accessible via
shortcuts on the main page.
The scroll menu is composed of two levels:

Level 1: menu grouping the main functions
This first menu is a scroll menu over two pages:
Level 2: sub-menu for each of the main functions
To access a page, click on the button of one of the sub-menus.
3.1.2 Arborescence
The HMI’s navigation menu includes the following functions:
7
428
3.2 Menu reminder
The title of the menu is shown on each page.
Level one menu title / Level two menu title
3.3 Back to the previous page

Each page has a back button to enable return to the previous menu or quit the page.
: Back to the previous page
3.4 Data modification windows

To quit these windows, there are two possible situations:
No data has been modified on the page (see 2.3).
Modifications have been made on the parameters; two buttons appear to either save or
cancel the modifications made.
: After modification of a value, these two buttons are displayed
To save the data, the page remains on screen and the new data presented is that read in the UPC to
check that changes have been integrated by the UPC. Finally, click the back button to close the page.
3.5 Connected SPCs

In the SPC selection pages, the colour and style of the buttons illustrates SPC connection and
presence in the topology.
8
429
: SPC module present in the topology and connected to the UPC
UPC, click this button to
view information about this SPC.
: SPC module present in the topology but not connected to the UPC
UPC, you cannot click
this button.
: SPC module not present in the topology, you cannot click this button.
3.6 Page navigation

The data pages contain ten parameters. An elevator on the left of the list enables navigation to the
next or previous page, and the number of the current page is displayed.
Data page navigation

bar
: Back to the previous page. If the current page is the first page, this button is grey
: Current page.
: Access to the next page. If the current page is the last page, this button is grey.
3.7 Entering and saving numeric data

When numeric values are to be entered, the screen displays a numeric keypad.
9
430
Back: deletes the last figure entered
1
2
Clr: deletes the last value entered
There are three steps to entering a new value:

1) Enter the value and press "Enter"
2) The HMI checks that the value is within the parameter’s minimum and maximum limits.
3) If the value entered is incorrect, an error message is displayed.
If the value is correct, the "save" and "cancel" buttons are displayed.
3.8 Using the Local modes

The Local Auto and Local Manu modes have the common controls described below:
3.8.1 ON / OFF switches

Switch operation is shown below: if the diode is green, it is active. Click on the button to make it
inactive and the diode becomes grey. Click again to activate and the diode becomes green again.
Click to deactivate
Click to activate
The button is activated The button is deactivated
3.8.2 Numeric display units

The value of these display units can be modified in two ways:
Increase or decrease the value by pressing the (+) sign
or the (-) sign
Click on the value to display a numeric keypad
10
431
Value decrease Value increase
A window containing a numeric

keypad opens to enable manual entry
of a value
3.9 Back to the main page

When navigating in the pages, you can return to the main page at any time by pressing
Main page
11
432
4. Data on the main page
On the main page, the main data of the target system can be viewed. These values are refreshed
periodically.
Target system Activity status Galvanometer Current operator level
Local mode
status
Topology
system fault
status
Current
language
Target system: current system to which the HMI is currently connected.

Operator level: level determining the access and modification rights of the pages.
o O1
o O2
o O3
Activation of Local Auto and Local Manu modes
o mode inactive (grey)
o Mode active (green)
Faults on all the systems in the topology
o communication fault (grey)
o No fault (green)
o Major fault (red)
o Minor fault (orange)
12
433
Activity status: indicates whether or not the system is active.
Galvanometers: displays the four test points selected for the target system.
Current language: abbreviation of the HMI’s current language.
5. Changing operator level
5.1 Access
Click on the current operator level to display the operator level change page.
5.2 Rights depending on operator level

The table below shows the actions possible according to the operator level selected.
Actions Data viewing Data HMI Local Auto Local Manu Selection of target
modification configuration mode control mode control system
Access level
O1
O2
O3
comment all HMI pages are visible and the values are refreshed periodically.
Level O1 comment:
5.3 Use
The operator level selection page is as shown below. If the operator level requested is greater than
level O1, a window appears with a keypad in order to enter the password. If the password is correct,
the level change request is granted, otherwise the current level is maintained. This password cannot
be modified and is stored by the target system.
Level without password
Displays a keypad to enter the password
Password OK Password incorrect
New level accepted Previous level maintained
13
434
6. Changing the current target
6.1 Access
Click on the name of the current target to display the change target system page.
6.2 Use
The target system selection page is shown below.
The target systems that may be selected are those that are part of the current topology. The "active
T.SLG automatic detection" mode offers the possibility of selecting the active T.SLG automatically. If
no T.SLGs are active, T.SLG(N) is selected and a warning message is displayed for the operator. If
two T.SLGs are active, T.SLG(N) is selected.
Target system selection
Selection of active TSLG

automatic detection mode
7. Viewing the parameters of a target
7.1 Access
After choosing the target, the "Application" sub-menu in the Parameter menu gives access to the
parameters page. Operator level O1 gives access to parameter viewing.
7.2 Use
1) Choice of the module on which the parameters are selected
14
435
2) Choice of type of parameters to be viewed. There are three possible types of
parameter:
• Analog parameters
• Configuration parameters
• Law parameters
7.2.1 Analog and configuration parameters
Name of the selected module
Mnemonic Long title Value
15
436
7.2.2 Law parameters
Name of the board selected
Mnemonic Long title
Click on the "View button" of the previous page to display the window below with the ten values and a
graphic representation of the law.
8. Modifying a parameter
8.1 Access
In the Parameters menu, the "application" sub-menu gives access to the parameters page. To modify
the parameters, level O2 is required.
8.2 Use
1) Choice of the module and type of parameters to be modified. See section 5.2.
2) To select a parameter to be modified, either:
o Double-click on the parameter, or

o Select the parameter line (highlighted in blue) (1) then click on the "modify" button at
the bottom of the page (2).
16
437
1
Parameter modification
page. See screens
below
8.2.1 Configuration parameters

There are two ways to modify configuration parameters:
Click on the value of the parameter to display a modification window with a numeric keypad.
Click on one of the eight boxes to validate or invalidate the parameter. The numeric value is
automatically refreshed according to the active parameters.
Decimal Manual selection of a

values new value via the
1 keyboard
2
4
8 Tick boxes
16
32
64
+ 128
Sum of the decimal
values for the ticked
boxes =
decimal value of the
parameter
8.2.2 Law parameters

To modify one of the law’s values:
o Select the value to be modified
o Enter a new value using the keypad
The values are then automatically sorted in increasing order on the X column.
Display of a law graph
17
438
9. Selecting a test point
9.1 Access
Click on one of the galvanometers to display the selection page for the test points associated with this
galvanometer. To modify the parameters, level O2 is required.
9.2 Use
1) Choice of module. See section 5.2.
2) To select a new test point, either:
o Double-click on the test point

o Select the test point line (highlighted in blue) (1), then click on the select button at the
bottom of the page (2).
New test point
The new test point is viewed in the galvanometer selected. The data associated with the test point
(mnemonic + module + unit) is updated.
Test point mnemonic
Board name Test point unit
Current value of the test point
18
439
10. Labelling a test point
10.1 Access
In the Configuration menu, the "Label management" sub-menu gives access to the labelling page.
To modify the labels associated with the test points, level O2 is required.
10.2 Use
10.2.1 Consultation
The page is divided into two parts:
• The left side of the page presents the four test points assigned to the galvanometers
with their associated labels.
• The right side is a summary of the ten labels available, with the mnemonic and
associated test point module for each one.
A label is linked to a test point. The association is made with the mnemonic and the name of the
module of this test point. The labels are valid for all target systems.
Summary of all labels with

their test points
Galvanometer test points with Labels available for all target

their labels systems
10.2.2 Modification of label attribution
This page enables modification or attribution of a label to one of the selected test points. Click on the
label to open a list of the labels available in the HMI.
Summary of the labels

associated with the test
points
List of the ten labels for

the test points
19
440
10.2.3 Viewing
The test point labels can be viewed when the screen switches to standby mode. Under each
galvanometer, the selected label is shown.
This test
point has no
associated
label
Label
11. Consulting current faults
11.1 Access
In the Fault menu, the "Current" sub-menu gives access to the current faults page. The faults of one of
the topology systems can also be accessed by clicking directly on the fault diode associated with the
system.
Activation of the current

faults page
20
441
11.2 Use
11.2.1 Page description
The page is refreshed periodically, every 300ms.

The various elements of the window are presented below:
Selected
system
Module Date Fault appearance time
Minor fault
Major fault
12. Acknowledging a fault
12.1 Access and use

From the current faults page, an O2 level operator can click on the "Acknowledge" button at the
bottom of the page to acknowledge the faults. The faults are automatically refreshed.
Major fault
acknowledgement
21
442
13. Consulting the fault log
In the Fault menu, the "Log" sub-menu gives access to the fault log page.
There are two types of events that can be associated with logged faults:
Appearance of a minor fault:
Appearance of a major fault:
Disappearance of a minor fault:
Disappearance of a major fault:
The window is shown below:
Page refresh
14. Configuring the peripheral links
14.1 TPLC Link menu
14.1.1 ModBus
14.1.1.1 Access and use

In the parameters menu, the "TPLCLink" sub-menu gives access to the TPLC configuration page.
These parameters can be viewed by an O1 operator and modified by O2 and above.
Click on this field to
display a keypad
Click on this button to

invert its value

display a list of possible
choices

display a keypad
TPLC link parameters are:
Number of Modbus station
22
443
Connection speed: 9600 38400 kb
Parity: none – even – odd
UPC response time

Number of data bits: 7 or 8 bits
Number of stop bits: 1 bit compulsory
Modbus mode: RTU or ASCII
14.1.2 Ethernet
The TPLC Ethernet page is similar to the TSoftLink page described below, with the addition of a
station number.
14.2 TSoftLink menu
14.2.1.1 Access and use

In the Parameters menu, the "TSoftLink" sub-menu gives access to the TPLC configuration page.
These parameters can be viewed by O1 operators and modified by O2 and above.
Click on one of these fields

to display the keypad with
the IP address to be
modified
The field containing the

cursor at the time of
modification is
highlighted
15. Creating a new topology
15.1 Topology
The topology corresponds to the architecture of the various systems present in the system.
23
444
15.2 Access
In the Configuration menu, the "Topology" sub-menu gives access to the topology management page.
This page is accessible even if the target system shows a communication fault, however, it will not be
detected.
15.3 Use
This page enables consultation or automatic detection of the system currently connected to the HMI
and then saving of this new topology. After saving, the new topology is considered and all the
information about the new or deleted systems is updated.
Current topology
New topology after

automatic detection
Topology detection
in progress
Start topology Save the new topology in

detection the HMI
: System present in the current topology (cyan)
: System absent from the current topology (dark blue)
: System detected by the new detection (cyan)
: System not detected by the new detection (dark grey)
16. Modifying language configurations

The HMI has two languages as standard:
HMI language 1
HMI language 2
16.1 Changing the HMI language
16.1.1 Access
To change from language 1 to 2 or vice versa click on the language button at the bottom right of the
screen. It is always visible.
24
445
16.1.2 Use
This button changes from HMI language 1 to language 2 and vice versa. The name of this button
shows the abbreviation of the current language selected from these two languages.
The window below shows an example of the passage from French to Chinese:
16.2 Associating HMI language with system language

16.2.1 Access
In the Configuration menu, the "HMI Language" sub-menu gives access to the language management
page. Level O2 is required to modify language assignments.
16.2.2 Use
The system has three languages that can be associated with HMI languages 1 or 2. For the HMI
current language change, the UPC sends back the data in the chosen language.
The window is shown below:
Display of HMI
language 1 or 2
Choice of three possible

system languages
17. Consulting and setting the date and time
17.1.1 Access
In the Configuration menu, the "Date / Time" sub-menu gives access to the date and time information
page. Level O2 is required to modify this information.
17.1.2 Use
25
446
The page shows the system date and current time for each of the systems in the topology. The data
on this page is refreshed periodically.
Date and time

modification
To modify system date and time, click on the first field of the date and a data modification window
opens. After validation, the date is sent to all systems.
The field in which the

cursor is active during
modification is
highlighted.
18. Local Auto mode
18.1 Access
In the Modes menu, the "Local Auto" sub-menu gives access to the Local Auto mode page. This page
can also be accessed by clicking directly on the Auto diode.
Modifications can be made on this page from level O2 and above.
Activation of the Local

Auto page
26
447
18.2 Use
The data on this page is refreshed periodically. Actions on setpoints OE and LO are only possible if
the Local Auto mode is active. Similarly, buttons R? are only accessible if the Local Auto is active.
These parameters can be modified only if authorised by the T.SLG.
Local Auto mode Analog setpoints

activation or
deactivation
Logic parameters
See the T.SLG operating instruction for a description of the mnemonics on this page.
19. Local Manu mode
19.1 Access
In the Modes menu, the "Local Manu" sub-menu gives access to the Local Manu mode page. This
page can also be accessed by clicking directly on the Manu diode.
Modifications can be made on this page from level O3 and above.
Local Manu page

activation
19.2 Page description

The data on this page is refreshed periodically.
The page is divided into four zones:
o Local Manu mode activation switch
o CSC parameter for the UPC
o OR n, n represents the selected SPC
o Table with the return setpoints of the SPCs connected to the system
27
448
CSC parameter for
the UPC
Activation or OR parameter for

deactivation of the the selected SPC
Local Manu mode
SPC returns
Consult the T.SLG operating instruction for a description of the mnemonics on this page.
19.3 Use
Action on setpoints CSC and OR + (SPC number) is only possible if the Local Manu mode is active
and the parameter associated with the setpoint is valid. Modifications to these parameters are possible
only if authorised by the T.SLG. To select an SPC and obtain its OR parameter, just click on its return
value in the zone at the bottom of the page. If the OR parameter of an SPC is active, its return value is
highlighted in green.
The CSC parameter is not The OR1 parameter is active,

active, its setpoint cannot its setpoint can therefore be
therefore be modified modified
Click on an SPC number

X return to select the OR
X parameter
OR1 parameter of SPC

1 is active
20. Managing redundancy
20.1 Access
In the Specific Functions menu, the "Redundancy" sub-menu gives access to the redundancy
management page.
28
449
20.2 Use
The ACK button authorises T.SLG passage into test mode. If the T.SLG is in test mode, the governor
is inactive and the standby T.SLG becomes active.
Normal TSLG(N) Standby TSLG(S)
TSLG activity
status
Test mode activity

status
Test mode
acknowledgement
Diode colours:
Activity
: T.SLG with communication fault (grey)
: T.SLG inactive (red)
: T.SLG active (green)
Test mode
: Test mode not active (grey)
: Test mode active (cyan)
Activation of the Jet Dispatcher

21. Viewing jet distribution
This page is a view page only. Overall operating time
Activation/deactivation
of operating time
Operating mode
Injector returns
Deflector returns
Operating time
29
450
22. Consulting system information
23. Screen calibration
23.1 Access and use

To calibrate the screen, click on the T.SLG logo, and the tactile screen calibration window is
displayed. Calibration is necessary the first time the screen is started up and if the clicks on screen do
not correspond to the screen area clicked
The instructions are given on the screen. Click briefly on each cross that appears on the screen.
24. Language file management
The HMI is multilingual, therefore the names of certain buttons or text zones are stored in text files.
24.1 Compiling the language file
In the HMI, there are two language files:

"Langue1.cfg" contains the texts for HMI language 1
"Langue2.cfg" contains the texts for HMI language 2
These texts are in unicode format. To modify, we recommend using the Windows note-pad.
These text files are in CSV format and have the following structure:
30
451
To modify a language file, translate all the texts of each line after the comma. The characters in front
of the comma must not be altered under any circumstances.
Text not to be Text to be Translated text

Unchanged text
altered under any translated into the
circumstances required language
24.2 Labels
The texts of the ten-galvanometer labels are contained in the language files.
As shown in the previous paragraph, the text that can be modified for the labels is after the comma.
Text of label 1
Text of label 10
31
452
24.3 Updating the language file
To modify an HMI language file, the file to be updated should be copied onto a USB key with its
correct name: "langue1.cfg" for the language 1 file and "langue2.cfg" for the language 2 file. The USB
key should have an "AlstomIHM" directory and the file to be updated should be located in this
directory.
Files to be updated
USB drive "AlstomIHM" directory containing

the files to be updated
Then, insert the key into the screen. A message will ask if you want to update the files. If so, answer
Yes and the update application is run automatically (this may take a few seconds). Then, the window
below is displayed. Validate to start copying the files on screen. As soon as the copying processing is
complete, remove the key and the screen will restart with the new language files integrated.
Progress bar indicating the

state of file copy on the HMI
Start file copying
Back to the HMI application
24.4 Updating the HMI software
To update the HMI application, the procedure is similar to that used to update the language files. Just
insert a USB key with the files to be updated in the Alstom HMI directory.
Wait a few moments and click on update validation .
The file corresponding to the HMI application is "IHMAppli.exe".
32
453
25. Trouble-shooting
Problem T.SLG not connected or indicating communication fault

Solution Check that the UPC module is working properly
Check that the cable between the HMI and the UPC is connected and in working
order.
Problem The screen does not start
Solution Check the power supply
Check the switch at the back of the screen
Problem Error message: DISK BOOT FAILURE, INSERT DISK AND PRESS ENTER
Solution Check that the Compact Flash is correctly inserted at the back of the screen
Contact Alstom to replace the Compact Flash
Problem Certain or all HMI texts are not visible
Solution Regenerate a language file from an original language file
Problem The texts are cut off
Solution Regenerate a language file with shorter texts
Problem The clicks on the screen do not correspond to the screen area clicked
Solution Calibrate the screen
Problem The screen does not react to the clicks
Solution Try to switch the screen off and then on again using the switch at the back of the
screen
Problem The screen starts but not the HMI application
Solution Contact Alstom to replace the Compact Flash
Problem When updating the HMI application, a message indicates USBKeyError
IOException
Solution Shut down the HMI, remove the USB key, restart and repeat the update procedure
33
454
NEYRPIC® T.SLG – 4014 ind 2
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
NEYRPIC® T.SLG
DESCRIPTION / INSTALLATION /
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
No. 4014 Ind.2
1/50 ABCD
455
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
RELEVANT DOCUMENTS
The following documents are available to supplement the information on the installation, operation
and maintenance of NEYRPIC® T.SLG. Please refer to the table below for further details:
General documents
Manual no. Title
4017 Module Incorporation Guide
4014 Technical Notes: Description/Installation/Maintenance of UPC module
4015 Technical Notes: Description/Installation/Maintenance of SPC module
4016 Technical Notes: Description/Installation/Maintenance of NEYRPIC® T.ADT
4013 HMI User Guide
4012 NEYRPIC® T.SOFT User Guide
4036 Operating instructions on NEYRPIC® T.ADT
Machine-related documents
Functional diagram
List of inputs and outputs
Overall installation
Control-box wiring diagram
Operating notes on governor
2/50 ABCD
456
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
CONTENTS
TABLES 5
DIAGRAMS 6
®
1. PRESENTATION OF NEYRPIC T.SLG 7
1.1. Overall Presentation of NEYRPIC® T.SLG 7
1.1.3. Powerful Software Tools 9
1.1.4. NEYRPIC® T.SOFT Connection 9
1.2. UPC 10
1.2.1. Testing Tools 10
1.2.2. Automatic Reconfiguration of SPCs 10
1.2.3. Redundancies for UPC 10
1.3. SPC 10
1.3.1. Optimised Settings for Parameters 10
1.3.2. Sensor Redundancies on SPCs 10
1.4. HMI
1.4.1. International Dimension 10
1.4.2. Easy Navigation 11
1.4.3. Access to Settings 11
1.5. NEYRPIC® T.SOFT 10
1.5.1. International Dimension 11
1.5.2. A real Maintenance Centre! 11
1.5.3. Split-Window View
1.5.4. Ethernet Circuit Connection 12
2. DESCRIPTION OF UPC 13
2.1. Internal structure 13
2.2. Identification 14
2.3. Dimensions and Overall Space Required 14
2.4. Power Supply 15
2.4.1. Principle 15
2.4.2. Power Consumption 18
2.4.3. Internal Structure of Power Supply 19
2.5. Communications Interface 20
2.5.1. Front Face 20
2.5.2. Rear Panel 21
2.6. Typical Interfaces 22
2.7. Wiring
2.7.1. Wire Kit with SPC 23
2.7.1.1. Wiring Topology with one SPC 24
2.7.1.2. Wiring Topology with several SPCs 24
2.7.2. Wire Kit with HMI and NEYRPIC® T.SOFT 25
2.7.3. Wire Kit for UPC Redundancy 27
2.8. Specifications and Standards 27
3/50 ABCD
457
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
3. INSTALLATION OF UPC 29
3.1. Checks 29
3.2. Operations 29
4. MAINTENANCE OF UPC 30
4.1. Preventive Maintenance 30
4.1.1. Checks 30
4.1.2. Necessary Precautions 30
4.2. Corrective maintenance 30
4.2.1. Possible Types of Maintenance 30
4.2.2. Fault Categories 30
4.2.3. Fault Indicators 31
4.2.4. Resetting Faults 31
4.3. Methodology of Repair 32
4.3.1. Examples of Faults 39
4.3.1.1. Viewing faults on the Front Face direct 39
4.3.1.2. Viewing faults with HMI 39
4.3.1.3. Viewing faults with NEYRPIC® T.SOFT 40
4.3.2. Testing with HMI 40
4.3.3. Testing with NEYRPIC® T.SOFT 40
4.3.3.1. Spy Mode and Master 40
4.3.3.2. Testing Points 41
4.3.3.3. Example of a Test 41
5. EXCHANGE 43
5.1. Exchanging a UPC Module 43
6. APPENDICES 44
APPENDIX 1 45
GLOSSARY 50
4/50 ABCD
458
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
TERMINOLOGY
UPC Unit-Processing Controller
SPC Servo-Processing Controller
HMI Human Machine Interface
I/O Inputs/Outputs
LED Light-Emitting Diode
®
NEYRPIC T.SOFT Turbine Software
®
NEYRPIC T.ADT Turbine Auxiliary Digital Tachometer
NEYRPIC® T.SLG Turbine Speed Load Governor
TABLES
Table 1: Performances of NEYRPIC® T.SLG _____________________________________________7
Table 2: Typical configurations of modules according to the type of machine____________________8
Table 3: NEYRPIC® T.SOFT - Rights of Access__________________________________________11
Table 4: Configuration of general power supply__________________________________________15
Table 5: Characteristics of power inputs of UPC module___________________________________20
Table 6: Front Face components ________________________________________________________21
Table 7: I/O Characteristics ___________________________________________________________23
Table 8: Wires to be used for installation __________________________________________________23
Table 9: Specifications and Standards ____________________________________________________28
Table 10: Faults of UPC module ________________________________________________________39
Table 11: Example of faults on HMI – UPC ________________________________________________39
Table 12: Example of faults NEYRPIC® T.SOFT – UPC _______________________________________40
5/50 ABCD
459
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
DIAGRAMS
Diagram 1: Example of T SLG cabinet __________________________________________________7
Diagram 2: Structure with redundancy at the level of the position sensors ______________________8
Diagram 3: Structure with redundancy at UPC module _____________________________________9
Diagram 4: Ethernet Circuit Connection ________________________________________________12
Diagram 5: Internal Structure of UPC __________________________________________________13
Diagram 6 : Label situated at the rear of the UPC module __________________________________14
Diagram 7: View of UPC module from the right __________________________________________14
Diagram 8: View of Face of UPC module _______________________________________________14
Diagram 9: Cabinet with NEYRPIC® T.SLG _____________________________________________15
Diagram 10: Structure of power supply in DC circuit ______________________________________16
Diagram 11: Structure of power supply in AC circuit with several AC/DC converters _____________16
Diagram 12: Structure of power supply in AC circuit with one AC/DC converter _________________16
Diagram 13: Connection on power-supply terminal board - Configuration DC Circuit _____________17
Diagram 14: Connection on power-supply terminal board - Configuration AC Circuit _____________17
Diagram 15: Wiring example - Client DC power supply ____________________________________18
Diagram 17: Structure of internal power-supply of UPC ____________________________________19
Diagram 18: Indicators on Front Face of UPC module _____________________________________20
Diagram 19: Panel Rear UPC ________________________________________________________21
Diagram 20: Marking of connectors on Rear Panel _______________________________________21
Diagram 21: Example of wiring between 1 UPC and 1 SPC without redundancy ________________24
Diagram 22: Example of wiring with several SPC _________________________________________25
Diagram 23: Wiring with HMI _________________________________________________________26
Diagram 24: Wiring with NEYRPIC® T.SOFT ____________________________________________26
Diagram 25: Connection with XLINK Interface ___________________________________________26
Diagram 26: UPC Redundancy wiring __________________________________________________27
Diagram 27: Testing points on NEYRPIC® T.SOFT _______________________________________41
Diagram 28: Physical marking of OE analogue input related to NEYRPIC® T.SOFT _____________42
Diagram 29: Marking of RO-T, R5 logical inputs related to NEYRPIC® T.SOFT _________________42
Diagram 30: Example of wiring for testing STANDARD ANALOGUE INPUTS __________________45
Diagram 31: Example of wiring for testing ANALOGUE OUTPUTS ___________________________45
Diagram 32: Example of wiring for testing ALL-OR-NOTHING INPUTS _______________________46
Diagram 33: load-breaking capacity of an output in VDC __________________________________47
Diagram 34: Example of wiring for testing QUICK ANALOGUE OUTPUTS ____________________48
Diagram 35: Characteristics of a TT input _______________________________________________48
Diagram 36: Example of wiring for testing an input _______________________________________49
6/50 ABCD
460
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
1. PRESENTATION OF NEYRPIC® T.SLG

1.1. Overall Presentation of NEYRPIC® T.SLG
1.1.1. This product is a speed-governing module.
NEYRPIC® T.SLG is not made up of specific chips integrated with a standard automaton; it is a
genuine ALSTOM product.
NEYRPIC® T.SLG has a guaranteed working life of at least 10 years. The product is entirely designed
and manufactured by ALSTOM and has been optimised to perform the functions of regulating the
speed and (or) the positioning of servomotors.
Diagram 1: Example of T SLG cabinet
ITS ADVANTAGES
Redundancy between two UPC modules through a dedicated digital link

Integrated turbine simulator for testing on the premises or for staff training
NEYRPIC® T.SOFT, software program for putting into operation and
maintenance of NEYRPIC® T.SLG
HMI, operating software for NEYRPIC® T.SLG
More inputs and outputs than its predecessors:
- 20 inputs with opto-couplers
- 18 relay outputs
- 6 analog inputs
- 6 analog outputs
The SPC modules are auto-configurated and their settings are defined by the
UPC module, which is a major advantage for quick repair ("Plug and Play")
Universal positioner, as it is capable of controlling all types of actuators
Can be adjusted to all types of interfaces with the existing automatism or to
be upgraded
Table 1: Performances of NEYRPIC® T.SLG
7/50 ABCD
461
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
1.1.2. Increased flexibility

NEYRPIC® T.SLG is a speed and load governor. It is organised around an electronic rack in a box or
wall cabinet. The specific characteristics of each installation will require a certain number of extra
modules (UPC, SPC, various sensors, TT, etc.). The UPC module is the principal component of the
NEYRPIC® T.SLG speed governor. However, there is a third independent module, which is called the
NEYRPIC® T.ADT (Auxiliary Digital Tachometer) for establishing the speed thresholds.
NEYRPIC® T.SLG is capable of governing up to 24 servomotors and is adapted for the control of
FRANCIS, KAPLAN or PELTON turbines.
. Machine Control Number of UPC Number of SPC

Gates 1 1
FRANCIS Individual control of
1 24 max
guide vanes
KAPLAN / BULBE Blades/gates 1 2
Injectors 8
PELTON 1
Deflectors 8
Table 2: Typical configurations of modules according to the type of machine
Depending on the topology chosen according to the turbine and the client's needs, we have the
following types of configurations:
Speed measurements ALSTOM P320 Or Others PLC

COM N
GRID FREQUENCY
HMI
UNIT FREQUENCY T ADT SPEED thresholds

Speed OUTPUTS
SPEED SENSOR 1 COM HMI Tachometer
n F
T SLG (UPC)
WIRED OUTPUTS
n SPEED SENSOR 2
F
(Faults , indicators etc.)
COM POS N
WIRED INPUTS
(Circuit breaker etc.)
1 to 24
T SLG (SPC) T SLG (SPC)
POSITIONNER POSITIONNER
SPEED
GOVERNOR
GUIDE VANE N°1

N°24
SERVOMOTOR
ACTUATOR
NORMAL SENSOR
STANDBY SENSOR
1 to 24 GUIDE VANES
Diagram 2: Structure with redundancy at the level of the position sensors
8/50 ABCD
462
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
ALSTOM P320 or Others PLC
COM N
COM S
COM HMI HMI
T SLG (UPC) REDUNDANCY T SLG (UPC)

Speed Speed Governor Speed Governor
measurements
Normal Standby
WIRED OUTPUTS
(Faults , indicators
etc.)
WIRED INPUTS
COM POS N
COM POS S
( Circuit breaker etc.)
1 to 24
T SLG (SPC) T SLG (SPC)
POSITIONNER POSITIONNER
SPEED
GOVERNOR
GUIDE VANE N°1 GUIDE VANE N°24
SERVOMOTOR
ACTUATOR
NORMAL SENSOR
STANDBY SENSOR
1 to 24 GUIDE VANES
Diagram 3: Structure with redundancy at UPC module
Please note: A complete redundancy may be performed by linking the two types of redundancies
mentioned above.
1.1.3. Powerful Software Tools

It may be supplied with two software programs: NEYRPIC® T.SOFT, in its "Light" or "Full" version,
(maintenance software) and "HMI" (application program) for setting the different parameters of the
governor.
1.1.4. NEYRPIC® T.SOFT Connection
Thanks to NEYRPIC® T.SOFT, NEYRPIC® T.SLG may be remote-operated via an Ethernet

connection. Hence, the operator may control the NEYRPIC® T.SLG remotely through the Ethernet
connection if he wants to. This enables him to be close to the servomotors to be controlled.
9/50 ABCD
463
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
1.2. UPC
1.2.1. Integrated testing tools
To make the operator's work easier, NEYRPIC® T.SLG has a certain number of testing points. This
means that the operator does not need to use any external measuring instruments.
These testing points are available on the MMI and on NEYRPIC® T.SOFT.
1.2.2. Automatic Reconfiguration of SPCs
In the event of a standstill of the machine due to a fault in the speed-governing process, the operator
may want to exchange certain modules, such as the SPC. To make the exchanging of these modules
easier, a "Plug and Play" system has been designed for the SPC.
In fact, the operator may exchange the SPC module in the event of a standstill of the machine without
having to reprogram the SPC that has been exchanged.
1.2.3. Redundancies for UPC (OPTION)
The NEYRPIC® T.SLG system offers a broad range of choices of redundancies to limit the risk of
technical fault or breakdown of the machine as much as possible.
To limit the risk of fault or breakdown, NEYRPIC® T.SLG offers a redundancy of data, starting with
UPC ("Normal"), towards the SPC modules. This is made possible by the use of a second UPC
("Emergency"), which repeats the data from UPC "Normal" to the SPC. See Diagram 3.
1.3. SPC
1.3.1. Optimised Settings for Parameters
Each SPC module has automatic settings, i.e. settings defined by the manufacturer, to compensate
for any Input/Output errors of its electronics system. These are also called "Firmware Settings".
This allows the mutual exchange of SPC and UPC without having to redo the settings linked to the
sensors and the other interfaces with the NEYRPIC® T.SLG.
1.3.2. Sensor Redundancies on the SPCs (OPTION)
The operator may benefit from a position-sensor redundancy for each SPC module. For this purpose,
the SPC are equipped with 2 position-sensor inputs: "normal" and "emergency". See Diagrams 2 and
3.
1.4. HMI
1.4.1. International Dimension
HMI is a tactile screen which allows the operator to control the NEYRPIC® T.SLG system and the
NEYRPIC® T.ADT auxiliary tachometer.
10/50 ABCD
464
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Thanks to an integrated "language" library, the tool is capable of communicating in the operator
language. It offers two languages. The user may modify the language files himself.
1.4.2. Easy Navigation
Thanks to its large tactile screen, HMI offers an efficient work space for controlling and administering
NEYRPIC® T.SLG and NEYRPIC® T.ADT.
The different controls are accessible via easy-to-use indexes. The scrolling of the functions created in
Windows CE offers high flexibility of use of NEYRPIC® T.SLG.
1.4.3. Access to settings
HMI offers quick and easy access to the settings. These settings may be of various kinds (date,
redundancy, mode, topology, faults, etc.) See HMI User Guide for further information.
1.5. NEYRPIC® T.SOFT
1.5.1. International dimension
Thanks to an integrated "language" library, the system is capable of communicating in the language of
the operator in various idioms. It offers two languages. The user may modify the language files
himself.
1.5.2. A real maintenance centre!
The use of NEYRPIC® T.SOFT is determined by different levels of access: each level determines the
rights of access and of modifying the different windows. See Table 3 and TSOFT User Guide for
further details.
HMI NEYRPIC®
Software T.SOFT
Level of
access
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Putting into
operation
ALSTOM
Table 3: NEYRPIC® T.SOFT - Rights of Access
The access codes are provided with the UPC or NEYRPIC® T.ADT modules.
11/50 ABCD
465
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
1.5.3. Split-window viewing
Apart from the main window in which you can view the principal data on the different modules
connected to NEYRPIC® T.SOFT, the tool offers split-window viewing of the data. This enables the
user to navigate more easily and to preserve all or part of his data.
1.5.4. Ethernet Circuit Connection
NEYRPIC® T.SOFT is connected, via a TCP/IP link, to a NEYRPIC® T.SLG with a UPC (N) and a
UPC (E) (optional) which are linked to SPC modules and a NEYRPIC® T.ADT module.
NEYRPIC TSLG
TCP/IP 1 à 24
UPC (N) modules
SPC
H
U UPC (E)
B
TSOFT
Ethernet NEYRPIC T.ADT

Link
Diagram 4: Ethernet Circuit Connection
12/50 ABCD
466
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
2. DESCRIPTION OF UPC
2.1. Internal Structure
IHM T.SOFT Redundant

T SLG
T.SOFT Data
interface Data
IHM Data
Redundant
Operator Flash Redundancy
Front interface Memory treatment
Front face Data treatment 8MBits
Face
Redondancy Data
Test point &
Parameters
Parameters
PowerPC
MCP565 Internal Data
32 Bits
CAN SPC1
Internal
Unit CAN SPC2

Position CAN
Control Position order
Process Input
System Process Data interface Load/frequency Position
control Position order
treatment
Output Position order Position CAN SPC2
UPC : Unit Processing
Speed
Measurements
Diagram 5: Internal Structure of UPC
13/50 ABCD
467
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
2.2. Identification
CE
Serial number : XXXXX
24-220VDC / 3.8A-0.4A
90 Watt max.
1 2
TEST REMOTE PC
Diagram 6 : Label situated at the rear of the UPC module
2.3. Dimensions and total space required

Inside the cabinet, the UPC module must be incorporated underneath the SPC in order to avoid
thermal overheating, following a specific procedure. See Incorporation Guide.
Prof : 210mmm
Diagram 7: View of UPC module from the right
44.5mm= 1U
483mm = 19U
Diagram 8: View of Face of UPC module
The module is destined to be incorporated in cabinets of a standard size of 19 inches and a height of
1 U (see Diagram 8 in this manual). See Incorporation Guide for further details.
Please note: the UPC and SPC modules have almost the same dimensions and only differ through
their FRONT and REAR PANELS.
14/50 ABCD
468
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Diagram 9: Cabinet with NEYRPIC® T.SLG
2.4. Power Supply

2.4.1. Principle
Each UPC and SPC module must be protected with a fuse protection or a circuit
breaker. The safety function is not integrated with the modules. There are two
types of power supply for the supply of the T SLG in complete safety. See Table
5.
Connectors
Client circuit Supplementary Conversion Protection
used
DC No Assembly of single-pole circuit- UC1 with
breakers (see Diagram 10) ground circuit
between UC3
and UC2
AC (Example Yes EXTERNAL Assembly of single-pole circuit- UC2 without
220VAC) Standard Converters with breakers (see Diagram 11) ground circuit
integrated safety devices
Table 4: Configuration of general power supply
15/50 ABCD
469
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Circuit- UPC(N)
breaker
Circuit- UPC(S)
breaker
T SLG
Circuit- SPC1
breaker
Circuit- SPC24
General Filtering breaker
c.-breaker
Circuit- T.ADT
breaker
DC Circuit
Diagram 10: Structure of power supply in DC circuit

Circuit- AC/DC UPC(N)
XXX 24VDC
breaker
Circuit- AC/DC UPC(S)

XXX 24VDC
breaker
T SLG
Circuit- AC/DC SPC1
XXX 24VDC
breaker
Circuit- AC/DC SPC24

General Filtering XXX 24VDC
breaker
c.-breaker
Circuit- AC/DC NEYRPIC®

XXX 24VDC T.ADT
breaker
AC Circuit
Diagram 11: Structure of power supply in AC circuit with several AC/DC converters
Circuit- UPC(N)
breaker
Circuit- UPC(S)
breaker
T SLG
Circuit- SPC1
breaker
Circuit- SPC24
Disjoncteur Filtrage AC/DC breaker
général XXX 24VDC
Circuit- NEYRPIC®
T.ADT
breaker
Réseau AC
Diagram 12: Structure of power supply in AC circuit with one AC/DC converter
It is important to stick to the connections for the power-supply connector. See

section 2.4.3 for further details on power input/outputs. You will also find a wiring
example in Diagram 13.
16/50 ABCD
470
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Arrivée disjoncteur V+
Arrivée
Arrivéedisjoncteur V-V-
disjoncteur
Diagram 13: Connection on power-supply terminal board - Configuration DC Circuit
Arrivée disjoncteur V-
Arrivée disjoncteur
Arrivée V+V-
disjoncteur
Conversion AC/DC
Diagram 14: Connection on power-supply terminal board - Configuration AC Circuit
An example of the wiring in a DC-circuit configuration is shown in Diagram 15 below. A UPCN module
and an UPCS module are connected to the general power-supply. They are protected through circuit-
breaker compartments and a filtering compartment. The location of the circuit breakers in the cabinet
containing NEYRPIC® T.SLG is shown in Diagram 16.
17/50 ABCD
471
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Diagram 15: Wiring example - Client DC power supply
Circuit-
breakers
Diagram 16: Example of client power-supply rack
2.4.2. Power consumption

The maximum power consumed by the UPC module is 90 Watt.
18/50 ABCD
472
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
2.4.3. Internal Structure of Power Supply

UCC1
Convertisseur DC/DC non isolé
+15V3 Vbat
-6V3 +15V1
De 48 VDC à UC1
UC1-24V
5V1
Batterie 0V UCC3
220VDC Usine
UC1-GND
isolation >2800Vdc 0V1
-15V3 24Vdc
24vdc -15V1
UC3 -OC1 Entrées analogiques
Sortie UC3-24V +24V
convertisseur UC3-GND
24vdc 0V
+15V2
+VA 24vdc 5V2
-OC2 Sorties analogiques
0V 0V2
UCC4 -15V2
isolation >2800Vdc
isolation >2800Vdc
Opto-isolation
UCC2
Convertisseur DC/DC isolé
>2800Vdc
24 VDC
UC2 Protections 24Vdc +15Vcc - CPU
5Vcc - Communications
Entrée alim UC2-24V et
CPU 24vdc UC2-GND - OC3 Parties analogiques
Fitrage xxxx -SC1-SC2-SC3-SC4-SC5 tachymétrie
-15Vcc
Vis de
fixations de la
carte Opto-isolation
isolation >2800Vdc
masse
métallique du
chassis
UC4 +VA
Alimentation UC4-24V - IC1 Entrées logiques
IHM UC4-GND - IC2-IC3-IC4 Bobines relais
0V
Diagram 17: Structure of internal power-supply of UPC
In the event of a technical fault, check first whether it is not the power supply
which may have caused this. To do this, apply the methodology explained in
chapter on MAINTENANCE.
Power input
Marking for General
Types Number Characteristics
Identification information
Input
Range of input voltages: 48Vdc,
Internal UC1 – 24V A universal input (in
1 110Vdc, 125Vdc, 220Vdc with a
DC/DC GND VDC) for the entire range
tolerance of +15%/-20%
Converter
Range of input voltages 24Vdc, with
a tolerance of: +15%/-20%
Input for
UC2 – 24V A 24Vdc input for supply Resistance to micro-
Supply of 1
GND of CPU interruptions: 20ms
Module
Protection: against polarity
inversion
19/50 ABCD
473
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Power-Output
Marking for General
Types Number Characteristics
Identification information
3A
Output
Output to be connected 24Vdc +/-5% for battery inputs
Internal UC3 – 24V
1 to UC2, if no external (48/110/125/220Vdc)
DC/DC GND
converter Protection against accidental short-
Converter
circuits
1.5A
24Vdc +/-5% for battery inputs
HMI 24 VDC power-supply of (48/110/125/220Vdc)
UC4 – 24V
Power-supply 1 HMI and other small For supply of an HMI and other
GND
output devices small devices (TPA)
Protection against accidental short-
circuits
Table 5: Characteristics of power inputs of UPC module
2.5. Communications Interface
2.5.1. Front face

The Front Faces of the modules are as follows, all the fault signals and buttons are explained in Table
6.
Diagram 18: Indicators on Front Face of UPC module
Leds Colour Status Function

POWER White On All internal power-supplies are within the ranges
On The CPU is in a state where it is ready to operate
RUN Green
Off Major fault in CPU
MAJOR Red On Major process fault
MINOR Orange On Minor process fault
On Module monitors the process
UPC ACTIVE Green Off Module is in "Standby" of another UPC module
Flashing Module is in loader mode (Boot Loader)
REDUNDANCY communications link is properly
Flashing
REDUNDANCY Green established
Off Connection faulty or not used
FIELD BUS communications link with ?[word missing
Flashing
FIELD BUS Green in FR] is properly established
Off Connection faulty, none of the stations responds
CONTROL SYSTEM communications link is properly
CONTROL Flashing
Green established
SYSTEM
20/50 ABCD
474
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Flashing Communications link is properly established

FRONT PANEL Green
Off Connection faulty
Flashing PC communications link properly established
PC Verte
BUTTON Type Contact Function
Push-
ACK On closing Allows to reset major faults
button
Table 6: Front Face components
2.5.2. Rear Panel
Below an overall view of the connections located at the rear of the UPC. The illustration below shows
the inputs/outputs on SUB D9 terminal boards, the Ethernet ports and RS232 and RS485 serial
connectors. See APPENDIX 1 for further details on the Inputs/Outputs of the rear panel.
TPLC
communication
Sensor ETOR inputs Power input
CAN Analogue
Speed-measuring
Inter module inputs
Connection Analogue
HMI outputs STOR outputs
connection
Redundancy TT Speed-measuring
Connection
Diagram 19: Panel Rear UPC
Diagram 20: Marking of connectors on Rear Panel
21/50 ABCD
475
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
2.6. Types of Interfaces

Logical I/O
Types Number Id General Information Characteristics
ETOR inputs with opto-couplers will be Nominal input current: 10mA
controlled by a free dry potential Maximum input current: 12.5mA
contact Minimum trigger current 5 mA
ETOR (all- The ETOR inputs are insulated from Maximum non-trigger current 2mA
or-nothing 20 X4 the electronic mass, but they are not Nominal input voltage 24Vdc
inputs) insulated among themselves. Maximum input voltage 30Vdc
Electronics. Power (24Vdc) supplied by Time constant of input filter: 2ms
chip. This 24Vdc is at the battery Insulation voltage (TOR input/
contact. earthed) 2.8KVdc
This is an output with a dry contact,
normally open. The contact will be open
in the event of a fault.
X2, The fault is triggered by software or by
1 Load-breaking capacity in VAC:
X3 a major system fault, such as by a
1250VA 5A/250VAC and
watchdog timer, power-supply fault etc.
0.5A/125VDC
…
STOR (all- Coil voltage 24Vdc
or-nothing Coil consumption 200mW
with relays) The contacts are normally open, in the Insulation of dielectrics 4kvac
event of a major fault these outputs Typical change-over time 5ms
will be opened independently from the Insulation voltage (TOR input/
1 X2, software program. This function allows earthed) 2.8KVdc
16 X3 the paralleling of an output of two
modules or in order to have one single
client output in the configurations of
redundant modules.
Analogue I/O
Primary filtering: 16Hz
These inputs are for general use. Nominal input current: 0-20mA
EANA
These inputs are insulated from the Protection: against overloads
(standard
6 X5B earth and from the other power Input resistance: 250
analog
supplies, but they are not insulated Differential-type input
inputs)
among themselves. Insulation voltage: 2.8KVdc
CAN resolution: 12bits
This output is for remote signalling. The Bandwidth: 30Hz
outputs are insulated from the earth Nominal output current: 4-20mA
SANA
and the other power supplies, but they Protection: admits short-circuits
(standard
6 X5A are not insulated among themselves. Load range: from 0 Ohm to 500 Ohm
analog
In the event of a major fault, this output Insulation voltage for the outputs:
outputs)
is set at 0mA, independently from the 2.8KVdc
software. Resolution: 12bits
These outputs are for connecting a
Bandwidth: 30Hz min
RSANA measuring instrument, such as a
Nominal voltage output: +/- 10V
(Quick recorder or an acquisition PC.
2 X10 Protection: admits short-circuits
analog The outputs are not insulated from the
Load range: 〈 à 100 K Ohm
outputs) earth.
Resolution: 12bits
22/50 ABCD
476
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Specific I/O
1
Primary filtering: 34Hz
These inputs are for measuring
Frequency- Input impedance: 20KOhm
"Unit" and "circuit" frequencies
measuring 1 X6A Nominal input voltage: 0-60Veff
coming from a voltage transformer
inputs (TT) Input frequency range: 0 to 120Hz
Minimum detection threshold: 100mVeff
1 Primary filtering: 10KHz

Frequency- These inputs are for measuring Input impedance: 2K Ohm
measuring "Unit" frequencies coming from a Supply voltage of sensor:
inputs by 1 X6B speed sensor mounted on a 30Vdc +/-5%
speed toothed wheel coupled to the Input frequency range: 0 to 3.5KHz
sensor turbine shaft. Max. current limited to input: 15 mA
1
Table 7: I/O Characteristics
2.7. Wiring
2.7.1. Wire Kit with SPC
Table 8 shows the different types of wires to be used for the connections between the UPC and SPC
modules. See Incorporation Guide for further details.
Configuration Type of
Connection Length Comments
cable/wire
End resistance of
UPC (N,E) with1
UPC to only SPC 1 0.20m 120 Ohms at both
SPC
ends
End resistance of
UPC to first SPC 4 0.20m 120 Ohms UPC
side
UPC (N,E) with
several SPC SPC to SPC 3 0.20m No end
End resistance
SPC to last SPC 2 0.20m
SPC side
Table 8: Wires to be used for installation
23/50 ABCD
477
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
2.7.1.1. Wiring topology with one SPC

In this topology without redundancy, only one connection cable is used for the connections between
the UPC and SPC modules. See Incorporation Guide and Table 8. An example is shown in Diagram
18.
UPC
X11A-UPC
Câble X11B-SPC SPC

type 1
Diagram 21: Example of wiring between 1 UPC and 1 SPC without redundancy
2.7.1.2. Wiring topology with several SPC

In this topology without redundancy, several connection cables are used for the connection between
the UPC and SPC modules. See Incorporation Guide and Table 8 for further details. An example is
also shown in Diagram 21.
24/50 ABCD
478
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
UPC
X11A-UPC
Câble X11B-SPC SPC1

type 4
X11A-SPC
Câble X11B-SPC SPC n-1

type 3
X11A-SPC
Câble X11B-SPC SPC n

type 2
Diagram 22: Example of wiring with several SPC
2.7.2. Wire kit with HMI and NEYRPIC® T.SOFT
Connection Length Comments
cable/wire
UPC with HMI SUB D9 Type

Serial 2 .0 m -
INT1-HMI
UPC with PC Crossed

Crossed Ethernet 2.0 m -
Ethernet
Wiring principle: for HMI, connect the male end designated as X7-UPC to the X7B connector (HMI) of
UPC while the female end (X-HMI) is connected to the RS485 connector of the "HMI". See Diagram
22.
For NEYRPIC® T.SOFT, connect UPC to PC with a simple Ethernet cable connection which will be
supplied. See Diagram 23.
25/50 ABCD
479
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Diagram 23: Wiring with HMI
X11A-UPC
UPC
PC Crossed
Ethernet
cable
Ethernet
Diagram 24: Wiring with NEYRPIC® T.SOFT
In the event that several different modules communicating with HMI must be
used, you must use an XLINK interface, which is a SUB D9 with several inputs
and only one outgoing cable to the HMI screen. See Diagram 24 for illustration.
Diagram 25: Connection with XLINK Interface
26/50 ABCD
480
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
2.7.3. Wiring Kit for UPC redundancy
Connection Length
cable
UPC (Normal)
SUB D9 Type
with UPC UPC to UPC 0.20m
1
(Emergency)
Wiring principle: connect the end designated as X11B-UPCN to the X11B connector (Redundancy) of
UPC normal, while the X11B-UPCS end should be connected to the X11B connector (Redundancy) of
UPC Emergency.
UPC Emergency
Serial
X11B-UPCN X11B-UPCS
cable
UPC Normal
Diagram 26: UPC Redundancy wiring
2.8. Specifications and standards

Operating temperature
Operating temperature From 0°C to +55°C ambient temperature
Storage temperature From –40°C to +70°C
CEI 68-2-2 (SN 62 1008.D) Dry-heat testing at +55°C for 16 hours
CEI 68-2-3 (SN 62 1008.D) Humid-heat testing at +40°C and 93% humidity for 96 hours
CEI 68-2-1 (SN 62 1008.D) Cold-resistance tests at –5°C ± 2°C
Mechanical resistance
CEI 255-21-1 (class C-III) Vibration tests
27/50 ABCD
481
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
CEM Protection
EN 55011 (class A) : Line disturbances on the power circuit
Group 1 Electrical component of radiation disturbance field.
CEI 61000-4-2 (level 3) Protection against electrostatic discharge.
CEI 61000-4-3 (level 3) Protection against external electromagnetic radiation.
CEI 61000-4-4 (level 4) Protection against rapid spikes (in bursts)
CEI 61000-4-5 (5Kv +0%/-10%
Protection against 'lightning'-type shock waves.
peak value)
CEI 61000-4-6 (level 3) Protection against line disturbances induced by radio-electric fields.
CEI 61000-4-11 (level N1 et
Protection against low-voltage dips and micro-interruptions.
N2)
CEI 61000-4-12 (class 3) Protection against high-voltage interferences
Insulation
General safety precautions to be taken for electrical equipment
CEI 61010-1
destined for professional or industrial use or educational purposes
2800Vdc dielectric resistance, testing no voltage
CEI 60255-5
>10M Ohm Insulation Resistance, testing no voltage
Table 9: Specifications and Standards
28/50 ABCD
482
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
3. INSTALLATION OF UPC
3.1. Checks
The UPC box must never be open. The system does not require any particular
monitoring when in normal operating mode. However, you are well advised to
carry out visual checks of the connections.
3.2. Operations
Undo connections between power supply and UPC module.
Monitor voltage on UCC1 at nominal value as indicated.
Check power-supply network no Is the voltage

measured right?
yes
Disconnect power-supply, then reconnect it at the input of

UPC module.
no Does the POWER

indicator come on?
Check supply voltage after having disconnected

yes
Make the connections described in the Incorporation Guide

Launch T.SOFT software to configure the operating
environment work. See T.SOFT User Guide
Supply voltage right?

no
yes Check wiring of its power supply
Exchange module.
See Chapter on EXCHANGE
yes
Wiring correct?
Find wiring fault
no
29/50 ABCD
483
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
4. MAINTENANCE OF UPC
4.1. Preventive Maintenance
4.1.1. Checks
The UPC box must never be open.
This equipment does not require any particular monitoring when in normal
operating mode. However, if the device is exposed to an extremely humid or acid
climatic environment, you are well advised to carry out visual checks of the
connections.
4.1.2. Necessary Precautions

Avoid any splashing with liquids on and, above all, inside the machine. In the event of accidental
contact of any of the units or connectors with a liquid, make sure the machine is off as soon as
possible. Do not put the machine back on unless you have cleaned and dried all the parts that were
affected.
4.2. Corrective maintenance

4.2.1. Possible types of maintenance
- Without software tools

- With HMI only
- With NEYRPIC® T.SOFT ("Light" or "Full" only)
4.2.2. Fault categories

In the event of a technical fault, there are four different types of fault or defect:
- Material defect: all the faults related to the power-supply circuit of the rack (fuses, short-
circuit, converter out of order, etc.)
- Major fault in CPU: blocks the functioning of the software program. It is a sign that there is
a fault either in the UPC module or a power-supply problem of +5V.
- Major application fault: this is the detection of an internal fault by UPC
- Minor application fault: this type of fault does not affect the operation of the governor.
However, depending on the type of fault, the governor may change over into a different
operating mode (see operating notes on governor).
30/50 ABCD
484
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
4.2.3. Fault Indicators

The first three types of faults bring the NEYRPIC® T.SLG to a standstill. The faults are indicated by
light indicators on the Front Face of the rack or on the HMI and NEYRPIC® T.SOFT screens.
4.2.4. Resetting Faults

Major fault: this type of fault has to be resolved by pressing the push-button on the front face of the
UPC or by using the HMI, or by using NEYRPIC® T.SOFT.
Minor fault: this type of fault is automatically resolved as soon as the fault disappears.
31/50 ABCD
485
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
4.3. Methodology of repairs

Outset
Identify major fault(s)

Bring turbines to a standstill and take necessary
safety precautions
Disconnect UPC then reconnect UPC
LED
yes POWER no see graph
on? A
See
graph E
yes LED RUN no see graph

on?
B
TSOFT no HMI no
available? available?
Fix the fault(s), following

the instructions in section
4.3.1.1 of this manual
yes Yes
see
Connect a PC to UPC graph F
Launch TSOFT See TSOFT
User Guide, sec. 2 and 3
Contact ALSTOM
TSOFT
yes UPC no
connection
properly
established
Make sure the Ethernet cable is properly connected

Make sure that TSOFT is properly installed on PC
See T SOFT User Guide, sec. 2 and 3 relevant
sections in this manual
see graph
C Launch TSOFT See TSOFT
User guide sec. 2 and 3
TSOFT
yes UPC no
connection
properly
made?
32/50 ABCD
486
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Graph A
General power- yes

supply problem?
Check voltages on DC or AC
circuits
no
yes Power-supply Poor network yes

problem of supply?
UPC?
Check its supply voltage once
you have disconnected it Repair power-supply
no network
do methodologie acc. to no
sec.3.3, 3.4, 3.5 of this manual
Good supply no
voltage?
Check wiring of its

yes power supply
Exchange module.
see Chapter
EXCHANGE Wiring yes
correct?
Check ventilation of
no modules
Fix wiring fault
Ventilation yes
correct?
Exchange module.
see Chapter
EXCHANGE Contact ALSTOM
no
Rectify ventilation of
modules. See Incorporation
Guide
Exchange module.
see Chapter
EXCHANGE
33/50 ABCD
487
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Graph B
Turn power
supply of UPC off,
then back on
again
LED RUN no
on?
yes Turn power

supply of UPC off,
then back on
again
yes LED RUN

on?
no
Exchange UPC
See Chapter Exchange
Contact ALSTOM
See
graph E
34/50 ABCD
488
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Graph C
Open a session if this has not been

done already. See TSOFT User Guide,
sec 7; wait 10 seconds
yes TSOFT no Make sure TSOFT is properly installed.

connected? See TSOFT User Guide sec. 7
LED PC no
on? Check wiring between TSOFT and PC
yes
yes LED PC no Exchange UPC
on? See Chapter Exchange
Contact ALSTOM
Select required required operator level
See TSOFT User Guide sec. 13
Set TSOFT parameters

See TSOFT User Guide sec 15
see graph
Set date. See TSOFT D
User Guide sec 22
Put TSOFT in maintenance mode
no
no
See faults
Inspect UPC to fix the faults and reset Are the fault yes MAJOR fault
dates correct? reset?
MAJOR faults
MINOR faults get automatically resolved once they have

been fixed. See sec. 19 of TSOFT User Guide to see
chronology of faults
Examples of faults are shown in section…
35/50 ABCD
489
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Graph D
Inspect UPC once again to fix faults and reset

MAJOR faults
See TSOFT User Guide section 18
MAJOR Use Incorporation notes supplied

faults and see relev. section of this manual
acquitted? no for further details on the wiring
reset faults
yes
MAJOR
yes faults no
reset?
Test and view Inputs/Outputs of

UPC. See TSOFT User Guide,
section 16 and incorporation diagram Exchange UPC
Contact ALSTOM
Tests no Check required operator level

accessible? See TSOFT User Guide, sec. 13
yes
See section 13 for further details on the

tests with TSOFT
Set UPC parameters. See TSOFT User
Guide, sec. 23, 25, 26, and 27
36/50 ABCD
490
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Graph F
Launch HMI. See HMI Cf. User Guide

wait 10 seconds
yes HMI live? no Check power supply of HMI and make sure that the
power supply of HMI is sufficient
LED of HMI no Check wiring between HMI

on UPC and UPC
on? See incorporation diagram
no
yes yes LED of HMI Exchange UPC
on UPC See Chapter Exchange
on? Contact ALSTOM
Select operator level
See HMI User guide
Set date. See HMI

User guide
Set parameters of HMI (Date, Language, …)
See HMI User guide
see graph
G
yes
no
Impossible Select right no
to change operator level
settings?
Are the fault yes MAJOR faults

dates reset?
no correct?
See faults yes

Inspect UPC to fix faults and reset MINOR faults get resolved automatically once they
MAJOR faults have been fixed. See HMI User Guide for the
See HMI User guide chonology of faults.
Examples of faults are shown in section…
37/50 ABCD
491
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Graph G
Inspect UPC once again to fix faults and reset

MAJOR faults
See HMI User Guide
MAJOR Use Incorporation notes supplied and

faults see relevant section of this manual for
reset? further details on the wiring
Reset faults
yes
MAJOR
yes faults no
reset?
Test and view UPC Inputs/Outputs.

See HMI User Guide and
incorporation diagram Exchange UPC
Contact ALSTOM
Tests no Check required operator level

accessible? See HMI User Guide
yes
See sec. 13 for further details on the tests

with HMI
Set UPC parameters. See HMI User Guide
38/50 ABCD
492
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
4.3.1. Examples of faults

4.3.1.1. Viewing faults on the Front Face direct
A variety of precautions may be taken to avoid a technical fault or breakdown of the UPC. Here are
some of the most common faults to help you ensure proper maintenance of the system. See section
1.6.1 of this manual for the names of LEDs on the Front Face.
LED What does it mean? How to fix it
HMI off Connection between UPC and Check that the cable between UPC and HMI is
MINOR FAULT on HMI faulty/non-existent properly connected. See section 2.7.1
POWER off Fault in UPC power supply Check the status of the general power supply, then
®
of the power-supply unit of the NEYRPIC T.SLG
cabinet and try again
If the problem persists, exchange the module
MAJOR FAULT on Major faults Check NEYRPIC® T.SLG unit
Reduced power supply
PC off Connection with NEYRPIC® Check cable between PC and UPC

MINOR FAULT on T.SOFT faulty
RUN off MAJOR System fault Contact ALSTOM Hydro Power or exchange the
UPC module
MINOR FAULT on MINOR process fault See examples of MAJOR and MINOR faults
HMI off No HMI used Check that the connection between the UPC and
HMI is properly made. See section 2.7.2 of this
manual.
In topology without HMI, don't do anything.
Table 10: Faults of UPC module
4.3.1.2. Viewing faults with HMI

Here are some of the most common faults to help you ensure proper maintenance of the UPC.
UPC Faults Action

HMI LED HMI off Connection between Check that cable between UPC
HMI Screen shows LED "MINOR FAULT" UPC and HMI faulty/non- and HMI is properly connected
"UPC not connected" off existent See section 2.7.2 of this manual
There is a major fault in
the "Faults" area. LED POWER off Fault in power supply of Check power supply, then turn
HMI screen is off UPC power on
(screen is black) Fault in power supply of Check power supply of HMI,
HMI then turn power on
Table 11: Example of faults on HMI – UPC
39/50 ABCD
493
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
4.3.1.3. Viewing faults with NEYRPIC® T.SOFT

Here are some of the most common faults to help you ensure proper maintenance of the system.
NEYRPIC® Faults Action

UPC
T.SOFT
MINOR fault LED HMI off Connection between UPC Check that cable between UPC
showing in the LED "MINOR and HMI faulty/non-existent and HMI is properly connected
common faults and FAULT" on
in the chronology of
faults LED POWER off Fault in power supply of Check general power supply,
UPC ventilation, power supply of
modules, then turn power back on.
See section 4.2.4
PC suddenly off None T.SOFT connection faulty Check power supply of PC
Relaunch T.SOFT
T.SOFT Off Line None T.SOFT connection faulty Check that the wiring between PC
and UPC is done.
Table 12: Example of faults NEYRPIC® T.SOFT – UPC
4.3.2. Testing with HMI

To view the values taken by the testing points marked in the wiring diagram contained in APPENDIX
1, you must:
- Select from the HMI screen the galvanometer of your choice
- Choose the module on which the testing is to be carried out
- Select the input or the output to be viewed
See section 9 of HMI User Guide for further details.
4.3.3. Testing with NEYRPIC® T.SOFT
4.3.3.1. Spy Mode and Master
When simultaneously operated together with HMI, NEYRPIC® T.SOFT takes the
priority over the operations to be performed. As soon as T.SOFT is connected, it
is in so-called "Master" Mode and HMI remains inactive during this time.
As soon as NEYRPIC® T.SOFT has been disconnected, the governing process is controlled by HMI. It
is then possible to use NEYRPIC® T.SOFT; however in "Spy" Mode this time, if the operator does not
want to stop HMI. In this configuration, NEYRPIC® T.SOFT will only access NEYRPIC® T.SLG in
"read-only" mode, i.e. it is not possible to make any changes. See NEYRPIC® T.SOFT User Guide,
section 11 for further details.
40/50 ABCD
494
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
4.3.3.2. Testing points

In maintenance mode, you can view the inputs and preset the outputs of the module to test the wiring.
Testing points have been integrated in the UPC to improve general maintenance. These testing points
can be viewed and selected from NEYRPIC® T.SOFT. The operator may thus act on the UPC system
through NEYRPIC® T.SOFT indirectly. To view the value of a testing point, you must:
- Select the UPC system
- Select the testing point to be viewed
- View or modify the value of the testing point
Remember the restriction as far as the viewing and changes of the settings are
concerned. The same goes for the testing points. See TSOFT User Guide,
section 16 for further details.
4.3.3.3. Example of a test

As shown in Diagram 26, testing points can be viewed in NEYRPIC® T.SOFT. Diagrams 27 and 28
are linked to these testing points and are drawn from the "Incorporation Diagram". Two examples are
contained in APPENDIX 2.
The operator may, thus, compare the physical with the virtual testing points. This example shows the
display of points OE, RO-T or R5.
Designations of
testing points
Testing Points
Diagram 27: Testing points on NEYRPIC® T.SOFT

Marking related to the UPC chip
41/50 ABCD
495
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
Diagram 28: Physical marking of OE analogue input related to NEYRPIC® T.SOFT
Diagram 29: Marking of RO-T, R5 logical inputs related to NEYRPIC® T.SOFT
42/50 ABCD
496
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
5. EXCHANGING MODULES
Each UPC module has automatic settings to compensate for input or output errors. This is also known
as "Firmware". This term designates the settings of the module put on by the manufacturer.
It is not necessary to carry out any settings while a module is being exchanged, as the NEYRPIC®
T.SLG system has been designed to avoid this.
The modules also have a 'fool-proofing' system to avoid positioning errors of the module in the rack.
5.1. Exchanging a UPC module
- Disconnect the NEYRPIC® T.SLG system

- Withdraw terminal boards from module
- Unscrew the four screws which hold the panel at the rack
- Take the module out towards the front
- Insert replacement module into the positioning guides
- Tighten the four fixing screws of the module
- Reconnect the terminal boards
- Reload the application software program NEYRPIC® T.SOFT which is supplied with the
module and reload the settings saved when putting the machine into operation (see User
Guide of TSOFT document n°4012)
- Check that the fault has actually disappeared and re-launch the module
43/50 ABCD
497
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
6. APPENDICES
APPENDIX 1: Input/Output wiring
44/50 ABCD
498
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
APPENDIX 1
STANDARD ANALOGUE INPUTS
Source of current
0-20mA 250 Ω
Galvanic Filtering
Differential
Insulation
amplification
1:1
Client circuits UPC
Diagram 30: Example of wiring for testing STANDARD ANALOGUE INPUTS

ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
X5/A-3
Load range
0-500Ω
X5/A-4
Galvanic
Insulation
1 :1 UPC
Client circuits
Diagram 31: Example of wiring for testing ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Do not connect without galvanic insulator if the user input (-) is directly linked to the earth.
45/50 ABCD
499
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
ALL-OR-NOTHING INPUTS
Cry-contact-relays Polarity
+24 V
V+ client distribution
X4 - 11
V- client
X4 – 1, 2, 3, 4
Client circuits
0V UPC
Diagram 32: Example of wiring for testing ALL-OR-NOTHING INPUTS
46/50 ABCD
500
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
ALL-OR-NOTHING WITH "STOR"-RELAYS
Outputs concerned
Outputs concerned
The relays are of type PE 014 024 – brand name: SHRACK. The outputs are all insulated and the
contacts are normally open. As for output no. IC2_01, the contact will be opened in the event of a
fault. The fault is triggered by the software or by a major system fault, such as a watchdog timer or a
power-supply fault.
Diagram 33: load-breaking capacity of an output in VDC
47/50 ABCD
501
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
QUICK ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Measuring instrument
Path 1
+ /- 10V
Path 2
Mass
Power-supply insulated from earth UPC
Diagram 34: Example of wiring for testing QUICK ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
FREQUENCY-MEASURING INPUTS (TT)
X6/A-3
380V
220V
127V 50V CPU
100V 20KΩ
58V
0V
X6/A-2
Transformer
STS-B2315B
UPC
Diagram 35: Characteristics of a TT input
48/50 ABCD
502
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
FREQUENCY-MEASURING INPUTS VIA SPEED SENSORS
X6/B-3
+15V
IA 5122
CPU
Signal X6/B-2
Sensor 2 wires
2KΩ
UPC
-15V
Diagram 36: Example of wiring for testing an input
49/50 ABCD
503
UPC TECHNICAL NOTES
GLOSSARY
A N
Access.............................................................................. 10 Navigation......................................................................... 10
All-or-nothing outputs with relays ..................................... 20 Neyrpic ............................................................................. 10
All-or-nothing inputs ......................................................... 20
Automatic Settings ........................................................... 40 O
Outputs ...............................................................................6
B
P
-
Panel ................................................................................ 20
C Settings............................................................................. 40
Precautions................................................................. 27, 36
Cable................................................................................ 22 Preventive................................................................... 26, 27
Category........................................................................... 27 Product ...............................................................................6
Cabinet............................................................................... 7 Protection.......................................................................... 25
Checks ....................................................................... 26, 27 Power ............................................................................... 17
Circuit ............................................................................... 11
Control ............................................................................. 10
Connection ......................................................................... 8 R
Corrective......................................................................... 27
Rack ...................................................................................7
D Rapid analogue outputs ................................................... 21
Redundancy.................................................................... 6, 9
Dimension .................................................................... 9, 10 Regulating...........................................................................6
Repair ............................................................................... 29
E
Ethernet............................................................................ 19 S
Safety device .................................................................... 15
F Sensors ..............................................................................7
Servomotor .........................................................................7
Fault ................................................................................. 36
Screen .............................................................................. 10
Fault indicators................................................................. 28
SPC .............................................................................. 9, 21
Fault signals .................................................................... 19
Specifications.................................................................... 25
Firmware ...................................................................... 9, 40
Standards ......................................................................... 25
Flexibility ............................................................................ 7
Standard analogue inputs ................................................. 20
Front Face........................................................................ 19
System.............................................................................. 28
I
T
Identification ..................................................................... 13 ®
NEYRPIC T.ADT...............................................................7
Inputs ................................................................................. 6
Terminal Boards ............................................................... 19
Installation .......................................................................... 7 ®
NEYRPIC T.SLG..................................................... 6, 7, 10
Insulation.......................................................................... 25
NEYRPIC® T.SOFT .......................................................... 11
Interface/s .................................................................... 6, 20
Tactile ............................................................................... 10
International ................................................................. 9, 10
Temperature ..................................................................... 25
Test/-ing..............................................................................9
K TT ................................................................................. 7, 21
Kit............................................................................... 23, 24
U
L
UPC ............................................................................ 19, 25
Level ................................................................................ 10
V
M
Speed .................................................................................6
Maintenance............................................................... 10, 27
Mechanical ....................................................................... 25
W
Methodology..................................................................... 29
Window............................................................................. 11
Module ....................................................................7, 11, 13
Wire
Wiring
50/50 ABCD
504
!
505
23
DOCUMENTATION
To provide additional information concerning installation, operation and maintenance of the

NEYRPIC® T.SLG, other manuals are available. See the table below for more details:
General documents
Manual no. Title
®
4017 Installation Guide for NEYRPIC T.SLG modules.
4014 UPC module Description/Installation/Maintenance manual
4015 SPC module Description/Installation/Maintenance manual
4016 NEYRPIC® T.ADT Description/Installation/Maintenance manual
4013 HMI User Manual
4012 NEYRPIC® T.SOFT User Manual
4036 NEYRPIC® T.ADT operating manual
Project Documents
Functional diagram
List of inputs and outputs
General layout
Cabinet cabling diagram
Controller operating manual
506
23
CONTENT
1 SPC DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................................5

1.1 Internal structure ................................................................................................................5
1.2 Identification .......................................................................................................................5
1.3 Dimensions and space requirements ...............................................................................5
1.4 Power supply ......................................................................................................................6
1.4.1 Principle .............................................................................................................................................6
1.4.2 Consumption ...............................................................................................................................7
1.4.3 Internal structure of the power supply .....................................................................................7
1.4.4 Inputs/Outputs .............................................................................................................................8
1.5 Communications interface.................................................................................................8
1.5.1 Front panel .........................................................................................................................................8
1.5.2 Rear panel ...................................................................................................................................9
1.5.3 Input/output Characteristics ....................................................................................................10
1.6 Amplification.....................................................................................................................10
1.6.1 Amplification for ALSTOM actuators......................................................................................11
1.6.2 Amplification for generic actuators .........................................................................................11
1.7 Cabling ..............................................................................................................................13
1.8 Specifications and standards ..........................................................................................13
2 SPC Installation................................................................................................................................13
2.1 Testing ..............................................................................................................................13
2.2 Operation ..........................................................................................................................13
3 SPC maintenance ...........................................................................................................................13
3.1 Preventive maintenance...................................................................................................14
3.1.1 Testing ........................................................................................................................................14
3.1.2 Precautions ................................................................................................................................14
3.2 Corrective maintenance ...................................................................................................14
3.2.1 Types of maintenance possible ..............................................................................................14
3.2.2 Fault classification ....................................................................................................................14
3.2.3 Fault indication ..........................................................................................................................15
3.3 Direct repair on the UPC or SPC......................................................................................15
3.3.1 Front panel indicators...............................................................................................................15
3.3.2 Examples of faults between the UPC and SPC (Modules) ................................................15
4 REPLACEMENT ................................................................................................................................17
4.1 Replacing an SPC module ...............................................................................................17
5 APPENDICES...............................................................................................................................................18
507
23
UPC: Unit Processing Controller ETOR: Digital inputs
SPC: Servo Processing Controller STOR: Digital outputs
HMI: Human Machine Interface EANA: Analogue inputs
I/O: Inputs/Outputs SANA : Analogue outputs
LED: Light Emitting Diode
NEYRPIC® T.SOFT: Turbine Software
NEYRPIC® T.ADT: Turbine Auxiliary Digital Tachometer
NEYRPIC®T.SLG: Turbine Speed Load Governor
TABLES
Table 1: SPC module power supply input characteristics .............................................................................. 8
Table 2: Front panel elements ............................................................................................................. 8
Table 3: Input/output Characteristics .................................................................................................... 10
Table 4: UPC and SPC module faults .................................................................................................. 16
FIGURES
Figure 1: Internal structure of the SPC.................................................................................................... 5
Figure 2: Label located on the rear of the SPC module ................................................................................ 5
Figure 3: Right view of SPC module ...................................................................................................... 6
Figure 4: Front view of SPC module ...................................................................................................... 6
Figure 5: NEYRPIC T.SLG installation cabinet ......................................................................................... 6
®
Figure 6: Internal structure of the SPC power supply ................................................................................... 7

Figure 7: SPC module front panel indicators ............................................................................................. 8
Figure 8: SPC module rear panel.......................................................................................................... 9
Figure 9: rear panel connector layout ..................................................................................................... 9
Figure 10: Amplification structure for ALSTOM actuators ............................................................................ 11
Figure 11: Amplification structure for generic actuators .............................................................................. 12
Figure 12: Example of cabling to test SANA outputs .................................................................................. 19
Figure 13: Example of cabling for 2-wire sensor....................................................................................... 20
Figure 16: Cabling of IS1 inputs ......................................................................................................... 21
Figure 17: Test cabling for IS3 and IS4 outputs ....................................................................................... 22
Figure 18: Load-breaking capacity of an inuput in VDC .............................................................................. 22
508
23
1 SPC DESCRIPTION
1.1 Internal structure

SPC is one of the NEYRPIC®T.SLG modules. It performs closed-loop control of a servomotor
in single or double position loop modes. It has a universal amplifier that can drive all types of
actuators. Designed to work in the harshest environments, its principal characteristics are its
high flexibility, robustness, and reliability.
Figure 1: Internal structure of the SPC
1.2 Identification
Serial number :
Figure 2: Label located on the rear of the SPC module
1.3 Dimensions and space requirements

In the cabinet, the UPC must be mounted below the SPCs to avoid overheating, in
accordance with established procedure. See Installation guide.
509
23
Depth: 170mm
Figure 3: Right view of SPC module
44.5mm = 1U
483mm = 19"
Figure 4: Front view of SPC module
The module is designed to be mounted in standard 19” rack-mount cabinets and is 1U high.
See figure 4 in this manual. See installation guide for more details.
NB: The UPC and the SPC have approximately the same dimensions and only differ in their
front and back panels.
®
Figure 5: NEYRPIC T.SLG installation cabinet
1.4 Power supply
1.4.1 Principle
See UPC instructions.
510
23
1.4.2 Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the SPC module is 170 watts. For the characteristics of
the fuses used, see the Installation Guide.
1.4.3 Internal structure of the power supply

UCS1
+15V3 Vbat
-6V3
US1 Alim Puissance
US1-24V
Batterie 0V des amplificateurs
US1-GND
Usine
-15V3 24Vdc
UCS3
US3
US3-24V +24V
Sortie +VA 24vdc alim
convertisseur US3-GND -SS1 amplificateur TR10
Cde -SS2 amplificateur ED12 ED25
24vdc 0V amplificateurs
0V
0V
isolation >2800Vdc
Opto-isolation
UCS2
>2800Vdc
- CPU
- Communications
US2
Entrée Protections 24Vdc +15Vcc -OS1 Entrées analogiques
US2-24V 5Vcc -OS2 Sorties analogiques
alim CPU et -SS3 Actionneur du commerce
24vdc US2-GND
Fitrage xxxx
-15Vcc -IS2 codage poste
GND-A
Vis de
fixations de la
carte Opto-isolation
UCS4 isolation >2800Vdc
masse
>2120Vdc
métallique du
Alimentation US4-24V 1à 4 chassis
24vdc +VA
Capteurs 4fils US4-GND - IS1 Entrées logiques
de OS1 - IS3-IS4-IS5-IS6 Bobines relais
24vdc
0V
Figure 6: Internal structure of the SPC power supply
When a failure occurs, first check that it is not a power supply problem.
511
23
1.4.4 Inputs/Outputs
Power supply inputs

Type Number ID mark General Characteristics
Range of input voltages 48Vdc, 110Vdc,
125Vdc, 220Vdc with tolerance of +15%/-
24V dc US1 – 24V A universal input (in VDC) for 20%
1
Converter Input GND the entire range Resistant to power line disturbances of
20ms without actuators
Protection: polarity inversion
Range of input voltages 24Vdc, with
CPU Power US2 – 24V A 24Vdc input to supply the
1 tolerance of +15%/-20%
supply input GND CPU
Protection: polarity inversion
Power supply outputs
Type Number ID mark General Characteristics
24V dc Output to be connected to
US3 – 24V 24VDC +/-5%
Converter 1 US2 if there is no external
GND
output converter
Each sensor is supplied with 24VDC +/-5%
Sensor power US4 – 24V
4 24Vdc at max. 250mA from 4 x 250mA per position sensor
supply outputs GND
this converter Accidental short-circuit protection
Table 1: SPC module power supply input characteristics
1.5 Communications interface
1.5.1 Front panel

The module front panels are shown in figure 16, all of the indicators and controls are given in table 6.
Figure 7: SPC module front panel indicators
LED Colour State Function

POWER White On All internal power supplies are within tolerance
RUN Green On The CPU is working
Off Major system fault
ACTUATOR ON Green On Amplifier working
FAULT Orange On Closed loop control position error
(“OR” function for minor and major faults)
FIELD BUS S Green On The SPC is being controlled by FIELD BUS S
ACTIVE Off The SPC is being controlled by FIELD BUS N
FIELD BUS N Green Blinking FIELD BUS N normal communication with the UPC has
been correctly established
On Configuration error in the UPC number
Off Communication error
FIELD BUS S Green Blinking FIELD BUS S communication with the backup UPC has
been correctly established
On Configuration error in the UPC number
Off Communication error or not in use
Table 2: Front panel elements
512
23
1.5.2 Rear panel
The picture below shows all of the SPC module rear panel connections. You can see the
inputs/outputs implemented via SUB D9 connectors and the RS232 and RS485 serial
connectors. See APPENDIX 1 for more details on the rear panel inputs & outputs.
Bacjup CAN Distributor position

connection sensor input TOR
Inputs/outputs Power supply
Normal CAN Actuator

SPC address coding* Servomotor position Configuration*
connection Analogue Command
for local network sensor input generaic actuator
outputs
outputs Configuration* 3A/6A
for ED25 actualtors
* See SPC operating instructions.
Figure 8: SPC module rear panel
Figure 9: rear panel connector layout
513
23
1.5.3 Input/output Characteristics
Logical I/O
Type Number ID General Characteristics

IS1 The opto-isolated ETOR inputs Nominal input current: 10mA
ETOR ( Digital inputs) 4 will be driven by a dry zero- Maximum input current: 12.5mA
voltage contact. Minimum triggering current: 5mA
Nominal input voltage: 24Vdc
Maximum input voltage: 30Vdc
OS1 These differential inputs are 1st order filtering: 16Hz
EANA ( Standard 4 dedicated to position Nominal input current: 0-20mA
analogue inputs) measurement Protection: overload
Input resistance: 250 ohms
Insulation voltage: 2.8KVdc
IS5 A normally open dry contact
1 output The contact will default to Switching capacity in VAC : 1250VA
open in the case of a fault. 5A/250Vac and 0.5A/125VDC
A fault is triggered by the program Coil voltage 24Vdc
or a major system error. Coil power consumption 200mW
STOR (Digital outputs) Dielectric insulation 4kvac
IS6
1 These contacts are normally Switching time 5ms nominal
open. In the case of a major Insulation voltage (between contacts/ ground)
fault, they are open independent 2.8KVdc
from the program.
IS3, IS4 Opto-isolated static outputs Nominal voltage: 24Vdc
STOR (Digital output) 5 intended to drive a relay. Maximum current: 100mA
Insulation voltage: 2,8KVdc
OS2 This output is provided for the Pass band: 30Hz
SANA (Standard analogue 1 implementation of remote Nominal output current: 4-20mA
output) displays. They are isolated from Protection: tolerates short-circuits
ground and other power supplies Load range: 0 ohm to 500 ohms
but not from each other. Output insulation voltage : 2.8KVdc
Resolution: 12bits
Table 3: Input/output Characteristics
1.6 Amplification
The SPC module, via its amplifier block, has 6 possible outputs:
- 2 to drive standard actuators of the ALSTOM TR10, ED12, ED25 types
- 4 to drive standard generic actuators
The correct standard is chosen, at installation, using the NEYRPIC® T.SOFT program.
The selected amplifier start/stop command is cut by hardware in the case of a major fault.
514
23
1.6.1 Amplification for ALSTOM actuators
Alim driver1 24Vdc
isolation >2800KVdc
Cde PW M 1
CPU Cde
PW M 1a / 1b 1a 2a
Actionneur
M/A
PW M TR10
CPU
M/A
M/A
Control Cde (1A)
2a / 2b 2b 1b
VAL_ TR10 Limitation
CPU Validation de Courant
0Vdc
Alim driver2
24Vdc
Actionneurs
ED12 (3A)
PW M
ED25 (6A)
PW M
M/A
Control
VAL _ ED Limitation Limitation
CPU Validation
de Courant Configuration
3A
Sur face
arrière
6A
Alim driver1 0Vdc

24Vdc Alim driver2
Contrôle Contrôle que

alimentations l'amplificateur
OK validé est OK
AMPLI _OK
ALSTOM Amplificateurs
Superviseur
CPU
Partie Actionneurs ALSTOM
Figure 10: Amplification structure for ALSTOM actuators
1.6.2 Amplification for generic actuators

For generic actuators, the amplifier can drive four standard interfaces through a switch
515
23
located at the rear of the module.
- Voltage: +/-10V
- Current 4-20mA (500 ohms max load)
- Current +/-20mA (500 ohms max load)
- Current +/-100mA (100 ohms max load)
Encodeur 2 vers 4
Conf 4-20mA
CPU 4-20mA
1 Setting
+/-10V
2 A
+/-20mA
3 B
+/-100mA
4
+/-15Vdc et +5Vdc
+15Vdc
Cde PWM 2
CPU
PWM
PWM Mise +/-10Vdc

Actionneur
du
M/A M/A
Control en forme commerce
VAL _mA/V
CPU Validation
AMPLI _OK
-15Vdc
Commerce
AMPLI _OK
CPU OU
AMPLI _OK
ALSTOM
+15Vdc
Actionneur
du
4-20mA;20mA et 100mA commerce
-15Vdc
Partie Actionneurs du COMMERCE
Figure 11: Amplification structure for generic actuators
516
23
1.7 Cabling
See UPC notice in the “UPC notice” paragraph.
1.8 Specifications and standards

See UPC notice in the “UPC notice” paragraph.
2 SPC Installation
2.1 Testing
The SPC case should never be opened. The equipment does not need any
particular attention during normal use. It is recommended that the connections are
checked visually.
2.2 Operation
Remove the SPC power supply connection. Check that the
voltage on USC1 is at the expected nominal value
Check power supply no Measured voltage

good?
yes
Turn off the power supply and reconnect to the SPC
no POWER indicator
comes on?
Check the supply voltage after disconnection

yes
Setup the connections as per the installation guide

Start the T SOFT program to configure the working
environment. Cf. T SOFT User Guide
Supply voltage good?

no
yes Check power supply wiring
Change the module.

See REPLACEMENT Chapter
yes
Cabling OK?
Repair the cabling fault
no
3 SPC maintenance
517
23
3.1 Preventive maintenance
3.1.1 Testing
The casing of the SPC module must never be opened.
In normal operation, this device requires no special surveillance. In the event the
device is exposed to a particularly humid or acid environment, it is recommended
to visually check the appearance of the connections.
3.1.2 Precautions
Avoid contact with liquid on and, especially, inside the equipment. In case of accidental
contact of the connectors or terminal blocks with any liquid, immediately switch the
equipment off. Do not switch the equipment back on until you have cleaned and dried the
affected parts.
3.2 Corrective maintenance
3.2.1 Types of maintenance possible

- Without software tools
- Only with HMI
- Only with NEYRPIC® T.SOFT “Light” or “Full”
3.2.2 Fault classification

In the case of a failure, there are 4 types of faults:
- Equipment fault: all faults related to the rack power supply circuits (fuses, short
circuit, power supply failure…)
- Major CPU fault: prevents program function. Symptomatic of either an SPC module
failure or a +5V power supply problem.
- Major application fault: the SPC has detected an internal failure.
- Minor application fault: this type of fault does not prevent the controller working.
But, depending on the fault type, the controller may change operating modes (See
controller operating instructions).
518
23
3.2.3 Fault indication
The first 3 fault types cause the NEYRPIC®T.SLG to stop working. Faults are indicated via
the front panel indicator lights or via the HMI and NEYRPIC® T.SOFT screens.
Repair method
Follow the method listed in the UPC installation and maintenance instructions. See tables 10,
11, and 12 for some examples of faults.
3.3 Direct repair on the UPC or SPC
3.3.1 Front panel indicators

See §1.5.1 of this manual.
3.3.2 Examples of faults between the UPC and SPC (Modules)

Many precautions are possible to prevent a NEYRPIC®T.SLG failure. In the table below,
some of the most common faults are listed to help with system maintenance.
Faults
Meaning Repair
UPC LED SPC LED
HMI off No connection between Verify that the cable connecting the UPC to the
UPC and HMI HMI is correctly connected to the right connections.
POWER off POWER off UPC and SPC power Check the power supply
supply fault
MAJOR lit FAULT lit No connection between Verify that the cable connecting the UPC to the
UPC and HMI IHM is correctly connected to the right connections.
Press the ACK button on the front panel of the UPC
to clear the fault
519
23
FIELD BUS off FIELD BUS CAN OPEN SPC Check the cabling between the UPC and SPC. See
ACTIVE off connection not established Installation guide
Use the correct cable types
MAJOR on POWER off UPC power supply fault Check the SPC power supply.
Replace SPC if necessary.
®
PC off NEYRPIC T.SOFT Check the cable between the PC and UPC
MINOR on connection failure Check that the computer, if present, is not switched
off rather than in sleep mode.
RUN off MAJOR system fault Reinitialise the module power supply
Contact ALSTOM Hydro Power or change the UPC
module
UPC ACTIVE off UPC module in backup Check that the cabling has been properly installed
mode and not normal mode for the layout chosen (UPC in standby instead of
active)
MINOR on MINOR process error See Examples of MAJOR and MINOR faults in the
UPC manual
REDUNDANCY off A redundancy connection In a redundant layout with another UPC, check that
has a fault the cabling between the two UPCs has been
correctly installed.
If the problem persists, change the UPC module
(N) while keeping UPC (S) or switch the operations
In a non-redundant layout, do nothing.
HMI off HMI connection failure Check that the connection between the UPC and
HMI off HMI has been properly installed.
In a non-HMI layout, do nothing.
Table 4: UPC and SPC module faults
520
23
4 REPLACEMENT
Each SPC module is equipped with automatic calibration to compensate for input and output
errors. This is known as Firmware configuration and describes the factory parameters
installed on the module during manufacturing.
It is therefore not necessary to make adjustments when replacing a module as the
NEYRPIC® T.SLG system has been designed to avoid this.
The modules are also fitted with an error-prevention system to prevent positioning errors of
the module in the rack.
4.1 Replacing an SPC module

- Switch off the power to the NEYRPIC® T.SLG system
- Remove the rear connections from the SPC module
- Unscrew the 4 screws holding the panel to the rack
- Remove the module from the front
- On the replacement module, position the rear switches on the same positions as
those of the failed module
- Insert the replacement module into the positioning guides
- Replace the 4 screws attaching the module
- Reconnect the connections
- Check that the fault has been cleared and restart
Note: the SPC is automatically configured by the UPC when powered on.
521
23
5 APPENDICES
APPENDIX 1: Input/Output cabling
522
23
APPENDIX 1
SANA – STANDARD ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Output concerned
X6- 5
Load range
0-500
X6 -9
Galvanic
insulation
1 :1 SPC
Client wiring
Figure 12: Example of cabling to test SANA outputs
POSITION MEASUREMENT ANALOGUE INPUTS
523
23
Entrée OS1_01
Power 24 V
+24V
S+
Signal
+
2 wire sensor 250 16Hz
S- -
0V
SPC
Figure 13: Example of cabling for 2-wire sensor
Entrée OS1_01
Power 24 V
+24V
S+
+
250
S-
-
3-wire sensor
0V
SPC
524
23
OS1_01 Input
+24V
Alim +
S+
S+ +
S- 250
-
S-
4-wire sensor 0V
SPC
ON/OFF INPUTS OUTPUTS
Dry contact relay Polarity

+24 V
Input + distribution
X4 - 3
Input -
X4 – 1, 14, 2, 15
Client wiring
0V SPC
Figure 16: Cabling of IS1 inputs
525
23
Polarity distribution
X4 - 3
Ouput + 24 V
4,7 Ohms
Sorties IS3, IS4

Dry contact relay
Output -
X4 – 4, 17, 5, 18, 7 0V
Client wiring
SPC
Figure 17: Test cabling for IS3 and IS4 outputs
For IS5 and IS6 outputs, relays used are PE 014 024 – SHRACK brand. All these outputs are
insulated and their associated contacts are open by default. For the IS5 output, the contact
will default to open in the case of a fault. A fault is triggered by the program or a major system
error such as by the watchdog, or power fault.
Figure 18: Load-breaking capacity of an inuput in VDC
526
23
ACTUATOR OUTPUTS
TR10 ou ED 12 et 25
TR10 actuators should be connected directly to the TR10 outputs whereas ED 12 and ED25
actuators should be connected to the ED outputs.
Only one actuator can be used at a time. This is defined by means of a parameter
in the UPC module application.
The current for ED12 (3A) and ED25 (6A) actuators is limited by means of a “switch” on the
rear panel.
527
23
! "#$% &
! "#$% &
! "#$% &
528
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................4
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................5
2.1 GENERAL CONFIGURATION OF AN SPC ..................................................................................................6
2.2 OPERATOR INTERFACE ....................................................................................................................................6
2.3 UPC CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................................6
3. PROCESSING POSITION SENSORS..................................................................................8
3.1 SERVOMOTOR POSITION MEASUREMENT (SE)....................................................................................8
3.2 DISTRIBUTOR POSITION MEASUREMENT (VA) (DIST_VA CONFIGURATION) ..................9
4. FEEDBACK LOOP .................................................................................................................................11
4.1 1-LOOP FEEDBACK (NO_DIST_VA CONFIGURATION) ...............................................................11
4.2 2-LOOP FEEDBACK (DIST_VA CONFIGURATION) ..........................................................................13
4.3 COMMAND OF THE GOVERNING LOOP ...................................................................................................14
5. OUTPUT STAGE ......................................................................................................................................15
5.1 ACTUATOR COMMAND (BX) .....................................................................................................................15
5.2 SERVOMOTOR POSITION (OR) ...................................................................................................................16
6. FAULT PROCESSING........................................................................................................................17
6.1 MAJOR FAULTS .................................................................................................................................................17
6.2 MINOR FAULTS ..................................................................................................................................................18
7. MANUAL CONTROL (MAN_CTR CONFIGURATION) ...........................20
7.1 AUTOMATIC PASSAGE TO AUTONOMOUS MANUAL MODE ........................................................20
8. APPENDICES ...............................................................................................................................................21
8.1 ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS .......................................................................................................................21
8.2 LIST OF PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................................22
8.3 TEST POINTS .......................................................................................................................................................23
8.4 NUMBERING ON THE CAN OPEN NETWORK “SPC ADDRESS” ...............................................24
8.5 INPUT ASSIGNMENT ........................................................................................................................................24
8.6 OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT....................................................................................................................................24
529
MODIFICATIONS
The previous reference number of this document N° 4035 Ind.1 is : 17 800 308 SPC A08 gb.doc
17 800 308 SPC A07 VERSION A7

Name of the configuration: DIST_VAL DIST_VA, DUAL_CAN DUAL_CA et MAN_CTRL
MAN_CTR
§3.1.3/3.2.3: modification §
§3.2.1: measurement less than 3mA/ -1.0 corresponds to closed position
§4.1: drawing modified (addition of test point DIT_CTR)
§4.1.6: modification §
§4.2.7: modification §
§6.1.2: fault MJ TRACK
§6.1.3/.61.4: measurement less than 3mA
§6.2.1: fault MN TRACK
§6.2.2, 6.2.3, 6.2.7 and 6.2.8: saturation fault (SAT_OFF)
§ 7 and 7.1: reference to § 8.4 for the logic commands
§8.1.1: configuration SAT_OFF
§8.2: addition test point DIT_CTR
§ 8.5: output IS3_01
Abbreviation Description
T•SLG Régulateur de charge/fréquence de Turbine
(Turbine Speed/Load Governor)
UPC Unité centrale de traitement du T•SLG
(Unit Processing Controller)
SPC Unité d’asservissement de position du T•SLG
(Servo Positioner Controller)
T•SOFT Logiciel de paramétrage du T•SLG
(T•SLG configuration software)
530
1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the interface and operation of the SPC position control system.
It is intended for:
• Clients, to provide precise information on system operation,
• Site personnel, to use the system for adjustment and maintenance operations.
531
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
An SPC is a component of the T•SLG turbine control system devoted to controlling the position of one
of the turbine’s operating mechanisms:
• Wicket gates for Francis/pump turbines,
• Wicket gates or blades for Kaplan/bulb turbines,
• Injector or deflector for Pelton turbines.
The system is totally autonomous in terms of electric power supply and functions. It contains:
• All the electronic components required to command actuators made by NEYRPIC® (ED, TR)
and other manufacturers,
• A micro processor totally dedicated to the feedback loop (enabling guarantee of the stringent
real time constraints imposed by 2ms sampling).
It performs the following functions:

• Acquisition and processing of the inputs required for control of the operating mechanism,
• Calculation of position feedback on the basis of the position setpoint issued by the UPC
(load/frequency control system),
• Control of the electro-hydraulic actuator controlling the operating mechanism:
Normal UPC Servo valve

Position setpoint
Position POWER Power
Position loop
order AMPLIFIER signal
Standby UPC
Position setpoint
Normal UPC Distribuiting valve

active
Sensor Valve
ttment position
Redundant position
Servomotor
Sensor Servomotor
ttment position
Redundant position
532
2.1 General configuration of an SPC
The SPC is designed for use in all types of project. Its general configuration enables adaptation of the
SPC to:
• The type of actuator used,
• The choice of functions enabling optimised overall availability of the T•SLG system.
The list of possible configurations is given in the enclosed table:

Mnemonic Description
NO_DIST_VA Control of the servomotor position only
DIST_VA Consideration of the distributor valve position
POW_2Q 2 quadrant power signal output
POW_4Q 4 quadrant power signal output
POW_MAV mA/V signal output
SE_RED Measurement redundancy of the servomotor position
VA_RED Measurement redundancy of the valve position
DUAL_CA Double communication port CAN Open
MAN_CTR Wired manual control
It should be noted that the general configuration of an SPC is saved in the UPC to which it is
connected. This configuration is loaded in the SPC each time communication is made with the UPC.
This is why SPCs are interchangeable: they automatically inherit the right configuration. Only the
hardware configuration must be altered on the board (see sections 3.1 and 5).
This document refers to the general configuration of an SPC to identify the functions implemented
(references to the general configuration are indicated in this document by “xxxx_xxx”).
2.2 Operator interface

The front panel of the SPC gives a quick view of the state of operation of the SPC board (presence or
absence of fault, state of communication with the UPC).
Access to the SPC’s internal data is via the operator interfaces connected to the UPC (i.e. the MMI
dedicated to the T•SLG or a PC equipped with the T•SOFT software).
This internal data includes:
• Adjustment parameters enabling adaptation of the SPC to an actuator (indicated in this
document by “xxxx_xxx”) – see section 8.1 for a full list of parameters,
• Test points to view the exact data for the SPC – See section 8.2 for a full list of test points,
• The type of any faults present – see section 5 for the list of faults.
2.3 UPC connection

This connection is used:
• For the periodical transmission by the UPC of the position setpoint,
• For transmission by the UPC of SPC configuration data,
• For acquisition by the UPC of internal SPC data.
The SPC is connected to a UPC via a CAN Open field bus. Several SPCs may be connected to the
same field bus for projects with several operating mechanisms (typically, Kaplan, bulb and Pelton
turbines).
533
An SPC is identified on the CAN Open field bus by a station number determined by the 5 selectors,
S1~S5, on the rear panel of the SPC (hardware configuration). The numbering system is given in the
appendix.
Configuration of the SPC number must be checked carefully when the SPC is installed on the CAN
Open field bus.
2.3.1 UPC redundancy (DUAL_CA configuration)

In the case of load/frequency control redundancy, the SPC is connected to each of the two redundant
UPCs via two separate CAN Open buses. In this situation, position feedback takes account of the
information issued by the active UPC only.
534
3. PROCESSING POSITION SENSORS
3.1 Servomotor position measurement (SE)

This section describes the processing of the servomotor position measurement. Processing is organised
as illustrated below:
SE1 RAW
SE1 SCA
SE NOLI
SE POS
Sensor selection
Main raw
Servomotor Scaling
Linearisation Filter Measurement
position
SE1 GAIN
SE LINE SE FILT
SE1 OFFS
SE2 RAW
SE2 SCA
Redundant raw
Scaling
Measurement
SE2 GAIN
SE2 OFFS
3.1.1 Scaling of the main signal SE1

Servomotor position is measured on the sensor SE1 input.
The SPC performs scaling between the input signal and the signal used by the feedback loop. This
scaling enables the high and low points of sensor setting to be determined.
Scaling is carried out as follows:

SE1_SCA = SE1_RAW * SE1_GAIN + SE1_OFFS with
• SE1_SCA = signal used by the feedback loop. This signal is normalised:
• 0.0 corresponds to the closed position,
• 1.0 to the open position.
• SE1_RAW = input signal in current. This signal is directly given by the firmware of the
SPC board:
• 0 corresponds to 4mA,
• 10000 corresponds to 20mA.
• SE1_GAIN and SE1_OFFS = scaling parameters.
3.1.2 Scaling of the standby signal SE2 (SE_RED configuration)

Sensor SE2 input is used as a standby redundant measurement for servomotor position measurement.
Scaling is carried out in the same way as for signal SE1, with SE2_GAIN and SE2_OFFS parameters
and SE1_RAW and SE1_SCA test points.
3.1.3 Filter
This digital filter is a first order low pass filter whose time constant is given by parameter SE_FILT.
535
If this filter is not used, it is recommended to set the default value of this parameter at 0.005 s, as this
value enables reduction of the noise induced by sampling without affecting the band with of the
governing system.
3.1.4 Linearisation
Servomotor position measurement can be linearised using the law SE_LINE which enables
compensation for any non-linearities caused by the servomotor position measurement mechanism.
3.2 Distributor position measurement (VA) (DIST_VA configuration)

This section describes the processing of the valve position measurement. Processing is organised as
illustrated in the diagram below:
VA1 RAW
VA1 SCA
VA POS
Sensor selection
Main raw
Valve Scaling
Filter Measurement
position
VA1 GAIN
VA FILT
VA1 OFFS
VA2 RAW
VA2 SCA
Redundant raw
Scaling
Measurement
VA2 GAIN
VA2 OFFS
3.2.1 Scaling of the main signal VA1

Distributor position is measured from the main 4-20mA signal VA1 (a measurement less than 4-20mA
is considered invalid).
The SPC performs scaling between the input signal and the signal used by the feedback loop. This
scaling enables the high and low points of the sensor setting to be determined.
536
Scaling is carried out as follows:
• VA1_SCA = signal used by the feedback loop. This signal is normalised:
• -1.0 corresponds to the closed position,
• 1.0 to the open position.
• VA1_RAW = input signal in current. This signal is directly given by the firmware of the
SPC board:
• 0 corresponds to 4mA,
• 10 000 corresponds to 20mA.
• VA1_GAIN et VA1_OFFS = scaling parameters
3.2.2 Scaling of the standby signal VA2 (VA_RED configuration)

Sensor VA2 input is used as a backup redundant measurement for valve position measurement.
Scaling is performed in the same way as for signal VA1, with parameters VA2_GAI and VA2_OFF
and test points RAW VA1 and SCA VA1.
3.2.3 Filter
This digital filter is a first order low pass filter whose time constant is given by parameter VA_FILT.
If this filter is not used, it is recommended to set the default value of this parameter at 0.005 s, as this
value enables reduction of the noise induced by sampling without affecting the band with of the
governing system.
537
4. FEEDBACK LOOP
The SPC can implement 2 position feedback structures:

• Servomotor only position feedback (1 loop),
• Servomotor position feedback using the position of the distributor tray (2 loops).
The structure is selected by configurations NO_DIST_VA and DIST_VA.
4.1 1-loop feedback (NO_DIST_VA configuration)

The feedback structure is illustrated in the diagram below:
INT ACT
ACT CTR
SE SETP
DIT CTR
SE ERR
PI ACT
I
TI
+ + +
+
setpoint P Opening order

- + +
KP
Electrical Dither
zero effect
RTA DIT AMP

DER ACT
SE POS
Servomotor
D
position
TD
KD
4.1.1 Block P
This block implements the proportional action whose gain is given by parameter KP.
This action can be deactivated by setting KP at zero.
4.1.2 Block I
This block implements the integral action, whose time constant is given by parameter TI.
Comment: this action can be deactivated by setting parameter TI at zero.
The integral action can be limited by parameter INT_LIM (limitation between -INT_LIM and
+INT_LIM).
538
4.1.3 Block D
This block implements the derivative proportional action whose time constant is given by parameter
TD and whose gain is given by parameter KD (that is greater than or equal to 1).
This action can be deactivated by setting parameter TD at zero.
4.1.4 Electric zero

The electric zero (equilibrium maintenance command) is given by the parameter RTA.
4.1.5 Dither effect

This is a square signal added to the position command to reduce servopositioner positioning hysteresis:
• Frequency 50Hz,
• Amplitude given by parameter DIT_AMP.
4.1.6 Inversion of actuator control direction

The adjustable configuration KD_INV implements actuator control direction inversion (inversion au
niveau du point de test PI_ACT).
539
4.2 2-loop feedback (DIST_VA configuration)
The feedback structure is illustrated in the diagram below:
INT ACT
ACT CTR
SE SETP
VA SETP
SE ERR
VA ERR
PI ACT
I
TI
+ + + +
setpoint P Limitation P Opening order

- + - +
KP VA MIN VA KP
VA MAX Electrical
zero
RTA
SE POS
VA TCMS
DER ACT
VA POS
Servomotor
position +
Valve
D
- position
TD
KD
Equilibrium
position
VA OSP
4.2.1 Block P (of the positioner loop)

This block implements the proportional action for the positioner loop whose gain is given by parameter
KP.
This action can be deactivated by setting KP at zero.
4.2.2 Block P (of the distributor loop)

This block implements the proportional action for the distributor loop whose gain is given by
parameter VA_KP.
This action can be deactivated by setting VA_KP at zero.
4.2.3 Block I
This block implements the integral action, whose time constant is given by parameter TI.
Comment: This action can be deactivated by setting parameter TI at zero.
The integral action can be limited by parameter INT_LIM (limitation between -INT_LIM and
+INT_LIM).
4.2.4 Block D
This block implements the derivative proportional action whose time constant is given by parameter
TD and whose gain is given by parameter KD (that is greater than or equal to 1).
This action can be deactivated by setting parameter TD at zero.
540
4.2.5 Equilibrium position
The equilibrium position is given by parameter VA_OSP.
4.2.6 Electric zero

The electric zero (equilibrium maintenance command) is given by parameter RTA.
4.2.7 Limitation block

This block enables limitation of the distributor valve excursion.
This limitation is achieved by the following parameters:
• VA_MIN for low limitation,
• VA_MAX for high limitation.
4.3 Command of the governing loop

In order to configure the position loop, the setpoint issued by the UPC can be applied to different parts
of the governing loop:
• At position setpoint level (test point SE_SETP),
• Directly at the command output (min and max position command on test point ACT_CTR),
• At distributor loop setpoint level (test point VA_SETP in configuration DIST_VA).
This function is managed at operator interface level (see documentation).
541
5. OUTPUT STAGE
Normal CAN SPC address Distributor position Configuration* Configuration* Power supply
connection coding* for local sensor input generic actuator 3A/6A for ED25
network outputs actuators
Bacjup CAN
connection Servomotor position Analogue outputs TOR Actuator Command
sensor input Inputs/outputs
5.1 Actuator command (BX)

This section describes the various configurations for the power stage.
5.1.1 NEYRPIC® ED type actuators

2 quadrants power signal output for actuator NEYRPIC® ED (POW_2Q configuration).
The selector on the rear panel enables selection of 3A or 6A current limitation (hardware
configuration).
5.1.2 NEYRPIC® TR10 type actuators

4 quadrants power signal output for actuator NEYRPIC® TR10 (POW_4Q configuration).
5.1.3 Other makes of actuator

Current and voltage signal output (+/-10V) for actuators made by other manufacturers (POW_MAV
configuration).
542
Selectors S1 and S2 on the rear panel enable selection of the type of current command output hardware
configuration:
1 2 Current command output

OFF OFF +/-20mA
OFF ON +/-100mA
ON OFF +/-100mA
ON ON 4-20mA
Parameters PWM_MIN and PWM_MAX enable the output signal excursion to be limited by the PWM
signal stop limits:
• PWM_MIN corresponds to the minimum limit of the PWM signal,
• PWM_MAX corresponds to the maximum limit of the PWM signal.
5.2 Servomotor position (OR)

This is the analog 4-20mA output that gives the servomotor position:
• 4mA corresponds to 0% servomotor opening,
• 20mA corresponds to 100% servomotor opening.
Scaling is performed as follows:

OR_RAW = SE_POS* OR_GAIN + OR_OFFS where
• OR_RAW = output signal in current (2000 corresponds to 4mA, 10000 to 20mA),
• SE_POS = test point giving the value of the servomotor position (0.0 corresponds to the closed
position, 1.0 to the open position),
• OR_GAIN and OR_OFFS = scaling parameters.
Comment: in a fully redundant UPC/SPC configuration, this output is forced to 0mA when the SPC is
connected to an inactive UPC (in order to facilitate the integration of redundant solutions).
543
6. FAULT PROCESSING
Fault management is a central process in the SPC board.
The aim is to detect any malfunction, implement the appropriate solution and indicate fault occurrence
in a reliable manner (particularly on the UPC board).
6.1 Major faults

These faults prevent the SPC from commanding the operating mechanism in position. In this case, the
actuator output command is invalidated.
They are indicated by SPC logic output R29 opening.
An SPC major fault disappears when the cause of the fault is eliminated. Overall availability of the
T•SLG for turbine control is managed by the UPC, which centralises SPC major fault management for
this purpose.
6.1.1 SPC COM: UPC communication fault

No communication between the SPC and the UPC.
This fault is major if the SPC must not maintain the current position of the operating mechanism in the
absence of a UPC setpoint, i.e.:
• Outside the MAN_CTR configuration,
• If the SPC has not received authorisation to switch automatically to Manual control in the
MAN_CTR configuration.
Comments:
• This problem may be related to a configuration error of the SPC address on the CAN Open
bus,
• In the case of UPC redundancy DUAL_CA configuration), this fault is detected on the state of
communication with the active UPC.
6.1.2 MJ TRACK: Discordance of actuator (Stopped)

Detection of a difference between the effective position of the actuator and position setpoint outside
the mechanical response time of the actuator.
The fault is detected when this difference is greater than the threshold TRK_TRIP during the period
TRK_TIM.
Comment: This surveillance is deactivated when the value of parameter TRK_TRIP is 1.0.
6.1.3 SE MES: servomotor measurement fault SE

Measurement SE1 is below the fault detection threshold (the signal is less than 3mA).
Comment: in the case of redundancy of measurement SE (SE_RED configuration), this fault is

detected when both measurements SE1 and SE2 are below the fault detection threshold.
6.1.4 VA MES: valve measurement fault VA (DIST_VA configuration)

Measurement VA1 is below the fault detection threshold (the signal is less than 3mA).
544
Comment: in the case of redundancy of measurement VA (VA_RED configuration), this fault is
detected when both measurements VA1 and VA2 are below the fault detection threshold.
6.1.5 POW AMP: command stage fault

Hardware fault at the actuator command stage.
6.1.6 CONF: configuration fault

SPC configuration is incorrect.
6.1.7 System faults

These faults are related to SPC system operation:
• Malfunction of hardware components,
• Software application operation fault.
Processing of these faults is entirely managed by mechanisms separate from the software application
and they are detected at UPC level by the presence of a fault in communication with the SPC.
These problems cause the software application to reboot (micro processor reset). It is then necessary to
read the value of test point RST_CDE containing the type code of the fault detected and communicate
this value to ALSTOM for analysis.
6.2 Minor faults

These faults do not prevent the SPC from continuing to command the operating mechanism in position.
They are indicated by closure of the SPC logic output R129.
A minor fault disappears when the cause of the fault disappears.
6.2.1 MN TRACK: Actuator discordance (Alarm)

Detection of a difference between the actual position of the actuator and the position setpoint beyond
the actuator’s mechanical response time.
The fault is detected if this difference is greater than threshold TRK_THR for a period of time
TRK_TIM.
Comment: set parameter TRK_THR to 1.0 to deactivate this surveillance.
6.2.2 SE1 SAT: measurement saturation SE1

Measurement of signal SE1 is outside the range defined by the scaling operation.
This fault causes saturation of measurSE1.
This fault is not indicated if the SAT_OFF configuration is implemented.
6.2.3 SE2 SAT: measurement saturation SE2 (SE_RED configuration)

Measurement of signal SE2 is outside the range defined by the scaling operation.
This fault causes saturation of measurement SE2.
6.2.4 SE1 MES: redundant measurement fault SE1 (SE_RED configuration)

The SPC switches to the standby signal measurement SE2.
545
6.2.5 SE2 MES: redundant measurement fault SE2 (SE_RED configuration)
6.2.6 SE DIS: measurement discordance SE (SE_RED configuration)

Measurements SE1 and SE2 differ (the difference between the two measurements is greater than the
discordance threshold SE_DISC).
6.2.7 VA1 SAT: measurement saturation VA1 (DIST_VA configuration)

Measurement of signal VA1 is outside the range defined by the scaling operation.
This fault causes saturation of measurement VA1.
6.2.8 VA2 SAT: measurement saturation VA2 (DIST_VA/VA_RED configuration)

Measurement of signal VA2 is outside the range defined by the scaling operation.
This fault causes saturation of measurement VA2.
6.2.9 VA1 MES: redundant measurement fault VA1 (DIST_VA/VA_RED configuration)

Measurement VA1 is below the fault detection threshold.
The SPC switches to the standby signal measurement VA2.
6.2.10 VA2 MES: redundant measurement fault VA2 (DIST_VA/VA_RED configuration)

Measurement VA2 is below the fault detection threshold.
6.2.11 VA DIS: measurement discordance VA (DIST_VA/VA_RED configuration)

Measurements VA1 and VA2 differ (the difference between the two measurements is greater than the
discordance threshold VA_DISC).
6.2.12 RDCOM: inactive UPC communication fault (DUAL_CA configuration)

Communication has not been established between the SPC and the inactive UPC.
6.2.13 NORMCOM: communication fault UPC (MAN_CTR configuration)

Communication has not been established between the SPC and the active UPC.
When this fault occurs, the SPC has received authorisation from the UPC to switch to Manual control.
546
7. MANUAL CONTROL (MAN_CTR CONFIGURATION)
Activation of logic input Manual Mode ON (cf. §8.5 switches the SPC to manual control: the position
of the operating mechanism is maintained in its present position and can be altered by the commands
(–) and (+) (cf. §8.5).
The positioner setpoint is altered according to a slope defined by parameter MAN_RAMP.
The manual mode is directly managed at SPC level and takes control regardless of the orders from the
UPC.
The Manual mode must be used with care.
7.1 Automatic passage to Autonomous Manual mode

The automatic passage of the SPC to Autonomous Manual mode takes place on the detection of a
major fault for the UPC or the detection of absence of communication with the UPC.
In this mode, the position of the SPC is maintained at its current position when the UPC is not
operational.
The use of the logical input Manual Mode ON (cf. §8.5) then allows controlling manually the setting
device by using the positioning commands (–) and (+) (cf. §8.5).
Automatic passage to Autonomous Manual mode depends on prior authorisation from the UPC, before
it is in major fault. Indeed, automatic passage must not be permitted during the speed governing
phases.
547
8. APPENDICES
The access level in the tables below refers to the level defined in the UPC:
• Operator level [O] (level by default),
• Commissioning level [M].
The configuration refers to section 2.1.
8.1 Adjustment parameters

Mnemonic Description Access Configuration
KP Servomotor proportional gain [O] /
TD Derivative time constant (s) [O] /
TI Integral time constant (s) [O] /
KD Derivative gain [O] /
RTA Electric zero [O] /
VA_KP Valve proportional gain [O] DIST_VA
VA_MIN Min valve excursion [O] DIST_VA
VA_MAX Max valve excursion [O] DIST_VA
VA_OSP Valve equilibrium position [O] DIST_VA
SE_FILT Time constant of measurement SE filter (s) [O] /
SE1_GAIN Sensor SE1 adjustment gain [O] /
SE1_OFFS Sensor SE1 adjustment offset [O] /
SE2_GAIN Sensor SE2 adjustment gain [O] SE_RED
SE2_OFFS Sensor SE2 adjustment offset [O] SE_RED
SE_DISC Measurement SE discordance threshold [O] SE_RED
VA_FILT Time constant of measurement VA filter (s) [O] DIST_VA
VA1_GAIN Sensor VA1 adjustment gain [O] DIST_VA
VA1_OFFS Sensor VA1 adjustment offset [O] DIST_VA
VA2_GAIN Sensor VA2 adjustment gain [O] DIST_VA
VA_RED
VA2_OFFS Sensor VA2 adjustment offset [O] DIST_VA
VA_RED
VA_DISC Measurement VA discordance threshold [O] DIST_VA
VA_RED
DIT_AMP Dither effect amplitude [O] NO_DIST_VA
TRK THR Servomotor following detection threshold [O] /
TRK TIM Servomotor following detection time (s) [O] /
OR_GAIN Output OR adjustment gain [O] /
OR_OFFS Output OR adjustment offset [O] /
MAN_RAMP Ramp time in manual command (s) [O] /
INT_LIM Integral action limitation [O] MAN_CTR
PWM_MIN PWM minimum value [O] POW_MAV
PWM_MAX PWM maximum value [O] POW_MAV
548
8.1.1 Configuration
KD_INV Control direction inversion [M] NO_DIST_VA
SAT_OFF Saturation fault desabled [M]
8.2 List of parameters

Mnemonic Minimal value Maximal value Default value
"KP" 0.0 200.0 0.0
"TD" 0.0 2000.0 0.0
"TI" 0.0 2000.0 0.0
"KD" 1.0 20.0 1.0
"RTA" -1.0 1.0 0.0
"VA_KP" 0.0 200.0 0.0
"VA_MIN" -2.0 0.0 -2.0
"VA_MAX" 0.0 2.0 2.0
"VA_OSP" -1.0 1.0 0.0
"SE_FILT" 0.0 10.0 0.0
"SE1_GAI" -10.0 10.0 0.0001
"SE1_OFF" -10.0 10.0 0.0
"SE2_GAI" -10.0 10.0 0.0001
"SE2_OFF" -10.0 10.0 0.0
"SE_DISC" 0.0 1.0 0.01
"VA_FILT" 0.0 10.0 0.0
"VA1_GAI" -10.0 10.0 0.0002
"VA1_OFF" -10.0 10.0 -1.0
"VA2_GAI" -10.0 10.0 0.0002
"VA2_OFF" -10.0 10.0 -1.0
"VA_DISC" 0.0 1.0 0.01
"DIT_AMP" 0.0 1.0 0.0
"TRK_THR" 0.0 1.0 1.0
"TRK_TIM" 0.0 2000.0 2000.0
"OR_GAIN" -10000.0 20000.0 10000.0
"OR_OFFS" -10000.0 10000.0 0.0
"MAN_RAM" 0.0 200.0 20.0
"INT_LIM" 0.0 1.0 0.01
"PWM_MIN" 500.0 9500.0 500.01
"PWM_MAX" 500.0 9500.0 9500.0
"TRK_TRIP" 0.0 1.0 1.0
549
8.3 Test points
SE_POS Servomotor position [O] /
SE_SETP Servomotor setpoint [O] /
SE_ERR Error on servomotor setpoint [O] /
VA_POS Distributor position [O] DIST_VA
VA_SETP Distributor setpoint [O] DIST_VA
VA_ERR Error on distributor setpoint [O] DIST_VA
ACT_CTR Actuator command in normalised [O] /
PI_ACT PI block output [O] /
INT_ACT Integral action [O] /
DER_ACT Derivative action [O] /
SE_NOLI Servomotor position before linearisation [O] /
SE1_RAW SE1 – raw sensor measurement [O] /
SE1_SCA SE1 – scaling [O] /
SE2_RAW SE2 – raw sensor measurement [O] SE_RED
SE2_SCA SE2 – scaling [O] SE_RED
VA1_RAW VA1 – raw sensor measurement [O] DIST_VA
VA1_SCA VA1 – scaling [O] DIST_VA
VA2_RAW VA2 – raw sensor measurement [O] DIST_VA
VA_RED
VA2_SCA VA2 – scaling [O] DIST_VA
VA_RED
VA_TCMS Distributor position corrected for [O] DIST_VA
commissioning
PWM Gross value of PWM [O] /
SYS_COD Code of last system fault [O] /
OVT_CNT Hour clock overshoot counter [O] /
DIT_CTR Actuator command before dither effect [O] NO_DIST_VA
550
8.4 Numbering on the CAN Open network “SPC Address”
1 2 3 4 5 6 Station number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Station number
On Off Off Off Off Off 01 On Off On On Off Off 13
Off On Off Off Off Off 02 Off On On On Off Off 14
On On Off Off Off Off 03 On On On On Off Off 15
Off Off On Off Off Off 04 Off Off Off Off On Off 16
On Off On Off Off Off 05 On Off Off Off On Off 17
Off On On Off Off Off 06 Off On Off Off On Off 18
On On On Off Off Off 07 On On Off Off On Off 19
Off Off Off On Off Off 08 Off Off On Off On Off 20
On Off Off On Off Off 09 On Off On Off On Off 21
Off On Off On Off Off 10 Off On On Off On Off 22
On On Off On Off Off 11 On On On Off On Off 23
Off Off On On Off Off 12 Off Off Off On On Off 24
8.5 Input assignment

Hardware ref. Software label Configuration
OS1_03 Main servomotor sensor signal (SE1) /
OS1_04 Standby servomotor sensor signal (SE2) SE_RED
OS1_01 Main distributor sensor signal (VA1) DIST_VA
OS1_02 Standby distributor sensor signal (VA2) DIST_VA
VA_RED
IS1_01 Manual mode ON MAN_CTR
IS1_02 Manual Mode – Command (-) MAN_CTR
IS1_03 Manual Mode – Command (+) MAN_CTR
IS1_01 ~ Assigned for project If NON MAN_CTR
IS1_04
8.6 Output assignment

Hardware ref. Software label Configuration
OS2 Servomotor position (4-20mA) /
IS3_01 • Assigned for project • If NON MAN_CTR
• SPC in Autonomous Manual mode • MAN_CTR
IS3_02 ~04 Assigned for project /
IS4_01 R80 (governor active) /
IS5_01 R29 (SPC operational) /
IS6_01 R129 (minor fault) /
551
NEYRPIC® T.ADT
OPERATING INSTRUCTION
Auxiliary Digital Tachometer
N° 4036 Ind.2
552
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................................................................................4
1.1 CONVENTIONS .................................................................................................................................................................4
1.1.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................4
1.1.2 Parameters ..............................................................................................................................................................4
1.1.3 Test points................................................................................................................................................................4
2. T•ADT ....................................................................................................................................................................................5
2.1 TACHOMETRY...................................................................................................................................................................5
2.1.1 Inputs processing .....................................................................................................................................................5
2.1.2 Outputs processing...................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.3 Speed measurement.................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.4 Speed calculation .....................................................................................................................................................8
2.1.5 Generation of the Tachometer analogy output ..........................................................................................................8
2.1.6 Detection of Creeping (Configuration Creep).............................................................................................................8
2.1.7 Detection of the direction of rotation (Configuration Direction) .................................................................................9
2.1.8 Detection of tachometer fault ...................................................................................................................................9
2.2 MAJOR FAULTS ...............................................................................................................................................................10
2.2.1 Major system faults ................................................................................................................................................10
2.2.2 Major process faults ...............................................................................................................................................11
2.2.3 List of major faults..................................................................................................................................................11
2.2.4 Acknowledgement of major faults...........................................................................................................................11
2.3 MINOR FAULTS ..............................................................................................................................................................11
3. APPENDICES........................................................................................................................................................................12
3.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION ............................................................................................................................................12
3.1.1 Read bits ................................................................................................................................................................12
3.1.2 Read words ............................................................................................................................................................13
3.1.3 Analogy values coding ............................................................................................................................................13
3.2 SETTING PARAMETERS .....................................................................................................................................................13
553
2/14 ABCD
Abbreviations Description
TT Voltage Transformer
T•CS Turbine Control System
T•SLG Turbine Speed/Load Governor
UPC T•SLG Unit Processing Controller
SPC T•SLG Servo Positioned Controller
T•ADT Turbine Autonomous Tachometer
T•PLC Turbine PLC
T•SOFT T•SLG/T•ADT Configuration Software
554
3/14 ABCD
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Conventions
Specific data are identified in this document.
1.1.1 Configuration
Configuration Base One measurement on channel 1
Configuration Red_1_2 Redundancy 2 measurements. Use of channels 1 and 2
Configuration Red_1_3 Redundancy 2 measurements. Use of channels 1 and 3
Configuration Red_3 Redundancy 3 measurements
Configuration Direction Detection of direction of rotation
Configuration Creep Creep detection
Configuration Tac1_TT Use of tachometer channel 1 on the input TT.
Configuration Tac2_TT Use of tachometer channel 2 on the input TT.
The user should select as minimum one of the first four configurations. These configurations allow
defining the channels to be used.
The four other configurations allow selecting additional functionality.
Note: The configuration Direction can be activated only if the channels 1 and 3 are used on the sensor.
For the configuration Creep, at least one sensor should be present.
In case of incorrect configuration, a major fault will appear.
1.1.2 Parameters
These are data that can be modified for allowing the adaptation of T•ADT to a site.
Type of data Code of the identifier (e.g.)

Parameters Floating value VT_SRA
1.1.3 Test points

These are internal data of T•ADT that can be displayed on the operator interfaces.
Type of data Code of the identifier (e.g.)

Test point Floating or logic value PT_FG
555
4/14 ABCD
2. T•ADT
The T•ADT is made up of a Central Processing unit (UPC) handling the following functions:
• Tachometry function: Delivers information relating to speed of rotating machinery:
HMI T°SOFT
T°SOFT data
HMI data
Operator
Front
Front face data interface
face
Treatment
Parameter
Test point
Input
Process Tachometer
T°CS Process data
InterfaceTreatment Treatment
Output
2.1 Tachometry
2.1.1 Inputs processing
Process inputs
FG-1 Unit speed Standard base The measurement is taken from a TT (Configuration
Tac1_TT) or a sensor
FG-2 Speed Configurations The measurement is taken from a TT (Configuration
Redundant unit Red_1_2 or Red3 Tac2_TT) or a sensor.
FG-3 Speed Configurations The measurement is taken from a sensor

Redundant unit Red_1_3 or Red3
Logic input
RMA Governor operation Standard base Supplied in wired logic
data
556
5/14 ABCD
2.1.2 Outputs processing

Control logic outputs
RV01
~ Speed threshold Standard base Supplied in wired logic or MODBUS
RV12
RSTO Machine Creeping Standard base Supplied in wired logic or MODBUS
RSRD Direction of rotation Configuration
Supplied in wired logic or MODBUS
"Normal" Direction
RSRI Direction of rotation Configuration
Supplied in wired logic or MODBUS
"Reverse" Direction
Fault outputs
RD29 T•ADT operational
(Complement to Standard base Supplied in wired logic or MODBUS
major fault)
RD129 Minor fault Standard base Supplied in wired logic or MODBUS
Analogy outputs
SA1 Unit speed Standard base Supplied in wired logic or MODBUS
2.1.3 Speed measurement
2.1.3.1 Measurement with single source

In this case, it is necessary to wire the measurement source on the input FG-1.
It is possible to predivide the speed signal in order to obtain a synchronised measurement on one or
more machine rotation. The predivision value can be adjusted via the parameter TC1_PRD. This
predivision is effective only if the speed is lower than a threshold, adjustable via the parameter
VT_SPRD.
The parameter TC1_FRN defines the frequency delivered by the sensor 1 at nominal speed (depends on
the speed of rotation of machine, the number of teeth of the gear wheel and the network frequency).
A low-pass filter is applied on the predivided and normalised signal. The time constant of the filter can
be adjusted via the parameter TC1_CTF.
Test points:
FRQ1_PRD: Predivided frequency input Sensor 1 (in Hertz).
FRQ1_N: Normalised frequency input Sensor 1 (normalised).
FRQ_FILT: Selected filtered frequency input (normalised).
557
6/14 ABCD
2.1.3.2 Measurement with 2 sources and 2nd source on channel 2 (Configuration Red_1_2)
Just like the input FG-1, the input FG-2 is provided with the predivision function (parameter TC2_PRD
and parameter VT_SPRD (common to all the speed inputs)), with the normalisation function
(parameter TC2_FRN) and with the filter function (time constant of filter TC2_CTF).
The signal taken into account is in priority the one coming from the input FG-1. In case discordance is
detected, refer to Chapter “measurement fault with 2 sources".
The filter is applied after the choice of signal; the cutout frequency corresponds to the selected input.
Test points:
2.1.3.3 Measurement with 2 sources and 2nd source on channel 3 (Configuration Red_1_3)
Just like the input FG-1, the input FG-3 is provided with the predivision function (parameter TC3_PRD
and parameter VT_SPRD (common to all the speed inputs)), with the normalisation function
(parameter TC3_FRN) and with the filter function (time constant of filter TC3_CTF).
Test points:
2.1.3.4 Measurement with 3 sources (Configuration Red3)

In this case, it is necessary to wire the 2nd measurement source on the input FG-2 and the 3rd
measurement source on the input FG-3.
2.1.3.5 Summary flowchart of measurement processing

FRQ1_PRD
FRQ1_N
FRQ_FILT
FG-1 Predivision Normalisation
TC1_PRD TC1_FRN
VT_SPRD
Filtre
FR_NOM Selection
FR-2 (traitement idem FG-1) TC1_CTF

TC2_CTF
TC3_CTF
FG-3 (traitement idem FG-1)
558
7/14 ABCD
2.1.3.6 Indication of activity

The activity of each tachometer input is indicated by the LEDs (CH.1, CH.2, CH.3) in the front face of
the T•ADT. If a signal is present on an input, the respective LED flashes. If there is no signal, the LED
remains Off.
2.1.4 Speed calculation

It is possible to generate up to 12 speed thresholds (outputs RV01 to RV12).
For each output, the parameters SV_SMi and SV_SDi (i varying from 1 to 12) allow setting the locking
and tripping thresholds respectively. The difference between the two parameters defines an operational
hysteresis, ensuring the stability of the output when the operational point is situated near the
programmed threshold.
The output polarity is linked:
• To the choice of direction of contact on the terminal (contact Rest / Work),
• To the state of rest defined by the parameter SY_RPi (i varying from 1 to 12), which
corresponds to the polarity if the speed measured is lower than the programmed threshold
(the programming of this parameter allows selecting the status of the threshold output when
the unit is at nominal speed).
Test point:
RVi: Threshold output (i varying from 1 to 12).
2.1.4.1 Case of threshold outputs RV11 and RV12

On each of these outputs, it is possible to programme:
• A time delay on locking, that can be set by the parameters TR_S11 and TR_S12, for
delaying the action of the selected output,
• A holding time after triggering, that can be set by the parameters TM_S11 and TM_S12,
for allowing to hold the output in working position during a finite instant (note that the
programming of "zero" value allows obtaining a classic operation, with the output
maintained as long as the condition of speed threshold is satisfied).
2.1.5 Generation of the Tachometer analogy output

The speed output is available in wired circuit in the form of an analogy signal.
It is possible to modify the limit values by programming of parameters:
SA_VT4 (= Value of the speed (Normalised) for a minimum output) and SA_VT20 (= Value of the
speed (Normalised) for a maximum output).
For displaying the machine speed on the different test points, it is necessary to programme the value of
nominal speed (in r.p.m.) via the parameter VT_VN.
2.1.6 Detection of Creeping (Configuration Creep)

The output RSTO is used for detecting a Creeping.
A time delay, of period adjustable via the parameter DT_GLIS, is rearmed on each leading edge of the
speed signal.
When this time delay has lapsed, the T•ADT declares that the machine is stopped and switches the
output RSTO.
559
8/14 ABCD
The output polarity is linked:

• To the state of rest defined by the parameter SV_RSTO, that corresponds to the polarity if
the machine is stopped.
The LED "Unit stopped" in front face of the T•ADT is lit as soon as the machine is stopped (and that the
configuration Creep is validated).
Note: The configuration Creep can be activated only if there is at least one sensor present on the T•ADT.
Test point:
RSTO: Creeping output.
2.1.7 Detection of the direction of rotation (Configuration Direction)

The outputs RSRD and RSRI are used in the case of a detection direction of rotation.
In this case, it is necessary to use two measurement sources to be connected on the inputs FG-1 and
FG-3.
The user must check that, under the normal conditions of machine rotation, the signal connected to the
input FG-1 is in phase advance with reference to the signal connected to the input FG-3 (should
correspond to the “Normal” direction of rotation (Turbine direction)).
The output RSRD is switched when the machine runs in the "Normal" direction (Turbine direction).
The output RSRI is switched when the machine runs in the "Reverse" direction.
The polarity of output is linked:
• To the state of rest defined by the parameters SV_RSRD and SV_RSRI, that corresponds to
the polarity if the machine is stopped.
Note: For activating the configuration Direction, the channels 1 and 3 of the T•ADT should be
obligatorily used on the sensors.
Test points:
RSRD: Output Normal direction (Turbine direction).
RSRI: Output Reverse direction.
2.1.8 Detection of tachometer fault

The T•ADT allows detecting the absence of speed signal during a turbine start-up. For this, it is
necessary to wire the data “operation order” on the RMA input (this is possible by using the data
"Governor operation order").
In this case, a time delay of duration adjustable by the parameter SY_TDEM is activated on a leading
edge of the RMA input.
When this time delay has lapsed, the absence of speed signal causes a major fault.
2.1.8.1 Measurement fault with single source

In this case, the loss of speed measurement causes a major fault.
It is possible to inhibit the Tachometer fault on the channel 1 when it is used on TT (Configuration
Tac1_TT) and if the speed is below a threshold, adjustable via the parameter TC_DT. This allows using
560
9/14 ABCD
one measurement per TT on a channel, without the appearance of a fault message when the signal is
no longer detected (low speeds).
2.1.8.2 Measurement fault with 2 sources (Configuration Red_1_2 or Red_1_3)

Just as in the channel 1, the parameter TC_DT allows inhibiting the Tachometer faults on the channel 2
if it is used on TT (Configuration Tac2_TT).
A difference between the two measurements (normalised) greater, in absolute value, than the threshold
ET_SDT, causes the detection of a discordance and the activation of a minor fault.
A time delay applied on the deviation between the two measurements, adjustable by ET_TMP, allows
avoiding the untimely fault indications due to the HF deviations.
If a discordance is detected, the signal processed is the one whose frequency is higher.
The loss of two speed measurements causes a major fault.
2.1.8.3 Measurement fault with 3 sources (Configuration Red3)

When a measurement shows a deviation with regard to the others (the two others being non-nil) and if
this deviation is greater, in absolute value, than threshold ET_SDT, discordance is detected and a minor
fault is activated.
A time delay applied on the deviation between the two measurements, adjustable by the parameter
ET_TMP, allows avoiding the untimely fault indications due to the HF deviations.
If a discordance is detected, the signal taken for processing is the one with highest frequency between
the two non-discordant signals.
A loss of 2 speed measurements causes the activation of a minor fault.

A loss of 3 speed measurements causes a major fault.
2.2 Major faults

These faults no longer allow the T•ADT to control the unit sequences.
A T•ADT is operational only when no major fault is detected.
In case of major fault, the outputs of T•ADT should no longer be taken into account.
The major faults are indicated:

• By opening the logic output of RD29 (for indication to the unit PLC),
• By the LED Major Fault in front face of the T•ADT,
• On the operator interfaces.
In addition to the above indications, the detection of a major fault leads:

• To the opening of all the logic outputs,
• To the cutout of all the analogy outputs.
A major fault disappears when the cause linked to the fault has disappeared and when the fault has
been acknowledged (refer following chapter).
2.2.1 Major system faults

These are faults relating to the system operation (hardware malfunctioning, software application
execution fault) detectable at the hardware level.
561
10/14 ABCD
2.2.2 Major process faults

These are faults detected at the level of the application.
2.2.3 List of major faults

Designation Description
System fault • Watchdog fault,
• Hardware fault (access to bus, memory, etc.),
• Software exceptions.
Major process faults • Loss of all speed measurement sources (refer following Chapter).
2.2.4 Acknowledgement of major faults

The faults can be acknowledged from one of the operator interfaces or during a restart.
It is possible to condition the acknowledgement of faults when the unit is stopped.

This condition allows preventing the consecutive acknowledgements of a sensor loss, unit in operation
(this may lead to the activation of certain low speed thresholds (due to a nil speed information) when
the unit is at nominal speed).
For this, it is necessary to wire the data "Governor operation" to the RMA input. This is possible by using
the same data as that wired on the input "operating order” of Governor).
In this configuration, it will be impossible to acknowledge the faults if RMA is excited and if the speed is
nil.
The faults shall be acknowledged after a time delay consecutive to the de-excitation of the RMA input.
The time delay can be adjusted by the parameter SY_TMDF. The programmed value should correspond
approximately to the machine stopping time (from nominal speed).
2.3 Minor faults

These faults are not critical for the T•ADT operation and allow the T•ADT to operate in degraded mode.
The disappearance of the associated cause leads to the disappearance of the fault and allows to the
T•ADT to resume its normal operation.
These faults are indicated:
• By the logic output RD129 at status TRUE,
• By the LED Minor Fault in front face of the T•ADT,
• On the operator interfaces.
A minor fault disappears when the cause linked to the fault has disappeared.
Certain minor faults are detected at the hardware level:

Minor faults
Designation Description Fallback mode
Loss of speed measurement with
Another speed
Minor process fault. possibility of switching to another
measurement.
measurement (refer following chapter).
562
11/14 ABCD
3. APPENDICES
3.1 MODBUS Communication

The autonomous turbine tachometer T•ADT is a slave station of the MODBUS link.
The zone addressable by MODBUS is divided into four parts:
Zone Word address Bit address

Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal
Read only bit 01 to 07 01 H to 07 H 16 to 127 10 H to 7F H
Read only word 16 to 127 10 H to 7F H / /
The bit zones are accessible in word addressing or in bit addressing.
3.1.1 Read bits

Address Identifier Designation Configuration
10H RD29 Major fault
11H DF_MJVT Loss of speed signal
20H RD129 Minor fault

Configuration Red_1_2 or
21H DF_VT1 Loss of signal Input Tachy 1
Red_1_3 or Red3
22H DF_VT2 Loss of signal Input Tachy 2 Configuration Red_1_2 or Red3
23H DF_VT3 Loss of signal Input Tachy 3 Configuration Red_1_3 or Red3
31H RV01 Speed threshold

3AH RV10 Speed threshold
3BH RV11 Speed threshold
3CH RV12 Speed threshold
3DH RSTO Creeping threshold Configuration Creep
3EH RSRD Rotation Normal direction Configuration Direction
3FH RSRI Rotation Reverse direction Configuration Direction
563
12/14 ABCD
3.1.2 Read words

Measurement Multi.
Address Identifier SIGNAL Valid domain Configuration
unit coeff.
Speed of
10H VT 0~6000 r.p.m 0.2
unit
3.1.3 Analogy values coding

The analogy data passing through the MODBUS network are coded by integers coded on 2 bytes in
complement of 2 (from–32767 to +32767), the hexadecimal value 8000 H being reserved for coding an
invalid value.
For converting these integer values into real values, it is necessary to use the multiplication coefficient
defined in the word tables:
The value read is multiplied by the multiplication coefficient.
Example: Reading of the integer 28 for the speed measurement. This reading corresponds to 5.6 R.P.M.
(28* 0.2).
3.2 Setting parameters

Mnemonic Significance Units Variation range Default value
DT_GLIS Time delay for holding Creeping info Second 0 to 2000 20
ET_SDT Fault threshold for sensor deviation Normalised 0 to 3 0.1
ET_TMP Time delay for tachy deviation fault Second 0 to 10 1
TM_S11 Holding time after locking threshold no. 11 Second 0 to 2000 15
TM_S12 Holding time after locking threshold no. 12 Second 0 to 2000 20
TR_S11 Locking time delay threshold no. 11 Second 0 to 200 5
TR_S12 Locking time delay threshold no. 12 Second 0 to 200 5
VT20 Speed for 20 mA on output SA1 Normalised 0 to 5 2
VT4 Speed for 4 mA on output SA1 Normalised 0 to 5 0.1
SV_SD1 Trailing threshold no. 1 Normalised 0 to 3 0.09
SV_SM1 Leading threshold no. 1 Normalised 0 to 3 0.11
564
13/14 ABCD

SYRP1-8 O1 Rest state of the output threshold O1 None 0 or 1 0
IO CONF RSRD Rest state of the output Normal direction None 0 or 1 0
IO CONF RSRI Rest state of the output Reverse direction None 0 or 1 0
IO CONF RSTO Rest state of the output RSTO threshold None 0 or 1 0
SY_TDME Time delay on starting Second 0 to 1000 10
SY_TMDF Time delay for fault acknowledgement Second 0 to 1000 200
Time constant of speed measurement
TC1_CTF Second 0 to 100 2
channel 1
TC_DT Fault threshold TT Normalised 0 to 1 0.2
TC1_FRN Nominal frequency of channel 1 Hertz 0 to 6000 50
TC1_PRD Speed measurement pre-division channel 1 None 0 to 1000 1
channel 2
TC2_FRN Nominal frequency of channel 2 Hertz 0 to 6000 50
channel 3
TC3_FRN Nominal frequency of the channel 3 Hertz 0 to 6000 50
VT_SPRD Predivision threshold speed signal Normalised 0 to 1 0.2
Nominal speed of the turbine for the display
VT_VN r.p.m. 0 to 3600 200
in r.p.m.
Nominal frequency of the turbine for the
FR_NOM Hertz 0. to 3600 50
display in Hz
565
14/14 ABCD
NEYRPIC® T.SLG
PROGRAMMING GUIDE
N° 4454 Rev 1
POWER
Hydro
566
PROGRAMMING GUIDE
MODIFIED FOLIOS VERSION MODIFICATIONS DOCUMENT STATUS DATE WRITTEN BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY
REFEFENCE (*)
All 1 First Edition N°4464 revision 2 GFE 13/01/09 S.GRAND D.CLEMENT J.FERRAL
(*) GFE : Good For Execution

GFR : Good For Review
PREL : Preliminary
567
PART I : CONFIGURATIONS …………………………………………
PART II : PARAMETERS …………………………………………………………
PART III : LAWS ……………………………………………………………………….
568
CONFIG T.SLG General configuration ACCESS_ALSTOM
Nom Description Commentaires Folio

Active "WIR_INP" means that we use wired inputs : R4, R5, R6, R7, R13, R60, R149, R70,
R130, R128_ON, R128_OFF, R131, R132, R127, R98.
When this configuration is activated the OE analog input is declared (the analog setpoint is
WIR_INP Wired input taken into account when the logical input R7 is 1).
In the particular case when the analog input "OE" is not present (and the logical input R7
associed), it is necessary to inhib the fault of the OE input by configuring the parameter
"IN_OE_LC" = -0,3.
When the configuration “WIR_LA” is activated the activation of the LOCAL_AUTO mode and
its control are made from the local panel. The logical input R140 allows to activate the
WIR_LA Wired LOCAL AUTO control LOCAL_AUTO mode. When the LOCAL_AUTO mode is activated by R140 the analog inputs
OE and LO are not taken account (the setpoints are incrementals : R21/R22 and R30/R31).
The choice of the feedback mode (opening or power) is given by the logical input R5.
Allows the UPC to set the autonomous mode. When the UPC is not operational (major fault),
the SPC fixes the actual setpoint to keep the production continuity. The SPC setpoint can be
changed in manual mode by the logic inputs (if the configuration "MAN_CTR" of the
configuration field "CONFIG_A" SPC is activated).
SPC_AUTM SPC autonomous mode enable Warning:
- When the SPC is in autonomous mode, the speed control and the external setpoint are not
operational.
- This mode must not be used with several SPC (Kaplan, Pelton,...).
"SV" onfiguration activates speed thresholds. The outputs "RV1" to "RV6" are set according to
the speed thresholds with an histeresis between "SV_SDx" to "SV_SMx". The speed
SV Speed Thresholds
thresholds are available only if the system has not redundancy UPC and has not level
feedback control.
"POW_FDB" configuration informs regulator of the avaibility to run with a power feedback.
POW_FDB Power Feedback When this configuration is selected, analog input "PW" is processed, logic input "R5" switches
between opening regulation and power regulation.
R6 Synchronisation choice by R6 Choice of the synchronization type (automatic or manual) on the grid by the logic input R6.
When the configuration "R6" is inactive, the choice of the synchronization type is fixed by the
Page 1 / 10
569
configuration "SY_AUTO" of the configuration field "PID_CNF". When the configuration "R6" is
activated, this is the logic input R6 which determines the synchronization mode (by the HMI if
we are in LOCAL AUTO mode).
If R6 = 1, the synchronization is manual (by the logical inputs R21/R21).
If R6 = 0, the synchronization is automatic.
When "HEAD_MSR" is selected, the head value is measured on the corresponding analog
HEAD_MSR Head measurement input(s). If this configuration is not selected or if an error is detected on the measurement, the
head value is taken from the head fallback value "CH_REPLI".
If the configuration "LO_4/20" is selected, an analogical 4/20mA input exists for limitation
value LO. Modbus LO value remains higher priority, but if modbus communication is lost, it is
LO_4/20 Opening limiter in 4/20mA switched to analog value. If this option is not selected, or if analog signal is faulty, incremental
mode is used : current value is kept, and can be modified thanks to logical inputs R30(+) and
R31(-).
CONFIG_A SPC Alstom configuration ACCESS_ALSTOM

Warning, one, and only one configuration between "POW_2Q", "POW_4Q " and "POW_MAV" must be selected. If none is selected,
SPC declares a major fault "CONFIG", because it is not able to drive the actuator.
If several are selected, the SPC takes into account, in order of priority: "POW_2Q", "POW_4Q" then "POW_MAV”.
SPC configuration. Determines if there is redundancy onservomotor sensor. When the
SE_RED Servomotor sensor redundancy measure difference between both sensors is higher than the parameter "SE_DISC", minor fault
"SE_DIS" is declared.
SPC configuration. Determines if there is redundancy on the distributor sensor. When
VA_RED Valve sensor redundancy measure difference between both sensors is higher than parameter "VA_DISC", minor fault
"VA_DIS" is declared.
SPC configuration. Configuration of the SPC output: driving 4 transistors (2 bridges), allowing
POW_4Q 4Q power output to control in both directions.
Example of actuator : for TR10 type actuators (Alstom).
SPC configuration. When this configuration is selected, the SPC controls a commercial
POW_MAV mA/V power output actuator. It can be either voltage controlled, or current controlled, depending on the
configuration of dip-switches of the SPC.
MAN_CTR Manual control SPC configuration. When this configuration is selected, the logic inputs on the SPC for the
Page 2 / 10
570
manual mode are actived.
SPC configuration. Configuration of the SPC output: driving only 2 transistors (1 bridge),
allowing a single direction control.
POW_2Q 2Q power output
Example of actuator: for ED type actuators (Alstom), which have a toggle spring and thus a
tendency.
SPC configuration. Determines the use or not of the internal loop which is the position control
DIST_VA Distributing valve
of the distributing valve with a position sensor fixed in it.
SPC configuration. Informs the SPC that it has two CAN links , each with an UPC. This
DUAL_CA Dual Can configuration is selected for systems with simple redundancy (Only the UPCs are redundants).
The selection of the CAN bus is automatic.
CONFIG_B SPC Alstom configuration ACCESS_ALSTOM

KD_INV Actuator control inversion SPC configuration. Invert the control of the actuator.
SPC configuration. When this configuration is activated, the saturation fault is not any more
indicated. This fault indicates that the analogic input 4/20mA is either lower than 4mA, or
SAT_OFF Saturation fault not signalled higher than 20mA. If the measure becomes lower than 3mA or higher than 21.4mA, the minor
saturation fault "SEx_SAT" or "VAx_SAT" it is no more declared but in its place the sensor loss
fault "SEx_MES" or "VAx_MES" (This fault is major for SPC).
GBF_CNF GBF bloc configuration ACCESS_MAINT

The speed governor has an internal generator of signals allowing to inject a periodic signal (sinus, square or triangular) on the internal
variable (FG, PI or CSC).
One, and only one configuration between "SINUS", "SQUARE" and "TRI" must be selected.
Moreover one configuration between " FG ", "PI", and "CSC" must be selected.
SQUARE Square The signal generator’s output is square.
Page 3 / 10
571
TRI Triangle The signal generator’s output is triangular.
PI PI bloc The output of the signal generator is added to the input of the PI block.
SINUS Sinus The signal generator’s output is sinusoidal.
CSC CSC (before dispatching) The generator’s output is added to the general setpoint before the distribution.
FG Unit frequency The generator’s output is added to unit’s frequency "FG".
HED_CNF Head measurement configuration ACCESS_ALSTOM

Determine the source of the head signal: if this configuration is selected, the head is
MDB_MSR MODBUS measurement determined from modbus link, otherwise it is determined from analogic input(s).
If this configuration is selected, the head calculated with the upstream and downstream levels
UP_DOWN Upstream and downstream level (CH = AM - AV). If it is not selected, the head is directly measured (by Modbus or by 4/20mA
analog signal depending of the configuration "MDB_MSR").
JD_CNF Pilote injector choice mode ACCESS_MAINT

Source of the choice of pilot needle: parameter "JD_PILIN", value given by modbus, or automatic selection based on the functionning
time of each needleas pilot. The automatic selection is made only when the speed governor is in “Standby” stage.
PARAM Use a parameter When this configuration is selected, the pilot needle is determined by the parameter JD_PILIN.
When this configuration is selected, the pilot needle is automatically selected, according to the
operation time of each servomotor: the less used needle becomes the current pilot if the
difference between his operation time and the operation time of the current pilot needle
AUTO Automaticle exceeds the parameter "JD_T_PIL". If neither the configuration "MDB", nor the configuration
"PARAM" are activated, whatever is the state of the "AUTO" configuration, the pilot needle is
automatically selected. The automatic choice of the pilot needle is valid only when the speed
governor is in the "Standby" mode (each start).
MDB Modbus When this configuration is selected, the pilot needle is determined by modbus.
Page 4 / 10
572
JD_RAZ_C Clear hour conters ACCESS_MAINT
Erasing the functionning time counter of each needle as pilot needle, which is used for the automatic selection of pilot needle.
Inj #6 Injector #1 Counter When this configuration is selected, the time counter of the needle 6 is set to 0.
L2P_CNF L2P bloc configuration ACCESS_OPERAT

OR

Select the calculation method of the limitation with 2 slopes closing law.
When this configuration is selected, the 2 slopes closing law are determined on a speed
threshold (LP_SURV). When the unit speed exceeds the value of the parameter "LP_SURV",
the closing ramp time is "LP_RPRP" (fast slope) during "LP_TPSV" seconds, otherwise the
closing ramp time is "LP_RPLT" (slow slope).
If the configuration "L2S" is not selected, the 2 slopes closing law are determined on positions
L2S L2P on speed threshold
thresholds (LP_POSH et LP_POSB). When the position exceeds the value of the parameter
"LP_POSH" the closing ramp time is "LP_RPRP" (fast slope). When the position is between
the value of the parameters "LP_POSH" and "LP_POSB" the closing ramp time is "LP_RPLT"
(slow slope). When the position is
lower than the value of parameter "LP_POSB" the closing ramp time is "LP_RPRP" (fast
slope).
Page 5 / 10
573
PID_CNF PID bloc configuration ACCESS_OPERAT
OR

Choice of the synchronization type (automatic or manual) on the grid by the configuration
"SY_AUTO". When the configuration "SY_AUTO" is activated, the synchronization is
SY_AUTO Automatic synchronisation automatic. When the configuration "SY_AUTO" is not activated, the synchronization is manual
(by the logic inputs R21/R22). The configuration "SY_AUTO" is available only if the
configuration "R6" of the configuration field "CONFIG" is not activated.
s_IvS6B Invert outputs Slot 6 group B ACCESS_MAINT

162SN
160SN
161SN
158SN
159SN
157SN
SIMUL Simulation mode ACCESS_ALSTOM

Activates the simulation mode in which actuators’ position measurement, the unit speed and
SIMUL T.SLG in simulation mode
the power measurement is simulated according to SPC setpoints.
Page 6 / 10
574
sIvEM Invert outputs 150EM ACCESS_MAINT

157EM
158EM
155EM
156EM
153EM
154EM
151EM
152EM
sIvS4A Invert inputs Slot 4 group A ACCESS_MAINT

153SN
152SN
152SP
151DS
151SN
150SP
150SW
Page 7 / 10
575
sIvS4B Invert inputs Slot 4 group B ACCESS_MAINT

131FC2
133SN
131FC1
sOption Configuring installation ACCESS_ALSTOM

sOKMFi
sRIPrese
sOFLST
sOKM
sModbusS
sMTemp
sFBoost
sFCount
SPT_CFG Speed threshold ACCESS_MAINT
Page 8 / 10
576
SP_TH5 Output #5 inverted
sSensor Analog sensor connected ACCESS_ALSTOM

sSPSTP
sSPSTT
sPPTP
sSPPTL
TAC_CNF TAC bloc configuration ACCESS_ALSTOM

FR_LOST FR desable lost detection This configuration allows to inhib the fault detection on FG2.
If the configuration "FG2_AVAI" is selected, the unit frequency is measured by two channels
FG2_AVAI FG2 on sensor available (redundancy measurement). The channel 2 is obligatory a sensor.
FG2_LOST FG2 desable lost detection This configuration allows to inhib the fault detection on FG2.
FG1_LOST FG1 desable lost detection This configuration allows to inhib the fault detection on FG1.
Page 9 / 10
577
Selection of the measurement source of the unit frequency FG1. When the configuration
FG1TCTT FG1 measurement on sensor "FG1TCTT " is selected, the measure is taken from a sensor otherwise measure is taken from
a VT (Voltage Transformer).
WL_MODE Water level control mode ACCESS_MAINT

Selection level regulation type: when the configuration "UP_MES" is selected, the governor
regulates the upstream level. If the configuration "UP_MES" is not selected, the level governor
UP_MES Use uper mesure
regulates downstream level. If a fault is declared in the analogic measure currently used, level
regulation is stopped.
Page 10 / 10
578
PART I : CONFIGURATIONS ………………………………………………….
PART II : PARAMETERS ……………………………………………….
PART III : LAWS ……………………………………………………………………….
579
Mnemonic Unit Min Max Default Description Access Explanation Folio
ACCESS
Proportional gain of “back to back” start-up, during
BB_Kp - 0 10 1,1 Prop gain - B2B _OPERA
“synchronisation” stage.
TOR
"Back to back" start up. "BB_TCF" represents the
ACCESS frequency rising time between minimum frequency "
BB_TCF s 0 500 180 B2B ramp time (s)
_MAINT VT_BBMN ", reached by prepositioning, and nominal
frequency.
ACCESS Derivative time constant in regulation feedback value
BB_Td s 0 10 0,22 Deriv time - B2B (s) _OPERA for “back to back” start-up, during “synchronisation”
TOR stage.
ACCESS
Integrator’s time constant for “back to back” start-up,
BB_Ti s 0 9999,9 4,2 Integr time - B2B (s) _OPERA
during “synchronisation” stage.
TOR
Minimum time of prepositioning in synchronizing
stage, where prepositioning is fixed to "VT_BBLC".
ACCESS
BB_TMP1 s 0 100 5 B2B prepos. temporisation (s)
_MAINT
Even if the unit frequency reaches "VT_BBLC"
threshold before "BB_TMP1" seconds, the rising ramp
of frequency will start only after this minimum period.
Maximum time of prepositioning in synchronizing
stage. Beyond this period, even if the unit frequency
ACCESS
BB_TMP2 s 0 100 30 B2B ramp start temporisation (s)
_MAINT
did not reach the minimum frequency "VT_BBMN",
rising ramp in frequency will start towards nominal
frequency (=1.0 ).
During synchronisation phase, frequency setpoint is
given manually or automatically. If synchronisation is
done manually, logic inputs R21 and R22 allow to
ACCESS
CF_PLAG Norm 0,05 1 0,1 Freq. modification width (Norm)
_MAINT
increase/decrease value of frequency setpoint. Ramp
time “Sync_TCF” seconds to go from 1.0 - "CF_PLAG"
to 1.0 + "CF_PLAG". So, “CF_PLAG” parameters both
defines limits of manual setpoint and its speed.
CH_HIND m 0 1000 100 Head max indicator scale ACCESS "CH_LIND" is the minimum value (meter) of the test
_MAINT point CH (head).
"CH_HIND" is the maximum value (meter) of the test
point CH (head).
Page 1 / 49
580
To take account the modification of this parameters
requires :
- Reboot UPC and HMI.
- Unselect the test point CH (if it was ever selected).
- Select the test point CH.
"CH_LIND" is the minimum value (meter) of the test
point CH (head).
"CH_HIND" is the maximum value (meter) of the test
point CH (head).
ACCESS
CH_LIND m 0 1000 0 Head min indicator scale
_MAINT
requires :
- Unselect the test point CH (if it was ever selected).
- Select the test point CH.
ACCESS
Nominal head value, in meters, which corresponds to 1
CH_NOM m 0 9999 40 Nominal Head (m) _OPERA
for the normalized values.
TOR
ACCESS
Head fallback value when the head measurement is
CH_REPLI m 0 9999 40 Head - Fallback value (m) _OPERA
not available.
TOR
ACCESS
Opening setpoint of the speed governor in a
CS_POSC Norm 0 1 0 Turb - Compensator positioning _OPERA
“synchronous condenser” (turbine).
TOR
ACCESS
Ramp time from 0% to 100% in “synchronous
CS_TCF s 1 2000 30 Compensator evolution time (s) _OPERA
condenser” stage.
TOR
ACCESS
DFL_CLTM s 1 9999,9 1 Deflector closing time (s) _OPERA Minimum closing time of deflectors.
TOR
ACCESS Frequency shift introduced in deflectors’ regulation.
DFL_EPS Hz 0 9999,9 0,01 Freq offset for deflector action _OPERA “DFL_EPS” is added to frequency setpoint before the
TOR PI block.
DFL_Kp - 0 10 4 Deflector Prop gain ACCESS Gain in the main regulation loop of the deflectors’
_OPERA positions.
Page 2 / 49
581
TOR
ACCESS
DFL_OPTM s 1 9999,9 1 Deflector opening time (s) _OPERA Minimum opening time of deflectors.
TOR
Interference threshold of deflectors into needles
regulation loop. When deflectors impact the jets
beyond a threshold, the integrator’s time constant
ACCESS value of needles regulation loop is lowered. This way,
DFL_SKD - 0 1 0,75 Penetration thres. to INJ_KTi _OPERA error correction of needles regulation loop is
TOR accelerated and deflectors’ impact will be reduced
sooner. “DFL_SKD” parameter fixes this threshold.
Deflectors’ impact in jets is estimated by interpolation,
with "DFL_PLD” and “DFL_GLD” laws.
ACCESS
Derivative time constant in feedback value of
DFL_Td s 0 10 0,2 Deflector Deriv time (s) _OPERA
deflectors’ positions.
TOR
ACCESS
Time constant of low-pass first order filterapplied to
DFL_TFD s 1 9999,9 2 Deflector Load order filter (s) _OPERA
load setpoint.
TOR
ACCESS
Integration time constant in the main loop of the
DFL_Ti s 0 9999,9 2 Deflector Integr time (s) _OPERA
deflectors’ positions regulation.
TOR
DIT_AMP Norm 0 1 0 Dither effect amplitude ACCESS "Dither" effect consists in adding a squared signal to
_OPERA the PWM modulated signal used to drive an actuator.
TOR This squared signal has an amplitude of “DIT_AMP”
and a 50Hz frequency. Amplitude must be high
enough to shake the actuator slightly and in this way to
avoid oil-film rupture which is necessary to decrease
frictions.
In equilibrium position, if the Dither effect amplitude is
too high, the distributor valve’s movement will allow an
oil flow to servomotors chambers. So parasitic
oscillations will appear in the servomotor. This
mechanism is not needed for TR10 type actuators as
they have a mechanical device which avoids this
Page 3 / 49
582
phenomenon.
In a speed measurement redundancy case,

“FG_DIFMX” parameter establishes maximum
ACCESS difference between two measurements before
FG_DIFMX Hz 0 50 1 Max FG1/2 freq. difference (Hz)
_MAINT “FG_DISC” is declared.
If a channel is grteater than selected channel, by more
than "FG_DIFMX", it becomes selected channel.
In order to avoid a measure discordance fault
ACCESS declaration in a redundant system, the parameter
FG_DISC Hz 0 100 20 Freq. min discrepancy detect(Hz)
_MAINT “FG_DISC”, determines the threshold under which
“FG_DISC” fault will not be activated.
Predivision threshold. If frequency is higher than
“FG_PRFQ” , several acquisitions are used to
determine frequency. Acquisition number is given by
“FG1_PRD” parameter for sensor 1, and by
ACCESS
FG_PRFQ Norm 0 2 0,9 Freq. threshold prediv. (Norm)
_MAINT
“FG2_PRD” for sensor 2.
The predivision function do not be used with low
frequency (because the sampling time becomes too
important). The "FG_PRFQ" threshold must be at least
0,9 (90% of the nominal frequency).
If unit frequency is lower than “FG_SLDF”, while
ACCESS
FG_SLDF Norm 0 2 0,05 No speed threshold (Norm)
_MAINT
regulator is in synchronisation stage for “FG_TDEM”
seconds, “MJ_FG” major fault is set.
If unit frequency is lower than “FG_SLDF”, while
ACCESS
FG_TDEM s 0 999999 60 Speed appearance time delay (s)
_MAINT
regulator is in synchronisation stage for “FG_TDEM”
seconds, “MJ_FG” major fault is set.
Detection threshold of the loss of the frequency
ACCESS measurement. When the frequency measured is lower
FG_TFD Norm 0 3 0,2 FG Thres. fault detection (norm)
_MAINT than "FG_TFD" the loss of the frequency measurement
(on gradian) is deactivated (no fault declared).
ACCESS “FG_TGR” defines first order filter’s time constant
FG_TGR s 0 20 0,1 FG filter time (s)
_MAINT applied to unit frequency.
FG1_FRN Hz 1 500 50 Sens. freq. at nominal speed(Hz) ACCESS “FG1_FRN” is the nominal frequency of the sensor
Page 4 / 49
583
(frequency measured by the sensor) of the channel 1
when the unit is operating in the nominal frequency.
_MAINT
FG1_FRN = Nominal frequency of the unit (rotation per
second) * Teeth number.
When unit frequency is higher than "FG_PRFQ"
threshold, predivision is activated.
"FG1_PRD" is the number of acquisitions used on the
channel 1 when the predivision function is activated.
The predivision function realizes a filtering on the
ACCESS
FG1_PRD - 1 200 1 Measurement number by period
_MAINT
sensor measurement (filtering of the imperfections of
the toothed wheel).
Usually, the frequency measurement, around of the
nominal frequency, has to do on a complete rotation of
the machine shaft. It is necessary to configure :
"FG1_PRD" = Teeth number.
“FG2_FRN” is the nominal frequency of the sensor
(frequency measured by the sensor) of the channel 2
ACCESS
FG2_FRN Hz 1 500 50 Sens. freq. at nominal speed(Hz)
_MAINT
when the unit is operating in the nominal frequency.
FG2_FRN = Nominal frequency of the unit (rotation per
second) * Teeth number.
When unit frequency is higher than "FG_PRFQ"
threshold, predivision is activated.
"FG2_PRD" is the number of acquisitions used on the
channel 2 when the predivision function is activated.
The predivision function realizes a filtering on the
ACCESS
FG2_PRD - 1 200 1 Measurement number by period
_MAINT
sensor measurement (filtering of the imperfections of
the toothed wheel).
Usually, the frequency measurement, around of the
nominal frequency, has to do on a complete rotation of
the machine shaft. It is necessary to configure :
"FG2_PRD" = Teeth number.
Mean flow is calculated with “FL/OR” law, which gives
ACCESS flow of a needle according to its opening. The result is
FLW_TFQ s 0 20 0,1 Time const on estimated flow (s)
_MAINT filtered with a first order filter which have a time
constant of “FLW_TQF”.
Page 5 / 49
584
Configurable analogic output n°1.
ACCESS "FO_1_MIN" corresponds to the value of the test point
FO_1_MAX - -1000 1000 1 Channel 1 - Max val _OPERA selected on the channel 1 for an analog output -10V.
TOR "FO_1_MAX" corresponds to the value of the test point
selected on the channel 1 for an analog output -10V.
FO_1_MIN - -1000 1000 -1 Channel 1 - Min val _OPERA selected on the channel 1 for an analog output -10V.
Configurable fast analogic output n°1. Selection of test
point to supply on the channel 1:
1="PID_D_FG" ,
2="PID_CNS" ,
ACCESS
3="PID_EP" ,
FO_1_NB - 0 255 1 Channel 1 - Test point Id _OPERA
4="PID_INT" ,
TOR
5="PID_CSC" ,
6="CSC" ,
7="FG_NORM" ,
8="PW_NORM" .
ACCESS
Configurable fast analogic output n°1. Time constant of
FO_1_TF s 0 1000 0 Channel 1 - Filter time const(s) _OPERA
the first order filter applied before visualization.
TOR
FO_2_MAX - -1000 1000 1 Channel 2 - Max val _OPERA selected on the channel 2 for an analog output -10V.
FO_2_MIN - -1000 1000 -1 Channel 2 - Min val _OPERA selected on the channel 2 for an analog output -10V.
FO_2_NB - 0 255 1 Channel 2 - Test point Id ACCESS Configurable fast analogic output n°2. Selection of test
_OPERA point to supply on the channel 2:
Page 6 / 49
585
1="PID_D_FG" ,
2="PID_CNS" ,
3="PID_EP" ,
4="PID_INT" ,
TOR
5="PID_CSC" ,
6="CSC" ,
7="FG_NORM" ,
8="PW_NORM" .
ACCESS
Configurable fast analogic output n°2. Time constant of
FO_2_TF s 0 1000 0 Channel 2 - Filter time const(s) _OPERA
first order filter applied before visualization.
TOR
ACCESS If unit frequency reaches “FQ_CPL”, governor
FQ_CPL Norm 0 2 0,9 Freq. coupling threshold (Norm)
_MAINT authorizes to change to coupled stage.
ACCESS FG_TGR defines first order filter’s time constant for
FR_TGR s 0 20 0,1 FR filter time (s)
_MAINT network frequency measurement.
ACCESS “FREQ_REF” determines system’s nominal frequency
FREQ_REF Hz 1 120 50 Frequency main reference (Hz)
_MAINT from which all normalized values are calculated.
"GBF_MIN" is the minimum value injected by the
ACCESS internal generator of signals (GBF).
GBF_MAX Norm -0,1 0,1 -0,1 Maximal signal value (Norm)
_MAINT "GBF_MAX" is the maximum value injected by the
internal generator of signals (GBF).
"GBF_MIN" is the minimum value injected by the
ACCESS internal generator of signals (GBF).
GBF_MIN Norm -0,1 0,1 -0,1 Minimal signal value (Norm)
_MAINT "GBF_MAX" is the maximum value injected by the
internal generator of signals (GBF).
ACCESS "GBF_PER" is the period of the signal injected by the
GBF_PER s 1 9999 50 Signal period (s)
_MAINT internal function GBF (internal generator of signals).
IN_AM_HC - -1 2 1 Head/Upst. Inp. high raw val. ACCESS Calibration of the analog input AM (upstream level
_MAINT measurement).
The parameters "IN_AM_LC" and "IN_AM_HC" allow

to calibrate the current range of the analog input:
IN_AM_LC = 0 informs the minimum current is 4 mA.
IN_AM_HC = 1 informs the maximum current is 20
Page 7 / 49
586
mA.
Keep the default parameter ("IN_AM_LC" and
"IN_AM_HC") for a standard analog input 4/20mA.
The parameters "IN_AM_LV" and "IN_AM_HV" allow

to calibrate the range measurement:
IN_AM_LV corresponds to the minimum value of the
measurement (meter).
IN_AM_HV corresponds to the maximum value of the
Calibration of the analog input AM (upstream level
measurement).

mA.
ACCESS
IN_AM_HV m 0 9999 80 Head/Upst. Input high val. (m)
_MAINT

IN_AM_LC - -1 2 0 Head/Upst. Inp. low raw val. ACCESS Calibration of the analog input AM (upstream level

mA.
Page 8 / 49
587

Calibration of the analog input AM (upstream level
measurement).

mA.
ACCESS
IN_AM_LV m 0 9999 20 Head/Upst. Input low val. (m)
_MAINT

IN_AV_HC - -1 2 1 Downstream Inp. high raw val. ACCESS Calibration of the analog input AV (downstream level
The parameters "IN_AV_LC" and "IN_AV_HC" allow to

calibrate the current range of the analog input:
IN_AV_LC = 0 informs the minimum current is 4 mA.
IN_AV_HC = 1 informs the maximum current is 20
mA.
Keep the default parameter ("IN_AV_LC" and
"IN_AV_HC") for a standard analog input 4/20mA.
Page 9 / 49
588
The parameters "IN_AV_LV" and "IN_AV_HV" allow to
calibrate the range measurement:
IN_AV_LV corresponds to the minimum value of the
IN_AV_HV corresponds to the maximum value of the
Calibration of the analog input AV (downstream level
measurement).

mA.
ACCESS
IN_AV_HV m 0 9999 80 Downstream Input high val. (m)
_MAINT

IN_AV_LC - -1 2 0 Downstream Inp. low raw val. ACCESS Calibration of the analog input AV (downstream level

mA.

Page 10 / 49
589
Calibration of the analog input AV (downstream level
measurement).

mA.
ACCESS
IN_AV_LV m 0 9999 20 Downstream Input low val. (m)
_MAINT

ACCESS first order filter’s time constant, used for analog input
IN_CH_TF s 0 20 1 Head Input filter time const.(s)
_MAINT head measurement and levels measurement.
IN_LO_HC - -1 2 1 LO Input high current raw val. ACCESS Calibration of the analog input LO (opening limiter).
_MAINT
The parameters "IN_LO_LC" and "IN_LO_HC" allow to
IN_LO_LC = 0 informs the minimum current is 4 mA.
IN_LO_HC = 1 informs the maximum current is 20
mA.
Keep the default parameter ("IN_LO_LC" and
"IN_LO_HC") for a standard analog input 4/20mA.
The parameters "IN_LO_LV" and "IN_LO_HV" allow to

Page 11 / 49
590
IN_LO_LV corresponds to the minimum value of the
measurement (norm).
IN_LO_HV corresponds to the maximum value of the
measurement (norm).
Calibration of the analog input LO (opening limiter).

mA.
ACCESS Keep the default parameter ("IN_LO_LC" and
IN_LO_HV Norm -1 2 1 LO Input high value (Norm)
_MAINT "IN_LO_HC") for a standard analog input 4/20mA.

measurement (norm).
measurement (norm).

mA.
IN_LO_LC - -1 2 0 LO Input low current raw val.

measurement (norm).
measurement (norm).
Page 12 / 49
591

mA.
IN_LO_LV - -1 2 0 LO Input low value (Norm)

measurement (norm).
measurement (norm).
ACCESS Time constant (seconds) of the LO measurement filter
IN_LO_TF s 0 20 1 LO Input filter time const. (s)
_MAINT (first order low pass filter).
IN_OE_HC - -1 2 1 OE Input high current raw val. ACCESS Calibration of the analog input OE (external order).
_MAINT
The parameters "IN_OE_LC" and "IN_OE_HC" allow
IN_OE_LC = 0 informs the minimum current is 4 mA.
IN_OE_HC = 1 informs the maximum current is 20
mA.
Keep the default parameter ("IN_OE_LC" and
"IN_OE_HC") for a standard analog input 4/20mA. If
the OE signal is not present and you want to inhib the
minor fault "OE" it is necessary to configure the
parameter IN_OE_LC = - 0,3.
The parameters "IN_OE_LV" and "IN_OE_HV" allow

IN_OE_LV corresponds to the minimum value of the
measurement (norm).
IN_OE_HV corresponds to the maximum value of the
Page 13 / 49
592
measurement (norm).
Calibration of the analog input OE (external order).

mA.
ACCESS
IN_OE_HV - -1 2 1 OE Input high value (Norm)
_MAINT

measurement (norm).
measurement (norm).
IN_OE_LC - -1 2 0 OE Input low current raw val. ACCESS Calibration of the analog input OE (external order).
_MAINT
mA.

Page 14 / 49
593
measurement (norm).
measurement (norm).
Calibration of the analog input OE (external order).

mA.
ACCESS
IN_OE_LV - -1 2 0 OE Input low value (Norm)
_MAINT

measurement (norm).
measurement (norm).
ACCESS Time constant (seconds) of the OE measurement filter
IN_OE_TF s 0 20 1 OE Input filter time const. (s)
_MAINT (first order low pass filter).
IN_PW_HC - -1 2 1 Power Input high raw value ACCESS Calibration of the analog input PW (power
The parameters "IN_PW_LC" and "IN_PW_HC" allow

IN_PW_LC = 0 informs the minimum current is 4 mA.
IN_PW_HC = 1 informs the maximum current is 20
mA.
Keep the default parameter ("IN_PW_LC" and
"IN_PW_HC") for a standard analog input 4/20mA.
Page 15 / 49
594
The parameters "IN_PW_LV" and "IN_PW_HV" allow
IN_PW_LV corresponds to the minimum value of the
measurement (MW).
IN_PW_HV corresponds to the maximum value of the
measurement (MW).
When "PW" fault is set, "IN_PW_TL" is the delay, in

seconds, before clearing fault during which signal must
be operational.
Calibration of the analog input PW (power
measurement).

mA.
ACCESS
IN_PW_HV MW 0 1000 100 Power Input high value (MW)
_MAINT
measurement (MW).
measurement (MW).

be operational.
IN_PW_LC - -1 2 0 Power Input low raw value ACCESS Calibration of the analog input PW (power

Page 16 / 49
595
mA.

measurement (MW).
measurement (MW).

be operational.
IN_PW_LV MW -1000 100 0 Power Input low value (MW) ACCESS Calibration of the analog input PW (power

mA.

measurement (MW).
measurement (MW).

Page 17 / 49
596
be operational.
ACCESS
Time constant (seconds) of the power measurement
IN_PW_TF s 0 20 1 Power filter time constant (s) _OPERA
filter (first order low pass filter).
TOR
ACCESS
IN_PW_TL s 0 1000 5 Power fail. detect. time lag (s)
_MAINT
be operational.
When deflectors reach “DFL_SKD” threshold,
ACCESS integrator’s time constant of needle regulation loop is
INJ_KTI - 0,1 1 0,25 Gain on Ti inj. if defl in jet _OPERA multiplied by “INJ_KTI”. This way, when deflector’s
TOR impact become important, needles’ correction is
accelerated.
ACCESS
The integrator’s output limitation of the position loop
INT_LIM Norm 0 1 0,01 Integral action limitation _OPERA
(SPC) in the interval [-INT_LIM;INT_LIM].
TOR
ACCESS
Permanent droop -
Intd_BP Norm 0 0,2 0,05
Interconnected
_OPERA Droop parameter in “interconnected network” stage.
TOR
ACCESS
Intd_Kp - 0 10 1,51 Prop gain - Interconnected _OPERA Proportional gain in “interconnected network” stage.
TOR
ACCESS
Time constant of derivative action in “interconnected
Intd_Td s 0 10 0,21 Deriv time - Interconnected (s) _OPERA
network” stage.
TOR
ACCESS
Time constant of integrator in “interconnected network”
Intd_Ti s 0 9999,9 4,1 Integr time - Interconnected(s) _OPERA
stage.
TOR
ACCESS
Isol_BP Norm 0 0,2 0,05 Permanent droop - Isolated _OPERA Droop parameter in “isolated network” stage.
TOR
ISOL_FTH Norm 0 1 0,1 Freq Threshold to isolated netw ACCESS Frequency variation detection (to switch in isolated
_OPERA network mode).
TOR If the difference between measured frequency and
nominal frequency is greater than the parameter
Page 18 / 49
597
"ISOL_FTH" the speed governor switch in the isolated
network mode. A pulse on the R128-ON input allows
to come back in normal mode.
ACCESS
Isol_Kp - 0 10 1,23 Prop gain - Isolated _OPERA Proportional gain in “isolated network” stage.
TOR
ACCESS
Time constant of derivative action in “isolated network”
Isol_Td s 0 10 0,53 Deriv time - Isolated (s) _OPERA
stage.
TOR
ACCESS
Isol_Ti s 0 9999,9 4,3 Integr time - Isolated(s) _OPERA Time constant of integrator in “isolated network” stage.
TOR
Frequency gradian detection (to switch in isolated
network mode).
ACCESS If during a time "ISOL_VTM" the variation of the
ISOL_VAR Norm 0 1 0,1 Freq varaition to isolated netw _OPERA measured frequency is greater than parameter
TOR "ISOL_VAR", the speed governor switch in the isolated
Frequency gradian detection (to switch in isolated
network mode).
ACCESS If during a time "ISOL_VTM" the variation of the
ISOL_VTM s 1 7 5 Time for ISOL_VAR detect (s) _OPERA measured frequency is greater than parameter
TOR "ISOL_VAR", the speed governor switch in the isolated
When governor is in another operating mode than
synchronization, for example, when it is coupled to
ACCESS network, “JD_STCMT” is the switching time (in
JD_COMTM s 0 100 10 Injector commutation time (s)
_MAINT seconds) when number of needles used changes. As
the number of needles used changes, SPC setpoints
are modified in order to maintain the same flow.
JD_GE5 Norm 0 1 0 5<->6 inj. flow threshold (norm) ACCESS The number of needle to use is related to the mean
_MAINT flow (which is calculated according to openings).
Page 19 / 49
598
“JD_QE1” parameter fixes flow threshold from which
the number of needles changes from 1 to 2.
An hysteresis [JD_QEx ; JD_QEx + 0.05] is used to

avoid unexpected transitions near thresholds values.
Selection of the pilot needle is conditioned by the
ACCESS
configuration “JD_CNF”. If “parameter” is selected,
JD_PILIN - 0 10 1 Pilote injector number _OPERA
parameter “JD_PILIN” parameter defines which needle
TOR
is the pilot one.
The number of needle to use is related to the mean
flow (which is calculated according to openings).
ACCESS
JD_QE1 Norm 0 1 0,2 1<->2 inj. flow threshold (norm)
_MAINT

JD_QE2 Norm 0 1 0,4 2<->3 inj. flow threshold (norm) ACCESS The number of needle to use is related to the mean
Page 20 / 49
599

The number of needle to use is related to the mean
flow (which is calculated according to openings).
ACCESS
JD_QE3 Norm 0 1 0,6 3<->4 inj. flow threshold (norm)
_MAINT

JD_QE4 Norm 0 1 0,8 4<->5 inj. flow threshold (norm) ACCESS The number of needle to use is related to the mean
Page 21 / 49
600

This parameter must be an integer, considered as a
binary word of 8 bits.
For example, "JD_SIO_2" defines which needles to
use when 2 needles must be activated. The binary
representation must have only 2 bits at "1". Most
significant bit is pilot needle, which is always 1.
"JD_SIO_2" default value, 148, thus
ACCESS 10010000(binary), means that needles to use are
JD_SIO_2 Binary 0 255 144 2 injectors sequence _ALSTO number "pilot" and number "pilot+3". If "pilot+3" is
M greater than total needle number, count loops back to
needle n°1.
"JD_DIO_3", "JD_DIO_4", and "JD_DIO_5"
parameters are built exectly the same way, for systems
with 3, 4 or 5 needles.
For systems with 6 needles, which is the maximum, all
needle are used, thus, there is no need of a 6th
parameter to describe which needle to use.
JD_SIO_3 Binary 0 255 168 3 injectors sequence ACCESS This parameter must be an integer, considered as a
_ALSTO binary word of 8 bits.
M For example, "JD_SIO_2" defines which needles to
10010000(binary), means that needles to use are
number "pilot" and number "pilot+3". If "pilot+3" is
greater than total needle number, count loops back to
needle n°1.
Page 22 / 49
601
This parameter must be an integer, considered as a
binary word of 8 bits.
For example, "JD_SIO_2" defines which needles to
ACCESS 10010000(binary), means that needles to use are
JD_SIO_4 Binary 0 255 216 4 injectors sequence _ALSTO number "pilot" and number "pilot+3". If "pilot+3" is
M greater than total needle number, count loops back to
needle n°1.
JD_SIO_5 Binary 0 255 248 5 injectors sequence ACCESS This parameter must be an integer, considered as a
_ALSTO binary word of 8 bits.
M For example, "JD_SIO_2" defines which needles to
10010000(binary), means that needles to use are
number "pilot" and number "pilot+3". If "pilot+3" is
greater than total needle number, count loops back to
needle n°1.
Page 23 / 49
602
In synchronisation operating mode, “JD_STCMT” is the
switching time (in seconds) when number of needles
ACCESS
JD_STCMT s 0 100 0 Start injector commut. time (s)
_MAINT
used changes. As the number of needles used
changes, SPC setpoints are modified in order to
maintain the same flow.
Pilot needle selection is conditioned by “JD_CNF”
configuration. If it is not fixed by a parameter nor by
modbus, UPC makes the selection automaticaly.
Automatic selection is made only when governor is in
"Standby" stage. Algorithm of the pilot needle
ACCESS
automatic selection is based on the cumulated
JD_T_PIL h 1 999 1 Pilote working time (hour) _OPERA
operating time of each jet: if difference of cumulated
TOR
operating time between pilot needle and one of the
other needles becomes higher than "JD_T_PIL" hours,
this least used needle becomes pilot for the next start
(in a equality case, the needle having the lowest
number becomes pilot).
“Conditioning” threshold (Kaplan turbine). When
difference between setpoint and measured position is
ACCESS higher than this threshold, integrator’s input value is
KB_BLCND Norm 0 1 0,05 Blade conditioning threshold
_MAINT forced to 0 in order to avoid too high values at its
output. Wicket gate’s threshold is “KP_WGCND” and
blades’ threshold is "KP_BLCND".
Customization of the measurement unity for the
conjugation law (blades). The parameters "KB_BLMIN"
ACCESS and "KB_BLMAX" allow to calibrate the blades position
KB_BLMAX - 9999 9999 36,5 Max. blade (same unit B(W,H)) _OPERA in unspecified unity. This unit (in degres for example)
TOR will be used in the 5 conjugation laws B(W Hx).
"KB_BLMIN" corresponds to the minimum value.
"KB_BLMAX" corresponds to the maximum value.
KB_BLMIN - 9999 9999 7 Min. blade (same unit B(W,H)) ACCESS Customization of the measurement unity for the
_OPERA conjugation law (blades). The parameters "KB_BLMIN"
TOR and "KB_BLMAX" allow to calibrate the blades position
Page 24 / 49
603
in unspecified unity. This unit (in degres for example)
will be used in the 5 conjugation laws B(W Hx).
"KB_BLMIN" corresponds to the minimum value.
"KB_BLMAX" corresponds to the maximum value.
A 3D law gives blades’ position according to the head
ACCESS and the wicket gate’s opening. “KP_HD1” is fixed head
KB_HD1 m 0 9999 12 Head #1 for conjugated law (m) _OPERA value used in 2D law "B(W H1)". This law gives blade
TOR opening function of wicket gate opening, when head
value is "KP_HD1".
and the wicket gate’s opening. “KP_HD2” is fixed head
ACCESS
value used in 2D law "B(W H2)". This law gives blade
KB_HD2 m 0 9999 13 Head #2 for conjugated law (m) _OPERA
opening function of wicket gate opening, when head
TOR
value is "KP_HD2".

value is "KP_HD3".
and the wicket gate’s opening. “KP_HD4” is fixed head
ACCESS
value used in 2D law "B(W H4)". This law gives blade
KB_HD4 m 0 9999 19 Head #4 for conjugated law (m) _OPERA
opening function of wicket gate opening, when head
TOR
value is "KP_HD4".

value is "KP_HD5".
KB_PPA1 Norm 0 1 0 Blade position with R131 (nom.) ACCESS Kaplan turbine only.
_OPERA - Manual prepositioning (by R131 and R132) :
TOR If R131 is active, blades prepositioning by a ramp
between current position and parameter "KB_PPA1".
Page 25 / 49
604
This ramp lasts "KB_TCF" seconds. R131 has priority
over R132.
- Automatic prepositioning (internal sequences of the
speed governor)
The parameter "KB_PPA1" is the first blades
prepositioning when the turbine starts.
Kaplan turbine only.
- Manual prepositioning (by R131 and R132) :
If R132 is active, blades prepositioning by a ramp
between current position and parameter "KP_PPA2".
ACCESS
This ramp lasts "KP_TCF" seconds. R131 has priority
KB_PPA2 Norm 0 1 0 Blade position with R132 (nom.) _OPERA
over R132.
TOR
- Automatic prepositioning (internal sequences of the
speed governor)
The parameter "KB_PP21" is the second blades
prepositioning when the turbine starts.
ACCESS Ramp time between the current setpoint and the
KB_TCF s 1 2000 60 Blade posit. evolution time (s)
_MAINT prepositioning setpoint of the blades.
“Conditioning” threshold (Kaplan turbine). When
ACCESS higher than this threshold, integrator’s input value is
KB_WGCND Norm 0 1 0,05 Wicket gate condit. threshold
_MAINT forced to 0 in order to avoid too high values at its
output. Wicket gate’s threshold is “KP_WGCND” and
blades’ threshold is "KP_BLCND".
Customization of the measurement unity for the
conjugation law (blades). The parameters
"KB_WGMIN" and "KB_WGMAX" allow to calibrate
ACCESS
the wicket gate position in unspecified unity. This unit
KB_WGMAX - 9999 9999 80 Max. wick. g. (same unit B(W,H)) _OPERA
(in degres for example) will be used in the 5
TOR
conjugation laws B(W Hx).
"KB_WGMIN" corresponds to the minimum value.
"KB_WGMAX" corresponds to the maximum value.
KB_WGMIN - 9999 9999 0 Min. wick. g. (same unit B(W,H)) ACCESS Customization of the measurement unity for the
_OPERA conjugation law (blades). The parameters
TOR "KB_WGMIN" and "KB_WGMAX" allow to calibrate
Page 26 / 49
605
the wicket gate position in unspecified unity. This unit
(in degres for example) will be used in the 5
conjugation laws B(W Hx).
"KB_WGMIN" corresponds to the minimum value.
"KB_WGMAX" corresponds to the maximum value.
If servomotor command is by a distributor (double
ACCESS loop):
KD - 1 20 1 Derivative action _OPERA - Derivative gain of the distributor position loop (SPC).
TOR Otherwise (sample loop):
- Derivative gain of the servomotor position loop (SPC).
ACCESS
Proportional gain of the servomotor position loop
KP - 0 200 0 Proportional _OPERA
(SPC).
TOR
"STOP" option : stop management of the turbine.
If opening is higher than “LA_POSA”, setpoint is 0.
When opening becomes lower than “LA_POSA”,
ACCESS setpoint goes to 0 with a ramp value of “VT_RPAR”
LA_POSA Norm 0 1 0,05 Start stop evolution (Norm)
_MAINT which is defined for a full stroke 0%->100%. When
opening becomes lower than “LA_POSF”, governor
switches to “Standby” mode, and actuators are
switched off.
LA_POSF Norm 0 1 0,01 Stop threshold detection (Norm)
switched off.
When "adaptative PID" option is used, main loop gain
ACCESS
depends on a 3D law, so in two parameters: opening
LAW_HD1 m 0 9999 10 Head #1 for conjugated law (m) _OPERA
and head. “KP(O H1)” 2D law gives Kp gain according
TOR
to opening and for a head value “LAW_HD1”.
LAW_HD2 m 0 9999 40 Head #2 for conjugated law (m) ACCESS When "adaptative PID" option is used, main loop gain
_OPERA depends on a 3D law, so in two parameters: opening
Page 27 / 49
606
and head. “KP(O H2)” 2D law gives Kp gain according
TOR
to opening and for a head value “LAW_HD2”.
ACCESS
LM_RMPTI s 0 9999 0 Local manu - Ramp time (s) _OPERA Time for a 0% to 100% operation in Local Manu mode.
TOR
Opening limitation in "back to back" start up.
Start up is omposed of three stages. Prepositioning
stage, where frequency setpoint is fixed by
"VT_BBMN" parameter, and where there is no opening
ACCESS
LO_BB1 Norm 0 1 0,1 B2B Open limitation #1
_MAINT
limitation. Sometimes, a waiting stage, where the
opening limitation is "LO_BB1". And finally, frequency
ramp stage, where unit frequency setpoint follows a
ramp to nominal frequency. During this stage opening
limitation is set to "LO_BB2".
Opening limitation in a "back to back" start up: the
start up is made in three stages. The prepositioning
stage, where the frequency is fixed to the parameter
"VT_BBMN", and where is not any opening limitation.
ACCESS Sometimes, a waiting stage, where the opening
LO_BB2 Norm 0 1 0,1 B2B Open limitation #2
_MAINT limitation is "LO_BB1". And finally, the frequency
increasing stage, where the unit frequency is
incremented following a ramp until it reaches the
nominal frequency. During this stage the opening
limitation is set to "LO_BB2".
ACCESS
Opening limitation when unit frequency is lower than
LO_DEM Norm 0 1 0,2 Opening limit on start up _OPERA
“VT_SRA”.
TOR
In synchronisation satge, when unit frequency is
ACCESS
between "VT_SRA" and "VT_PID", opening limitation
LO_RABT Norm 0 1 0,1 Closing limit opening _OPERA
is the minimum value between parameter "LO_RABT"
TOR
and the value stemming from the law "LO_RBCH".
In coupled mode, if a power measurement fault "MW"
ACCESS
is declared, opening limitation is defined by the
LO_RPLI Norm 0 1 1 Fallback limit opening _OPERA
minimum between “LO/CH” law value and parameter
TOR
"LO_RPLI".
Page 28 / 49
607
If opening limitation is controlled by incremental orders
(R30 and R31), the ramp applied to limitation value is
ACCESS defined by a period of “LO_TIM” required to achieve a
LO_TIM s 5 500 60 Ramp time of incremental LO (s)
_MAINT 0%->100% stroke. When opening limitation value is
given by analog signal LO or modbus, this parameter
is not used.
Adjusting of the 2 slopes closing ramp limiter (opening
thresholds):
When the position is greater than the parameter
"LP_POSH" the fast ramp of closing is active
ACCESS (LP_RPRP).
LP_POSB Norm 0 2 0,35 Down threshold (Norm) _OPERA When the position is between the parameters
TOR "LP_POSH" and "LP_POSB" the slow ramp of closing
is active (LP_RPLT).
When the position is lower than the parameter
"LP_POSB" the fast ramp of closing is active
(LP_RPRP).
Adjusting of the 2 slopes closing ramp limiter (opening
thresholds):
When the position is greater than the parameter
"LP_POSH" the fast ramp of closing is active
ACCESS (LP_RPRP).
LP_POSH Norm 0 2 0,75 Up threshold (Norm) _OPERA When the position is between the parameters
TOR "LP_POSH" and "LP_POSB" the slow ramp of closing
is active (LP_RPLT).
When the position is lower than the parameter
"LP_POSB" the fast ramp of closing is active
(LP_RPRP).
Adjusting of the 2 slopes closing ramp limiter:
ACCESS Fast ramp, where the full stroke 0%->100% time is
LP_RPLT s 0 500 10 Slow ramp time (s) _OPERA “LP_RPRP” seconds.
TOR Slow ramp, where the full stroke 0%->100% time is
“LP_RPRT” seconds.
LP_RPRP s 0 500 1 Fast ramp time (s) ACCESS Adjusting of the 2 slopes closing ramp limiter:
_OPERA Fast ramp, where the full stroke 0%->100% time is
Page 29 / 49
608
“LP_RPRP” seconds.
Slow ramp, where the full stroke 0%->100% time is
TOR
“LP_RPRT” seconds.
Adjusting of the 2 slopes closing ramp limiter

(frequency thresholds):
When the frequency is greater than the parameter
ACCESS "LP_SURV" the fast ramp of closing is active
LP_SURV Norm 0 2 1,1 Speed threshold (Norm) _OPERA (LP_RPRP).
TOR When the frequency is lower than the parameter
"LP_SURV" the slow ramp of closing is active
(LP_RPRP) during "LP_TPSV" seconds. Then the fast
ramp of closing is active (LP_RPRP).
Adjusting of the 2 slopes closing ramp limiter
(frequency thresholds):
When the frequency is greater than the parameter
ACCESS "LP_SURV" the fast ramp of closing is active
LP_TPSV s 0 100 10 Temporisation time (s) _OPERA (LP_RPRP).
TOR When the frequency is lower than the parameter
"LP_SURV" the slow ramp of closing is active
(LP_RPRP) during "LP_TPSV" seconds. Then the fast
ramp of closing is active (LP_RPRP).
Error between power measurement and the power
ACCESS
LW_KP - 0,1 10 0,1 Power limiter - Prop. gain
_MAINT
limitation is corrected by a proportional and integral
action. “LW_KP” is the gain of this action.
Activation threshold of power limitation. When
ACCESS
measured power becomes higher than the minimum
LW_LIM MW 0 1000 100 Power limitation (MW) _OPERA
value between parameter “LW_LIM” and “LW_W/CH”
TOR
law, power limitation is activated.
“Conditioning” threshold (Francis turbine). When the
ACCESS
LW_SCND Norm 0 1 0,05 Conditioning threshold
_MAINT
higher than “LW_SCND” threshold, integrator’s input
value is forced to 0 in order to avoid too high values at
its output.
Page 30 / 49
609
“Conditionning” activation threshold. When difference
ACCESS between setpoint and measured position is higher than
LW_SCND Norm 0 1 0,05 Conditioning threshold _OPERA conditioning threshold “LW_SCND”, integrator’s input
TOR value is forced to 0 in order to avoid too high values at
its output.
Minimum ramp time of integral action of power
ACCESS
LW_TF s 1 200 10 Pw lim - Closing mov. time (s)
_MAINT
limitation: integrator’s output ramp is limited. This
parameter should be the closing time of servomotors.
ACCESS
LW_TI s 0 500 100 Pw lim - Integ. action time (s)
_MAINT
Time constant of integral action of power limitation
SPC control in manual mode is done by two logic

ACCESS
inputs “+” and “-“. Setpoint ramp generated by the
MAN_RAM s 0 200 20 Manual control ramp (s) _OPERA
activation of one of this two inputs needs
TOR
“MAN_RAMP” seconds for a full stroke 0%->100%.
Calibration coefficient of analog output OR (analog
output 4/20mA on the SPC).
This analog output informs the actual servomotor
position.
ACCESS
Raw output = servomotor position * OR_GAIN +
OR_GAIN - -10000 20000 10000 Servomotor position output- Gai _OPERA
OR_OFFS.
TOR
With the ranges:
- Raw output : 2000 to 10000 (2000 corresponds to
4mA and 10000 corresponds to 20mA).
- Servomotor position : 0 to 1.
Calibration coefficient of analog output OR (analog
output 4/20mA on the SPC).
This analog output informs the actual servomotor
position.
ACCESS
Raw output = servomotor position * OR_GAIN +
OR_OFFS - -10000 10000 0 Servomotor posit output-Offset _OPERA
OR_OFFS.
TOR
With the ranges:
- Raw output : 2000 to 10000 (2000 corresponds to
- Servomotor position : 0 to 1.
Page 31 / 49
610
Scaling for the analog output FG (unit frequency).
ACCESS
OU_FG_20 Norm -1 3 2 Unit freq. for 20mA outpt (Norm)
_MAINT
OU_FG_4 corresponds to the value of FG for 4mA.
Scaling for the analog output FG (unit frequency).
ACCESS
OU_FG_4 Norm -1 2 0 Unit freq. for 4mA output (Norm)
_MAINT
Scaling for the analog output CF (Load/Frequency) in
ACCESS synchronization stage (frequency setpoint).
OU_FL_20 Norm 0 2 1,1 Freq. setpoint 20mA out. (Norm)
_MAINT OU_FL_4 corresponds to the value of CF for 4mA.
OU_FL_20 corresponds to the value of CF for 20mA.
ACCESS synchronization stage (frequency setpoint).
OU_FL_4 Norm 0 2 0,9 Freq. setpoint 4mA out. (Norm)
_MAINT OU_FL_4 corresponds to the value of CF for 4mA.
OU_FL_20 corresponds to the value of CF for 20mA.
Scaling for the analog output FR (grid frequency).
ACCESS
OU_FR_20 Norm -1 3 2 Grid freq. for 20mA outpt (Norm)
_MAINT
OU_FR_4 corresponds to the value of FR for 4mA.
Scaling for the analog output FR (grid frequency).
ACCESS
OU_FR_4 Norm -1 2 0 Grid freq. for 4mA output (Norm)
_MAINT
ACCESS coupled stage (load setpoint).
OU_LD_20 Norm -2 2 1 Load order for 20mA out. (Norm)
_MAINT OU_LD_4 corresponds to the value of CF for 4mA.
OU_LD_20 corresponds to the value of CF for 20mA.
ACCESS coupled stage (load setpoint).
OU_LD_4 Norm -2 2 -1 Load order for 4mA out. (Norm)
_MAINT OU_LD_4 corresponds to the value of CF for 4mA.
OU_LD_20 corresponds to the value of CF for 20mA.
Scaling for the analog output LO (Opening limitation).
ACCESS
OU_LO_20 Norm -1 2 1 LO for 20mA output (Norm)
_MAINT
OU_LO_4 corresponds to the value of LO for 4mA.
Scaling for the analog output LO (Opening limitation).
ACCESS
OU_LO_4 Norm -1 2 0 LO for 4mA output (Norm)
_MAINT
Page 32 / 49
611
Scaling for the analog output MW (power
measurement).
ACCESS OU_MW_4 corresponds to the value of the power for
OU_PW_20 MW 0 1000 100 Power val. for 20mA output (MW)
_MAINT 4mA.
OU_MW_20 corresponds to the value of the power for
20mA.
Scaling for the analog output MW (power
measurement).
ACCESS OU_MW_4 corresponds to the value of the power for
OU_PW_4 MW -1000 1000 0 Power value for 4mA output (MW)
_MAINT 4mA.
OU_MW_20 corresponds to the value of the power for
20mA.
ACCESS
Frequency value for which “O(CH F1)” law was
PM_FQ1 Norm 0 2 0,2 Freq #1 or pump law (norm) _OPERA
established. This law gives opening according to head.
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
PM_FQ5 Norm 0 2 1 Freq #5 or pump law (norm) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
Opening setpoint of the speed governor in a
PM_POSC s 0 1 0 Pump - Compensator positioning _OPERA
“synchronous condenser” (pump).
TOR
PM_PSPR Norm 0 1 0,22 Pump - Preopening positionning ACCESS In synchronous condenser mode (pump), when R130
Page 33 / 49
612
_OPERA input is not activated, the opening setpoint is
TOR “PM_PSPR” prepositioning value.
ACCESS Ramp time for a full stroke 0%->100% in synchronous
PM_RPOV s 1 2000 30 Pump - Ramp time (s)
_MAINT condenser mode (pump).
"PW_LIND" is the minimum value (MW) of the test
point PW (power).
"PW_HIND" is the maximum value (MW) of the test
point PW (power).
ACCESS
PW_HIND MW 0 2000 100 Power max indicator scale(MW)
_MAINT
requires :
- Unselect the test point PW (if it was ever selected).
- Select the test point PW.
"PW_LIND" is the minimum value (MW) of the test
point PW (power).
"PW_HIND" is the maximum value (MW) of the test
point PW (power).
ACCESS
PW_LIND MW -1000 100 0 Power min indicator scale (MW)
_MAINT
requires :
- Unselect the test point PW (if it was ever selected).
- Select the test point PW.
ACCESS
“PW_MAX” defines maximum power. This is the
PW_MAX MW 0 1000 100 Max unit power (MW) (max head) _OPERA
reference value (=1.0) for normalized power values.
TOR
Calibration parameters for the PWM output. The
parameters "PWM_MIN" and "PWM_MAX" allow to
calibrate the minimal and maximal voltage on the
ACCESS
PWM output.
PWM_MAX - 500 9500 9500 PWM maximum value _OPERA
PWM_MIN = 500, corresponds to 5% of the output
TOR
voltage (0,05 * 24 = 1,2V).
PWM_MAX = 9500, corresponds to 95% of the output
voltage (0,95 * 24 = 22,8
PWM_MIN - 500 9500 500,01 PWM minimum value ACCESS Calibration parameters for the PWM output. The
_OPERA parameters "PWM_MIN" and "PWM_MAX" allow to
Page 34 / 49
613
calibrate the minimal and maximal voltage on the
PWM output.
PWM_MIN = 500, corresponds to 5% of the output
TOR
voltage (0,05 * 24 = 1,2V).
PWM_MAX = 9500, corresponds to 95% of the output
voltage (0,95 * 24 = 22,8V).
Slide value in seconds. The slide coefficient allows to
ACCESS add an offcet on the frequency setpoint in the network
RES_GLI s -100 100 -10 Slide coefficient (s)
_MAINT synchronization stage (for the automatic
synchronization only).
The equilibrium position is achieved for a current value
in the self of the actuator. “RTA” parameter represents
ACCESS
the offset to apply for the equilibrium current in the
RTA - -1 1 0 Electrical zero _OPERA
actuator. For a setpoint value of zero, distributor valve
TOR
is at “middle” position and no oil flow is supplied to any
of the 2 chambers of the servomotor.
No load opening :
- If "VT_OMAV" is not 0, the parameter is effective.
ACCESS
RV_TMAV s 0 5 0,5 Delay on speed no load (s)
_MAINT
- If "VT_OMAV" is 0, the no load opening value is
saved opening before the circuit breaker closing
(saving with a delay "RV_TMAV" seconds).
ACCESS
Press Tank/Too High Level 2
s131SN1 mm 0 3000 0
(mm)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s131SN10 mm 0 3000 0 Press Tank/Low Level (mm) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s131SN11 mm 0 3000 0 Press Tank/Level too Low (mm) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
Press Tank/Too High Level 1
s131SN2 mm 0 3000 0
(mm)
_OPERA
TOR
s131SN3 mm 0 3000 0 Press Tank/High Level (mm) ACCESS
Page 35 / 49
614
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s131SN4 mm 0 3000 0 Press Tank/Normal Level (mm) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s131SN5 mm 0 3000 0 Press Tank/Sufficient Level (mm) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s131SN6 mm 0 3000 0 Press Tank/Low Level 1 (mm) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
s131SNH mm 0 300 10 Press Tank/Level Hysteresis(mm)
_MAINT
ACCESS
Press Tank/Too High Press
s131SP1 Mpa 0 30 0
2(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s131SP10 Mpa 0 30 0 Press Tank/Low Pressure (Mpa) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
Press Tank/Too High Press
s131SP2 Mpa 0 30 0
1(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
s131SP4 Mpa 0 30 0 Press Tank/Normal Press(Mpa) ACCESS
_OPERA
Page 36 / 49
615
TOR
ACCESS
s131SP5 Mpa 0 30 0 Press Tank/Sufficient Press(Mpa) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s131SP6 Mpa 0 30 0 Press Tank/Low Pressure 1 (Mpa) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
TOR
ACCESS
s131SPH Mpa 0 3 0,1 Press Tank/Pres hysteresis(Mpa)
_MAINT
ACCESS
s150MR1 °C 0 100 0 Sump Tank/Too high Temp 2 (°C) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
Sump Tank/Low Temperature
s150MR10 °C 0 100 0
(°C)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s150MR2 °C 0 100 0 Sump Tank/Too high Temp 1 (°C) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s150MR3 °C 0 100 0 Sump Tank/Too high Temp (°C) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
Sump Tank/Normal
s150MR4 °C 0 100 0
Temperature(°C)
_OPERA
TOR
Page 37 / 49
616
ACCESS
Sump Tank/Suffi.
s150MR5 °C 0 100 0
Temperature(°C)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s150MRH °C 0 30 2 Sump Tank/Temp Hysteresis (°C)
_MAINT
ACCESS
Sump Tank/Too high Press 2
s150SP1 Mpa 0 30 0
(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s150SP10 Mpa 0 30 0 Sump Tank/Low Pressure (Mpa) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
Sump Tank/Too high Press 1
s150SP2 Mpa 0 30 0
(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s150SP4 Mpa 0 30 0 Sump Tank/Normal Press (Mpa) _OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
Sump Tank/Sufficient Press
s150SP5 Mpa 0 30 0
(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
Sump Tank/Low Pressure 1
s150SP6 Mpa 0 30 0
(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s150SP7 Mpa 0 30 0
(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s150SP8 Mpa 0 30 0
(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
ACCESS
s150SP9 Mpa 0 30 0
(Mpa)
_OPERA
TOR
s150SPH Mpa 0 3 0,1 Sump Tank/Press Hysteresis ACCESS
Page 38 / 49
617
(Mpa) _MAINT
Press Tank/20mALevel ACCESS
s20131MN mm 0 3000 3000
scaling(mm) _MAINT
Press Tank/20mAPres ACCESS
s20131MP Mpa 0 30 10
scaling(Mpa) _MAINT
Sump Tank/20mA Pres ACCESS
s20150MP Mpa 0 30 10
scaling(Mpa) _MAINT
Sump Tank/20mA Temp scaling ACCESS
s20150MR °C 0 100 100
(°C) _MAINT
s2131MNO mm 0 3000 3000
output(mm) _MAINT
Sump Tank/20mA Pres ACCESS
s2150MPO Mpa 0 30 10
output(Mpa) _MAINT
Press Tank/4mA Level ACCESS
s4131MN mm 0 3000 0
scaling(mm) _MAINT
s4131MNO mm 0 3000 0
output(mm) _MAINT
Press Tank/4mA Pres ACCESS
s4131MP Mpa 0 30 0
scaling(Mpa) _MAINT
Sump Tank/4 mA Pres ACCESS
s4150MP Mpa 0 30 0
scaling(Mpa) _MAINT
Sump Tank/4 mA Pres ACCESS
s4150MPO Mpa 0 30 0
output(Mpa) _MAINT
Sump Tank/4 mA Temp scaling ACCESS
s4150MR °C 0 100 0
(°C) _MAINT
ACCESS
sDeltaT °C 0 293 20 Delta max temp oil Pres Tank(°C)
_MAINT
ACCESS When there is redundancy on servomotors' sensors,
SE_DISC Norm 0 1 0,01 Servomotor discrep. threshold _OPERA "SE_DISC" stads for difference threshold between
TOR both measurements to declare "SE_DISC" fault.
SE_FILT s 0 10 0 Servomotor filter constant (s) ACCESS Servomotor’s position measure can be filtered (low
_OPERA pass filter first order) with a time constant “SE_FILT”.
Page 39 / 49
618
TOR Zero means that no filter is applied.
Calibration coefficient of the position measurement 1 of
the servomotor.
Calibrated measurement = raw measurement *
ACCESS
SE1_GAI + SE1_OFF.
SE1_GAI - -10 10 0 Servomotor sensor 1 - Gain _OPERA
With the ranges :
TOR
- Calibrated measurement : 0 to 1.
- Raw measurement : 0 to 10000 (0 corresponds to
the servomotor.
ACCESS
SE1_GAI + SE1_OFF.
SE1_OFF - -10 10 0 Servomotor sensor 1 - Offset _OPERA
With the ranges :
TOR
Calibration coefficient of the position measurement 2
(redundant measurement) of the servomotor.
ACCESS
SE2_GAI + SE2_OFF.
SE2_GAI - -10 10 0 Servomotor sensor 2 - Gain _OPERA
With the ranges :
TOR
(redundant measurement) of the servomotor.
ACCESS
SE2_GAI + SE2_OFF.
SE2_OFF - -10 10 0 Servomotor sensor 2 - Offset _OPERA
With the ranges :
TOR
SEL_MDB - -1 1 1 Modbus : RS485 (>=0) TCP/IP ACCESS Selection of the communication type with TPLC:
(<0) _ALSTO RS485 if greater or equal to 0, or TCP / IP if strictly
Page 40 / 49
619
greater than 0.
M
Restarting the UPC is mandatory.
Pumps minimum operating ACCESS
sFTMin min 0 32000 0
time(mn) _MAINT
ACCESS
SIM_GRFQ Norm 0 2 1 Simulated Grid req. (Norm) _OPERA Normalized frequency value in simulation mode.
TOR
ACCESS
SIM_PMX MW 0 1000 100 Simul. Turb. Max unit power(MW) _OPERA Maximum power of simulated turbine.
TOR
ACCESS When turbine is not connected to the network, it is
SIM_TA s 1 20 10 Simulated Turbine Ta (s) _OPERA simulated by an integrator with a time constant of
TOR “SIM_TA”.
ACCESS
For a Kaplan turbine, blades are simulated by an
SIM_TMAB s 0 200 30 Simulated actuator TMan Blad(s) _OPERA
integrator with a time constant of “SIM_TMAB”.
TOR
ACCESS
Actuators are simulated by an integrator with a time
SIM_TMAN s 0 200 0,1 Simulated actuator TMan (s) _OPERA
constant of “SIM_TMAN”.
TOR
ACCESS Position error is simulated by a derivative action
SIM_TW s 0,1 2 1 Simulated Turbine Tw (s) _OPERA applied to setpoint. “SIM_TW” is the time constant of
TOR this derivative action.
ACCESS
Sn_Kd - 0 10 5 Differential gain _OPERA Derivative gain (feedback value)
TOR
ACCESS
sNbPump - 1 4 2 Number of pump connected _ALSTO
M
ACCESS
sOTSSTL s 1 2400 60 Delay to start oil governor (s)
_MAINT
Low limit of load setpoint. Whatever is the origin of load
ACCESS
SpLd_LLM - -1 1 -1 Load setter Low limitation
_MAINT
setpoint (OE or incremental), it can not be lower than
"SpLd_LLM".
Page 41 / 49
620
When governor is in load stage, "Spld_TCF” parameter
ACCESS
determines ramp time for a manual control (done by
SpLd_TCF s 1 2000 60 Load setter evolution time (s) _OPERA
R21 and R22) and maximum slope value for an
TOR
external setpoint (analogic or modbus type).
ACCESS
sT157SN s 1 3200 10 Tempo to detect 157SN (s)
_MAINT
ACCESS
sTIAT1 s 1 3600 10 Air injection duration (s)
_MAINT
ACCESS
sTIAT2 s 1 3600 30 Delay between 2 air injection(s)
_MAINT
ACCESS
sTOrdIV ms 0,1 6000 500 I.V. pulse start duration (ms)
_MAINT
ACCESS
sTStarP s 1 3200 10 Time delay loading of pumps (s)
_MAINT
If “SV” configuration of “CONFIG” field is selected,
logic outputs values RV1 to RV6 depend on unit
ACCESS frequency value. RV1 output is activated if unit
SV_SD1 Norm 0 3 1 Falling threshold SV1 (Norm)
_MAINT frecuency reaches “SV_SM1” and deactivated if unit
frequency is lower than “SV_SD1”. So it has an
hysteresis between “SV_SD1” and “SV_SM1”.
SV_SD4 Norm 0 3 1 Falling threshold SV4 (Norm) ACCESS If “SV” configuration of “CONFIG” field is selected,
_MAINT logic outputs values RV1 to RV6 depend on unit
Page 42 / 49
621
frequency value. RV4 output is activated if unit
frecuency reaches “SV_SM4” and deactivated if unit
SV_SM1 Norm 0 3 1,1 Rising threshold SV1 (Norm)
Page 43 / 49
622
ACCESS
Proportional gain of regulation in “synchronization”
Sync_Kp - 0 10 1,1 Prop gain - Synchronisation _OPERA
stage.
TOR
When automatic synchronization is deactivated,
ACCESS frequency setpoint is controlled with incremental
Sync_TCF s 1 2000 60 Frequ. setter evolution time (s) _OPERA actions from logic inputs R21 and R22. The ramp time
TOR between 1.0 - "CF_PLG" and 1.0 + "CF_PLAG" is
"Sync_TCF" seconds.
ACCESS
Time constant of derivative action in “synchronization”
Sync_Td s 0 10 0,22 Deriv time - Synchronisation(s) _OPERA
stage.
TOR
ACCESS
Time constant of integrator in the “synchronization”
Sync_Ti s 0 9999,9 4,2 Integr time - Synchronisat. (s) _OPERA
stage.
TOR
TD s 0 2000 0 Derivative time (s) ACCESS If servomotor command is by a distributor (double
_OPERA loop):
Page 44 / 49
623
- Derivative time constant of the distributor position
loop (SPC).
TOR Otherwise (sample loop):
- Derivative time constant of the servomotor position
loop (SPC).
ACCESS
Integrator’s time constant of the servomotor position
TI s 0 2000 0 Integral time (s) _OPERA
loop (SPC).
TOR
ACCESS Delay to detect a TPLC communication loss. The same
TO_TPLC s 0,05 60 5 Time out of TPLC link (s)
_MAINT delay is used during the detection of a reconnection.
Activation of the minor fault “MIN_TRK” : if the
ACCESS
difference between setpoint and position of the
TRK_THR Norm 0 1 1 Tracking error threshold (alarm) _OPERA
servomotor reaches “TRK_THR” during “TRK_TIM”
TOR
seconds.
Activation of the minor fault “MIN_TRK” : if the
ACCESS
difference between setpoint and position of the
TRK_TIM s 0 2000 2000 Tracking error detect time(s) _OPERA
servomotor reaches “TRK_THR” during “TRK_TIM”
TOR
seconds.
When difference between setpoint and position of the
ACCESS
servomotor becomes greater than
TRK_TRIP Norm 0 1 1 Tracking error threshold (trip) _OPERA
“TRK_TRIP”(normalized) during “TRK_TIM” seconds,
TOR
SPC declares “MJ_TRACK” major fault .
When sensor redundancy on distributing valve position
ACCESS
is used, if difference between the two measurements is
VA_DISC Norm 0 1 0,01 Distr. valv discrep. threshold _OPERA
higher than “VA_DISC” a minor fault "VA_DISC" is
TOR
declared.
ACCESS Distributing valve’s position measurement can be
VA_FILT - 0 10 0 Distr. valv filter constant (s) _OPERA filtered with a time constant “VA_FILT”. Zero value
TOR means no filter is applied.
ACCESS
VA_KP - 0 200 0 Distr. valve loop - Prop gain _OPERA Gain of distributor’s loop (small loop)
TOR
VA_MAX Norm 0 2 2 Distr. valve - Max limitation ACCESS Limitation of maximum position of the distributor, and
_OPERA so of operating speed of the servomotor associated
Page 45 / 49
624
TOR with it.
ACCESS Limitation of minimum position of the distributor, and
VA_MIN Norm -2 0 -2 Distr. valve - Min limitation _OPERA so of operating speed of the servomotor associated
TOR with it.
ACCESS
VA_OSP Norm -1 1 0 Distr. valve - Equilib. Pos. _OPERA Equilibrium point of distributor valve.
TOR
the distributing valve.
ACCESS
VA1_GAI + VA1_OFF.
VA1_GAI - -10 10 0 Distr. valv sensor 1 - Gain _OPERA
With the ranges :
TOR
the distributing valve.
ACCESS
VA1_GAI + VA1_OFF.
VA1_OFF - -10 10 -1 Distr. valv sensor 1 - Offset _OPERA
With the ranges :
TOR
(redundant measurement) of the distributing valve.
ACCESS
VA2_GAI + VA2_OFF.
VA2_GAI - -10 10 0 Distr. valv sensor 2 - Gain _OPERA
With the ranges :
TOR
VA2_OFF - -10 10 -1 Distr. valv sensor 2 - Offset ACCESS Calibration coefficient of the position measurement 2
_OPERA (redundant measurement) of the distributing valve.
TOR Calibrated measurement = raw measurement *
VA2_GAI + VA2_OFF.
Page 46 / 49
625
With the ranges :
Opening preposition, in a "back to back" starting up.
Opening setpoint holds this preposition value while the
ACCESS
VT_BBLC Norm 0 1 0,2 B2B launch openning (Norm)
_MAINT
frequency is lower than "VT_BBMN" and during a
minimum period of "VT_TMP1" and a maximum period
of "VT_TMP2".
"Back to back" start up. Threshold of normalized
frequency from which the setpoint changes from the
ACCESS
VT_BBMN Norm 0 1 0,1 B2B ramp start frequency (Norm)
_MAINT
prepositioning value "VT_BBLC" to a slope of
frequency bringing the group frequency from
"VT_BBLC" to its nominal frequency.
Insensibility on the frequency measurement of the unit
ACCESS
in coupled mode (according the logical input R4):
VT_ITA0 Norm 0 1 0 Default insensitivity (Norm) _OPERA
- R4 = 0, the insensibility is "VT_ITA0".
TOR
Insensibility on the frequency measurement of the unit
ACCESS
in coupled mode (according the logical input R4):
VT_ITA1 Norm 0 1 0 Insensitivity with R4 (Norm) _OPERA
TOR
No load opening :
- If "VT_OMAV" is not 0, the parameter is effective.
ACCESS
VT_OMAV Norm 0 1 0 Opening in speed no load
_MAINT
- If "VT_OMAV" is 0, the no load opening value is
saved opening before the circuit breaker closing
(saving with a delay "RV_TMAV" seconds).
In a synchronisation phase, when normalized
frequency is lower than “VT_SRA”, opening limitation
“LO_DEM” is used.
ACCESS
VT_PID Norm 0 2 2 OL disabling threshold (Norm)
_MAINT
When normalized frequency is between “VT_SRA” and
“VT_PID”, opening limitation “LO_RAB” is used.
When frequency is higher than "VT_PID", limitation is
given by external order: modbus or analog signal.
Page 47 / 49
626
VT_RPAR s 1 2000 50 Sluice evolution time (s)
switched off.
In a synchronisation phase, when normalized
frequency is lower than “VT_SRA”, opening limitation
“LO_DEM” is used.
ACCESS
VT_SRA Norm 0 2 0,75 Closing speed threshold (Norm)
_MAINT
When normalized frequency is between “VT_SRA” and
“VT_PID”, opening limitation “LO_RAB” is used.
When frequency is higher than "VT_PID", limitation is
given by external order: modbus or analog signal.
Level error is calculated between the setpoint
ACCESS
“WL_Csg” and level measurement. The last value of
WL_Bn Norm 0 1 0,1 Permanent droop (norm) _OPERA
setpoint multiplied by “WL_BN” is subtracted to this
TOR
error: a level droop is introduced.
ACCESS
Level setpoint is given by “WL_Csg” parameter, in
WL_Csg m 0 1000 0 Setpoint- Water level control(m) _OPERA
meters.
TOR
Normalization of levels: calculations are done
ACCESS
WL_DOWN m 0 1000 10 Fall down high (m)
_MAINT
considering [WL_DOWN ; WL_UP] (in meters) as an
[0;1].
Insensibility of level regulation: Error is considered as
ACCESS zero if difference between setpoint and measurement
WL_INS Norm 0 1 0,05 Insensi - Water level control
_MAINT is lower than “WL_INS”. This parameter is a
normalized value.
ACCESS
WL_Kd - 1 10 5 Diff gain - Water level control
_MAINT
Derivative gain of level regulation loop.
ACCESS
WL_Kp - 0 10 1 Prop gain - Water level control
_MAINT
Proportional gain in level regulation loop.
WL_Td s 0 20000 20 Deriv time - Water level control ACCESS Derivative time constant of level regulation feedback
Page 48 / 49
627
_MAINT value.
ACCESS
WL_Ti s 0 20000 1000 Integ time - Water level control
_MAINT
Integrator’s time constant of main regulation loop.
Normalization of levels: calculations are done

ACCESS
WL_UP m 0 1000 30 Fall up high (m)
_MAINT
considering [WL_DOWN ; WL_UP] (in meters) as an
[0;1].
Page 49 / 49
628
PART I : CONFIGURATIONS ………………………………………………….
PART II : PARAMETERS ………………………………………………………….
PART III : LAWS ………………………………………………………….
629
B(W H1)
Description Unité Min X Max X Unité Min Y Max Y Access Folio
Blade vs. Wicket gate, Head 1 - -100 9999 - -100 9999 ACCESS_OPERATOR
Blades position according to the wicket gate’s position, for a constant head measure H1, defined by parameter "KB_HD1".
The units depend on the scaling parameters "KP_WGMIN", "KP_WG_MAX " and "KP_BLMIN", "KP_BLMAX".
Explanations
x = wicket gate position
y = blades position
B(W H2)
Explanations
y = blades position
B(W H3)
Explanations
y = blades position
Page 1 / 7
630
B(W H4)
Explanations Blades position according to the wicket gate’s position, for a constant head measure H4, defined by parameter "KB_HD4".
y = blades position
B(W H5)
Explanations
y = blades position
DFL_GLD
DFL_GLD vs Referance Opening Norm 0 1 Norm 0 1 ACCESS_MAINT
Explanations Limit of interaction of the deflector in the jet, according to the opening. When the position of the deflector is higher than the
value given by this law, the deflector is outside the jet, so it has no influence on flow.
x = Pilot needle position (norm)
Page 2 / 7
631
y = Deflector position (norm)
DFL_PLD
DFL_PLD vs Referance Opening Norm 0 1 Norm 0 1 ACCESS_MAINT
Limit of interaction of the deflector in the jet, according to the opening. When the position of the deflector is lower than the
value given by this law, the deflector cuts totally the jet, the power transmitted to the turbine is almost zero.
Explanations
x = Pilot needle position (norm)
y = Deflector position (norm)
FL / OR
Flow (norm) vs opening (norm) Norm 0 1 Norm 0 1 ACCESS_MAINT
Output flow of a needle according to its opening.

Explanations x = Needle opening (norm)
y = Neddle flow (norm)
LO_RBCH
Fallback opening limit. / head Norm 0 9999 m 0 1 ACCESS_OPERATOR
Explanations In synchronizing stage, when the frequency evolves from "VT_SRA" to "VT_PID", opening is limited by the minimum of the
parameter "LO_RABT" and the "LO_RBCH " law which is a function of the head.
x = Head (m)
Page 3 / 7
632
y = Opening limitation (norm)
LO / CH
Opening limitation versus head Norm 0 9999 m 0 1 ACCESS_OPERATOR
Opening limitation, in coupled stage, function of the head.

Explanations x = Head (m)
y = Opening limitation (norm)
LW_W/CH
Power limitation versus head 0 1000 0 1000 ACCESS_MAINT
Power limitation function of the head.

y = Power (MW)
O(CH F1)
Pump mode Opening (Head, Freq 1) 0 1000 0 1 ACCESS_OPERATOR
Wicket position function of the head for a constant frequency of unit F1, defined by parameter "PM_FQ1".
y = Setpoint of the wicket gate position (norm)
Page 4 / 7
633
O(CH F2)
O(CH F3)
O(CH F4)
Page 5 / 7
634
O(CH F5)
O(CH F6)
PW_O/nW
Opening versus nominal power 0 1 0 1 ACCESS_MAINT
Linearization law of the wicket opening function of the power.

Explanations x = Power (norm)
y = Wicket gate opening (norm)
SE_LINE
Page 6 / 7
635
Servomotor sensor linearisation 0 1 0 1 ACCESS_OPERATOR
Linearization law of the servomotor position.

Explanations x = position measurement
y = position measurement linearized
Page 7 / 7
NEYRPIC® T.SLG
SOFTWARE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
LIBRAIRIES
N° 4464 Ind 2
POWER
Hydro
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H This document applies to all standard T.SLG functions. H

Its goal is to describe T.SLG behaviour with a good balance between level of detail and readability.
Modified Folios Version MODIFICATIONS STATUS DATE DRAWN BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY

G G
All 1 First revision GFE 18/08/08 S.GRAND D.CLEMENT M.BOUSCHON
Power feedback activation signal path easier to understand.

F 8, 12, 14. 2 Some links fixed. GFE 20/08/08 S.GRAND D.CLEMENT M.BOUSCHON F
Sn_Kp , Sn_Ti and Sn_Td parameters are not prefixed Sn_XX but Sync_XX.
E E
D D
C C
B SERIAL N° SERIAL PLAN n° 4464 BUSINESS TITLE CUSTOMER

B
DRAWN BY:
S.GRAND - NEYRPIC® T.SLG - -
CHECKED BY:
D.CLEMENT
APPROVED BY:
SOFTWARE FUNCTIONAL 1 2
A M.BOUSCHON A
DATE: DIAGRAM LIBRAIRIES - - - 1/30
20/08/08 OTP EP REP FOLIO
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Analog signal 2D 2D law D Derivator Logical NOT

H H
+
Logic signal Test point Insensibility Plus / minus
+
A
G Analog input Fixed value Logic input ramp A/B Division G
B
+
A
Analog output Major fault - Logic input ramp Ax B multiplication
B
F F
First order low-pass
Logic input Minor fault Min Minimum
filter
Rising edge
E Logic output Switch Max Maximum E
detection
A
Internal analog input 2D Law process B
A>B
A greater than B Delay
D A
D
Internal analog output 3D law process A<B A smaller than B Scale modification
B
S
Internal logic input Limiter & Logical AND Q RS trigger
R
C C
Signal id true since
Internal logic output Hysteresis ≤1 Logical OR
xx seconds.
B B
P Parameter P Gain ≤1 Exclusive OR Function Generic function.
A
C Configuration I Integrator Folio 2 / 30 A
Titre Legend
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R0P R104
R0T R11
R1 124
H R128_OFF
Sequencer
Regulation process depends on R129 H
R128_ON sequencer stage R133
R13
Turbine type R224
R130 4 R233
R131 R24
R132 R270
R140 S R29
G R149 Y R300_A G
R21 N R300_M
R22 C PID Opening Two ramps R305
R30 H synchro limitation limiter R313
R31 R R80
O 13, 14 19 26 Francis turbine
R4 Tachometer R81
no repartitor
R49 RV1
F R5 9, 10 RV2 F
R6 L RV3
Isolated
R60 O Level PID Opening Power Two ramps RV4
network
R7 A regulation speed/load limitation limitation limiter RV5
detection
R70 D RV6
11 12 15 to 18 19 20 26
R8
Input Input OUT_CF
R98
E R_HITEMP
Traitement selection C Kaplan OUT_MW E
M OUT_LO
5, 6 7, 8 P OUT_FG
Compensator 27
/ OUT_FR
OE Pump
P OUT_FAO1
LO
M 25 OUT_FAO2
MW
P
AM / CH
D AV
D
B
Pelton M
Back to back
2
start o
M B 21
d
o 24
C b C
d
u
b
s
u General Individual
local manu local manu
s Deflectors
synchro
B 22
B
Deflectors
speed/load Folio 3 / 30
A A
23 Titre Overview
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NOTE: Back to back stage available if « B2B » option.
1 STOPPED Stopping stage available if « STOP » option.
H Pump stage available if « PUMP » option. H

R0T Pump condenser and generator condenser
R60
& stages available only if
« SYNCHROCONDENSER » option.
Option « Automatic
blade prepositionning »
R0T
BLADE
G 2
PREPOS. G
R0P R0P R0T
R70
& R70
& R60
&
| BLD_pos - P KB_PPA1 | < 0.004
OR FG_Norm > P VT_SFPD
F F
3 SYNCHRO PUMP
8 7 PUMP 6 BACK TO BACK
CONDENSER
SQC_STA
R0T R70
R0P
E R60
R1
R0T
E
R70
R70 R1
& R0T Sequencer
stage
R1
& R0T
R0P R0T
FG_Norm A
R0T A>B
{9.F1}
FG_Norm R1
& P FQ_CPL B
D P FQ_CPL
D
P LA_POSF R0T
P VT_SFPD
9 STOPPING
4 LOAD
P VT_PSBY
R0T
C R0T Opening* A
≤1 C
Only if « STOP » option.
R0T & A<B
R70
& R1
R0T
P LA_POSF B Otherwise, go to
* « Opening » is Wicket gate opening for Kaplan
« STOPPED » stage.
R70
& and Francis, or pilot injector opening for Pelton.
B 10
BLADE B
STOPPPING Only if options :
GENRATOR ¤ « Automatic blade prepositionning »
5
CONDENSER ¤ And « STOP »
FG_Norm A Otherwise, go to « STOPPED » stage.
A<B
P VT_PSBY B
& Folio 4 / 30
A R0T R0T A
Titre Sequencer Stages
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
IN_OE_RW
{6.E8}
If C HEAD_MSR
IN_AM_RW
IN_CH_RW
H Analog OE {6.E8} H
IN_OE Input
Treatment
Analog Fault_AM
Input
OE
AM / CH
Treatment
P IN_OE_TF {7.B8}
P IN_OE_LC OE {8.G8}
G P IN_OE_HC AM_Ana G
P IN_OE_LV P IN_CH_TF
P IN_OE_HV P
P
IN_AM_LC
IN_AM_HC
≤1
IN_LO_RW
P IN_AM_LV
{6.E8}
P IN_AM_HV + {8.F8}
CH_Ana
-
Analog
IN_AV_RW
LO
F IN_LO Input {6.E8} F
Treatment
Analog Fault_AV
LO
AV Input
P IN_LO_TF {7.G8}
Treatment
P IN_LO_LC LO
P IN_LO_HC
E P IN_LO_LV
E
P IN_CH_TF
P IN_LO_HV {8.G8}
P IN_AV_LC
P IN_AV_HC AV_Ana
IN_PW_RW
P IN_AV_LV
{6.E8}
P IN_AV_HV
Analog MW P CH_REPLI
D IN_MW Input D
Treatment
PW
{29.D8}
P IN_PW_TF
Pwr_MW
P IN_PW_LC
P IN_PW_HC
C C
PW_NORM
P IN_PW_LV
{29.G4}
P IN_PW_HV
P PW_MAX {15.D8}
A
A/B Pwr_Norm
B
B C UP_DOWN
B
Fault_AV {12.F8}
AV
FALSE
Fault_AM {12.F8}
AM
FALSE
A Folio 5 / 30 A
CH Titre Analog Inputs : Overview
FALSE
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
G G
Fault
detection
F Fault
detection F
1.0
{5}
Analog Analog input processing

E Input
Raw
0.0
E
Input
Treatment Processed
Input, 0.0 if
fault detected
D D
Filter constant Low input High input Low ouput High output
C C
parameters P ...
B B
A Folio 6 / 30 A
Titre Analog Inputs : Details
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H R140
& H
C WIR_LA
C WIR_INP
{5.F6} LO
& Modbus is
active
LOCAL AUTO
mode
G 1.0 G
{5.E6} LO
Modbus LO
value LOCAL AUTO
FALSE
LO value
1.0
TRUE
TRUE Incremental
TRUE or analog
LO_STP
F FALSE
switch F
R30 + {19.B8}
{19.F8}
-
R31 LO_Stp
0.0
P LO_TIM
E 1.0
E
D D
R140
C WIR_LA
&
C WIR_INP
C {5.H6} OE
& Modbus is
active
LOCAL AUTO
mode C
{12.G8}
{15.F8}
0.0 {16.D7}
{5.G6} OE Ext_Order
Modbus OE
value LOCAL AUTO
FALSE
OE value
0.0
{16.H7}
B R7
Modbus R7 {15.F8} B
state TRUE OE_Ana
FALSE
A Folio 7 / 30 A
Titre Analog inputs selection (1)
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C HEAD_MSR
C MDB_MSR
H C UP_DOWN H
IN_AM_VA
0.0 0.0 {12.F8}
AM
{5.G1} AM_Ana
0.0 0.0
G G
IN_AV_VA
{5.E1} AV_Ana
{5.F1} CH_Ana {12.F8}

AV
F MDB ACTIVE F
CH
0.0
0.0
MDB_AV CH
0.0 {13.C8}
0.0 {15.A8}
{17}
E MDB_AM {19}
{20.F8}
E
{21.B7}
MDB_CH {25.H8}
{27.B8}
P CH_REPLI
D R140
D
C WIR_LA
& R305
C WIR_INP
Modbus is LOCAL AUTO

active mode
C C
(No change)
{8.B2} Pwr_Fdb
Modbus R5
value LOCAL AUTO {8.C8}
R5 switch {15.G8}
& {15.D8}
& {19.E8}
B R5 & Pwr_Fdb
B
MW
C POW_FDB
If option « Level regulation »
A
R13
& No power feedback Folio 8 / 30 A
{11.D4} when level regulation is active.
Isol_Net
Titre Analog inputs selection (2)
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
{13.G8}
TAC_FR
A {37.G8}
Nomalized value
FR
A/B FR_Norm
H B
H
FR
FR
Fault MN_FG
detection If C FG
{4}
GBF_OUT
{11.G8}
P FR_TGR
G GBF {13.E8}
{19.D8}
G
FG_NORM
P FREQ_REF
{10.F8} {22.H8}
{29.G4}
C FG2_AVAI {24.D6}
{25.G8}
{26.E8}
Filtering and + {29.H8}
+
error FG_Norm
processing
MJ_FG
F P FREQ_REF F
P FG_TGR
P FG_SLDF
P FG_TDEM {15.C8}
{23.H8}
FG_Ins
E R4
1.0 E
P VT_ITA0
P VT_ITA1
TAC_FG1
FG insensibilization
D FG1 Wheel D
rotation
synchro
C FG1_TCTT
Fault Only if FG_Norm > P FG_TFD
& detection
LOST_FG1
{10.G1} FG_Filt A
A>B
P FG_PRFQ B Number of
C 1.0 edges to {10.B8} C
P FG1_PRD synchronize
on.
Frequency
redundancy
Predivision
TAC_FG2
process FG_DISC
B FG2 Wheel B
rotation
synchro
Fault Only if FG_Norm > P FG_TFD
LOST_FG2
detection
A
P FG_DISC Folio 9 / 30 A
P FG_DIFMX
Titre Tachometer overview
Redundancy : if C FG2_AVAI configuration selected Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H Fault H
detection
Minor Fault
1.0 &
Sequencer in
« LOAD » stage
G G
FG
{9.F3} Turbine frequency FG {9.C8}
FG_Filt
Filtering and
error
processing Processed Turbine frequency
F F
Fault
detection
A Major Fault
Grid frequency FR B
A/B A
A<B
&
B
E « SYNCHRO »
stage
E
Filter
Nominal Time Fault Synchronisation
value constant threshold delay
D A
D
A>B
B ≤1
Selected frequency measurement
FG1 +
Abs A
A>B
C {9.C4}
-
B C
FG2 Discrepancy
Frequency & fault
redundancy
process
+
B B
-
0.2
Fault
enable Discrepancy
threshold threshold
A Folio 10 / 30 A
Titre Tachometer details (1)
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H Frequency error threshold H
+
{9.F1} FG_Norm Abs
-
1.0
A
A>B
G P ISOL_FTH B G
Frequency variation threshold

F F
+
Abs ≤1
-
P ISOL_VTM A
A>B
E P ISOL_VAR B E
{15.H8}
S {18.H7}
Q Isol_Net
R128_ON R
D D
Isolated network is used in « LOAD » stage.

C While isolated network detection is true, PID C
parameters change (gains and time constants).
B B
A Folio 11 / 30 A
Titre Isolated network detection
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Selection
R313
H R13 H
&
{11.D4} Isol_Net &
R7 {15.F8}
OE_Ana
{7.B1} Ext_Order TRUE
G {15.F8} G
C UP_MES Ext_Order
{5.B6} AV
{5.B6} AM
Droop
{8.F2} AV
F F
{8.G2} AM
WL_INTn
A
AxB
P WL_Bn B
I
E E
WL_EPn
WL_Csn
0.0
+
1.0
- +
- + +
P D P
-
+
D D
P WL_Csg
Normalized
WL_IN
PI regulator
setpoint
P WL_DOWN
P WL_UP
0.0
1.0
C P WL_INS C
P WL_Kd
P WL_Td
Level feedback loop
B P WL_Kp B
P WL_Ti
{19.F2} LO_Csc
A Folio 12 / 30 A
Titre Level regulation
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Manu_FQ
R21 +
+ {28.D8}
A {14.G8}
-
R22 Ax B
H B
+
Auto H
PID_CNS
synchro
{37.H4}
-1.0 1.0
{22.F8}
P Sync_TCF
FQ_Stp
1.0 Manual setpoint
P CF_PLAG
{24.C1} B2B_Stp
If B2B option
If C PI configuration
G of GBF_CNF field is selected
G
+
{9.H1} FR_Norm
1.0 A
+ GBF
P RES_GLI A A/B
Ax B B
F P FREQ_REF B
F
GBF_OUT
PID_CSC
{29.G4}
PI Main loop
Automatic setpoint = grid frequency + glide
+ {19.A8}
+ + +
P PID_Csc
-
E +
E
PID_D_FG
0.0
{37.G4}
PID_INT
{9.F1} FG_Norm
{29.H4}
1.0
PID_KD
P D I
PID_TD
D D
P Sn_Kd 0.0
P Sync_Td A
AxB LO_Eff
B {19.C5}
PID_NLD
PD frequency Feedback
P Sync_Kp {14.E8}
{17.B7}
PID_KP
C No load
{15.G8} C
{8.E2} CH No_Load
Value
A
AxB
2D TD(H)
B
B 2D KP(H) Option « adaptative PID » B
PID_TI
2D TI(H)
A
A P Sync_Ti B
AxB
Folio 13 / 30 A
Titre PID Synchro (1)
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
C R6
{13.H5}
C SY_AUTO
Auto Auto synchro
G synchro R6 & switch G
{9.H1} FR
F F
P VT_OMAV A
A>B
0.00001 B
{13.C2}
No load
No load value
E Value E
Integrator
output
P RV_TMAV
D D
Option « Back to Back »
Uses « PID synchro » control loop.

C C
Auto Synchro is OFF.
Gain is P BB_Kp instead of P Sync_Kp
Derivatice time constant is P BB_Td instead of P Sync_Td

B B
Integrator time constant is P BB_Ti instead of P Sync_Ti
Adaptative PID is still available using same laws.
A Folio 14 / 30 A
Titre PID Synchro (2)
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Regulator parameters depends on isolated network detection
Isol_Net ON Isol_Net OFF

H P Xxxx_Bp P Isol_Bp P Intd_Bp H
{11.D4} Isol_Net P Xxxx_Td P Isol_Td P Intd_Td
Folio 17 P Isol_Kp P Intd_Kp
Folio 17 P Isol_Ti P Intd_Ti
{8.B2} Pwr_Fdb
G G
{13.C1} No_Load
{7.B1} OE_Ana
PID_CSC
{29.G4}
R49
PID_CNS
{16}
PID_EP
{29.H4}
{29.H4}
F R21 Speed + F
droop Error + {19.F8}
R22
Processing PID_Csc
Setpoint + +
{7.B1} Ext_Order
processing P 0.0
- +
P SpLd_LLM
1.0
PID_BP
P SpLd_TCF
Load_Stp
E {37.C8} E
{23.F8}
P Xxxx_Bp LoadError
2D PW_O/nW
D {8.B2} Pwr_Fdb
D
{5.B6} Pwr_Norm
Power Feedback
{9.E1} FG_Ins
C C
+
PID_KD
P D +
-
+
GBF_OUT
P Sn_Kd 1.0
B B
PID_TD
P Xxxx_Td A
AxB
B
{8.E2} CH GBF
A
If option « adaptative PID » Folio 15 / 30 A
2D TD(H)
If C PI configuration Titre PID Speed/Load (1)
Frequency (speed) feedback of GBF_CNF field is selected
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
{7.B1}
H OE_Ana Incremental or analog setpoint H
R49
≤1
R21 +
G -
G
R22
{16.C7}
0.0 mem_Csc
P SpLd_TCF
1.0
Incremental
F setpoint F
PID
Setpoint
Setpoint {7.B1}
Analog
processing Ext_Order setpoint
+ +
1.0
0.0 - +
{16.C1}
E mem_Csc
E
Main loop 0.0

+
period -
0.03 A
D B
A/B
D
Ramp speed limitation to : 1 / P SpLd_TCF
P SpLd_LLM
C C
Output ramp
speed
a
B -a Analog input B
Output ramp speed limitation speed
= a
incremental ramp speed
-a
A Folio 16 / 30 A
Where : a = 1 / P SpLd_TCF
Titre PID Speed/Load (2)
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
{18.C8}
H Condition
H
{29.G4}
PID_INT
0.0
I
G G
+
Error + Setpoint
P
F F
R128
PID_KP
Error Integrator
Processing P Intd_Kp output limiter
A
PID_TI
P Isol_Kp AxB
B
P Intd_Ti
E A 0.0
+
E
AxB -
P Isol_Ti
B +
+
Opening *
{8.E2} CH
2D KP(O, H1)
D P LAW_HD1 D
2D KP(O, H2)
P LAW_HD2
If option
Opening *
« adaptative PID »
{8.E2} CH
2D TI(O, H1)
C P LAW_HD1
C
2D TI(O, H2)
P LAW_HD2
{13.C1} No_Load
{8.B2} Pwr_Fdb
B LO_Eff
B
Inverted law: power = f (opening)

2D PW_O/nW
A Folio 17 / 30 A
* Opening is wicket gate opening for Francis and Kaplan, or pilot injector opening for Pelton.
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
G {15.F1} PID_Csc
+
A Pelton case
G
- A>B
B
Pilot_Opg
P LW_SCND
F F
{17.H5} +
{15.F1} PID_Csc A Francis case
- A>B
Condition B
WG_Opg Conditionning
On/off
P LW_SCND
E E
+
{15.F1} PID_Csc A
- A>B
B
D WG_Opg D
P KP_WGCND
≤1 Kaplan case
+
{15.F1} PID_Csc A
- A>B
B
BL_Opg
P KP_BLCND
C C
B B
A Folio 18 / 30 A
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H Load stage limitation H
MW
{8.E2} CH
G {13.C3}
G
2D LAW_LOCH
LO_Eff
LO_EFF
{7.E1} LO_Stp
Min
LO_CSC
Min
F P LO_RPLI {20.B8}
{20.G8}
F
{15.F1} PID_Csc
Min LO_Csc
E Synchronization stage limitation E

{8.B2} Pwr_Fdb
{9.F1} FG_Norm
D P VT_SRA
D
P VT_PID
A
A>B
B
C C
LO_EFF
P LO_DEM
P LO_RABT
Min {13.C3}
LO_Eff
{8.E2} CH
LO_CSC
B 2D LO_RBCH
{20.B8}
B
{7.E1} LO_Stp {20.G8}
Inverted law Min LO_Csc

2D PW_O/nW
{13.E1} PID_Csc
A Folio 19 / 30 A
Titre Opening limitation
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
{5.B6} Pwr_Norm A
H B
A>B H
S
Power limitation activation
Q
R
{19.F1} LO_Csc A
A<B
B
G G
Power feedback
LW_EF
0.0
F {8.E2} CH
-
F
Min A
+ + Max
B
A/B P
2D LW_W/CH +
P LW_LIM
P PW_MAX
E I E
P LW_KP
0.0
+ 1.0
0.0
-
A
A/B
D P LW_TF B D
Integrator output speed limitation

P LW_TI
LW_CSC
C {26.A8}
C
LW_Csc
{19.F1} LO_Csc
Min
B B
Local manu:
General setpoint
A Folio 20 / 30 A
Titre Power limitation
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Jet dispatcher behaviour with 3 injectors.
H H
CSC
Local manu:
General setpoint Local manu:
Individual setpoint
{26.E1} CSC
Flow to Setpoint 1
opening Setpoint 2
Setpoint 3
G setpoint G
Opening 1 Number
Estimated Number of
Opening 2 Flow of Jet
Opening 3 Mean flow Injectors
injectors dispatch
needed
er
R98 Injectors Injectors
MDB_R98 selection contributions
IHM_R98 Pilote Injectors
F P JD_QE1 injector on/off F
P JD_QE2 selection
P JD_QE3
MDB_PIL
P JD_T_PIL
P JD_PILIN
E C PARAM E
C MDB
C AUTO
P JD_SIO_2
P JD_STCMT
D P JD_COMTM D
A Injector 1
Mean flow General AxB
Opening 1 setpoint B setpoint
FLW_ESTI
C Injector 1 C
+
Opening 2 + contribution
A Flow to A Injector 2
A/B A Injector 2 AxB
+
NbJet B AxB opening B setpoint
B Estimated setpoint contribution
Flow Opening 3 (=3 here)
Mean flow
B Injector 3
A
AxB
Injector 3 B
2D FL / OR B setpoint
contribution
P FLW_TFQ
Inverted law: OR = f(FL)
2D FL / OR
{8.E2} CH A
A/B
Head factor
A
P CH_NOM B
Folio 21 / 30 A
Titre Jet dispatcher (1)
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Frequency feedback
H H
{9.F1} FG_Norm P D
If C PI configuration of
GBF GBF_CNF field is selected
P Sn_Kd
P DFL_Td
GBF_OUT
G G
DFL_CSC
DFL_EP
P DFL_EPS
+ - + To SPC
+ + + +
{13.H1} FQ_Stp P Dfl_Setpoint
+
F Integrator ramp F
DFL_INT
P DFL_Kp speed limitation
A
E A/B E
P DFL_CLTM B
A Deflector action on jet

A/B
P DFL_OPTM B for « Deflector Synchro » and
« Deflector Speed/load »
DFL_PLD
D P DFL_Ti Deflector D
opening
2D DFL_GLD
1
Pilot injector opening
Pilot_Opg
Deflector is
outside jet
DFL_GLD
2D DFL_PLD
C Deflector
C
interacts with jet :
useful area
2D DFL_GLD 2D DFL_PLD
Deflector
B stops the B
whole flow
0 1 Injector
opening
A Folio 22 / 30 A
Titre Deflectors synchro
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Frequency feedback
If C PI configuration of
GBF_CNF field is selected
H GBF H
{9.E1} FG_Ins P D
GBF_OUT
P Sn_Kd
DFL_CSC
DFL_EP
P DFL_Td
G +
-
+ +
+
+ +
To SPC G
1.0 P Dfl_Setpoint
+ + +
P DFL_EPS
Integrator ramp
DFL_INT
speed limitation
{15.E1} LoadError
F F
P DFL_TFD I
P DFL_Kp
A
A/B
E P DFL_CLTM B E
A
A/B
P DFL_OPTM B
D P DFL_Ti D
DFL_PLD
Pilote injector opening
Pilot_Opg
C C
DFL_GLD
2D DFL_PLD
B 2D DFL_GLD
B
A Folio 23 / 30 A
Titre Deflectors speed/load
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Frequency setpoint : PID synchro setpoint is B2B_Stp and
Prepositioning : opening setpoint. Returns to standby
Kp : P BB_Kp
stage when R0T
H Is constant : P VT_BBLC Td : P BB_Td
goes low state H
Ti : P BB_Ti
1
R0T
0
G 1
G
R60
0
Opening
Trig
ger
s
Opening limiter
P LO_BB1
F F
Opening setpoint
P VT_BBLC
Opening limiter
P LO_BB2
Opening measurement
E E
Time
P BB_TMP1
D Frequency R149
D
{9.F1} FG_Norm A
&
1.0
A>B
P VT_BBMN B
≤1 oin
t
A e tp
s
A>B cy
Tr
C P BB_TMP2 B en C
igg
qu B2B_Stp {13.G8}
er
Ramp stage condition re

s
F
t Tr
ig
ge
rs
P VT_BBMN
B B
y
uenc
Freq ement
sur
me a
A Folio 24 / 30 A
Time
Frequency ramp time: P BB_TCF
Titre Back to back
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
« PUMP » option.
Sequencer in PUMP stage 3D law : Opening = f ( Head , frequency )
3D law with fallback value Analog driven ramp
H Opening H
PID_CSC
{37.G4}
R130
{8.E2} CH 2D O(CH F6)

Q6
_F
Csc PM
ion for f = FG_Norm
olat
{9.F1} FG_Norm P
SPC setpoint f= in terp
r
ea 5 2D O(CH F5)
Lin _FQ
2D O(CH F1)
G P PM_FQ1
0.0 PM G
P
2D O(CH F2) 1.0 Opening for f=
couple FQ4
P PM_FQ2 PM_ 2D O(CH F4)
(CH, FG_Norm) P
2D O(CH F3) f=
P PM_FQ3
Q3
2D O(CH F4) P PM_F 2D O(CH F3)
P PM_FQ4
f=
2
PM_FQ 2D O(CH F2)
F 2D
P
O(CH F5)
PM_FQ5
f= P
F
2D O(CH F6) 2D O(CH F1)
P PM_FQ6 f= P PM_FQ1
P PM_PSPR
CH
Head
P PM_RPOV
E E
Local manu:
General setpoint
Sequencer in TU_COMP stage
PID_CSC
{37.G4}
D D
P CS_POSC Csc
SPC setpoint
0.0
P CS_TCF 1.0
C C
Local manu:
General setpoint
Sequencer in PM_COMP stage
PID_CSC
{37.G4}
B B
P PM_POSC Csc
SPC setpoint
0.0
A P CS_TCF 1.0
Folio 25 / 30 A
Titre Compensator/Pump regulator
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Limiter input is speed (if true)
C L2S
or opening (if false) Ramp speed
limitation
H H
P LP_POSB P LP_POSH Wicket gate
opening
Opening threshold - P LP_RPLT
WG_Opg A
A>B
G P LP_POSH B - P LP_RPRP G
≤1
A
A<B
P LP_POSB B
Ramp speed
limitation Time
F F
General
- P LP_RPLT
local manu
P LP_TPSV
Speed Threshold
- P LP_RPRP
{29.G4}
CSC
{9.F1} FG_Norm A
A>B S
E P LP_SURV B Q To repartiror E
R Frequency
CSC
P LP_SURV
P LP_TPSV
D Time D
C C
0.03
B + B
LP_CSC
0.03 A
+
P LP_RPLT A/B
B
P LP_RPRP
« SYNCHRO »
Max
stage
A
{20.C1} LW_Csc Negative ramp speed limitation Folio 26 / 30 A
{19.F3} LO_Csc Titre Two ramps limiter
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
stop Blades brake
Prepos. stage Synchro stage Load stage Standby stage
stage stage
H Frequency H
Blades opening
1.0
Frequency measurement
KP_BL
P KB_PPA1
G G
in t
etpo
P KB_PPAR BL_CSC
Triggers
P
SPC setpoint
es s
Bla switc
on
KB
de hed
ger
Blad
ositi
_TC
sa
Trig
Triggers
CF
P
F
es p
ctu off
_T
P KB_TCF
KB
KB
ato
Blad
F F
_T
CF
rs
CF
P
T
KB_
P KB_PPA2
P VT_SFPD
P
P VT_PPAR
P VT_PSBY
ge Wicket gates
E R0T
ed
ing rs
Ris rigge
opens E
t
Wicket gate opening A
triggers
Tr
R1 Falling edge A<B
ig
ge
P LA_POSF B
rs
&
{9.F1} FG_Norm A
A<B
P VT_PPAR B
D D
3D law with scale
CSC
adaptation
{26.E1} CSC 0.0

KP_WG_SC
KP_BL_SC
1.0
KP_WG
C P KP_WGMIN C
P KP_WGMAX Load stage
blades setpoint Wicket gates setpoint
{8.E2} CH WG_CSC
SPC setpoint
2D B(W H1)
P KP_HD1 1.0
B 2D B(W H2) 0.0 Manual prepositionning mode : B

P KP_HD2 If option « automatic blade
2D B(W H3) prepositionning » is not selected:
P KP_HD3
2D B(W H4)
P KP_HD4
Prepositioning to P KB_PPA1 is
2D B(W H5) triggered by R131 .
P KP_HD5
A Prepositioning to P KB_PPA2 is Folio 27 / 30 A
P KP_BLMIN triggered by R132 . Titre Kaplan repartitor
P KP_BLMAX
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
« STANDBY »
stage
H Francis and Kaplan ≤1 R270
H
WG_Opg
R104 LOCAL MANU
Pelton mode
Pilot_Opg
{13.C1} No_Load
+
G +
G
0.004
{13.E1} +
PID_Csc R11
F {15.F1}
-
R233
F
{26.E1} CSC
0.00001 0.986
0.99
0.002
{7.E1} LO_Stp
E E
C SV R133
« SYNCHRO »
stage R124 0.01
D {16.C1} mem_Csc
FALSE 0.014 D
( Output used by
{13.H1} Manu_FQ « SV » threshold
option )
-0.99
-0.986
C LOCAL AUTO
C
R300_A
mode
R224
0.986
LOCAL MANU
0.99 R300_M
mode
B B
Abs A
A<B R24
B
0.004
A Folio 28 / 30 A
Titre Logic outputs
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P FO_1_NB
{9.F1} FG_Norm FG
Fast Analog Output
H {13.E5} PID_D_FG 1
(FAO)
H
P OU_FG_4 1.0 (20mA) {13.H5} 2
PID_CNS
{15.F6}
P OU_FG_20 0.0 (4mA)
{15.F4} PID_EP 3
{17.G2} 4
PID_INT
{13.D3}
FAO1
{13.F2} 5
PID_CSC
{15.F1}
G {26.E2} 6
G
{9.H1} FR_Norm FR CSC
20mA
{9.G2} FG_NORM 7
4mA
P OU_FR_4 1.0 (20mA) 8
{5.C6} PW_NORM
P OU_FR_20 0.0 (4mA)
P FO_1_MIN
F P FO_1_MAX F
P FO_1_TF
{7.E1} LO_Stp LO
P OU_LO_4 1.0 (20mA)

P OU_LO_20 0.0 (4mA) P FO_2_NB
E 1 Fast Analog Output
E
{13.E5} PID_D_FG
{13.H5}
(FAO)
PID_CNS 2
{15.F6}
{15.F4} PID_EP 3
{5.C6} Pwr_MW MW
{17.G2} 4
PID_INT
{13.D3}
FAO2
{13.F2} 5
D P OU_PW_4 1.0 (20mA) {15.F1}
PID_CSC D
P OU_PW_20 0.0 (4mA) {26.E2} CSC 6
20mA
{9.G2} FG_NORM 7
4mA
{5.C6} PW_NORM 8
« SYNCHRO »
stage P FO_2_MIN
C P FO_2_MAX
C
{15.E6} Load_Stp P FO_2_TF
CF
P OU_LD_4 1.0 (20mA)

P OU_LD_20 0.0 (4mA)
B B
{13.H1} FQ_Stp
P OU_FL_4 1.0 (20mA)
A P OU_FL_20 0.0 (4mA) Folio 29 / 30 A

Titre Analog outputs
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P DIT_AMP
P RTA
H H
50Hz square signal
Servomotor regulator Valve regulator generator. Amplitude =
P DIT_AMP
ACT_CTR
VA_SETP
DIT_CTR
SE_ERR
VA_ERR
SE_STP
PI_ACT
From UPC,
G Via CANopen bus + +
G
+ + + + +
UPC_Stp P P SPC Setpt
- + -
INT_ACT
SE_POS
Linearization If C DIST_VA option
NOT selected
F SE_Pos I F
2D SE_LINE
P SE_FILT
P TI
E P KP E
+
0.0
-
P INT_LIM
D P VA_MIN
D
P VA_MAX
VA_TCMS
DER_ACT
VA_POS
VA_Pos
C +
C
P VA_FILT P D
-
P KD
P TD
B P VA_OSP B
P VA_KP
If C DIST_VA option selected

A Folio 30 / 30 A
Titre SPC regulator
Date 20/08/2008
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ANNEX
ANNEXE 4 – DRAWINGS A3
1 – GENERAL & LOCAL BOXES
2 – PRESSURE TANKS
3 – OPU
4 – MONITORING
ANNEX 4 DRAWINGS A3.DOC GRE-TM801 C

COMMENTS
:
Sign
F N.
. FILLARDET BECIU JP OGER 04/03/2008 For site commissioning following note M-3A-3-024 GFE
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION VA, VE, VH
Sign
E N.
. FILLARDET BECIU JP OGER 16/02/2006 After FAT of OPU and Governor GFE
MANUAL ISOLATING VALVE VA, VE, VH Sign After detailed design of sump tank and letter LAI ref F109 and F105
D . FILLARDET BECIU JP OGER 22/09/2005 GFE
N. (review note M-3A-3-013
Sign
MANUAL 3 WAY VALVE VA, VE, VH
C N.
. G BECIU PATOUILLARD JP OGER 15/03/05 For OPU manufacturing order GFE
Sign
MOTORIZED VALVE VA, VE, VH B N.
. G BECIU G BECIU JP OGER 3/04/04 Following LAI erf M-3A-3-001 dated 16/04/2004 GFE
Sign
A N.
. G BECIU G BECIU JP OGER 23/01/04 STANDARD DESIGN FOR ANALOGY PRL
NON-RETURN VALVE VQ
STA
REV ESTABLISHED CHECKED APPROVED DATE MODIFICATIONS
BOLTED FLANGE _ T

ADJUSTABLE ORIFICE PLATE BP
Date : ………………………….. Signature : …………………………….

PRESSURE CHECK POINT _
AUTOMATIC FILTER FI
MANUAL FILTER & CLOGGING ALARM FI

PUMP WITH ELECTRICAL MOTOR PO
M
LIMIT SWITCH FC
SAFETY VALVE VQ
10 x 140MVA
FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SL
PILOTED LOGIC VALVE DR
PROPORTIONAL VALVE EB
SOLENOID VALVE WITH MECHANICAL

EM
LOCKS
SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE EM

FRANCIS TURBINE
PRESSURE INDICATOR LP GOVERNING SYSTEM
LEVEL INDICATOR LN
BLOCK DIAGRAM
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER MP
none
LEVEL TRANSMITTER MN ALSTOM Power Environment
Hydro
FLOW TRANSMITTER MD
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER MR This document is the exclusive property of ALSTOM and shall not be used, copied or communicated to third parties without their prior authorization
SH/SH END N of SH
DISPLACEMENT TRANSMITTER MM MRW 050XX - 00 - 001 1/4
OIL MOISTURE TRANSMITTER MH
FLOW SWITCH SD
NOM DE FICHIER COMPLET

D:\DATA\2 -MEROWE\0 PLANS EN COURS\MRW050-00-001G SCHÉMA RÉGULATION.VSD
U.C.B. GOVERNOR CUBICLE 101RG
UNIT P.L.C.
Touch screen - Local M.M.I.
OIL PRESSURE STATION
SNPX
DI Water in oil 110SH
DI_910 Fine filter clogging 110SP
U_REF AI_806 Oil Temperature 110MR

U
AI_808 Oil pressure into circuits 110MP

OK R101 DO_612
DI_909 Too low water flow 110SD

Fault R29_P DO_614
ON R100 DI_908
210 CR PUMP STARTER
LOCAL MANUAL MODE
GTU H AO_501 DO_601 111PO On/Off
420CR
AO_502
TOP P DO_602 112PO On/Off
DI_906 111MO 111PO Start 111 SPKA1 Oil pressure limiter 111SP 111SN
OR1 AO_503
111PO Fault Stop-110SNK1 Too low Oil level 110/111SN
DI 112MO
DI_907 112PO Start Unloader valve
111EMKA 111EM
DI 112PO Fault
111EMKA Unloader valve 112EM
DI 110SNKA2
GRE101EM
AVR P AI_802
DO_603
DO_604
DO_605 101EM-O To Open isolating valve 130EM-0

GTU
H AI_803
430 CR DO_606 101EM-C To Close isolating valve 130EM-C
DO_609 101VA Air injection into pressure tank 101 DU

WORDS
U 400VAC
DI Loss of U 5CV1
OPENING SETPOINT R29 + R0_G
POWER SET-POINT
OPENING LIMITATION DI 210CR_Local mode 210KA2 Local
POWER LIMITATION
Isolating valve Closed

BP SPEED DROOP DI_902 101FC_O
F8000
DI_903 Isolating valve Open 102FC_C
AI_605 Oil Level into pressure tank 101MN

BITS
OPENING MODE AI_607 OIl Pressure into pressure tank 101MP
POWER MODE
SET-POINT DO_610 Oil cooler acting 110 VE
STATUS
RACK 8035
LOCAL AUTOMATIC MODE
OIL PRESSURE TANK
CAN_BUS
SPEED-LOAD
DI 101R29
MODULE
101R129 PROPORTIONAL VALVE GRE101EB
DI
PUSH-PULL
U_REF U
A0_1 Remote 101EB12
SERVOMOTORS
RUN R0_G LI_0
SM1 ANACH0 Feed back signal 101MM11
PTG Generator 120EB12
101FR1
100 3 frequency PT generator
101FR3 Speed 123 MM TOOTHED WHEEL Variable pressure

PTn Network
102FR2
100 3 frequency PT_Grid
R01 Unit Breaker CLOSURE LI_1=0
AUXILIARY
Speeed + R21 101R21 LI_4=0 LI_4
TACHOMETER R600
SYNCHRO PB R21
Speed - R22 101R22 LI_5=0 LI_5

A0_1
PB R22
LI_03 =1
120R600
PB R0 GUIDE VANE
120R0 LI_0
120FR1 122MM
120R0
TTr 120FR2 120FR3 121MM
101R1 LI_1=0 Local R120 R120 PB
Safety valve control BA

Variable pressure
PHOENIX module
DI 120CR_Local mode 120R120
1 to 10
Speed switches
DI Fault supply SLG2 120R210 SOLENOID VALVE GRE102EB
RS1 Emergency
DI Speed switches 120RV 1_10
DI Alarm CAN_Bus OUT 120R129
DI Fault -speed switches not available 120R29

SM1 ANACH0 Feed back signal 120MM11
220VDC U
U_REF
120 CR
EMERGENCY POSITIONNING DEVICE
LOCAL MANUAL MODE SPEED LOAD GOVERNOR - BLOCK DIAGRAM
FORMAT N° CODE N° DRAWING REV
SUPPLY AUTHOR BECIU A3 MRW0050XX-00-001 MRW00 GRE SP001 F

220 VDC 220 VDC DATE 23/01/2004 SCALE none Standard ISO SHEET 2/4
AIR UPFILLING DEVICE
N= 100 rpm
101 DU
Clockwise from Top wiev 121MM
122MM HP AIR System
101EV
See AHTMRW00-GRESP014
123MM
101DN32PN100
102VA
101 101
MP LP
101 AQ
V = 6 m3
122DN25 P_maxi. = 7.0 M Pa 135 VA
110 DP PN100 BS
P_rated = 6.4 M Pa 101 101
MN LN
P_mini. = 5.12 M Pa
L Maxi.
A B 132 VA
110 DT
101 VQ 101
SN
P T
131FC
FULL OPENED L Mini.
110 FC 131 VA
101
MM11
123DN25PN100BS
C 201 202 101VH
MP MP
102VH
101 VH
130 DP 101 FC-O

150 A
FC SERVOMOTOR
LEAKAGE TANK
101SM 121DN25PN100BS
B L
120 DN25 102FC-C
PN100BS 102DN25PN100
110 110 111 130 EM 101 RI
LP MP SP
120 110 Storage &

MM11 TO automatic valves LT Supply System
111 DN80
101 DN80 420 & 410VD
132FC
PN100BS 110
FULL CLOSED To Close PN100BS MR
112 DN180
112 PO 111 PO 110 FJ
PN100BS
OR
OS
PT
101 EB 102 EB 101 EM 110DR 420 EM 410 EM
To open
M
X 112 EM 111 EM
151 PJ
APH-MRW00-GRE-EQ501
APH-MRW00-GRE-EQ501
110 CR
NO-LOAD DEVICE
NO-LOAD DEVICE
101DR MARSHALLING BOX
O 210CR OIL PUMPS

102DP 111 DP 112 DP STARTER BOX
Tn Tmo Tmc
110 SP 110 FI
120 CR POSITIONING
DEVICE
102DR
C
101 DP
Te 110 LN
110 SN 120 FI 112 FI 111 FI

110 BA 150 PJ
110 SH
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
110DP 110 EH
COOLING SYSTEM
110 SD AUTHOR BECIU A3 MRW0050XX-00-001 MRW00 GRE SP001 F
AHS MRW11SRG-SP100
DATE 23/01/2004 SCALE none Standard ISO SHEET 3/4
AIR
64 BAR
ACTION
OIL
T
CLOSURE
P
B
A
101 DP
Te
AUTHOR BECIU A3 MRW0050XX-00-001 MRW00 GRE SP001 F

COMMENTS:
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION
LP PRESSURE INDICATOR SP PRESSURE SWITCH Sign.

F N. GPI BECIU VALDENAIRE 05/08/2007 Modification of HP air compressor cooling & adding devices after Unit 1 test GFE
Sign.
E G BECIU B VALDENAIRE JP OGER 29/09/2006 Modification after Turbine bearing review GFE
MP PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SN LEVEL SWITCH N.
Sign.
D N.
G BECIU B VALDENAIRE JP OGER 22/09/2005 Modification taken into account Turbine & Compressor detailed design GFE
MN LEVEL TRANSMITTER
Sign.
H N. G BECIU P RENAUD P SCHERER 19/01/2010 Add external loop for Trushbearing cooler GFE
LN LEVEL INDICATOR Sign.
G N.
G BECIU P RENAULT JP OGER 24/11/2009 ADD EXTERNAL LOOP FOR COOLING OF THRUST BEARING GFE
MD FLOW TRANSMITTER SD FLOW SWITCH A

Sign.
G BECIU JP OGER JP OGER 20/01/04 BASIC P&I D : STANDARD DESIGN FOR ANALOGY PRL
N.
REV
MR TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT
LT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
MM DISPLACEMENT TRANSMITTER SM DISPLACEMENT SWITCH
Date : ………………………….. Signature : …………………………….
MH OIL MOISTURE SENSOR SH OIL MOISTURE SWITCH LAHMEYER INTERNATIONAL
MB CAVITATION NOISE TRANSMITTER GOVERNMENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF THE SUDAN

XR WEAR DETECTOR
MX VIBRATION SENSOR
MEROWE DAM PROJECT

MANUAL ISOLATING VALVE
SUMP TANK BA label
10 x 140MVA
VA & VE Label CONTRACTS 3A, 3B, 3C, 3E
MANUAL 3 WAY VALVE PRESSURE TANK AQ label CONTRACTOR:
ENGINEER:
MOTORIZED VALVE
MEASURE TAPE MINIMESS TYPE
VD Label
FI M
NON-RETURN VALVE - VT Label FILTER - FI Label
VT
BOLTED FLANGE
ADJUSTABLE ORIFICE PLATE - DP Label

DP
FAST COUPLING CHECK POINT
FRANCIS TURBINE
& FLEXIBLE PIPE PJ Label PIPES & INSTRUMENTS DRAWINGS
FILTER - FI Label
FI
MANUAL FILTER & CLOGGING ALARM 1/1
FI
Power Environment
PUMP WITH ELECTRICAL MOTOR- PO Hydro
M
LIMIT SWITCH - FC Label

FC
SAFETY VALVE - VQ Lable
VQ
SH/SH END N of SH
EH
WATER TO OIL COOLER - EH Label AHT MRW 00 GRE - SP 01 4 MRW 050XX - 01 - 004 1/6 6
AIR DRYER - SH Label
HYDRO EJECTOR DJ label
451 DN150 P or I
Pipe reference Internal diameter mm Permanent Flow or not

D:\DATA\2 -MEROWE\0 PLANS EN COURS\MRW050-01-004H SCHEMA INSTRUM.VSD
TURBINE BOARD
CONCRETE
GTU401 CR
LEVEL 249.14
402
MP
401
MD
404
LP
402
LP
432
MB
430DN80 402DN10PN10
431
MB
401
LP
x 4 at 90° Line 401.DN10
403
403DN10PN10 LP
TURBINE BOARD
GTU402 CR
LEVEL 235.85 GTU 420 CR
VIB & CAVITATION
MONITORING
BOX
DN600
GTU401VE
GTU 402 VE
HYDRAULIC MEASURES
AUTHOR BECIU A3 MRW050XX-01-004 MRW00 GRE SP014 F2

AIR
CONCRETE
O
451SN
450BA
From 453 DN100

COOLING 10 m3/h 451VA 391 392
See SRA drawing MX MX
SRA008VE
6
450
DN100 404 402
SN SN
401PO
403 401
M
401DP SN SN
400DP
7 432 DN25 FROM LP AIR
461 SYSTEM
422VE 422DP PN20
DN80 432 VA
413DN50PN10 431DP
DN65 TO COOLING
431 DN400 SYSTEM
401DJ AHSMRW11
PN20
SRA001VE SRG SP100
SRA002VE
2X
460
400DN400
DN150
I/Water 422 FC
8
To TAIL RACE FROM /TO GOVERNOR
AHTMRW00
410SN GRE-SP001
F
422DN25PN100
410BA 421 FC
FROM COOLING
412 DN50 SYSTEM
410VA PN10 AHSMRW11

421DP 420 VD SRA SRG SP100
421VE
006VE
410 411
LN SN
412 FC
452
ACCESS GALLERY
FROM /TO GOVERNOR

DN400 See AHTMRW00
F
I/dirty water GRE-SP001
401
LEVEL 249.55
MP 412DN25PN100
451DN150 410
MN 411 FC
P/Water 410 VE HP AIR
410 DN80
Q < 5dm3/s 411 DN100 PN20 DEWATERING BUS
PN100 See AHTMRW00
411 VE 410VD
GRE SP018
411DP
401
DN300
I/Water 239,44
433DN25
FROM LP AIR
SYSTEM
GTU 430 CR
CONCRETE
400-1VE
INSTRUMENTS
DRAINAGE GALLERY BOX
Gutter
400-2 VE
RUNNER DEWATERING & DRAIN SYSTEM

CONCRETE FORMAT N° CODE N° DRAWING REV
DEWATERING GALLERY
451 DN150 P or I AUTHOR BECIU A3 MRW050XX-01-004 MRW00 GRE SP014 F2
Pipe reference Internal diameter mm Permanent Flow or not
451FI
450VE 452VE
COOLING SYSTEM
see drawing SRG
400
411 DMX Into Pit
412
LP LP
11 Max DWS
Q > 3 dm3/s 450 DN80SS 259.80 mEL
P > 0.42 MPa DN80 451
SP
300 micron
450 450
GTU 450 CR 450FI 401 402 403
M MD LP
CONTROL BOX MR MR MR
451VE
Gallery 249,14 mEL

453VE
450 DP
451 DP
449 411 412 430 441 442 443 444
LP MM MM SP MR MR MR MR
LP AIR PRESSURE SYSTEM
LP Air
455 455 415 15
SP LP SP Oil treatment (dirty oil)
See drawing SPT
See drawing SKH

02 455 VA 450 420
0.7 MPa < P < 1 MPa 455 DN10 XR MR 16
Oil treatment (fresh oil)
455 FI 450BA See drawing SKH
Acces galery
Gravity OIL Leakage

Rated DWS
245.50 mEL
Min DWS
245.00 mEL
450DN50
451 452 453 451 452 453

MP MP MP LP LP LP
410
SM
441 442 441

SN SN LN
410
MH
455 450 455
LP LP SP
OIL Sump tank
455 VA 415 Level 235.85
SP TURBINE BEARING AND SEAL
455 FI
PIT BOARD
410 CR AUTHOR BECIU A3 MRW050XX-01-004 MRW00 GRE SP014
302 302 301 301
LP MP LP MP
IM1
IM2
IM1
330 330
IM2
302DN20 SH LT
302 FI 301 FI PN150
341 342 343

MR MR MR
300FI
G G
PVC 310
331 332 333 334 335 336
MP
300 DN50 MR MR MR MR MR MR
310
MN
M M
AC AC 310
312 PO B 311 PO B DN15 DN15 LN
PVC
DN15 300FA 321PJ
321 322 323 324 325 326
331VH
320PJ MR MR MR MR MR MR
321DN80PN10
301 DN50
PN10
322VH
323VH 322DN80PN10
303 303 DP310
LP MP
332 331 331 311
IM1
IM2
MM MM MX MD
303 FI
SKID
DN15
G
AN320 321 PO 322 PO

M M
323 AC AC
SP
M
DC
313 PO B
AC320
GTU
322 321
LP MP 310CR
DN80
DN80
310
MD
COOLING SYSTEM
See drawing SRG
THRUST BEARING
AUTHOR BECIU A3 MRW050XX-01-004 MRW00 GRE SP014 G2

410DN80 410DN80 410DN80 410DN80 410DN80 410DN80 410DN80 410DN80 410DN80
To Dewatering valve
Unit 1 to 10 drawing AHTMRW00 GRE-PM 711
721 722 723 724

721VQ LP 722VQ LP 723VQ LP 724VQ LP 701
x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 MP
721AQ 722AQ 723AQ 724AQ BR720 DN80PN100

6 m3 6 m3 6 m3 6 m3 701
LP
7-4.5 MPa 7-4.5 MPa 7-4.5 MPa 7-4.5 MPa 701VQ x2
x2
713VA
701AQ
3 m3
721VA 722VA 723VA 724VA 7-6.8 MPa 101DN32 U1
720
MP 714VA
725DN80 101DN32 U2
711VA
720DN80
714VA
710VT 101DN32 U3
745VA
714VA
741VA 742VA 743VA 744VA 101DN32 U4

724DN65 722DN65 729DN32 714VA
744VA
SKID SKID LOCAL
101DN32 U5
CONTROL BOX
20 SPR702 CR Dryer 714VA
20SPR 701SH
101DN32 U6
701DN32PN100
714VA
101DN32 U7
20SPR701CO 20SPR702CO 20SPR703CO 20SPR704CO 20SPR705CO 20SPR706CO 714VA
M M M M M M
101DN32 U8
714VA
101DN32 U9
18°C 4m3/h
PN5-8°C
714VA
101DN32 U10
714VA
To AIR/OIL Pressure tanks for Governor

Unit 1 to 10 See AHTMRW00 GRE-PM711
721DN30PVC
LOCAL CONTROL CUBICLE OF 4 WATER
COOLED COMPRESSORS 712VA
723DN30PVC
20 SPR 701 AR
HIGH PRESSURE AIR SUPPLY FOR

COOLING SYSTEM GOVERNOR & DEPRESSING SYSTEM
AHSMRW11-
SRG-SP100 AUTHOR BECIU A3 MRW050XX-01-004 MRW00 GRE SP014 F3
Gutter in air pressure tank ROOM 0M206 Level 241,5 EL

O&M - Manuel GRE TM801C PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

O&M - Manuel GRE TM801C PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

COMMENTS :

ETABLI VERIFIE APPROUVE

DATE MODIFICATIONS STAT

Approved Approved as noted Returned for correction For information

Date : ………………………….. Signature : …………………………….

GOVERNMENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF THE SUDAN

MEROWE DAM PROJECT

OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REV SH/SH END N of SH

EP10 SPEED GOVERNOR

EP20 LOCAL CONTROL BOXES

EP30 PRESSURE TANKS & ACCESSORIES

EP50 OIL PRESSURE UNIT OPU

EP60 MONITORING TURBINE

ANNEX1 LIST OF SPARE – GENERAL & SPECIAL

ANNEX2 DATASHEET OF SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES

ANNEX3 BOOKLET A4.

ANNEX3 DRAWING A3.

File: 1° page O&M manuel GOVrevC.doc 2 GRE-TM801B

OPERATING & MAINTENACE MANUAL OF GOVERNING SYSTEM GRE-PA 00

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS USED FOR THIS DOCUMENT. ...................................................................................... 2

2 GENERAL OPERATIONS ....................................................................................................... 3

2.1 TURBINE CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................................................... 3

2.2 TURBINE CONTROL ................................................................................................................................... 4

2.3 TRANSIENT FROM ONE MODE TO ANOTHER......................................................................................... 7

2.4 SPECIFIC USE............................................................................................................................................. 10

3 SPECIAL MODES .................................................................................................................. 11

3.1 GO TO CONDENSER MODE FROM GENERATOR MODE......................................................................... 11

3.2 STOP IN CONDENSER MODE ................................................................................................................... 12

3.3 EMERGENCY STOP IN CONDENSER MODE ............................................................................................ 13

3.4 GO TO GENERATOR MODE FROM CONDENSER MODE......................................................................... 14

3.5 DEAD BUS START....................................................................................................................................... 14

4 BACK UP MODES ................................................................................................................. 15

6 SPARE PART LIST................................................................................................................. 17

7 DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................. 18

TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA00_2.DOC

OPERATING & MAINTENACE MANUAL OF GOVERNING SYSTEM

Each components is designed by a special functional label.

• One pressure tank noted GRE-101AQ at level 251,90

• One speed governor cubicle noted GRE-101RG.

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS USED FOR THIS DOCUMENT.

• WG means Wicket Gate or turbine guide vane

• TB means Thrust bearing

• EPD means Emergency Positioning device

• UCB means Unit Control Board or Cell Controller.

• PLC means Programmable Logic Controller

• AVR means Generator Voltage Controller

Associated documents & drawings

Governing system functional diagram GRE-SP001

List of Input-Output of Turbine GRE-FC013

F8000 list _______

FILE: TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA00_2.DOC GRE-TM801REVC

OPERATING & MAINTENACE MANUAL OF GOVERNING SYSTEM

2.1 TURBINE CHARACTERISTICS

Wicket Gate fast emergency closure : 20s

Inertia PD2 = 46 106 kgm

Rated speed = 100 rpm

Rated power at rated head = 120 MW @ 45.5 m

Max overpressure during load rejection = +25%

Max over-speed during load rejection = +50%

FILE: TM801A_O&M MANUAL PA00_2.DOC GRE-TM801REVC

OPERATING & MAINTENACE MANUAL OF GOVERNING SYSTEM

2.2 TURBINE CONTROL